Hitachi Command Suite

Global Link Manager

User Guide

Document Organization

Product Version

Getting Help

Contents

MK-92HC214-08
 © 2014, 2017 Hitachi, Ltd. All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means,
electronic or mechanical, including copying and recording, or stored in a database or retrieval
system for commercial purposes without the express written permission of Hitachi, Ltd., or Hitachi
Data Systems Corporation (collectively "Hitachi"). Licensee may make copies of the Materials
provided that any such copy is: (i) created as an essential step in utilization of the Software as
licensed and is used in no other manner; or (ii) used for archival purposes. Licensee may not make
any other copies of the Materials. "Materials" mean text, data, photographs, graphics, audio, video
and documents.

Hitachi reserves the right to make changes to this Material at any time without notice and assumes
no responsibility for its use. The Materials contain the most current information available at the time
of publication.

Some of the features described in the Materials might not be currently available. Refer to the most
recent product announcement for information about feature and product availability, or contact
Hitachi Data Systems Corporation at https://support.hds.com/en_us/contact-us.html.

Notice: Hitachi products and services can be ordered only under the terms and conditions of the
applicable Hitachi agreements. The use of Hitachi products is governed by the terms of your
agreements with Hitachi Data Systems Corporation.

By using this software, you agree that you are responsible for:

1) Acquiring the relevant consents as may be required under local privacy laws or otherwise from
authorized employees and other individuals to access relevant data; and

2) Verifying that data continues to be held, retrieved, deleted, or otherwise processed in accordance
with relevant laws.

Notice on Export Controls. The technical data and technology inherent in this Document may be
subject to U.S. export control laws, including the U.S. Export Administration Act and its associated
regulations, and may be subject to export or import regulations in other countries. Reader agrees to
comply strictly with all such regulations and acknowledges that Reader has the responsibility to
obtain licenses to export, re-export, or import the Document and any Compliant Products.

Hitachi is a registered trademark of Hitachi, Ltd., in the United States and other countries.

AIX, AS/400e, DB2, Domino, DS6000, DS8000, Enterprise Storage Server, eServer, FICON,
FlashCopy, IBM, Lotus, MVS, OS/390, PowerPC, RS/6000, S/390, System z9, System z10, Tivoli,
z/OS, z9, z10, z13, z/VM, and z/VSE are registered trademarks or trademarks of International
Business Machines Corporation.

Active Directory, ActiveX, Bing, Excel, Hyper-V, Internet Explorer, the Internet Explorer logo,
Microsoft, the Microsoft Corporate Logo, MS-DOS, Outlook, PowerPoint, SharePoint, Silverlight,
SmartScreen, SQL Server, Visual Basic, Visual C++, Visual Studio, Windows, the Windows logo,
Windows Azure, Windows PowerShell, Windows Server, the Windows start button, and Windows
Vista are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Microsoft product screen
shots are reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.

All other trademarks, service marks, and company names in this document or website are
properties of their respective owners.

ii
Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Contents
Preface.................................................................................................. xi
Intended audience....................................................................................................xii
Product version........................................................................................................ xii
Release notes...........................................................................................................xii
Document organization............................................................................................. xii
Related documents.................................................................................................. xiii
Document conventions.............................................................................................xiv
Conventions for storage capacity values.....................................................................xv
Accessing product documentation............................................................................. xvi
Getting help............................................................................................................ xvi
Comments.............................................................................................................. xvi

1 Introducing Global Link Manager............................................................1-1

About Global Link Manager...................................................................................... 1-2
Overview......................................................................................................... 1-2
Features.......................................................................................................... 1-4
What's new? ................................................................................................... 1-5
Global Link Manager components.......................................................................1-5
Terms and concepts..........................................................................................1-8

2 Getting started..................................................................................... 2-1

Using Global Link Manager...................................................................................... 2-2
Road map........................................................................................................ 2-2
Configuring a web browser................................................................................2-5
Logging in and out............................................................................................2-8
Global Link Manager GUI window...................................................................... 2-9
Reconfiguring the multipath management software operating environment............... 2-12
Upgrading multipath management software on the host.................................... 2-12
Changing the multipath management software device (LU) configurations of hosts
..................................................................................................................... 2-12
Changing host connection targets or remote management client connection targets
..................................................................................................................... 2-13
Replacing CHAs or CHA microprograms.................................................................. 2-15
Viewing paths....................................................................................................... 2-17
Setting paths according to I/O distribution.............................................................. 2-18

iii
Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Managing I/O bottlenecks and path bandwidth................................................. 2-19
Distributing I/O across multiple paths...............................................................2-20
Responding to path errors..................................................................................... 2-21
Identifying and correcting path errors.............................................................. 2-21
Path failover...................................................................................................2-23
Path failback...................................................................................................2-23
Path health check........................................................................................... 2-24

3 Managing users and permissions............................................................3-1

Overview................................................................................................................3-2
Viewing a list of users............................................................................................. 3-4
Viewing individual user information.......................................................................... 3-5
Viewing a summary of user permissions................................................................... 3-5
Viewing a list of user permissions.............................................................................3-6
Adding users.......................................................................................................... 3-6
Editing user profiles................................................................................................ 3-7
Deleting users........................................................................................................ 3-7
Deleting individual users................................................................................... 3-8
Deleting multiple users......................................................................................3-8
Changing user passwords........................................................................................ 3-9
Changing user permissions...................................................................................... 3-9
Locking user accounts........................................................................................... 3-10
Unlocking user accounts........................................................................................ 3-11
Changing the method for user authentication..........................................................3-11
Preparing to link to an external authentication server........................................ 3-12
Changing the user authentication method.........................................................3-13

4 Managing user profiles.......................................................................... 4-1

Overview................................................................................................................4-2
Viewing user profiles...............................................................................................4-3
Editing user profiles................................................................................................ 4-3
Changing login passwords....................................................................................... 4-4

5 Managing hosts.................................................................................... 5-1

Overview................................................................................................................5-2
Viewing a list of hosts............................................................................................. 5-4
Viewing individual host information.......................................................................... 5-4
Adding hosts.......................................................................................................... 5-5
Preparing to add hosts...................................................................................... 5-7
Adding hosts manually.................................................................................... 5-10
Adding hosts by importing a CSV file................................................................ 5-11
Adding hosts using a "Scan Now" network scan................................................ 5-12
Adding hosts using a "Scheduled Scan" network scan........................................5-13
Removing hosts.................................................................................................... 5-15
Refreshing host information................................................................................... 5-15
Refreshing host information for a single host.................................................... 5-18
Refreshing host information for multiple hosts.................................................. 5-19
Refreshing a single host group.........................................................................5-20
Refreshing multiple host groups.......................................................................5-20
Refreshing all hosts connected to a CHA port....................................................5-21

iv
Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Multipath LU configuration..................................................................................... 5-21
Configuring multipath LUs for individual hosts...................................................5-26
Configuring multipath LUs for individual host groups......................................... 5-27
Configuring multipath LUs for an individual storage system................................5-28
Configuring the HDLM operating environment for a host.......................................... 5-28
Configuring the HDLM operating environment for an individual host................... 5-31
Configuring the HDLM operating environment for multiple hosts........................ 5-31
Configuring alerts for a host...................................................................................5-32

6 Managing resource groups.................................................................... 6-1

Overview................................................................................................................6-2
Viewing a list of resource groups..............................................................................6-5
Viewing individual resource group information.......................................................... 6-5
Creating resource groups........................................................................................ 6-6
Editing resource groups...........................................................................................6-7
Deleting resource groups.........................................................................................6-7
Deleting individual resource groups....................................................................6-8
Deleting multiple resource groups......................................................................6-8
Adding hosts to a resource group.............................................................................6-8
Removing hosts from a resource group.................................................................... 6-9
Adding users to a resource group...........................................................................6-10
Removing users from a resource group...................................................................6-11

7 Managing host groups...........................................................................7-1

Overview................................................................................................................7-2
Viewing a list of host groups....................................................................................7-5
Viewing individual host group information.................................................................7-5
Creating host groups...............................................................................................7-6
Editing host groups................................................................................................. 7-7
Deleting host groups............................................................................................... 7-7
Viewing host information for a host group................................................................ 7-8
Adding hosts to a host group................................................................................... 7-9
Removing hosts from a host group...........................................................................7-9
Refreshing host information for host groups............................................................7-10
Refreshing a single host group.........................................................................7-10
Refreshing multiple host groups.......................................................................7-11

8 Managing paths....................................................................................8-1
Overview................................................................................................................8-2
Viewing a summary of paths....................................................................................8-4
Viewing a summary of all paths......................................................................... 8-4
Viewing a summary of paths for a single host..................................................... 8-5
Viewing a summary of paths for a host group.....................................................8-5
Viewing a summary of paths for a storage system.............................................. 8-6
Viewing a summary of paths for a physical storage system (e.g. of a virtual storage
machine)......................................................................................................... 8-6
Viewing a list of paths............................................................................................. 8-7
Viewing a list of paths for a single host.............................................................. 8-7
Viewing a list of paths for a host HBA port..........................................................8-7
Viewing a list of paths for a host group.............................................................. 8-8

v
Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Viewing a list of paths for a storage system........................................................8-9
Viewing a list of paths for a CHA port of a storage system................................... 8-9
Viewing a list of paths for a physical storage system (e.g. of a virtual storage
machine)........................................................................................................8-10
Viewing a list of paths for a CHA port of a physical storage system (e.g. of a virtual
storage machine)............................................................................................8-11
Viewing a list of paths for a multipath LU..........................................................8-11
Viewing a list of paths that have a specific status.............................................. 8-12
Filtering and viewing a list of paths........................................................................ 8-13
Switching path status............................................................................................ 8-15
Switching paths online.................................................................................... 8-18
Switching paths offline.................................................................................... 8-18
Resetting the number of path I/O counts and I/O errors.......................................... 8-19
Viewing a list of storage systems............................................................................8-20
Viewing individual storage systems information....................................................... 8-20
Viewing a list of physical storage systems (e.g. of a virtual storage machine)............ 8-21
Viewing physical storage system information (e.g. of a virtual storage machine)........8-22
Show list of lost paths........................................................................................... 8-23

9 Managing alerts....................................................................................9-1
Overview................................................................................................................9-2
Viewing a list of alerts............................................................................................. 9-6
Viewing alert filtering.............................................................................................. 9-7
Marking alerts as read.............................................................................................9-9
Marking alerts as unread....................................................................................... 9-10
Deleting alerts...................................................................................................... 9-10
Deleting all alerts.................................................................................................. 9-11
Alert transfer settings............................................................................................9-11
Configuring the lost path check option....................................................................9-12
Configuring email to report alerts........................................................................... 9-12
Displaying a list of email addresses.................................................................. 9-13
Adding an email address................................................................................. 9-13
Removing email addresses.............................................................................. 9-14
Configuring an email address...........................................................................9-15
Configuring the SMTP server........................................................................... 9-15
Displaying resource group information for email addresses................................ 9-16
Adding resource groups to an email address..................................................... 9-16
Removing a resource group from an email address........................................... 9-17
Configuring alert types.................................................................................... 9-18

10 Managing licenses............................................................................. 10-1

Overview..............................................................................................................10-2
Viewing license information................................................................................... 10-3
Editing a license....................................................................................................10-3

11 Setting security.................................................................................11-1
Overview..............................................................................................................11-2
Viewing conditions for passwords........................................................................... 11-3
Changing conditions for passwords.........................................................................11-4
Viewing settings for automatic account lock............................................................ 11-4

vi
Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Changing settings for automatic account lock..........................................................11-5
Viewing a preview of the warning banner............................................................... 11-6
Editing a warning banner.......................................................................................11-7
Deleting a warning banner.....................................................................................11-7

12 Exporting management information....................................................12-1

Overview..............................................................................................................12-2
Exporting to a CSV file...........................................................................................12-2

13 Generating reports on path availability................................................13-1

Overview..............................................................................................................13-2
Creating a report...................................................................................................13-4
Creating a single host report..........................................................................13-11
Creating a multiple host report.......................................................................13-12
Creating a single host group report................................................................ 13-13
Creating a multiple host group report............................................................. 13-13

14 Download functionality...................................................................... 14-1

Overview..............................................................................................................14-2
Downloading the HDLM installer.............................................................................14-2

A GUI reference...................................................................................... A-1

Global Link Manager window................................................................................... A-2
Global tasks bar area........................................................................................ A-2
Explorer menu..................................................................................................A-2
Dashboard menu..............................................................................................A-3
Global Link Manager subwindow.............................................................................. A-4
Subwindows for managing hosts....................................................................... A-4
Hosts subwindow.................................................................................... A-4
Show Paths dialog box............................................................................ A-9
Set Online dialog box.............................................................................A-15
Set Online(D) dialog box........................................................................A-20
Set Offline dialog box............................................................................ A-22
Add Hosts dialog box (adding to resources).............................................A-27
Network Scan Results (scan-type) dialog box.......................................... A-31
Network Scan Results Detail (scan-type) dialog box................................. A-32
Add Network Scan Schedule dialog box...................................................A-34
Edit Network Scan Schedule dialog box...................................................A-35
Delete Network Scan Schedule dialog box............................................... A-37
Remove Hosts dialog box (removing from resources)...............................A-37
Refresh Hosts dialog box....................................................................... A-38
Adds a Path Dynamically - host-name/Deletes a Path Dynamically - host-name
dialog box.............................................................................................A-39
Show Refresh Failed Hosts dialog box.....................................................A-41
Multihost Configuration wizard............................................................... A-41
Create Report dialog box....................................................................... A-51
Show Hosts dialog box...........................................................................A-53
host-name subwindow...........................................................................A-53
storage-system-name dialog box............................................................ A-69
host-name dialog box............................................................................ A-79

vii
Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Reset I/O Count - host-name dialog box................................................. A-88
Configure Multipath LUs dialog box.........................................................A-88
Configure HDLM - host-name dialog box................................................. A-92
Storage System Setting Results dialog box.............................................. A-99
Configure Alerts - host-name dialog box................................................A-100
Show Lost Paths - host-name dialog box............................................... A-101
Filter - Paths dialog box....................................................................... A-104
Subwindows for managing paths on storage systems...................................... A-106
Storage systems subwindow.................................................................A-106
storage-system-name subwindow......................................................... A-108
storage-system-name dialog box (physical storage information)..............A-122
Subwindows for managing paths on storage systems (physical storage information)
................................................................................................................... A-126
Storage systems subwindow (physical storage information)....................A-126
storage-system-name subwindow (physical storage information)............ A-127
Show Paths dialog box (physical storage information)............................ A-134
Set Online/Offline dialog box (physical storage information)................... A-137
Refresh Hosts dialog box (host connected to a CHA port)....................... A-139
host-name dialog box (physical storage information)..............................A-140
storage-system-name dialog box (virtual storage machines information). A-145
Subwindows for managing host groups.......................................................... A-148
Host Groups subwindow...................................................................... A-148
Create Host Group dialog box...............................................................A-160
Delete Host Groups dialog box............................................................. A-160
Refresh Host Groups dialog box............................................................A-160
host-group-name subwindow............................................................... A-162
Edit Properties - host-group-name dialog box........................................ A-177
Add Hosts dialog box (adding to a host group)...................................... A-178
Remove Hosts dialog box (removing from a host group)........................ A-178
Subwindows for managing users....................................................................A-178
Users and Permissions subwindow........................................................A-178
Users subwindow................................................................................ A-179
Add User dialog box.............................................................................A-180
user-ID subwindow..............................................................................A-181
Edit Profile - user-ID dialog box (editing a user profile).......................... A-183
Change Password - user-ID dialog box (changing a user password)........ A-184
Change Permission - user-ID dialog box................................................ A-185
Permissions subwindow....................................................................... A-185
application-name subwindow................................................................A-186
Subwindows for managing resource groups.................................................... A-187
Resource Groups subwindow................................................................A-187
Create Resource Group dialog box........................................................ A-188
Delete Resource Groups dialog box.......................................................A-188
resource-group-name subwindow......................................................... A-189
Edit Properties - resource-group-name dialog box..................................A-191
Add Hosts dialog box (adding to a resource group)................................ A-191
Remove Hosts dialog box (removing from a resource group).................. A-192
Add Users - resource-group-name dialog box........................................ A-192
Remove Users dialog box..................................................................... A-193
Subwindows for managing security options.....................................................A-194
Security subwindow.............................................................................A-194
Password subwindow...........................................................................A-194

viii
Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Password dialog box............................................................................ A-195
Account Lock subwindow..................................................................... A-196
Account Lock dialog box...................................................................... A-196
Warning Banner subwindow................................................................. A-197
Edit Message dialog box.......................................................................A-197
Subwindows for managing alerts....................................................................A-198
Alerts subwindow................................................................................ A-198
Delete Alerts dialog box....................................................................... A-205
Filter - Alerts dialog box....................................................................... A-208
Configure Alert Transfer dialog box.......................................................A-210
Configure Lost Path Check dialog box................................................... A-211
E-mail Notification dialog box............................................................... A-212
Add E-mail Address dialog box............................................................. A-213
Remove E-mail Addresses dialog box.................................................... A-213
Modify E-mail Address dialog box......................................................... A-213
Configure SMTP Server dialog box........................................................ A-214
Modify Resource Group dialog box........................................................A-214
Add Resource Groups dialog box.......................................................... A-215
Remove Resource Groups dialog box.................................................... A-215
Modify Alert Type dialog box................................................................ A-216
Subwindows for editing profiles..................................................................... A-216
User Profile subwindow........................................................................A-216
Edit Profile - user-ID dialog box (editing the logged-in user's profile).......A-218
Change Password - user-ID dialog box (changing the logged-in user's
password)...........................................................................................A-218
Subwindows for managing licenses................................................................ A-219
License Info subwindow.......................................................................A-219
License, About, and Edit License dialog boxes....................................... A-220

B Description of icons.............................................................................. B-1

Icon indicating host status.......................................................................................B-2
Icon indicating storage system status.......................................................................B-2
Icon indicating host group status............................................................................. B-3
Icon indicating port status.......................................................................................B-4
Icon indicating path status...................................................................................... B-5

C Functionality and version information for HDLM...................................... C-1

Support status of the HDLM functions...................................................................... C-2
HDLM version information....................................................................................... C-4

D Terms of multipath management products.............................................D-1

Comparing terminology multipath management products.......................................... D-2

Acronyms and abbreviations

Index

ix
Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
x
Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Preface
This manual provides a system overview of Hitachi Global Link Manager
(abbreviated hereafter to Global Link Manager) and explains how to use the
system by using the GUI.

□ Intended audience

□ Product version

□ Release notes

□ Document organization

□ Related documents

□ Document conventions

□ Conventions for storage capacity values

□ Accessing product documentation

□ Getting help

□ Comments

Preface xi
Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Intended audience
This document is intended for system administrators who are using Global
Link Manager to perform integrated management of hosts on which multipath
management software is installed and perform operations and management
of the storage system.
This document assumes that the audience understands the following:
• Management functions of the multipath management software
• Management functions of the storage system

Product version
This document revision applies to Hitachi Global Link Manager v8.5.1 or later.

Release notes
Read the release notes before installing and using this product. They may
contain requirements or restrictions that are not fully described in this
document or updates or corrections to this document. Release notes are
available on Hitachi Data Systems Support Connect: https://
knowledge.hds.com/Documents.

Document organization
The following table provides an overview of the contents and organization of
this document. Click the chapter title in the left column to go to that chapter.
The first page of each chapter provides links to the sections in that chapter.

Chapter/Appendix Description

Chapter 1, Introducing Global Link Provides a functional overview and information

Manager on page 1-1 about characteristics of Global Link Manager and
explains Global Link Manager terminology.

Chapter 2, Getting started on page Explains the initial settings required to use Global
2-1 Link Manager and the procedure to use this
software.

Chapter 3, Managing users and Describes the functions for managing users and
permissions on page 3-1 explains how to use these functions.

Chapter 4, Managing user profiles Describes the functions for managing user profiles
on page 4-1 and explains how to use these functions.

Chapter 5, Managing hosts on page Describes the functions for managing hosts and
5-1 describes how to use these functions.

Chapter 6, Managing resource Describes the functions for managing resource

groups on page 6-1 groups and explains how to use these functions.

Chapter 7, Managing host groups Describes the functions for managing host groups
on page 7-1 and describes how to use these functions.

xii Preface
Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Chapter/Appendix Description

Chapter 8, Managing paths on page Describes the functions for managing paths and
8-1 explains how to use these functions.

Chapter 9, Managing alerts on Describes the functions for managing alerts and
page 9-1 explains how to use these functions.

Chapter 10, Managing licenses on Describes the functions for managing licenses and
page 10-1 describes how to use these functions.

Chapter 11, Setting security on Describes the functions for setting security options
page 11-1 during login and explains how to use these
functions.

Chapter 12, Exporting Describes the functions for batch output of Global
management information on page Link Manager management information to a CSV
12-1 file and explains how to use these functions.

Chapter 13, Generating reports on Describes the function used to output reports on
path availability on page 13-1 path availability to a CSV file and explains how to
use this function.

Chapter 14, Download functionality Describes the functionality used to download an

on page 14-1 HDLM installer and explains how to use this
functionality.

Appendix A, GUI reference on page Explains Global Link Manager windows and
A-1 subwindows.

Appendix B, Description of icons on Provides information about icons.

page B-1

Appendix C, Functionality and Describes HDLM functions and explains version

version information for HDLM on information.
page C-1

Appendix D, Terms of multipath Provides information about the terminology related

management products on page to multipath management products.
D-1

Related documents
The following related Hitachi Command Suite documents are available on the
documentation CD:
• Hitachi Command Suite Global Link Manager Installation and
Configuration Guide, MK-95HC107
• Hitachi Command Suite Global Link Manager Messages, MK-95HC108
• Hitachi Command Suite Dynamic Link Manager (for AIX) User Guide,
MK-92DLM111
• Hitachi Dynamic Link Manager User's Guide for HP-UX® Systems,
MK-92DLM112
• Hitachi Command Suite Dynamic Link Manager (for Linux®) User Guide,
MK-92DLM113

Preface xiii
Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 • Hitachi Command Suite Dynamic Link Manager (for Solaris) User Guide,
MK-92DLM114
• Hitachi Command Suite Dynamic Link Manager (for Windows®) User
Guide, MK-92DLM129
• Hitachi Command Suite Dynamic Link Manager (for VMware®) User
Guide, MK-92DLM130
• Hitachi Command Suite Installation and Configuration Guide,
MK-90HC173
• Hitachi Command Suite Administrator Guide, MK-90HC175
• Hitachi Command Suite Tuning Manager Server Administration Guide,
MK-92HC021
• Hitachi Command Suite Tuning Manager User Guide, MK-92HC022

Document conventions
This document uses the following typographic conventions:

Convention Description

Bold • Indicates text in a window, including window titles, menus, menu

options, buttons, fields, and labels. Example:
Click OK.
• Indicates a emphasized words in list items.

Italic • Indicates a document title or emphasized words in text.

• Indicates a variable, which is a placeholder for actual text
provided by the user or for output by the system. Example:
pairdisplay -g group
(For exceptions to this convention for variables, see the entry for
angle brackets.)
Monospace Indicates text that is displayed on screen or entered by the user.
Example:
pairdisplay -g oradb

< > angled Indicates a variable in the following scenarios:

brackets • Variables are not clearly separated from the surrounding text or
from other variables. Example:
Status-<report-name><file-version>.csv
• Variables in headings.

[ ] square Indicates optional values. Example: [ a | b ] indicates that you can

brackets choose a, b, or nothing.

{ } braces Indicates required or expected values. Example: { a | b } indicates

that you must choose either a or b.

| vertical bar Indicates that you have a choice between two or more options or
arguments. Examples:
[ a | b ] indicates that you can choose a, b, or nothing.
{ a | b } indicates that you must choose either a or b.

xiv Preface
Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 This document uses the following icons to draw attention to information:

Icon Label Description

Note Calls attention to important or additional information.

Tip Provides helpful information, guidelines, or suggestions for

performing tasks more effectively.

Caution Warns the user of adverse conditions or consequences (for

example, disruptive operations).

WARNING Warns the user of severe conditions or consequences (for

example, destructive operations).

Conventions for storage capacity values

Physical storage capacity values (for example, disk drive capacity) are
calculated based on the following values:

Physical capacity unit Value

1 kilobyte (KB) 1,000 (103) bytes

1 megabyte (MB) 1,000 KB or 1,0002 bytes

1 gigabyte (GB) 1,000 MB or 1,0003 bytes

1 terabyte (TB) 1,000 GB or 1,0004 bytes

1 petabyte (PB) 1,000 TB or 1,0005 bytes

1 exabyte (EB) 1,000 PB or 1,0006 bytes

Logical capacity values (for example, logical device capacity, cache memory
capacity) are calculated based on the following values:

Logical capacity unit Value

1 block 512 bytes

1 cylinder Mainframe: 870 KB

Open-systems:
• OPEN-V: 960 KB
• Others: 720 KB

1 KB 1,024 (210) bytes

1 MB 1,024 KB or 1,0242 bytes

1 GB 1,024 MB or 1,0243 bytes

1 TB 1,024 GB or 1,0244 bytes

Preface xv
Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Logical capacity unit Value

1 PB 1,024 TB or 1,0245 bytes

1 EB 1,024 PB or 1,0246 bytes

Accessing product documentation

Product documentation is available on Hitachi Data Systems Support
Connect: https://knowledge.hds.com/Documents. Check this site for the
most current documentation, including important updates that may have
been made after the release of the product.

Getting help
Hitachi Data Systems Support Connect is the destination for technical support
of products and solutions sold by Hitachi Data Systems. To contact technical
support, log on to Hitachi Data Systems Support Connect for contact
information: https://support.hds.com/en_us/contact-us.html.
Hitachi Data Systems Community is a global online community for HDS
customers, partners, independent software vendors, employees, and
prospects. It is the destination to get answers, discover insights, and make
connections. Join the conversation today! Go to community.hds.com,
register, and complete your profile.

Comments
Please send us your comments on this document: [email protected].
Include the document title and number, including the revision level (for
example, -07), and refer to specific sections and paragraphs whenever
possible. All comments become the property of Hitachi Data Systems
Corporation.
Thank you!

xvi Preface
Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 1
Introducing Global Link Manager
This chapter provides information you need to understand before using Global
Link Manager, the chapter provides an overview of the Global Link Manager
system and explains key terms. Read this chapter before operating Global
Link Manager.

□ About Global Link Manager

Introducing Global Link Manager 1-1

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
About Global Link Manager

Overview
Global Link Manager uses multipath management software path control
functionality to provide integrated path management for large-sized system
configurations. While multipath management software manages paths for a
host, Global Link Manager batch-manages paths for multiple hosts. Global
Link Manager supports the following multipath management software:
• HDLM (Hitachi Dynamic Link Manager)
• DMP (VxVM Dynamic Multipathing function)
• HP-UX Multipath
When you use a large-sized system configuration containing many hosts, the
workload for managing paths from each host grows in proportion to the size
of the system. Global Link Manager enables you to reduce the workload by
providing unified management of the path information for multiple hosts.
Global Link Manager also helps you to improve system reliability, by switching
path statuses while taking into account the balancing of workloads in the
whole system, by enabling the reporting of error information (alerts) from
each host, and by enabling you to quickly solve problems.
Global Link Manager collects information about paths from multiple hosts on
which multipath management software is installed, and the Global Link
Manager server collectively manages this information. Collected information
can be viewed and controlled by multiple users who manage the hosts from
client machines. The following figure shows an example of a Global Link
Manager system configuration.

1-2 Introducing Global Link Manager

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Figure 1-1 Example of a Global Link Manager system configuration
The following table lists the components that make up the Global Link
Manager system.

Table 1-1 System configuration components for Global Link Manager

Component Description

Global Link Manager A management server on which Global Link Manager has been
server installed.

Global Link Manager A client used to run Global Link Manager. The Global Link
client Manager GUI is used via a Web browser to run a Global Link
Manager client.

Introducing Global Link Manager 1-3

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Component Description

SNMP transfer A transfer destination server for alerts managed by the Global
destination server Link Manager server. By specifying the transfer destination,
alerts can be transferred to any SNMP management server after
being received by the Global Link Manager server.

SMTP server An email server used to email alerts received by the Global Link
Manager server.

Remote management An instance of the Hitachi Command Suite Common Agent

client Component that connects to and controls a host via a LAN. Also
refers to the computer on which the component is installed. A
remote management client is required when you use Global
Link Manager to manage the VMware edition of HDLM.
We recommend that each remote management client should
not manage more than 10 hosts.

Host A host on which the multipath management software is installed

and that is managed by Global Link Manager. If your OS is
VMware, the host is the server running the ESXi Hypervisor.
Functions are executed by operating remote multipath
management software from Global Link Manager.
• For HDLM versions earlier than 5.8, a Device Manager
agent is required to operate HDLM from Global Link
Manager.
• For DMP or HP-UX multipath, a Global Link Manager agent
is required to operate the multipath management software
from Global Link Manager.

SAN A dedicated network used for data transfer by the host machine
and storage system.

Storage system An external storage device connected to a host machine.

Related topics
• Features on page 1-4
• Global Link Manager components on page 1-5
• Terms and concepts on page 1-8

Features
Global Link Manager includes the following features:
¢ Collective Management of Path Information of Multiple Hosts
By using remote operations from the Global Link Manager GUI, you
can collectively set up multiple hosts and collect information from the
multipath management software on multiple hosts. Operations can be
managed from one console without having to log in to each host.
Since multiple hosts can be managed collectively, the user can view
the path information for hosts, HBA ports, storage systems, CHA
ports, or by path status.
¢ Summarizing the Path Statuses for the Whole System

1-4 Introducing Global Link Manager

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Global Link Manager can also display a summary of path statuses (the
number of paths in each status). You can check path availability in the
entire system without having to check the status of each host
individually.
¢ Support for Path Bandwidth Control
Global Link Manager enables you to specify the format for viewing
path information, such as by storage system or by CHA port. You can
also use Global Link Manager to adjust the bandwidth of paths (the
actual number of online paths) among multiple user applications or
hosts.
¢ Collective Management of Error Information from Multiple Hosts
To quickly detect an error that occurs on a host in a multi host system
and take appropriate action, you need to set up the environment so
that it informs you of the error cause and location. To facilitate
collective management, you can set up Global Link Manager so that
path error information (detected by the multipath management
software on each host) is reported to you as alerts. You can use an
application of your choosing to manage alert information that was
transferred from the Global Link Manager server to another SNMP
management server.
Related topics
• Overview on page 1-2
• Global Link Manager components on page 1-5
• Terms and concepts on page 1-8

What's new?
The following is the principal new functionality in Global Link Manager v8.5.1:
• Functionality for downloading the HDLM installer is now supported: The
HDLM installer for the target OS can now be downloaded from the client.

Tip: Readme and Release Notes Contents: These files can be found on the
installation DVD-ROM. They contain requirements and notes for use of Hitachi
Global Link Manager that may not be fully described in this Help. Please
review these files before installing the product.

Global Link Manager components

The Global Link Manager system consists of the following components:
Global Link Manager server
¢ Global Link Manager
¢ Hitachi Command Suite Common Component
¢ HiRDB
Global Link Manager client

Introducing Global Link Manager 1-5

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 ¢ Web browser
Remote management client (when the host OS is VMware)
¢ HDLM
¢ Hitachi Command Suite Common Agent Component
HDLM host
¢ HDLM
¢ Device Manager agent (when the HDLM version is earlier than 5.8)
¢ Hitachi Command Suite Common Agent Component (when the HDLM
version is 5.8 or later, and the host OS is not VMware)
DMP host
¢ DMP
¢ Global Link Manager agent
HP-UX multipath host
¢ HP-UX multipath
¢ Global Link Manager agent
SNMP transfer destination server
¢ SNMP management application
The following figure shows the structure of the components:

1-6 Introducing Global Link Manager

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Figure 1-2 Structure of the components
Global Link Manager
Global Link Manager collects information from hosts, and sets up hosts.
Hitachi Command Suite Common Component
Hitachi Command Suite Common Component provides Hitachi Command
Suite products server functionality and the basic functionality of the GUI.
Hitachi Command Suite Common Component is installed as part of Global
Link Manager, Device Manager, Tuning Manager, and other Hitachi
Command Suite server products, and is always updated to the latest
version.

Introducing Global Link Manager 1-7

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 HiRDB
HiRDB is a relational database that manages the Global Link Manager
information.
Web browser
The user uses the Global Link Manager GUI via a Web browser.
HDLM, DMP, or HP-UX multipath
HDLM, DMP, and HP-UX multipath manage the paths between hosts and
storage systems. HDLM, DMP, and HP-UX multipath can also be used to
balance the loads on paths and to switch paths if a problem occurs.
Device Manager agent
A Device Manager agent is software required for communicating with the
Global Link Manager server when the version of HDLM installed on the
host is earlier than 5.8.
Hitachi Command Suite Common Agent Component
Hitachi Command Suite Common Agent Component, which is included in
HDLM, is a component required for communicating with the Global Link
Manager server when the version of HDLM installed on the host is 5.8 or
later.
When the host OS is VMware, this component is installed on the remote
management client. Otherwise, it is installed on the host where HDLM is
used.
Global Link Manager agent
The Global Link Manager agent is software required for communicating
with the Global Link Manager server when DMP, or HP-UX multipath is
used on a host.
SNMP management application
An application that manages alert information transferred from the Global
Link Manager server by SNMP traps. Transfer of alert information from
the Global Link Manager server is optional.
For information on system requirements for Global Link Manager, such as
supported operating systems and prerequisite programs, see the Hitachi
Command Suite Global Link Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.
Related topics
• Overview on page 1-2
• Features on page 1-4
• Terms and concepts on page 1-8

Terms and concepts

This section describes the following terms and concepts that should be
understood when operating Global Link Manager:
• Resources on page 1-9

1-8 Introducing Global Link Manager

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
• Resource groups on page 1-9
• User management types and permissions on page 1-9
• Host groups on page 1-11
• Paths on page 1-12
• Multipath LUs on page 1-15
• CHA ports on page 1-15
• HBA ports on page 1-16
• Load balancing on page 1-16

Resources
Resources indicate hosts managed by Global Link Manager or storage
systems connected to the hosts. When you use the Global Link Manager
graphical-user interface (GUI) to add a host, you can view information about
that host's paths and connected storage systems from Global Link Manager.

Resource groups
Resource groups indicate a group of resources that are grouped by task or
other criteria and associated with users to limit the range of resources
accessed by users. Users who manage a wide range of resources can be
associated with multiple resource groups in order to extend their range of
operations.

User management types and permissions

To control access, Global Link Manager uses resource groups that restrict
operation scope, management types that restrict user operations, and user
permissions.
Two different types of users operate Global Link Manager, as indicated in the
following table:

Table 1-2 User management types

Management type Description

User management User who manages all users common to all Hitachi
Command Suite products. This type of user can specify
settings for user IDs, permissions, and other information
for Hitachi Command Suite product users.

Global Link Manager User who manages Global Link Manager resources and
management information that belongs to those resources, such as paths.

The following table lists the user permissions associated with the user types.
All users can manage their user profiles and Global Link Manager licenses
regardless of their permissions.

Introducing Global Link Manager 1-9

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Table 1-3 User permissions

Management type Permissions Description

User management Admin Allows a user to log in to all Hitachi

Command Suite products and to set up the
users common to all Hitachi Command
Suite products.

Global Link Manager Admin Allows a user to access all Global Link
management Manager resources and execute all tasks
other than those for user management.

Modify Allows a user to manage resources and

paths and outputs that information to CSV
files within a resource set by a user who
has Admin (Global Link Manager
management) permission.

View Allows a user to view resources and paths

within a resource set by a user who has
Admin (Global Link Manager management)
permission.

Initially, Global Link Manager comes with a built-in account that has an ID
called System that can manage all users and products. This user ID and its
permissions cannot be changed or deleted.
By default, a user who has the Admin (user management) permission (other
than the built-in account with the user ID System), cannot perform any
Global Link Manager operations other than those for user management. Only
the built-in account user System can perform such operations. To use Global
Link Manager, the user must specify the desired Global Link Manager
management permission.
After a user with Admin (user management) permission sets up Global Link
Manager users, users with Admin (Global Link Manager management)
permission (who are allowed to access all resources) can set up resource
groups.
Among the Global Link Manager management users, the users with
permissions other than the Admin permission can use the GUI to:
• View only the hosts within an associated resource group, the paths to the
hosts, and the storage systems connected to the hosts.
• Perform operations on the above hosts, paths, and storage systems
according to their user permissions.
The following figure uses an example to show the relationship between
resource groups and user permissions:

1-10 Introducing Global Link Manager

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Figure 1-3 Relationship between resource groups and user permissions

Host groups
A host group is a group of Global Link Manager managed hosts that is created
according to the user's goals and desired tasks. To simplify management of
multiple hosts and paths, each user who can perform Global Link Manager
management classifies the managed hosts (hosts that exist in the assigned
resource group) into the desired groups. Host groups can be layered in a
hierarchical structure, and a single host can belong to multiple host groups.
The following figure uses an example to show an overview of host groups:

Introducing Global Link Manager 1-11

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Figure 1-4 Overview of host groups

Paths
A path that connects a host to a storage system for data I/Os.
When the host operating system is Linux or Solaris, the number of paths
displayed in the Global Link Manager GUI is the same as the number of
physical paths (which is the same as the number of LUs recognized by the
SCSI driver), even though there are as many paths as there are partitions
(slices). For a host running Linux, Solaris 8, Solaris 9, Solaris 10, or Solaris
11, these numbers are the same because a path ID is assigned for each
physical path. For a host running Solaris 7, these numbers are the same
because information about the path IDs assigned to each slice is summarized,
and only the minimum required information is displayed in the Global Link
Manager GUI (totals for the number of I/O counts and I/O errors on the paths
are displayed).
The following table describes the path statuses that Global Link Manager
manages.

1-12 Introducing Global Link Manager

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Table 1-4 Path status for HDLM

Path status Description

Online This status enables I/Os to be issued normally.

Users can perform offline operations on a path that has the Online
status.
When the host operating system is Windows and the host is in a
cluster configuration, this status includes paths that have the
Online(P) status (a path connected to an LU in reserve processing,
and waiting for execution of offline processing).
Note that paths that have the Online status are checked by the lost
path check option.

Offline(C) A path that is in an offline state due to an offline operation on the

path. Users can perform online operations on a path that has the
Offline(C) status.
Note that paths that have the Offline(C) status are checked by
the lost path check option.

Offline(E) A path that is in an offline state because the host's HDLM has
detected an error.
Users can perform offline operations or (after error recovery) online
operations on a path that has the Offline(E) status. If HDLM's
automatic failback function #1 is enabled, the path automatically
returns to the Online status after error recovery is confirmed.
When the host operating system is Windows and the host is in a
cluster configuration, this status includes paths that have the
Offline(P) status (a path connected to an LU in reserve
processing, and waiting for execution of offline processing).

Online(E) #2 A path has been taken offline because the host's HDLM has
detected an error on all paths associated with a specific logical unit
(LU). In this case, one of the paths is placed in Online(E) status,
with the others placed in Offline(E) status. While the error
persists, the status of paths accessing that LU changes between
Online(E) and Offline(E) so that one path is always in
Online(E) status.
After recovering from the error, you can perform online operations
on the path that has Online(E) status. If the HDLM automatic
failback function is enabled, paths return to Online status when
HDLM detects that the error has been resolved.
When the host operating system is Windows and the host is in a
cluster configuration, this status includes paths in Online(EP)
status (a path to a reserved LU waiting for execution of offline
processing)

Online(S) The path error of the primary volume (P-VOL) in the HAM
environment has been resolved, but I/O to the P-VOL is being
suppressed.
Paths with the Online(S) status are displayed when HDLM is used
as multipath management software, and when true is set for the
gui.physical.view properties in the server.properties file for
Global Link Manager server. When false is set, the paths are
displayed as paths with the Offline(E) status. For details about

Introducing Global Link Manager 1-13

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Path status Description
the gui.physical.view properties, see the Hitachi Command Suite
Global Link Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

Online(D) The path error of the primary volume (P-VOL) in the HAM
environment has been resolved, but I/O to the P-VOL is being
suppressed. If an error occurs on all the paths on the secondary
volume (S-VOL), the P-VOL paths automatically change to the
Online status. To change to the Online(D) status, specify the
status in the dialog box for setting Online(D).
Paths with the Online(D) status are displayed when HDLM is used
as multipath management software, and when true is set for the
gui.physical.view properties in the server.properties file for
Global Link Manager server. When false is set, the paths are
displayed as paths with the Offline(E) status. For details about
the gui.physical.view properties, see the Hitachi Command Suite
Global Link Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

#1
If the host operating system is VMware, for details about the automatic
failback function see the manual of the version of HDLM being used.
#2
When the host OS is VMware, paths do not change to Online(E) status,
and paths in Online(E) status are not displayed.

Table 1-5 Path status for DMP Windows

Path status Description

Healthy This status enables I/O to be issued normally.

Note that paths that have the Healthy status are checked by the
lost path check option.

Unhealthy A path that is in an offline state because the host's DMP has
detected an error.
When Windows Plug and Play detects an error, the path where
the error occurred is deleted. If a host detects that error before
the path is deleted, the path's status is changed to Unhealthy.
After the host has been recovered, update the host information
to change the status back to Healthy.

Table 1-6 Path status for HP-UX multipath

Path status Description

Online This status enables I/Os be issued if a path has the Online
status. If a path has the standby status, I/Os cannot be issued.
The status of a path for HP-UX multipath is online or standby.
Users can perform offline operations on a path that has the
Online status.

1-14 Introducing Global Link Manager

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Path status Description
Note that paths that have the Online status are checked by the
lost path check option.

Offline(C) A path that is in an offline state due to an offline operation on

the path.
The status of a path for HP-UX multipath is disable.
Users can perform online operations on a path that has the
Offline(C) status.
Note that paths that have the Offline(C) status are checked by
the lost path check option.

Offline(E) A path is in offline status because a path error(Offline) or a

lunpath authentication error(unusable)# was detected in the
path.
The status of a path for HP-UX multipath is offline or
unusable.

#
If you want to change the device and use it, you need to perform
operations for re-authentication. After performing re-authentication
operations, you can use Global Link Manager to set Online status. For
details about re-authentication operations, see the HP-UX manual.

Multipath LUs
If there are multiple paths for one LU, the multipath management software
creates a corresponding device by integrating as many existing SCSI devices
as the number of physical paths. Each host application uses the device
corresponding to the multipath management software to access the LU in a
storage system. Multipath LUs are expressed by the logical device file of the
multipath management software device or the name of the assigned disk
drive. In the Global Link Manager GUI, this is displayed as shown in the table
below.

Table 1-7 Displayed multipath LU information

Host
Display
environment

HDLM HDev name

DMP (Windows) Disk name

HP-UX LUN hardware path

multipath

CHA ports
This is an adapter that controls channels on a storage system. When you are
using DMP in Windows, this is displayed as a target. When you are using HP-
UX multipath, this is displayed as a target address.

Introducing Global Link Manager 1-15

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 HBA ports
This is an interface device that connects a host and an external device. When
you are using DMP in Windows, this is displayed as a port/channel. When you
are using HP-UX multipath, this is displayed as an HBA path.

Load balancing
If there are multiple paths that access an LU area, this functionality balances
loads on the paths by executing I/O on multiple paths. When you are using
DMP in Windows, this is displayed as a load balancing policy.
The following table shows the correspondence of terms between HDLM and
HP-UX multipath:

Table 1-8 Correspondence of terms between HDLM and HP-UX multipath

HDLM HP-UX multipath

LDEV LUN ID

Storage System Name Storage Subsystems

CHA Target address

Multipath LU LUN hardware path

HBA H/W Path

HBA WWN Port name

I/O Count Total I/Os processed

I/O Errors I/O failures

Path ID lunpath ID

Path Name lunpath hardware path

Related topics
• Overview on page 1-2
• Features on page 1-4
• Global Link Manager components on page 1-5

1-16 Introducing Global Link Manager

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 2
Getting started
This chapter describes an example of Global Link Manager operation. This
chapter also describes the workflows for specifying initial user and resource
settings, changing the configuration of the multipath management software
operating environment, maintaining storage systems, and collectively
managing the paths set up between hosts and storage systems.

□ Using Global Link Manager

□ Reconfiguring the multipath management software operating environment

□ Replacing CHAs or CHA microprograms

□ Viewing paths

□ Setting paths according to I/O distribution

□ Responding to path errors

Getting started 2-1

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Using Global Link Manager
This section explains the entire flow of tasks from setup to operation. This
section also explains the settings required to start the operation, and the
procedural steps to log in to Global Link Manager.

Road map
This road map summarizes how to use Global Link Manager. The following
steps assume that:
• Multipath management software has been installed and the multipath
management software environment has been set up.
• Global Link Manager has been installed and the Global Link Manager
environment has been set up.
If DMP or HP-UX multipath is used on a host, then the Global Link
Manager agent has been installed and the Global Link Manager
environment has been set up.
• Global Link Manager licenses have been set up during the initial login.
Specify Global Link Manager users.
Users who manage Global Link Manager are specified by a user who has
the Admin (user management) permission.
a. Add Global Link Manager users.
b. Specify permissions for registered users.
Register hosts as Global Link Manager resources.
To use Global Link Manager to facilitate integrated management of paths
managed by multipath management software, you must register the
hosts on which the multipath management software is installed in Global
Link Manager.
a. Add hosts.
Alert notification is automatically set, by default, for all registered
hosts. To change the alert setting for a host, you must set the
server.snmp.auto_set property to false in the Global Link Manager
server's server.properties file. For details about how to edit the
properties file, see the Hitachi Command Suite Software Installation
and Configuration Guide.
b. Set the operating environment for hosts.
For details about how to set the operating environment for registered
hosts, see Configuring alerts for a host on page 5-32.
If you are using HDLM, also see the following sections:
- Multipath LU configuration on page 5-21
- Configuring the HDLM operating environment for a host on page
5-28
For details about how to set up load balancing for an individual LU and
how to configure the operating environment, see the VxVM
documentation.

2-2 Getting started

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Tip: Note the following when you register hosts as Global Link Manager
resources:
• If you are using multipath management software in a cluster
configuration, you must individually register all of the hosts that make
up the cluster. Note that, in the Global Link Manager graphical-user
interface (GUI), the registered hosts will be displayed by their host
names regardless of whether the hosts make up the cluster. If
necessary, specify the required settings for each host.
• You cannot run multiple types of multipath management software on
one host at the same time.
Control user access to the hosts.
You can limit the range of resources (hosts) that can be manipulated by
each user by creating resource groups and assigning users to them.
When a user logs in using the Global Link Manager, only the assigned
host is displayed.
a. Add resource groups.
b. Add hosts in a resource group.
c. Add users in a resource group.
If necessary, change the configuration of the host's multipath management
software environment.
If necessary, upgrade the version of the multipath management software
on the host and change the storage system's LU configuration. For details
on how to change the configuration of a multipath management software
environment,see the following sections:
¢ Upgrading multipath management software on the host on page
2-12
¢ Changing the multipath management software device (LU)
configurations of hosts on page 2-12
¢ Changing host connection targets or remote management client
connection targets on page 2-13

Tip: You cannot run multiple types of multipath management software on

one host at the same time.

Replace the storage system CHAs or microprograms, if necessary.

If necessary, perform maintenance on the storage system CHAs or the
CHA microprograms. For details about how to replace CHAs or CHA
microprograms, see Replacing CHAs or CHA microprograms on page
2-15.
Perform integrated path management by using Global Link Manager.
Perform integrated management of paths set between the host and
storage system by distributing the workload for the paths and correcting
path errors. For details about the procedure used for path management,
see the following sections:

Getting started 2-3

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 ¢ Viewing paths on page 2-17
¢ Managing I/O bottlenecks and path bandwidth on page 2-19
¢ Identifying and correcting path errors on page 2-21

Guidelines for maximum number of Global Link Manager

management targets and batch operations
The management targets used in operating Global Link Manager include the
hosts to be registered, the paths that belong to the hosts, the resource
groups, and the host groups to be set for managing hosts. The maximum
number of each of these targets is explained in the following table.

Table 2-1 Guidelines for maximum number of Global Link Manager

management targets

Management target type Maximum number

Hosts 1500

Host groups 100

Resource groups 100

Multipath LUs#1#2 15000

Paths#1#2#3 60000

Lost paths (for a host) 1024

#1
For the maximum numbers of multipath LUs and paths per host, use the
following formula:
maximum-number-of-multipath-LUs-or-paths / number-of-management-
target-hosts
#2
If DMP or HP-UX multipath is used on the host, you also need to take into
account the maximum number when DMP or HP-UX multipath is used.
#3
If acquisition of path availability information (path status log) for a host is
enabled to output reports on path availability information, set
approximately 1000 for the maximum number of paths per host on which
HDLM version 5.9 or later is running.
By default, acquisition of path availability information (path status log) for
a host is disabled. To change the acquisition setting, use the
server.pathreport.enable property in the server.properties file of
the Global Link Manager server. For details about the
server.pathreport.enable property, see the Hitachi Command Suite
Global Link Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.
The following table lists the maximum number of paths and LUs per host
when using DMP or HP-UX multipath.

2-4 Getting started

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Table 2-2 Guidelines for maximum number when using DMP or HP-UX
multipath

Multipath
Maximum number of
management Maximum number of paths
multipath LUs
software

DMP (Windows) 1024 256

HP-UX Multipath 1024 512

The following table explains maximum numbers for each operation when
operating Global Link Manager in batch mode.

Table 2-3 Guidelines for maximum number when operating in batch mode

Operation Maximum number

Add hosts (import a CSV file in batch mode) 100 (hosts)

Refresh host information 100 (hosts)

Set multipath LU 100 (multipath LUs)

Multi Host Configuration 100 (hosts)

Switch path status (online or offline operation) 100 (paths)

Related topics
• Managing Users and Permissions
• Adding hosts on page 5-5
• Managing Resource Groups
• Outputting Reports on Path Availability

Configuring a web browser

If a warning message is display stating that a pop-up window in the Global
Link Manager GUI is being blocked, you can change the settings so that pop-
up windows are always displayed. You can also display pop-up windows by
registering the Global Link Manager product URL as a trusted site ahead of
time. If SSL/TLS is used to communicate between the management server
and clients, use the SSL version of URL in the pop-up blocker settings.

Information to collect in advance

• IP address or host name of the Global Link Manager server
• Port number of the Global Link Manager server
You can use the server.https.port property in the server.properties
file on the Global Link Manager server to check the port number of the
server.

Getting started 2-5

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 For details about these properties, see the Hitachi Command Suite Global
Link Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

To disable the pop-up blocker:

1. In the pop-up blocker settings of the browser, register the following URL
as the address of the website to allow:
For SSL communication:
https://Global-Link-Manager-server-IP-address-or-host-name
For non-SSL communication:
http://Global-Link-Manager-server-IP-address-or-host-name

Reference:
• URL for communication with the Global Link Manager server:
http://Global-Link-Manager-server-IP-address-or-host-name:Global-
Link-Manager-server-port-number/
¢ Non-SSL example
http://Global-Link-Manager-server-address:22015/
GlobalLinkAvailabilityManager/
¢ SSL example
https://Global-Link-Manager-server-address:22016/
GlobalLinkAvailabilityManager/
• To stop the Global Link Manager pop-up windows from being displayed in
the background, specify settings so that pop-up windows are not
displayed in a new tab.

To configure the options in Internet Explorer:

If you are using Internet Explorer to use the GUI of Global Link Manager,
configure the settings to communicate with the Global Link Manager server.
The settings are optional for items that are not listed below:
1. Start Internet Explorer.
2. On the Tools menu, click Internet Options.
3. When the Internet Options dialog box appears, click the Security tab.
4. Click the Custom Level of the Trusted sites.
5. When the Security Settings dialog box appears, configure your browser to
use the configuration settings below.

Table 2-4 Configuration settings

Items to be set Setting value

Run ActiveX controls and plug-ins Enable

Script ActiveX controls marked safe for scripting Enable

Active scripting Enable

2-6 Getting started

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Items to be set Setting value

Launching programs and files in an IFRAME Prompt or Enable

Submit non-encrypted form data Prompt or Enable

File download Enable

Allow Web sites to prompt for information using Enable

scripted windows

6. On the Privacy tab of the Internet Options dialog box, enable cookies.
7. On the Advanced tab of the Internet Options dialog box, select Warn
about certificate address mismatch and Show pictures.
8. When you finish, click OK until you exit all dialog boxes.

Note: Note that when using Internet Explorer in Windows Server 2008 or
Windows Server 2012, if the loading animation does not start or if files
cannot be downloaded from a server for which HTTPS is enabled, disable
Internet Explorer Enhanced Security Configuration.
Related topics
• Logging in and out on page 2-8
• Global Link Manager GUI window on page 2-9

Tip:
• Set the Web browser locale to match the operation.
• Set the Web browser page caching to show the latest information every
time the page is accessed.
• Set the font size to Medium or Larger. If you set the font size to
Largest, characters might overlap when displayed.
• Enable Enhanced Protection Mode in Internet Explorer 10.

To configure the options in Firefox:

If you are using Firefox to use the GUI of Global Link Manager, configure the
settings to communicate with the Global Link Manager server. The settings
are optional for items that are not listed below:
1. Start Firefox.
2. In the Options dialog box, perform the following settings:
¢ Enable cookies
¢ Set images to be loaded automatically
¢ Enable JavaScript
¢ Register the IP address of the GUI of Global Link Manager as a site for
which pop-ups are allowed

Getting started 2-7

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Note:
• Make sure that the language settings in the web browser and X-terminal
are the same. If the language settings differ, character strings might not
be displayed correctly in the title bar.
• Do not change the default setting for the font size. If the font size is
increased, characters might overlap when displayed.

Logging in and out

Licenses need to be registered after Global Link Manager is installed in order
for users to log into Global Link Manager. For details about how to install
Global Link Manager and set up licenses, see the Hitachi Command Suite
Global Link Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.
To log in:
1. In the Web browser's address bar, enter the login URL. This URL follows
the syntax: http://IP-address-of-the-Global Link Manager-server#:port-
number-for-HBase64 Storage-Mgmt-Web-Service-of-the-Global Link
Manager-server/GlobalLinkAvailabilityManager/.

Example:
http://127.0.0.1:22015/GlobalLinkAvailabilityManager/
After the Back To Login window appears, the User Login window appears
automatically.
#:When specifying an IP address in IPv6 format, enclose the IP address
in square brackets ([ ]). If you are using Firefox in an IPv6 environment,
you cannot use an IPv6 address in the URL for Global Link Manager. To
use Firefox and establish an IPv6 connection, specify the IPv6 IP address
and host name of the Global Link Manager server in the hosts file, and
then use the host name to access Global Link Manager.
2. Enter the user ID and password.
To specify a Global Link Manager user when you log in to Global Link
Manager for the first time, log in as the built-in account user (the default
user who has the Admin (user management) permission). Use the user ID
and password given below (default). If you have already used another
Hitachi Command Suite product and have changed the password, use the
new password. If you enabled authentication using an external
authentication server, use the password registered in that server.
Logging in as the built-in account user
User ID: System
Password: manager (default)

Tip: For security reasons, a user's account may be locked automatically if

the user fails to log in successfully after a certain number of unsuccessful
attempts. A user with Admin (user management) permission sets whether
login automatic account lock is to be enabled and, if so, the number of
consecutive login failures that will cause an account to be locked.

2-8 Getting started

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 3. Click the Login button. The initial window of the Global Link Manager GUI
appears.
To log out and end the Global Link Manager GUI:
1. Click the Logout button in the Global Link Manager GUI window. The
Global Link Manager GUI terminates, and you are logged out.
Related topics
• Changing settings for automatic account lock on page 11-5
• Unlocking user accounts on page 3-11
• Configuring a web browser on page 2-5
• Global Link Manager GUI window on page 2-9

Global Link Manager GUI window

All Global Link Manager tasks are performed from the Global Link Manager
graphical-user interface (GUI) window. The following figure shows the Global
Link Manager GUI window and its components.
The following figure shows the window organization of the Global Link
Manager GUI:

Figure 2-1 Window organization of the Global Link Manager GUI

Getting started 2-9

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Global tasks bar area
Displays the Global Link Manager menus, action buttons, the previous
login time, and information about the user who is logged in. In the global
tasks bar area, you can toggle between viewing and hiding the Explorer
menu and Dashboard menu areas, output Global Link Manager
management information to a CSV file, close a window, log out from
Global Link Manager, download the HDLM installer, view Help, and view
the version and license information.
Explorer menu
Displays Global Link Manager task menu items. Choosing a menu item
displays the corresponding information in the navigation and application
areas.
Dashboard menu
Displays a list of Hitachi Command Suite products. A product shown in the
active mode can be started by using the GO link. The number of
unconfirmed alerts among the alerts related to a path error appears under
HGLM. The number of unconfirmed alerts is updated when an automatic
refresh occurs or when an operation such as setting an alert to read is
performed in the Alerts subwindow.
The default refresh interval for the display in the Dashboard menu is one
minute. To change the interval, specify the desired interval in the
gui.indicator.auto_refresh_interval property in the Global Link
Manager server's server.properties file. For details about this property,
see the Hitachi Command Suite Global Link Manager Installation and
Configuration Guide.
Application bar area
Displays the name of the item selected in the Explorer menu,
corresponding action buttons, and the button that toggles between
viewing and hiding the navigation area.
Navigation area
Displays, in a tree format, the objects that belong to the item selected in
the Explorer menu. Clicking the Refresh Tree button updates the
information in the navigation area and the application area.
Object tree
Displays objects in the navigation area, in a tree format. Expanding the
object tree and choosing a desired object displays information about
object-name in the application area.
Application area
Displays information corresponding to the object chosen from the object
tree or the Explorer menu.
Subwindow
A window displayed within the application area is called an object-name
subwindow.
Dialog box

2-10 Getting started

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 A popup window displayed by clicking an action button is called an action-
name dialog box.
Notes
Observe the following guidelines about the GUI window:
¢ In a dialog box with tabbed pages, the contents you enter in a
tabbed-page are cleared when you change tabs. Complete an
operation in a tabbed-page before changing tabs.
¢ When you close a dialog box, use the Close button in the Global Link
Manager GUI. If you close a dialog box by another browser operation,
the results of operations performed in that dialog box are not applied
to the navigation area and application area when the dialog box is
closed.
¢ On rare occasions, a GUI window on a browser of a client machine
becomes either of the following conditions, or the management
information is not displayed, or both:
• The GUI window becomes white and displays nothing.
• Although the GUI window does not become white, the
management information is not displayed correctly.
• Depending on the operation timing, browser error occurs and the
following procedure can not be performed.
In this case, perform the following procedures to recover:
• Press the F5 key to refresh the information displayed on the
browser.
• If the management information is not displayed correctly even
after refreshing the browser, display the login dialog box and log
in again.
¢ The Internet Explorer might cause application error on rare occasions.
In this case, invoke the Internet Explorer again and re-log in to Global
Link Manager.
¢ Depending on the version of Windows and Internet Explorer, File
Download dialog may appear again after the Open button is clicked
on the File Download dialog. The file is downloaded correctly by
clicking Open or Save on the secondly reappeared dialog.
Related topics
• Global tasks bar area on page A-2
• Explorer menu on page A-2
• Dashboard menu on page A-3
• Logging in and out on page 2-8
• Configuring a web browser on page 2-5

Getting started 2-11

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Reconfiguring the multipath management software
operating environment
This section explains the procedures to change the operating environment for
the multipath management software on the host. For example, this section
explains the procedure to upgrade the multipath management software
version of the host, and the procedure to change the configurations of the
LUs in a storage system that are accessed from a managed host.

Upgrading multipath management software on the host

This subsection describes the procedure for upgrading the multipath
management software version of hosts managed by Global Link Manager.
To upgrade the multipath management software version of hosts:
1. Check the multipath management software version of all the hosts being
managed by viewing the summary of multipath management software
versions in the list of hosts.
2. On the host that contains the multipath management software version to
be upgraded, install the new version of multipath management software.
see the multipath management software documentation.

Tip: Before installing a new version of HDLM on a host where a version of

HDLM earlier than 5.8 is installed, stop the service or the daemon process
of the Device Manager agent. see the Hitachi Device Manager Agent
Installation Guide or Hitachi Command Suite Administrator Guide.
3. Refresh the host to apply the updated multipath management software
information to Global Link Manager.
Related topics
• Viewing a list of hosts on page 5-4
• Refreshing host information on page 5-15
• Changing the multipath management software device (LU) configurations
of hosts on page 2-12
• Changing host connection targets or remote management client
connection targets on page 2-13

Changing the multipath management software device (LU)

configurations of hosts
Use the following general procedure to change the configuration of the LUs in
a storage system that are accessed from a host managed by Global Link
Manager, and the configuration of the devices corresponding to the multipath
management software (disk devices when the host operating system is
Windows).
To change the configuration of an LU:

2-12 Getting started

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 1. On each host, change the configuration of the multipath management
software devices (disk devices) that correspond to the LU.
see the multipath management software documentation.
2. Refresh the host to apply the updated multipath management software
information to Global Link Manager.
Related topics
• Refreshing host information on page 5-15
• Upgrading multipath management software on the host on page 2-12
• Changing host connection targets or remote management client
connection targets on page 2-13

Changing host connection targets or remote management client

connection targets
You will need to re-register a host in the following circumstances:
• You change the IP address of a host managed by Global Link Manager.
• You change one of the following port numbers:
¢ HDLM versions of the host are earlier than 5.8: the port number for
the port specified in the following properties in the
server.properties file of the Device Manager agent:
- server.agent.port property (agent service port)
- server.http.port property (remote port)
For information about the server.properties file of the Device
Manager agent, see the Hitachi Device Manager Agent Installation
Guide or Hitachi Command Suite Administrator Guide.
¢ On a host running HDLM version 5.8 or later on an OS other than
VMware or on a host using DMP or HP-UX multipath as the multipath
management software: the port number specified in the
server.agent.port property (agent service port) of the
server.properties file of the Hitachi Command Suite Common Agent
Component.
For information about the server.properties file of Hitachi
Command Suite Common Agent Component, see the Hitachi
Command Suite Global Link Manager Installation and Configuration
Guide.
• You change the connection target of the remote management client,
when the host operating system is VMware and the multipath
management software is HDLM.

Tip: When acquisition of path availability information (path status log) for a
host is enabled in order to output a report that uses the path availability
information, if you change the IP address or port number of a host on which
HDLM version 5.9 or later is running, the path availability information before
the change will be deleted.

Getting started 2-13

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 By default, acquisition of path availability information (path status log) for a
host is disabled. To change the acquisition setting, use the
server.pathreport.enable property in the server.properties file of the
Global Link Manager server. For details about the
server.pathreport.enable property, see the Hitachi Command Suite Global
Link Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.
To change the IP address, port number, or remote management client
connection target:
1. From Global Link Manager, temporarily delete the host whose IP address,
port number, or remote management client connection target you want to
change. After you do this, the host will no longer be managed by Global
Link Manager.
2. Change the IP address, port number, or remote management client
connection target.
To change the port number, edit the server.properties file of the
Device Manager agent or Hitachi Command Suite Common Agent
Component.
To change the remote management client properties, go to step 4.
3. Restart the Device Manager agent or Hitachi Command Suite Common
Agent Component.
¢ If the HDLM version of the host is earlier than 5.8, see the Hitachi
Device Manager Agent Installation Guide or Hitachi Command Suite
Administrator Guide.
¢ If the HDLM version of the host is 5.8 or later, on an OS other than
VMware or on a host using DMP or HP-UX multipath as the multipath
management software, see the Hitachi Command Suite Global Link
Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.
4. In Global Link Manager, re-register the deleted host with the new IP
address, port number, or remote management client connection target.
5. Set up an operating environment for the host.
If you are using HDLM:
¢ Multipath LU configuration (configuring loadbalancing and dynamic I/O
path control at the LU level).
¢ Configuring the HDLM operating environment for the host.
For details about how to set up load balancing for an individual LU and
how to configure the operating environment, see the VxVM manual.
For details about how to set up load balancing for an individual LU of HP-
UX multipath and how to configure the operating environment, see the
HP-UX documentation.
Related topics
• Outputting Reports on Path Availability
• Removing hosts on page 5-15
• Adding hosts on page 5-5
• Multipath LU configuration on page 5-21

2-14 Getting started

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 • Configuring the HDLM operating environment for a host on page 5-28
• Configuring alerts for a host on page 5-32
• Upgrading multipath management software on the host on page 2-12
• Changing the multipath management software device (LU) configurations
of hosts on page 2-12

Replacing CHAs or CHA microprograms

By using alternate paths, you can perform maintenance of storage system
CHAs and CHA microprograms while the system is running. However, to do
so, all of the paths, including the alternate paths, must be online.
From the host multipath management software, checking all of the target
paths along with their alternate paths is tedious. However, Global Link
Manager enables you to check the paths to all of the hosts from a particular
CHA port, which reduces the preparation work needed before performing the
replacement. The following figure shows an example of checking alternate
paths when replacing CHA:

Getting started 2-15

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Figure 2-2 Checking alternate paths with and without using Global Link
Manager
To replace a CHA or a CHA microprogram:
1. In the CHA ports, or Targets of the Storage-system-Name subwindow,
select all of the CHA ports belonging to the CHA you want to replace, or
select all of the CHA ports belonging to the cluster of the microprogram
you want to replace, and then update the information for the connected
hosts.
2. Make sure that all of the paths of the CHA port selected in step 1 are
online.
When replacing a CHA or a microprogram, to avoid having to shut down
the entire system due to inadvertently stopping CHAs or clusters that you
do not plan to replace, place all target and alternate paths in online
status.

2-16 Getting started

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 3. Make sure that alternate paths exist for the CHA port selected in step 1.
You can check the alternate paths in the Set Offline dialog box. When you
display paths in the Set Offline dialog box, if there is a path that cannot
be placed offline because no alternate path exists (if all online paths that
access a particular LU would be lost), the applicable path is highlighted. If
this occurs, stop the operation and check the target path, and then
perform the operation again.
4. Replace the CHA or the CHA microprogram.
For details about how to perform this replacement, see the maintenance
documentation that is provided with the storage system.
5. To obtain the latest information after the replacement, update the
information for the hosts connected to the CHA port selected in step 1
once again.
Related topics
• Refreshing all hosts connected to a CHA port on page 5-21
• Switching paths offline on page 8-18

Viewing paths
Global Link Manager lets you display at one time all paths set between hosts
and storage systems, without having to log in to each host on which
multipath management software is installed. You can effectively manage the
paths for multiple hosts from a single console, and reference paths from that
console from various viewpoints (such as grouping information in units of
hosts, HBA ports, storage systems, or CHA ports). The following figure shows
an example of path management:

Getting started 2-17

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Figure 2-3 Path management example
To view path information:
1. Hierarchically group hosts as required.
Management of hosts becomes easier when host groups are created to
facilitate specific tasks and purposes. The hosts managed by each user
can be grouped and the host groups can be hierarchically organized.
2. View path information.
Paths can be displayed as a list of paths for all the hosts or summarized
into their path statuses. Paths can be displayed in specific units so that
the appropriate paths can be placed offline and online as a group when an
error occurs or for hardware maintenance.
Related topics
• Managing Host Groups
• Managing Paths

Setting paths according to I/O distribution

This section explains the procedure to control path bandwidth and the load-
balancing function to distribute the workload on paths.

2-18 Getting started

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Managing I/O bottlenecks and path bandwidth
Path bandwidth is controlled by setting up an available path by first making it
redundant, switching the path to online or offline, and then increasing or
reducing the path bandwidth. The following figure shows an example of
controlling the path bandwidth by switching the offline path (path pool) to
online:

Figure 2-4 Example of controlling path bandwidth

To explain how to determine whether bottlenecks exist during system
operations, and how to locate them, this subsection introduces an example
using Tuning Manager. Tuning Manager provides resource performance and
capacity data so that the user can optimize use of various resources. You can
use Tuning Manager to locate problems as well as prevent problems by
executing the forecast function.see the Hitachi Command Suite Tuning
Manager Software Server Administration Guide and Hitachi Command Suite
Tuning Manager Software User Guide.
To control I/O bottlenecks:
1. Use Tuning Manager to check the performance and capacity information,
such as for hosts, file systems, and storage system LUs.
2. On the basis of the performance and capacity information for the
connected storage system and hosts, set up the paths while considering
the pools so that the bandwidth can be adjusted.
¢ To use Global Link Manager to manage paths, first use the host's
multipath management software to set LUs and their paths as

Getting started 2-19

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 management targets. see the multipath management software
documentation.
¢ To reflect the information specified in the multipath management
software onto the Global Link Manager GUI, refresh the host
information.
3. Identify bottlenecks during system operations by using Tuning Manager
to:
¢ Check information, such as the number of I/O operations at each
storage system port, and the transmission rate for read and write
operations.
¢ Find the location where the workload has increased, such as on paths
and CHAs.
4. Adjust the workload by switching the path status.
¢ To distribute the workloads of paths and eliminate bottlenecks, place
paths online or offline as required. Use the Global Link Manager
graphical-user interface (GUI) to summarize the paths into an
appropriately sorted list, such as in units of CHA ports or storage
systems, then switch any desired path statuses.
¢ To check the effect of switching the path status, use Tuning Manager
to view applicable information, such as the number of I/O operations
and the transmission rate.
Related topics
• Refreshing host information on page 5-15
• Viewing a list of paths on page 8-7
• Switching path status on page 8-15
• Distributing I/O across multiple paths on page 2-20

Distributing I/O across multiple paths

You can use the load-balancing function of multipath management software
to automatically distribute the workload and use paths efficiently. Load
balancing prevents performance degradation of the entire system, caused by
the excessive concentration of the workload on a single path.
The following figure shows an overview of the load-balancing function:

2-20 Getting started

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Figure 2-5 Overview of the load-balancing function
For information about load-balancing requirements and processing methods,
see the multipath management software documentation.
When you use HDLM and Global Link Manager together, you can configure
path load balancing at the LU level of the storage subsystem, as well as at
the host level. For details about how to configure load balancing at the host
level in the Global Link Manager GUI, see Configuring the HDLM operating
environment for a host on page 5-28. To configure load balancing at the LU
level, see the section describing LU-level load balancing in Multipath LU
configuration on page 5-21.
Related topics
• Configuring the HDLM operating environment for a host on page 5-28
• Multipath LU configuration on page 5-21
• Managing I/O bottlenecks and path bandwidth on page 2-19

Responding to path errors

This section explains the procedure to address path errors and the function to
address the errors automatically.

Identifying and correcting path errors

If an error occurs on a path managed by Global Link Manager, error
information detected by the multipath management software on each host is

Getting started 2-21

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 reported in the form of alerts. Global Link Manager can identify the host
where the error occurred without having to check each host because Global
Link Manager collectively manages error information for multiple hosts.
To identify and correct path errors:
1. In the Dashboard menu of the Global Link Manager GUI, be sure that
the number of alerts displayed under HGLM has been updated.
You can also check for path errors by using an icon displayed for each
host, host group, or storage system.
2. Check the list of alerts for the reported error information to identify the
host or path where the error occurred.
3. Acquire the most recent host information.
To view the most recent status of hosts and paths, refresh the host
information.
4. Check the path where the error occurred and determine the cause.
Determine the cause of the error by displaying the path errors in the list
of paths, viewing the number of I/O counts and I/O errors, and checking
the action to take for the error. If intermittent error monitoring is
enabled, a path that is believed to have caused an intermittent error is
indicated by a blinking path icon in the list of paths.
5. Handle the error.
Use a tool such as an operating system or hardware management tool to
locate the error and take appropriate action. For information about
hardware maintenance, contact your hardware distributor or maintenance
company if there is a maintenance contract.
To handle the error, place the paths offline as required. For example, if
the cause of the error is a faulty HBA, place all paths to that HBA offline
so the HBA can be replaced. After the error is corrected, place online all of
the paths that were placed offline.
If error recovery requires replacement of a hardware component,
reconfigure the multipath management software operating environment
after the replacement.see the multipath management software
documentation.
6. Refresh the information for the host for which the error was handled to
make sure that the path has recovered from the error and is operating
normally.
Related topics
• Overview on page 9-2
• Refreshing host information on page 5-15
• Viewing a list of paths on page 8-7
• Switching path status on page 8-15
• Path failover on page 2-23
• Path failback on page 2-23
• Path health check on page 2-24

2-22 Getting started

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Path failover
The automatic multipath management software failover function blocks the
path where an error has occurred and switches to a normal path, thus
enabling data I/O operations to continue. If the multipath management
software detects a Critical or Error path error, a failover will be performed.
The following figure shows an overview of the automatic failover function:

Figure 2-6 Overview of the automatic failover function

For information about the requirements for the failover function and target
path priorities, see the multipath management software documentation.
Related topics
• Identifying and correcting path errors on page 2-21
• Path failback on page 2-23
• Path health check on page 2-24

Path failback
When the multipath management software automatic failback function is
enabled and the recovery of a path for which a failover was performed due to
an error is detected, the path is automatically returned to an online state. If
the automatic failback function is not enabled, the path must be manually
returned to online.
The following figure shows an overview of the automatic failback function:

Getting started 2-23

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Figure 2-7 Overview of the automatic failback function
For information about the requirements for the automatic failback function
and target path priorities, see the multipath management software
documentation.
Related topics
• Configuring the HDLM operating environment for a host on page 5-28
• Identifying and correcting path errors on page 2-21
• Path failover on page 2-23
• Path health check on page 2-24

Path health check

The HDLM path health checking function, or the DMP (Windows) dynamic
recovery function is used to check path status at fixed intervals for error
detection purposes, automatically blocking a path where an error is detected.
Normally, an error cannot be detected unless an I/O is issued, because the
path status is checked when the I/O is issued. However, when the path
health checking function is enabled, the path that are online are checked at
fixed intervals regardless of whether I/Os are issued.
The following figure shows an overview of the path health check function:

2-24 Getting started

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Figure 2-8 Overview of the path health check function
For information about the requirements for the path health checking function,
see the multipath management software documentation.
Related topics
• Configuring the HDLM operating environment for a host on page 5-28
• Identifying and correcting path errors on page 2-21
• Path failover on page 2-23
• Path failback on page 2-23

Getting started 2-25

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
2-26 Getting started
Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 3
Managing users and permissions
This chapter describes the functions for managing users and explains how to
use these functions.

□ Overview

□ Viewing a list of users

□ Viewing individual user information

□ Viewing a summary of user permissions

□ Viewing a list of user permissions

□ Adding users

□ Editing user profiles

□ Deleting users

□ Changing user passwords

□ Changing user permissions

□ Locking user accounts

□ Unlocking user accounts

□ Changing the method for user authentication

Managing users and permissions 3-1

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Overview
To run Global Link Manager, you first register the Global Link Manager users,
and then you define the permissions that limit the range of operations each
user is permitted to perform. You can also reinforce the system security by
temporarily locking user accounts. A user whose account has been locked can
no longer log in.
Users are managed by a user who has the Admin (user management)
permission. When Hitachi Command Suite products other than Global Link
Manager are being used, users common to all Hitachi Command Suite
products can be specified.
If you want to integrate user account authentication with other application
programs, you can link to an external authentication server (the LDAP
directory server, RADIUS server, or Kerberos server for user authentication).
Two different types of users operate Global Link Manager, as indicated in the
following table:

Table 3-1 User management types

Management type Description

User management User who manages all users common to all Hitachi Command
Suite products. This type of user can specify settings for user
IDs, permissions, and other information for Hitachi Command
Suite product users.

Global Link Manager User who manages Global Link Manager resources and
management information that belongs to those resources, such as paths.

The following table lists the user permissions associated with the user types.
All users can manage their user profiles and Global Link Manager licenses
regardless of their permissions.

Table 3-2 User permissions

Management type Permissions Description

User management Admin Allows a user to log in to all Hitachi Command

Suite products and to set up the users common to
all Hitachi Command Suite products.

Global Link Manager Admin Allows a user to access all Global Link Manager
management resources and execute all tasks other than those
for user management.

Modify Allows a user to manage resources and paths and

outputs that information to CSV files within a
resource set by a user who has Admin (Global Link
Manager management) permission.

View Allows a user to view resources and paths within a

resource set by a user who has Admin (Global Link
Manager management) permission.

3-2 Managing users and permissions

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Initially, a built-in account that can manage all users and products is
prepared. The user ID for the built-in account is System. This user ID (and
permissions) cannot be deleted or changed.
By default, a user with Admin (user management) permission (other than the
built-in account with the user ID System) cannot perform any Global Link
Manager operations other than those for user management. Only the built-in
account user System can perform such operations. To use Global Link
Manager, the user must specify the desired Global Link Manager management
permission.

Explorer menu items for managing users

The following table lists the Explorer menu items used for managing users,
and which permissions are required for operating these items.

Table 3-3 Explorer menu items for managing users

Explorer menu Permissions

Admin, Modify,
View (for
Admin (for user
Submenu Command Global Link
management)
Manager
management)

Administration Users and Permissions Yes No

Functions for managing users

The following table lists the functions for managing users, and which
permissions are required for operating these functions.

Table 3-4 List of functions for managing users

Permissions
Admin, Modify,
Functions View (for
Admin (for user
Global Link
management)
Manager
management)

Viewing a list of users Yes No

Viewing individual user information Yes No

Viewing a summary of user permissions Yes No

Viewing a list of user permissions Yes No

Adding a user Yes No

Editing a user Yes No

Deleting a user Yes No

Managing users and permissions 3-3

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Permissions
Admin, Modify,
Functions View (for
Admin (for user
Global Link
management)
Manager
management)

Changing user passwords Yes No

Changing user permissions Yes No

Locking user accounts Yes No

Unlocking user accounts Yes No

Changing the method for user authentication Yes No

Related topics
• Viewing a list of users on page 3-4
• Viewing individual user information on page 3-5
• Viewing a summary of user permissions on page 3-5
• Viewing a list of user permissions on page 3-6
• Adding users on page 3-6
• Editing user profiles on page 3-7
• Deleting users on page 3-7
• Changing user passwords on page 3-9
• Changing user permissions on page 3-9
• Locking user accounts on page 3-10
• Unlocking user accounts on page 3-11
• Changing the method for user authentication on page 3-11

Viewing a list of users

You can view a list of user information for all Hitachi Command Suite products
that have been installed. The list displays user information such as user IDs.
To view a list of users:
1. In the Explorer menu, click Administration and choose Users and
Permissions.
The Users and Permissions subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree and choose Users.
The Users subwindow appears with a list of users and corresponding
information.
Related topics
• Viewing individual user information on page 3-5

3-4 Managing users and permissions

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 • Viewing a summary of user permissions on page 3-5
• Users and Permissions subwindow on page A-178
• Users subwindow on page A-179

Viewing individual user information

You can view the following information for each user:
• User profile (information such as the user ID and full name)
• The Permissions list set for each Hitachi Command Suite product
To view user information:
1. In the Explorer menu, click Administration and choose Users and
Permissions.
The Users and Permissions subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree, choose Users, and choose the desired user ID.
The user-ID subwindow appears with user information.
Related topics
• Viewing a list of users on page 3-4
• Viewing a summary of user permissions on page 3-5
• Users and Permissions subwindow on page A-178
• user-ID subwindow on page A-181

Viewing a summary of user permissions

You can view summary information about all installed Hitachi Command Suite
products, such as the number of products registered and the number of
users.
To view a summary of information about user permissions:
1. In the Explorer menu, click Administration and choose Users and
Permissions.
The Users and Permissions subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree and choose Permissions.
The Permissions subwindow appears with a summary of permission
information.
Related topics
• Viewing a list of users on page 3-4
• Viewing individual user information on page 3-5
• Users and Permissions subwindow on page A-178
• Permissions subwindow on page A-185

Managing users and permissions 3-5

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Viewing a list of user permissions
You can view a list of users and their permissions, for each user who
manages users and for each Hitachi Command Suite product that has been
installed. The list displays permissions information for each user.
To view permission information:
1. In the Explorer menu, click Administration and choose Users and
Permissions.
The Users and Permissions subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree, choose Permissions, and then choose User
Management or a desired product name.
The User Management subwindow or the application-name subwindow
appears. Each subwindow displays the member users of the product and
their permission information.
Related topics
• Viewing a list of users on page 3-4
• Viewing individual user information on page 3-5
• Users and Permissions subwindow on page A-178
• application-name subwindow on page A-186

Adding users
The following procedure describes how to add users common to all Hitachi
Command Suite products. To allow an existing Hitachi Command Suite
product user to also use Global Link Manager, specify the Global Link
Manager management permissions for the user.
The initial password required for user registration is set by a user who has
the Admin (user management) permission. After logging in by using that
initial password, the registered user can change the password.
If the exauth.properties file of a management server has been edited to
link to an external authentication server, additional users will be
authenticated by using the external authentication server by default. For
details on the exauth.properties file, see the Hitachi Command Suite Global
Link Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.
To add a user:
1. In the Explorer menu, click Administration and choose Users and
Permissions.
The Users and Permissions subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree and choose Users.
The Users subwindow appears.
3. Click the Add User button.
The Add User dialog box appears.

3-6 Managing users and permissions

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 4. Register the user information to be added.
Check the Users subwindow to make sure that the registered user
information is displayed.
Related topics
• Changing user permissions on page 3-9
• Editing user profiles on page 3-7
• Deleting users on page 3-7
• Users and Permissions subwindow on page A-178
• Users subwindow on page A-179
• Add User dialog box on page A-180

Editing user profiles

You can edit user profile information that is shared among all Hitachi
Command Suite products, such as a user's full name or email address.
To edit a user:
1. In the Explorer menu, click Administration and choose Users and
Permissions.
The Users and Permissions subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree, choose Users, and choose the desired user ID.
The user-ID subwindow appears.
3. Click the Edit Profile button.
The Edit Profile - user-ID dialog box appears.
4. Edit the user information and apply the changes.
Check the user-ID subwindow to make sure that the user information has
been updated.
The changes might not immediately appear in the list of users in the
Users subwindow. If you do not see the changes, click the Refresh Tree
button to update the displayed information.
Related topics
• Adding users on page 3-6
• Deleting users on page 3-7
• Users and Permissions subwindow on page A-178
• user-ID subwindow on page A-181
• Edit Profile - user-ID dialog box (editing a user profile) on page A-183

Deleting users
You can delete the users common to all Hitachi Command Suite products. You
can delete the single user who is currently displayed or, from a list, you can
select and delete multiple users at the same time.

Managing users and permissions 3-7

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Related topics
• Adding users on page 3-6
• Editing user profiles on page 3-7

Deleting individual users

To delete an individual user:
1. In the Explorer menu, click Administration and choose Users and
Permissions.
The Users and Permissions subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree, choose Users, and choose the desired user ID.
The user-ID subwindow appears.
3. Click the Delete User button.
The Remove User - user-ID dialog box appears.
4. Check the information of the user to be deleted, and then perform the
deletion.
5. Check the Users subwindow to make sure that the user information has
been deleted.
Related topics
• Users and Permissions subwindow on page A-178
• user-ID subwindow on page A-181
• Users subwindow on page A-179

Deleting multiple users

To delete multiple users at one time:
1. In the Explorer menu click Administration and choose Users and
Permissions.
The Users and Permissions subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree and choose Users.
The Users subwindow appears.
3. From the list of users, select the check boxes of the users to be deleted,
and then click the Delete Users button.
The Remove Users dialog box appears.
4. Check the users to be deleted, and then perform the deletion.
5. Check the Users subwindow to make sure the users have been deleted.
Related topics
• Users and Permissions subwindow on page A-178
• Users subwindow on page A-179
• Remove Users dialog box on page A-193

3-8 Managing users and permissions

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Changing user passwords
A user with the Admin (user management) permission can change the
passwords of registered users (except for users who are externally
authenticated). You cannot change the passwords of users for whom external
authentication is enabled because an external authentication server manages
such passwords. You must observe the password conditions, such as the
number of characters and the combination of characters that can be
specified, which are set in Security under Administration in the Explorer
menu.
If you changed the password of a logged-in user, the user can continue to
perform operations until logout, but will be unable to start Tuning Manager
from the Dashboard menu.
When the Global Link Manager server is running in a cluster environment, if
you change the password for the built-in account (user ID: System), specify
the same settings on all nodes that make up the cluster.
If Hitachi Command Suite products and Storage Navigator Modular 2 are
installed on the same computer, Common Component centrally manages the
user accounts for both. Therefore, if you change the password for a user ID in
one of a Hitachi Command Suite product or Storage Navigator Modular 2, the
password for the other is also changed.
To change a password:
1. In the Explorer menu, click Administration and choose Users and
Permissions.
The Users and Permissions subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree, choose Users, and choose the desired user ID.
The user-ID subwindow appears.
3. Click the Change Password button.
The Change Password - user-ID dialog box appears.
4. Change the password and apply the change.
Related topics
• Setting Security
• Changing user permissions on page 3-9
• Users and Permissions subwindow on page A-178
• user-ID subwindow on page A-181
• Change Password - user-ID dialog box (changing the logged-in user's
password) on page A-218

Changing user permissions

You can specify permissions for the operation of each Hitachi Command Suite
product for each registered user. To enable an existing Hitachi Command
Suite product user to also use Global Link Manager, specify the Global Link

Managing users and permissions 3-9

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Manager management permissions for the user. Permissions can also be
granted to users who operate Hitachi Command Suite products other than
Global Link Manager.
To change permissions:
1. In the Explorer menu, click Administration and choose Users and
Permissions.
The Users and Permissions subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree, choose Users, and choose a desired user ID.
The user-ID subwindow appears.
3. Click the Change Permission button.
The Change Permission - user-ID dialog box appears.
4. Change permissions and apply the change.
Related topics
• Changing user permissions on page 3-9
• Users and Permissions subwindow on page A-178
• user-ID subwindow on page A-181
• Change Password - user-ID dialog box (changing the logged-in user's
password) on page A-218

Locking user accounts

You can temporarily suspend a user's capability to log in to Global Link
Manager by locking the user's account. You can lock the accounts of users
who are currently logged in, but you cannot lock the accounts of users who
can execute the lock operation or the users of the built-in account (user ID:
System). When the account of a user who is currently logged in is locked, that
user will encounter an error while operating the GUI and will be unable to
continue.
In addition to manually setting the account lock, you can also set the system
to lock a user account automatically after a specified number of unsuccessful
consecutive attempts to log in from that account.
To lock user accounts:
1. In the Explorer menu, choose Administration and Users and
Permissions.
The Users and Permissions subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree, and choose Users.
The Users subwindow appears.
3. From the list of users, select the check boxes of the users to be locked,
and then click the Lock Users button.
The Lock Users dialog box appears.
4. Check the users to be locked, and then execute locking.

3-10 Managing users and permissions

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Use the Users subwindow to check that the user accounts have been
locked.
Related topics
• Changing settings for automatic account lock on page 11-5
• Unlocking user accounts on page 3-11
• Users and Permissions subwindow on page A-178
• Users subwindow on page A-179
• Account Lock dialog box on page A-196

Unlocking user accounts

Users whose accounts have been temporarily locked or locked because of
automatic account locking cannot log in to Global Link Manager until a user
who has the Admin (user management) permission unlocks their account.
This subsection explains how to unlock user accounts.
You can determine whether a user's account is locked by checking the Status
field in the list of users.
To unlock user accounts:
1. In the Explorer menu, choose Administration and Users and
Permissions.
The Users and Permissions subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree, and choose Users.
The Users subwindow appears.
3. From the list of users, select the check boxes of the users to be unlocked,
and then click the Unlock Users button.
The Unlock Users dialog box appears.
4. Check the users to be unlocked and then execute unlocking.
Use the Users subwindow to check that the user accounts have been
unlocked.
Related topics
• Locking user accounts on page 3-10
• Users and Permissions subwindow on page A-178
• Users subwindow on page A-179
• Account Lock dialog box on page A-196

Changing the method for user authentication

You can use an external authentication server (the LDAP directory server,
RADIUS server, or Kerberos server for user authentication) to authenticate
user accounts for Hitachi Command Suite products to centrally manage the
accounts with other application programs. To do this, register the accounts

Managing users and permissions 3-11

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 that are the same as the user accounts managed by the external
authentication server in the Hitachi Command Suite products, and then
authenticate the user IDs and passwords on the external authentication
server side. For each user, you can specify whether the account is
authenticated as an account exclusive to Hitachi Command Suite products or
authenticated by using the external authentication server. However, you
cannot authenticate the built-in account (user ID: System) by using the
external authentication server.
To enable external authentication for users, you need to prepare to link to the
external authentication server by, for example, setting up the server and
registering user accounts. Perform the procedures described in Preparing to
link to an external authentication server on page 3-12, and then perform the
procedures described in Changing the user authentication method on page
3-13. If you want to disable external authentication, perform the procedures
described in Changing the user authentication method on page 3-13 to
change the authentication method to the one used in Hitachi Command Suite
products.

Preparing to link to an external authentication server

To link to an external authentication server:
1. On the Global Link Manager management server, specify settings for
linking to an external authentication server.
For details about requirements for an external authentication server and
how to specify settings for linking to the server, see the Hitachi Command
Suite Global Link Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.
2. Register the user IDs and passwords used by Hitachi Command Suite
products in the external authentication server.
The user IDs must be character strings that are within the valid range for
Global Link Manager GUI. For details about specifiable character strings,
click the Help button in the Add User dialog box. For details about this
dialog box, see Adding users on page 3-6.
For passwords, you do not have to follow the Global Link Manager
restrictions.
3. Register Hitachi Command Suite product users by using the user IDs
registered in step 2.
In Global Link Manager GUI, specify the user IDs that are the same as
those of the accounts registered in the external authentication server.
Note
When performing external authentication by using more than one
domain or realm, include the domain name and the realm name in the
user ID at registration.
Example: user-name@domain-name-or-realm-name
Enter the user ID in the above format at login also.
For passwords, specify any character string within the valid range for
Global Link Manager GUI. If external authentication in enabled, you do
not need to match the password to the one registered in the external

3-12 Managing users and permissions

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 authentication server because the password registered in the external
authentication server is used for authentication. The specified password is
only used when external authentication is disabled.
For details about how to register users, see Adding users on page 3-6.
This step is not necessary if you have already registered users.
4. Specify permissions for the users registered in step 3.
For details about how to specify user permissions, see Changing user
permissions on page 3-9. This step is not necessary if you have already
specified the user permissions.
Related topics
• Add User dialog box on page A-180

Changing the user authentication method

To change the method for user authentication:
1. From the Explorer menu, choose Administration and then Users and
Permissions.
The Users and Permissions subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree, and then select Users.
The Users subwindow appears.
3. In the list of users, select the check boxes of the users for whom you
want to enable or disable linkage to the external authentication server,
and then click the Change Auth button.
The Change Authentication Method dialog box appears.
4. Specify the authentication method, and then update the information.
The Authentication column for each user displayed in the Users
subwindow is refreshed.
Related topics
• Users and Permissions subwindow on page A-178
• Users subwindow on page A-179

Managing users and permissions 3-13

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
3-14 Managing users and permissions
Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 4
Managing user profiles
This chapter describes the functions for managing user profiles and explains
how to use these functions.

□ Overview

□ Viewing user profiles

□ Editing user profiles

□ Changing login passwords

Managing user profiles 4-1

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Overview
Logged-in users can manage their own information.
Each user uses the user-profile management functions to change passwords
and user information (such as full names and email addresses, but not user
IDs).

Explorer menu items for managing user profiles

The following table lists the Explorer menu items used for managing user
profiles, and which permissions are required for operating these items.

Table 4-1 Explorer menu items for managing user profiles

Explorer menu Permissions

Admin, Modify,
View (for
Admin (for user
Submenu Command Global Link
management)
Manager
management)

Settings User Profile Yes Yes

Functions for managing user profiles

The following table lists the functions for managing user profiles, and which
permissions are required for operating these functions.

Table 4-2 List of functions for managing user profiles

Permissions
Admin, Modify,
Functions View (for
Admin (for user
Global Link
management)
Manager
management)

Viewing a user profile Yes Yes

Editing a user profile Yes Yes

Changing a user's password Yes Yes

Related topics
• Viewing user profiles on page 4-3
• Editing user profiles on page 4-3
• Changing login passwords on page 4-4

4-2 Managing user profiles

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Viewing user profiles
You can view information about logged-in users. This information includes:
• User information, such as their user ID and full name
• Information about permissions set for a user for each product
To view a user profile:
1. In the Explorer menu, choose Settings and User Profile.
The User Profile subwindow appears with information about the logged-in
user.
Related topics
• Editing user profiles on page 4-3
• Changing login passwords on page 4-4
• User Profile subwindow on page A-216

Editing user profiles

You can edit a user profile, such as the full name and email address.
Only the logged-in user's information can be changed. Adding and deleting
user IDs, and changing the permissions can be performed from the
Administration menu by users who have the Admin (user management)
permission.
To edit a user profile:
1. In the Explorer menu, choose Settings and User Profile.
The User Profile subwindow appears.
2. Click the Edit Profile button.
The Edit Profile - user-ID dialog box appears.
3. Edit the user information and apply the changes.
4. Check the User Profile subwindow to make sure that the user information
has been updated.
The changes might not immediately appear in the list of users in the
Users subwindow. If you do not see the changes, click the Refresh Tree
button to update the displayed information.
Related topics
• Viewing user profiles on page 4-3
• Changing login passwords on page 4-4
• User Profile subwindow on page A-216
• Edit Profile - user-ID dialog box (editing a user profile) on page A-183

Managing user profiles 4-3

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Changing login passwords
You can change the login password. The logged-in user can change their
initial password, which was specified by a user who had the Admin (user
management) permission. However, if passwords are set up to be externally
authenticated, users cannot change the passwords by using the Global Link
Manager GUI because an external authentication server manages such
passwords. To change such passwords, use an external authentication server.
Any changes made to a password must conform to the settings set by a user
who has the Admin (user management) permission for setting password
conditions, such as the minimum length and a required combination of
character types.
When the Global Link Manager server is running in a cluster environment, if
you change the password for the built-in account (user ID: System), specify
the same settings on all nodes that make up the cluster.
To change the password:
1. In the Explorer menu, choose Settings and User Profile.
The User Profile subwindow appears.
2. Click the Change Password button.
The Change Password - user-ID dialog box appears.
3. Change the password and apply the change.
The next time you log in, use the new password. If you are using Tuning
Manager and the password is changed, you will not be able to start
Tuning Manager from the Dashboard menu. To start Tuning Manager,
log out, and then log in by using the new password.
Related topics
• Viewing user profiles on page 4-3
• Editing user profiles on page 4-3
• User Profile subwindow on page A-216
• Change Password - user-ID dialog box (changing the logged-in user's
password) on page A-218

4-4 Managing user profiles

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 5
Managing hosts
This chapter describes the functions for managing hosts and describes how to
use these functions.

□ Overview

□ Viewing a list of hosts

□ Viewing individual host information

□ Adding hosts

□ Removing hosts

□ Refreshing host information

□ Multipath LU configuration

□ Configuring the HDLM operating environment for a host

□ Configuring alerts for a host

Managing hosts 5-1

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Overview
Global Link Manager provides integrated management of hosts to control the
paths between multiple hosts and storage systems.
In Global Link Manager, host management functions are used for the
following purposes:
• Manage information for multiple hosts
• Determine which hosts are running an older version of multipath
management software to upgrade the version of the multipath
management software installed on the hosts
• Configure the host execution environment (multipath LU configuration,
HDLM environment configuration, alert configuration)
You can configure the multipath LU configuration and HDLM environment
configuration in Global Link Manager only if you are using HDLM for the
hosts.
The following figure uses an example to show an overview of host
management:

Figure 5-1 Overview of host management

Explorer menu items for managing hosts

The following table lists the Explorer menu items used for managing hosts,
and which Global Link Manager management permissions are required for
operating these items.

5-2 Managing hosts

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Table 5-1 Explorer menu items for managing hosts

Explorer menu Permissions

Submenu Command Admin Modify View

Resources Hosts Yes Yes Yes

My Groups Host Groups Yes Yes Yes

Functions for managing hosts

The following table lists the functions for managing hosts, and which Global
Link Manager management permissions are required for operating these
functions.

Table 5-2 List of functions for managing hosts

Permissions
Functions
Admin Modify# View#

Viewing a list of hosts Yes Yes Yes

Viewing individual host information Yes Yes Yes

Adding a host Yes No No

Removing a host Yes No No

Refreshing host information Yes Yes No

Multipath LU configuration Yes Yes No

Configuring the HDLM operating environment for a Yes Yes No

host

Configuring alerts for a host Yes Yes No

#
A user with Modify or View permission can use these functions only for
hosts in resource groups associated with that user. When the host OS is
VMware, the HDLM version of the host is displayed, not that of the remote
management client.
Related topics
• Viewing a list of hosts on page 5-4
• Viewing individual host information on page 5-4
• Adding hosts on page 5-5
• Removing hosts on page 5-15
• Refreshing host information on page 5-15
• Multipath LU configuration on page 5-21
• Configuring the HDLM operating environment for a host on page 5-28
• Configuring alerts for a host on page 5-32

Managing hosts 5-3

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Viewing a list of hosts
You can view a list of information for all hosts for which you have access
permissions. You can also use the host icons to check path errors and the
update status of host information.
• Summarized information for all hosts (the number of hosts, the number
of hosts for which the information failed to be refreshed, and the number
of paths in each path status)
• A list of hosts
• A summary of multipath management software versions# (the number of
hosts for each operating system or kernel version)
#
If the HDLM version of a host is earlier than 5.6, only the version and
revision numbers are displayed, and the service pack version and
corrected version information are not displayed.
Viewing the information for multiple hosts enables understanding of the
status of all managed hosts. It also lets you identify all hosts for which a
version upgrade of multipath management software is to be performed. The
following versions should be checked from the table in order to determine
which hosts need to be upgraded:
• The versions of the multipath management software installed on all of the
managed hosts
• The OS or kernel versions
To view a list of hosts:
1. In the Explorer menu, click Resources and choose Hosts.
The Hosts subwindow appears with a list of hosts and corresponding
information.
If a host for which information failed to be refreshed exists, the Number
of Refresh Failed Hosts link is displayed. Clicking this link (the number
of hosts) displays the Show Refresh Failed Hosts dialog box.
Related topics
• Viewing individual host information on page 5-4
• Hosts subwindow on page A-4

Viewing individual host information

You can view information for each host. This information includes:
• Summarized information for the host (including such information as the
host name, operating system, multipath management software version#,
IP address, and the number of paths in each of the path statuses)
• A list of paths
• A list of Multipath LUs

5-4 Managing hosts

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 • A list of HBA ports
• HDLM environment configuration information
• Alert configuration information
#
If the HDLM version of a host is earlier than 5.6, only the version and
revision numbers are displayed, and the service pack version and
corrected version information are not displayed.
You can view host information from the Resources submenu or My Groups
submenu. In cases such as when many hosts are to be managed, create host
groups and allocate the hosts into appropriate groups. The My Groups
submenu can then be used to easily find desired hosts.
To view host information:
1. Perform one of the following steps in the Explorer menu:
¢ Click Resources and choose Hosts.
¢ Click Resources and choose Storage systems.
¢ Click My Groups and choose Host Groups.
The Hosts subwindow, Storage systems subwindow, or Host Groups
subwindow appears.
2. If the Storage systems subwindow appears, expand the object tree and
select the target storage system.
The Storage-system-Name subwindow appears.
If necessary, select the tab for the target multipath management
software.
3. Select the target host.
If the Hosts subwindow or Host Groups subwindow appears, expand the
object tree and select the target host.
The host-name subwindow appears with the host information.
Related topics
• Viewing a list of hosts on page 5-4
• Hosts subwindow on page A-4
• Storage systems subwindow on page A-106
• Host Groups subwindow on page A-148
• storage-system-name subwindow on page A-108
• host-name subwindow on page A-53

Adding hosts
To place hosts under Global Link Manager management, you need to register
each host as a Global Link Manager resource.
When a host is added, information for the paths that belong to the host and
the connected storage systems can also be browsed from Global Link

Managing hosts 5-5

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Manager. The following figure shows an example of host management before
and after adding a host:

Figure 5-2 Example of managing hosts before and after adding a host
The following steps summarize the procedures for adding hosts:
1. Before adding hosts, collect information about the hosts to be added, and
configure the Device Manager agent, the hosts file, and other settings on
each host.
2. Either enter the host information or add hosts automatically based on a
network scan.
To add hosts by entering host information, either manually enter the
necessary information for one host at a time, or import information for all
hosts at the same time from a CSV file.
If you add hosts automatically by scanning for hosts on a network in a
specified IP address range, you can perform a Scan Now or Scheduled
Scan network scan. With a Scheduled Scan network scan, you can specify
the time and fixed interval (daily, weekly, or monthly) at which to
periodically perform the scan.

Tip: When multipath management software will be used in a cluster

configuration, you need to individually add all of the hosts in the cluster.

Related topics
• Removing hosts on page 5-15

5-6 Managing hosts

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Preparing to add hosts
This section describes the information that needs to be collected and the
settings that need to be configured on each host, before adding hosts to
Global Link Manager resources.

Required settings on a host:

Before you add a host, if necessary, observe the following guidelines:
• If you will be using Device Manger agent on the host to be added
If you will not be using Device Manager agent or if you have already
configured the Device Manager server information by using the
hdvmagt_account command# of the Device Manager agent to manage the
host by Device Manager, this configuration is unnecessary.
If you will be using Device Manager agent and you have not already
configured the Device Manager server information by using the
hdvmagt_account command#, execute the hdvmagt_account command#
of the Device Manager agent on each host, using the following IP address,
port number, user ID, and password:
¢ IP address: The IP address of the local host (that is to be added)
¢ Port number: 2001 (if this number is used, specify any number)
¢ User ID: HaUser
¢ Password: haset

#:
If you will be using Device Manager to manage hosts and you have
not configured the Device Manager server information, execute the
hdvmagt_account command to configure the information. The
hdvmagt_account command is a command of the Device Manager
agent whose version is earlier than 7.0. If you are using version 7.0
or later of the Device Manager agent, execute the hdvmagt_setting
command to configure the information.
For information about the hdvmagt_account command and the notes
on executing a command, see the Hitachi Device Manager Agent
Installation Guide.
For information about the hdvmagt_setting command and the notes
on executing a command, see the Hitachi Command Suite
Administrator Guide.

Tip: If the service of Device Manager agent is not running on the host
after you execute the command, start the service. For information about
starting the service, see the Hitachi Device Manager Agent Installation
Guide or Hitachi Command Suite Administrator Guide
• If the host operating system is Solaris, AIX, HP-UX, or Linux
Edit the hosts file of each host to be added.

Managing hosts 5-7

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Write localhost and your host (host name) into the /etc/hosts file of
each host to be added. If the host operating system is Linux, write your
host on the line above the localhost line.
If the host operating system is Windows, this configuration is
unnecessary.
• If adding a host where multiple network-interface cards (NICs) are
installed
Specify the IP address used to communicate with Global Link Manager. If
only one network-interface card is installed on the host, or if the host OS
is HDLM VMware, this configuration is unnecessary.
If multiple NICs are installed, you must specify the IP address of one of
them for the server.http.socket.agentAddress and
server.http.socket.bindAddress properties# in the Device Manager
agent or Hitachi Command Suite Common Agent Component
server.properties file on each host. If these settings are not
performed, it might not be possible to add a host.
To add a host by specifying a host name, you must have configured the
network in such a way that the host name can be resolved from the IP
address specified in the server.http.socket.agentAddress property
and server.http.socket.bindAddress property.

#:
For information about the server.http.socket.agentAddress
property and server.http.socket.bindAddress property in the
server.properties file, when the HDLM version of the host is earlier
than 5.8, see the Hitachi Device Manager Agent Installation Guide or
Hitachi Command Suite Administrator Guide. If the HDLM version of
the host is 5.8 or later, see the Hitachi Command Suite Global Link
Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

Collecting host information:

Prepare the following information for each host to be added because the
information will be required when adding hosts.
When the HDLM version of a host is earlier than 5.8:
¢ IP address or host name
¢ Agent service port: A port number# used by the service (or daemon
process) of the Device Manager agent
¢ Remote port: A port number# used in the Web server functionality of
the Device Manager agent
#:
For information about how to check the set values for the following
properties in the server.properties file, see the Hitachi Device
Manager Agent Installation Guide or Hitachi Command Suite
Administrator Guide:
- Agent service port: server.agent.port property

5-8 Managing hosts

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 - Remote port: server.http.port property

When the HDLM version of a host is 5.8 or later, or when you are using DMP
or HP-UX multipath:
¢ IP address or host name
¢ Agent service port:
When the host OS is not HDLM VMware, a port number# used by the
service (or daemon process) of Hitachi Command Suite Common
Agent Component
When the host OS is HDLM VMware, a port that connects to the
Hitachi Command Suite Common Agent Component on the remote
management client
#:
For information about how to check the set values for the
server.agent.port property in the server.properties file, see the
Hitachi Command Suite Global Link Manager Installation and
Configuration Guide.

Notes on the ESXi host:

• When managing an ESXi host
When managing an ESXi host, a message is displayed in the following
situations:
¢ When the alert notification function is enabled, the ESXi host is
accessed every five minutes to collect alert information, so login and
logout messages are output on the ESXi host.
¢ When the automatic update function of the host is enabled, the ESXi
host is accessed and information is collected for every value specified
in server.auto_refresh.interval in the server.properties, so
login and logout messages are output on the ESXi host.
• When using Lockdown Mode on an ESXi host
If Lockdown Mode is enabled, you cannot perform operations from a
remote management client. For this reason, disable Lockdown Mode
before you perform an operation from Global Link Manager. Furthermore,
because Global Link Manager functions cannot collect information while
Lockdown Mode is enabled, disable the following Global Link Manager
functions before you perform an operation using Lockdown Mode.
¢ Function for receiving SNMP traps
¢ Output of reports on path availability information
Related topics
• Adding hosts on page 5-5
• Adding hosts manually on page 5-10
• Adding hosts by importing a CSV file on page 5-11
• Adding hosts using a "Scan Now" network scan on page 5-12

Managing hosts 5-9

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 • Adding hosts using a "Scheduled Scan" network scan on page 5-13

Adding hosts manually

To add a host manually:
1. Review the guidelines described in Preparing to add hosts on page 5-7
before adding hosts.
2. In the Explorer menu, click Resources and choose Hosts.
The Hosts subwindow appears.
3. In the Hosts tabbed-page, click the Add Hosts button.
The Add Hosts dialog box appears.
4. In the Manual Entry tabbed-page, register the information about the
hosts to be added.
5. Check the Hosts subwindow to make sure that the information about the
registered hosts is displayed.

Tip: When registering a host, specify the IP address or host name using a
real address or real host name.
6. If alerts are configured to be automatically reported from hosts#, confirm
that the alerts are being reported normally.
An alert (message ID: KAPL04042-I) that indicates changing the alert
setup has finished is reported from registered hosts. In the Explorer
menu, click the Alerts submenu and check the alert list to confirm that
the alert has been reported.
#
By default, hosts are automatically configured so that alerts are reported
from each host. You can change this setting by specifying the
server.snmp.auto_set property in the server.properties file of the
Global Link Manager server. For information about this property, see the
Hitachi Command Suite Global Link Manager Installation and
Configuration Guide.
Related topics
• Adding hosts on page 5-5
• Preparing to add hosts on page 5-7
• Adding hosts manually on page 5-10
• Adding hosts using a "Scan Now" network scan on page 5-12
• Adding hosts using a "Scheduled Scan" network scan on page 5-13
• Hosts subwindow on page A-4
• Add Hosts dialog box (adding to resources) on page A-27
• Add Hosts dialog box (adding to a host group) on page A-178
• Add Hosts dialog box (adding to a resource group) on page A-191

5-10 Managing hosts

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Adding hosts by importing a CSV file
To add hosts by importing a comma-separated value (CSV) file:
1. Review the guidelines described in Preparing to add hosts on page 5-7
before adding hosts.
2. Prepare the import file by using the following format. The number of hosts
that can be loaded from the import file at one time depends on the Global
Link Manager server environment settings#1.
Format for the import file

IP-address or host-name-1,agent-service-port-1,remote-port-1
IP-address or host-name-2,agent-service-port-2,remote-port-2
:
IP-address or host-name-n,agent-service-port-n,remote-port-n
To add a comment line, begin the line with a hash mark (#).
If the HDLM version of a host is 5.8 or later, you do not need to
specify the remote port and it does not matter whether you add a
comma (,) to the right of the specified value for the agent service
port.
Example:

# A job host
210.145.108.1,24041
hostnamexx,24041
# B job host
210.145.108.3,23013,23011
:
210.145.108.10,24041

Tip: When registering a host, specify the IP address or host name using a
real address or real host name.
3. In the Explorer menu, click Resources and choose Hosts.
The Hosts subwindow appears.
4. In the Hosts tabbed-page, click the Add Hosts button.
The Add Hosts dialog box appears.
5. Register the information about the hosts you plan to add by specifying the
import file in the Import tabbed-page.
6. Check the Hosts subwindow to make sure that the information about the
registered hosts is displayed.
7. If alerts are configured to be automatically reported from hosts#2,
confirm that the alerts are being reported normally.
An alert (message ID: KAPL04042-I) that indicates changing the alert
setup has finished is reported from registered hosts. In the Explorer
menu, click the Alerts submenu, and then check the alert list to confirm
that the alert has been reported.
#1

Managing hosts 5-11

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 The maximum number of hosts that can be loaded from the import file is
equal to the maximum number of task queues specified in the
server.task.max_queue_size property in the server.properties file of
the Global Link Manager server. For information about this property, see
the Hitachi Command Suite Global Link Manager Installation and
Configuration Guide.
#2
By default, hosts are automatically configured so that alerts are reported
from each host. You can change this setting by specifying the
server.snmp.auto_set property in the server.properties file of the
Global Link Manager server. For information about this property, see the
Hitachi Command Suite Global Link Manager Installation and
Configuration Guide.
Related topics
• Adding hosts on page 5-5
• Preparing to add hosts on page 5-7
• Adding hosts manually on page 5-10
• Adding hosts using a "Scan Now" network scan on page 5-12
• Adding hosts using a "Scheduled Scan" network scan on page 5-13
• Hosts subwindow on page A-4
• Add Hosts dialog box (adding to resources) on page A-27
• Add Hosts dialog box (adding to a host group) on page A-178
• Add Hosts dialog box (adding to a resource group) on page A-191

Adding hosts using a "Scan Now" network scan

To add hosts using a Scan Now network scan:
1. Review the guidelines described in Preparing to add hosts on page 5-7
before adding hosts.
2. In the Explorer menu, click Resources and choose Hosts.
The Hosts subwindow appears.
3. In the Hosts tabbed-page, click the Add Hosts button.
The Add Hosts dialog box appears.
4. In the Scan Now tabbed-page under the Network Scan tab, enter the
IP address range (maximum number: 256) and the port numbers you
want to scan, and then initiate the scan.
Check the results of the scan in the Scan Results dialog box. You can also
check the scan results by clicking the View Scan Results button to view
a historical record of scan results.

Tip:

5-12 Managing hosts

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 • Depending on the operating status of the Global Link Manager server
and the number of hosts registered, scanning might take several tens
of minutes.
• If a Scan Now scan begins just before a scan is scheduled to be
executed, the scheduled scan will begin sometime after its scheduled
time, because a Scan Now scan takes precedence.
5. If alerts are configured to be automatically reported from hosts#, confirm
that the alerts are being reported normally.
An alert (message ID: KAPL04042-I) that indicates changing the alert
setup has finished is reported from registered hosts. In the Explorer
menu, click the Alerts submenu and check the alert list to confirm that
the alert has been reported.
#
By default, hosts are automatically configured so that alerts are reported
from each host. You can change this setting by specifying the
server.snmp.auto_set property in the server.properties file of the
Global Link Manager server. For information about this property, see the
Hitachi Command Suite Global Link Manager Installation and
Configuration Guide.
Related topics
• Adding hosts on page 5-5
• Preparing to add hosts on page 5-7
• Adding hosts manually on page 5-10
• Adding hosts by importing a CSV file on page 5-11
• Adding hosts using a "Scheduled Scan" network scan on page 5-13
• Hosts subwindow on page A-4
• Add Hosts dialog box (adding to resources) on page A-27
• Add Hosts dialog box (adding to a host group) on page A-178
• Add Hosts dialog box (adding to a resource group) on page A-191

Adding hosts using a "Scheduled Scan" network scan

To add hosts using a Scheduled Scan network scan:
1. Review the guidelines described in Preparing to add hosts on page 5-7
before adding hosts.
2. In the Explorer menu, click Resources and choose Hosts.
The Hosts subwindow appears.
3. In the Hosts tabbed-page, click the Add Hosts button.
The Add Hosts dialog box appears.
4. In the Scheduled Scan tabbed-page under the Network Scan tab, click
the Add Schedule button.
The Add Network Scan Schedule dialog box appears.

Managing hosts 5-13

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 5. Register the IP address range (maximum number: 256) and the port
numbers you want to scan, as well as the execution schedule.
You can register a maximum of 100 schedules. To edit or delete a
registered schedule, in the Scheduled Scan tabbed-page under the
Network Scan tab, select the check box corresponding to the schedule
you want to edit or delete, and then click the Edit Schedule button or
the Delete Schedule button.

Tip:
• If a schedule is edited or deleted while scanning is being performed,
the ongoing scan is updated or deleted after it has finished executing,
without being interrupted.
• If a Scan Now scan begins just before a scan is scheduled to be
executed, the scheduled scan will begin sometime after its scheduled
time, because a Scan Now scan takes precedence.
• You cannot specify information about the connection target for a
remote management client.
6. Check the scan results after the scheduled time has passed. To do so, in
the Scheduled Scan tabbed-page under the Network Scan tab, click
the View Scan Results button.
This action displays the Network Scan Results (Scheduled Scan) dialog
box. Here you can check the processing status and scan results of
scheduled network scans.
7. If alerts are configured to be automatically reported from hosts#, confirm
that the alerts are being reported normally.
An alert (message ID: KAPL04042-I) that indicates changing the alert
setup has finished is reported from registered hosts. In the Explorer
menu, click the Alerts submenu and check the alert list to confirm that
the alert has been reported.
#
By default, hosts are automatically configured so that alerts are reported
from each host. You can change this setting by specifying the
server.snmp.auto_set property in the server.properties file of the
Global Link Manager server. For information about this property, see the
Hitachi Command Suite Global Link Manager Installation and
Configuration Guide.
Related topics
• Adding hosts on page 5-5
• Preparing to add hosts on page 5-7
• Adding hosts manually on page 5-10
• Adding hosts by importing a CSV file on page 5-11
• Adding hosts using a "Scan Now" network scan on page 5-12
• Hosts subwindow on page A-4
• Add Hosts dialog box (adding to resources) on page A-27
• Add Hosts dialog box (adding to a host group) on page A-178

5-14 Managing hosts

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 • Add Hosts dialog box (adding to a resource group) on page A-191
• Add Network Scan Schedule dialog box on page A-34
• Network Scan Results (scan-type) dialog box on page A-31
• Network Scan Results Detail (scan-type) dialog box on page A-32

Removing hosts
To change the Global Link Manager-management host to non-Global Link
Manager-management host, remove the host from Global Link Manager
resources.
When a host is removed, the information that belongs to the host will no
longer be managed by Global Link Manager, and the alert information and
path availability information (path status log) that are acquired from the host
will also be removed. Make sure that you have checked all alerts before
removing a host.
To remove a host:
1. In the Explorer menu, click Resources and choose Hosts.
The Hosts subwindow appears.
2. In the Hosts tabbed-page, select the check boxes of the hosts to be
removed, and then click the Remove Hosts button.
The Remove Hosts dialog box appears.
3. Check the hosts to be removed, and then perform the deletion.
4. Check the Hosts subwindow to make sure that the hosts have been
removed.
Related topics
• Adding hosts on page 5-5
• Hosts subwindow on page A-4
• Remove Hosts dialog box (removing from resources) on page A-37
• Remove Hosts dialog box (removing from a resource group) on page
A-192

Refreshing host information

You can refresh to update information about a specified host. The
configuration information for each host is collected, and the most recent
information is displayed on the Global Link Manager graphical-user interface
(GUI).
In Global Link Manager, GUI operability can be maintained even in an
environment in which many hosts are connected. This is accomplished by
maintaining configuration information collected from the hosts in an Global
Link Manager server database. This information can be viewed using the

Managing hosts 5-15

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Global Link Manager client and a Web browser. The following figure shows the
flow of processing when refreshing the host information:

Figure 5-3 Flow of processing when refreshing the host information

Change path configuration

The path configuration can be changed when the host information is
refreshed. The change path configuration functionality is for adding or
deleting paths dynamically without affecting the existing paths. This
functionality can be executed if the host has HDLM (and the operating system
is not VMware).

Tip:
• The path configuration can be changed only if the version of HDLM on the
host is version 7.6 or later.
• If the version of HDLM is 7.6 and if the operating system is Solaris, when
paths are added dynamically, the multipath LUs that are disconnected are
deleted.
• If the host operating system is Solaris, the multipath LU name for added
paths might not be displayed. In this case, wait a while and then refresh
the host information.

Procedure for changing the path configuration

The procedure for changing the path configuration is given below. Note that
paths can be deleted if the HDLM version is 8.0 or later and the host
operating system is Solaris (version 10 or later). Also, if the host operating
system is Windows, paths cannot be added dynamically.
1. If adding paths dynamically and if the host operating system is Linux, the
paths you want to add are required to be recognized by the operating
system. See the HDLM manual and make the operating system recognize
the paths.
2. If deleting paths dynamically, perform the following for each host's
operating system beforehand:

5-16 Managing hosts

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 ¢ If the host operating system is AIX, select the path you want to delete
and then perform offline settings.
¢ If the host operating system is Linux, the paths you want to delete
need to be deleted from the operating system. See the HDLM manual,
and delete the paths from the operating system.
¢ If the host operating system is Solaris (version 10 or later), and if the
version of HDLM is 8.0 or later, the paths you want to delete need to
be deleted from the operating system. See the HDLM manual, and
delete the paths from the operating system.
¢ If the host operating system is Windows, select the paths you want to
delete that are not connected, and then perform offline settings.
3. In the Explorer menu, click Resources and choose Hosts.
The Hosts subwindow appears.
4. In the Hosts tabbed-page, select the check boxes of the hosts for which
you want to change path configuration, and then click the Refresh Host
button.
The Refresh Hosts dialog box appears.
5. In Change Path Configuration:, select the Adds a Path Dynamically
or the Deletes a Path Dynamically check box, and then execute the
functionality.
In Paths, check the information of the added or deleted paths in the
Adds a Path Dynamically - host-name dialog box, or in the Deletes a
Path Dynamically - host-name dialog box.

Procedure to reset processing

The procedure to reset processing is described below.
1. In the Explorer menu, click Resources and then choose Hosts.
The Hosts subwindow appears.
2. In the Hosts tab, select the check boxes of the hosts for which you want
to reset processing, and then click the Refresh Host button.
The Refresh Hosts dialog box appears.
3. Under Reset, select the Reset I/O Count check box or the Reset the
Lost paths check box, and then execute the function.

Procedure for refreshing the GAD non-preferred path option

The procedure for refreshing the GAD non-preferred path option is given
below. Note that this procedure can be performed when the version of HDLM
is 8.0.1 or later and when global storage virtualization is being used.
1. In the Explorer menu, click Resources and then choose Hosts.
The Hosts subwindow appears.
2. In the Hosts tab, select the check boxes of the hosts for which you want
to perform processing to refresh the GAD non-preferred path option, and
then click the Refresh Host button.
The Refresh Hosts dialog box appears.

Managing hosts 5-17

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 3. Select the Refresh the GAD non-preferred path option check box,
and then execute.

Automatically refreshing host information

You can configure the Global Link Manager server environment settings so
that host information is refreshed automatically.
• Automatically refresh at a fixed interval
By default, host information is automatically refreshed every 180
minutes. Use the server.auto_refresh.enable property in the Global
Link Manager server server.properties file to specify whether to enable
or disable automatic refreshing of host information.
• Automatically refresh upon receiving an alert
By default, if an alert (message ID: KAPL08022-E) is received through
notification by an SNMP trap issued when a path error occurs, information
about the originating host is updated automatically. Use the
server.snmp.alert_refresh_enable property in the Global Link
Manager server server.properties file to specify whether to enable or
disable automatic refreshing of host information.
You can configure the SNMP trap alert notification function for hosts
running HDLM version 5.8 or later, or when you are using DMP or HP-UX
multipath.
For details about the server.properties file, see the Hitachi Command Suite
Global Link Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.
You can manually refresh host information for one host or host group, for
multiple hosts or host groups, or for all hosts connected to a selected CHA
port.
Related topics
• Configuring alerts for a host on page 5-32
• Hosts subwindow on page A-4
• Refresh Hosts dialog box on page A-38
• Adds a Path Dynamically - host-name/Deletes a Path Dynamically - host-
name dialog box on page A-39

Refreshing host information for a single host

To refresh host information for a host:
1. Perform one of the following steps in the Explorer menu:
¢ Click Resources and choose Hosts.
¢ Click My Groups and choose Host Groups.
The Hosts subwindow or Host Groups subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree and select the target host.
The host-name subwindow appears.

5-18 Managing hosts

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 3. Click the Refresh Host button.
The Refresh Host - host-name dialog box appears.
4. Confirm the host to be refreshed and execute the refresh.
5. Check the host-name subwindow to make sure that the host information
has been refreshed.
Related topics
• Refreshing host information on page 5-15
• Refreshing host information for multiple hosts on page 5-19
• Refreshing a single host group on page 5-20
• Refreshing multiple host groups on page 5-20
• Refreshing all hosts connected to a CHA port on page 5-21
• Hosts subwindow on page A-4
• Host Groups subwindow on page A-148
• host-name subwindow on page A-53
• host-name dialog box on page A-79

Refreshing host information for multiple hosts

To refresh host information for multiple hosts at once:
1. Perform one of the following steps in the Explorer menu:
¢ Click Resources and choose Hosts.
¢ Click My Groups and choose Host Groups.
The Hosts subwindow or Host Groups subwindow appears.
2. If the Host Groups subwindow is displayed, expand the object tree and
select the target host group.
The host-group-name subwindow appears.
3. In the Hosts tabbed-page, select the check boxes of the hosts to be
refreshed, and then click the Refresh Hosts button.
The Refresh Hosts dialog box appears.
4. Confirm the hosts to be refreshed and execute the refresh.
5. Check the Hosts subwindow or Host Groups subwindow to make sure that
the host information has been refreshed.
Related topics
• Refreshing host information on page 5-15
• Refreshing host information for a single host on page 5-18
• Refreshing a single host group on page 5-20
• Refreshing multiple host groups on page 5-20
• Refreshing all hosts connected to a CHA port on page 5-21
• Hosts subwindow on page A-4
• Host Groups subwindow on page A-148

Managing hosts 5-19

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 • host-group-name subwindow on page A-162
• Refresh Hosts dialog box on page A-38

Refreshing a single host group

To refresh host information for a host group:
1. In the Explorer menu, click My Groups and choose Host Groups.
The Host Groups subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree and select the target host group.
The host-group-name subwindow appears.
3. Click the Refresh Group button.
The Refresh Host Group - host-group-name dialog box appears.
4. Check the host group to be refreshed, and then perform the refresh.
5. Check the host-group-name subwindow to make sure that the host
information has been refreshed.
Related topics
• Refreshing host information on page 5-15
• Refreshing host information for a single host on page 5-18
• Refreshing host information for multiple hosts on page 5-19
• Refreshing multiple host groups on page 5-20
• Refreshing all hosts connected to a CHA port on page 5-21
• Host Groups subwindow on page A-148
• host-group-name subwindow on page A-162
• Refresh Host Groups dialog box on page A-160

Refreshing multiple host groups

To refresh host information for multiple host groups at once:
1. In the Explorer menu, click My Groups and choose Host Groups.
The Host Groups subwindow appears.
2. In the Groups tabbed-page, select the check boxes of the host groups to
be refreshed, and then click the Refresh Groups button.
The Refresh Host Groups dialog box appears.
3. Check the hosts that belong to the selected host groups, and then
perform the refresh.
4. Check the Host Groups subwindow to make sure that the host group
information has been refreshed.
Related topics
• Refreshing host information on page 5-15
• Refreshing host information for a single host on page 5-18
• Refreshing host information for multiple hosts on page 5-19

5-20 Managing hosts

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 • Refreshing a single host group on page 5-20
• Refreshing all hosts connected to a CHA port on page 5-21
• Host Groups subwindow on page A-148
• Refresh Host Groups dialog box on page A-160

Refreshing all hosts connected to a CHA port

To refresh host information for all hosts connected to a CHA port:
1. In the Explorer menu, click Resources and choose Storage systems.
The Storage systems subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree and select the target storage system.
The Storage-system-Name subwindow appears.
If necessary, select the tab for the target multipath management
software.
3. In the CHA Ports tabbed-page, or Targets tabbed-page, select the
check boxes of the CHA ports, and then click the Refresh Hosts button.
The Refresh Hosts dialog box appears.
4. Confirm the hosts to be refreshed and execute the refresh.
5. Check the Hosts subwindow or host-group-name subwindow to make sure
that the host information has been refreshed.
Related topics
• Refreshing host information on page 5-15
• Refreshing host information for a single host on page 5-18
• Refreshing host information for multiple hosts on page 5-19
• Refreshing a single host group on page 5-20
• Refreshing multiple host groups on page 5-20
• Storage systems subwindow on page A-106
• storage-system-name subwindow on page A-108
• Refresh Hosts dialog box on page A-38
• Hosts subwindow on page A-4
• host-group-name subwindow on page A-162

Multipath LU configuration
In Global Link Manager, you can configure the following at the LU level: load
balancing, dynamic I/O path control, the number of times the same path can
be used, and the number of times the same path can be used for extended
load balancing (random I/O).

Managing hosts 5-21

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Setting load balancing at the LU level
When the Hitachi Dynamic Link Manager Software (HDLM) version of the host
is 5.8 or later, Global Link Manager enables you to set load balancing for
individual LUs connected from the host. You can do the following:
• Change the setting for whether to use the load balancing function for
certain LUs.
• Set separate load-balancing algorithms for certain LUs.
• For certain LUs, the specified algorithm sets the number of times the
same path can be used for I/O.

Setting dynamic I/O path control at the LU level

When all the following conditions are met, you can enable or disable dynamic
I/O path control for individual LUs.
• The HDLM version is 7.3 or later.
• The storage systems connected to the host support dynamic I/O path
control.

Tip: When the host OS is VMware, operations on the host might take several
minutes (approximately 3 minutes) per 100 LUs to complete.

Setting the number of times the same path can be used at the LU
level
When the Hitachi Dynamic Link Manager (HDLM) version of the host is 7.4.1
or later and the host OS is not VMware, you can set the following for
individual LUs:
• Set the number of times the same path can be used for I/O when
applying round robin (rr), least I/Os (lio), or least blocks (lbk) for load-
balancing algorithms.
• Set the number of times the same path can be used for sequential I/O
when applying extended round robin (exrr), extended least I/Os (exlio),
or extended least blocks (exlbk) for load-balancing algorithms.

Setting the number of times the same path can be used for
extended load balancing (random I/O) at the LU level
When the Hitachi Dynamic Link Manager (HDLM) version of the host is 8.1.2
or later and the host OS is not VMware, you can set the following for
individual LUs:
• Set the number of times the same path can be used for random I/O when
applying extended round robin (exrr), extended least I/Os (exlio), or
extended least blocks (exlbk) for load-balancing algorithms.
If the host OS is VMware, the settings for load balancing, number of times
the same path can be used, and dynamic I/O path control on the Configure
HDLM page are applied to all multipath LUs. If the host OS is not VMware,

5-22 Managing hosts

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
the settings for dynamic I/O path control are applied to all multipath LUs.
This configuration must be performed from the Configure Multipath LUs dialog
box. When you add a new host to Global Link Manager resources, the load
balancing setting for each host is carried over when load balancing is set for
individual LUs.
The following figure shows an example of configuring load balancing, the
number of times the same path can be used, and dynamic I/O path control
for individual LUs:

Figure 5-4 Example of configuring load balancing and dynamic I/O path
control for individual LUs
The load balancing, the number of times the same path can be used, and
dynamic I/O path control configuration for individual LUs is applied to the
multipath LUs corresponding to the LUs. Regardless of the number of paths,

Managing hosts 5-23

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 in a list of Multipath LUs, the list of HDevs (host devices managed by HDLM)
sorted by the individual LUs is displayed as Multipath LUs. Therefore, you can
select a Multipath LU for each LU to configure load balancing. If the host
operating system is Solaris 7, and multiple HDevs correspond to the same LU,
only the HDev that has the smallest path ID and has an owner path is
displayed. This HDev is displayed as the HDev name with the slice number
omitted. The following figure shows an example of Multipath LU configuration
for each host operating system:

Figure 5-5 Overview of multipath LU configuration (configuration example

for each host operating system)

5-24 Managing hosts

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
The Multipath LU configuration can be set up to view a list of Multipath LUs in
units of hosts, host groups, or storage systems. Set the same unit as is used
for the configuration of the host used by the user application.

Tip: Initializing the Multipath LU configuration information: When one of the

following conditions is true, the Multipath LU configuration information set by
the Global Link Manager GUI is initialized:
• The HDLM interface (HDLM GUI, HDLM Web GUI, or HDLM command) of
the host is used for configuring load balancing:
HDLM sets the environment configuration for individual hosts. You cannot
set this on an LU basis. Therefore, if the HDLM user interface is used for
configuring load balancing, the number of times the same path can be
used, the number of times the same path can be used for extended load
balancing (random I/O), or dynamic I/O path control, the configuration
settings apply to individual hosts, and each Multipath LU configuration is
initialized.
• The host operating system is Windows and an LU is dynamically
reconfigured (when the function that dynamically removes LUs is used in
a Windows version of HDLM):
When all paths that are connected to an LU become disconnected, the LU
is automatically removed from the HDLM management targets. After this,
when the LU is restored, the Multipath LU configuration set for that LU is
initialized.

Tip: Results for HDLM commands executed during Multipath LU configuration:

If an HDLM command is executed with the -sys -sfunc parameter specified
for the view operation when you set load balancing or dynamic I/O path
control for an individual LU in a manner that differs from the host-level
setting, an asterisk (*) is output as the Load Balance or Dynamic I/O Path
Control value, as shown in the following example. If the host OS is VMware,
an asterisk (*) is not output as the Load Balance value.
Example: When the HDLM configuration and multipath LU configuration are
as follows:
HDLM configuration
• Load Balancing: Extended Round Robin
• Dynamic I/O path control: Disabled
Multipath LU configuration
• Load Balancing: Extended Least I/Os or Following setting in the
host is specified for individual LUs
• Dynamic I/O path control: Disabled or Enabled is specified for individual
LUs

HDLM Version : 7.6.0-00

Service Pack Version :
Load Balance : on(exrr)*
Support Cluster :
Elog Level : 3
Elog File Size(KB) : 9900
Number Of Elog Files : 2
Trace Level : 0

Managing hosts 5-25

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Trace File Size(KB) : 1000
Number Of Trace Files : 4
Path Health Checking : on(30)
Auto Failback : off
Intermittent Error Monitor : off
Dynamic I/O Path Control : off(10)*

Configuring multipath LUs for individual hosts

Load balancing can be set for individual LUs only when the HDLM version of
the host is 5.8 or later. The number of times the same path can be used, can
be set for individual LUs only when the HDLM version of the host is 7.4.1 or
later. The number of times the same path can be used for extended load
balancing (random I/O) can be set for individual LUs only when the HDLM
version of the host is 8.1.2 or later. Dynamic I/O path control can be set for
individual LUs only when the HDLM version of the host is 7.3 or later and the
connected storage subsystem is compatible with dynamic I/O path control. If
the HDLM version of the host is earlier than 5.8, the Configure Multipath
LUs button is not displayed in the host-name subwindow selected in the
Global Link Manager graphical-user interface (GUI).
To configure Multipath LUs for individual hosts:
1. Perform one of the following steps in the Explorer menu:
¢ Click Resources and choose Hosts.
¢ Click My Groups and choose Host Groups.
The Hosts subwindow or Host Groups subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree and select the target host.
The host-name subwindow appears.
3. In the Multipath LUs tabbed-page, select the check boxes of the
multipath LUs to be configured with the same load balancing algorithm,
the number of times the same path can be used, the number of times the
same path can be used for extended load balancing (random I/O), or
dynamic I/O path control setting, and then click the Configure
Multipath LUs button.
The Configure Multipath LUs dialog box appears.
4. Set the load balancing algorithm, the number of times the same path can
be used, the number of times the same path can be used for extended
load balancing (random I/O), or dynamic I/O path control for the selected
multipath LUs.
5. Check the host-name subwindow to make sure that the Multipath LU
information has been refreshed.
6. To configure multiple algorithms, repeat steps 3 and 5.
Related topics
• Multipath LU configuration on page 5-21
• Configuring multipath LUs for individual host groups on page 5-27
• Configuring multipath LUs for an individual storage system on page 5-28
• Hosts subwindow on page A-4

5-26 Managing hosts

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 • Host Groups subwindow on page A-148
• host-name subwindow on page A-53
• Configure Multipath LUs dialog box on page A-88

Configuring multipath LUs for individual host groups

Load balancing can be set for individual LUs only when the Hitachi Dynamic
Link Manager Software (HDLM) version of the host is 5.8 or later. The
number of times the same path can be used, can be set for individual LUs
only when the HDLM version of the host is 7.4.1 or later. The number of
times the same path can be used for extended load balancing (random I/O)
can be set for individual LUs only when the HDLM version of the host is 8.1.2
or later. Dynamic I/O path control can be set for individual LUs only when the
HDLM version of the host is 7.3 or later and the connected storage subsystem
is compatible with dynamic I/O path control.
To configure Multipath LUs for an individual host group:
1. In the Explorer menu, click My Groups and choose Host Groups.
The Host Groups subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree and select the target host group.
The host-group-name subwindow appears.
3. In the Multipath LUs tabbed-page, select the check boxes of the
multipath LUs to be configured with the same load balancing algorithm,
the same number of times the same path can be used, the number of
times the same path can be used for extended load balancing (random
I/O), or the same dynamic I/O path control setting, and then click the
Configure Multipath LUs button.
The Configure Multipath LUs dialog box appears.
4. Set the load balancing algorithm, the number of times the same path can
be used, the number of times the same path can be used for extended
load balancing (random I/O), or dynamic I/O path control for the selected
multipath LUs.
5. Check the host-group-name subwindow to make sure that the Multipath
LU information has been refreshed.
6. To configure multiple algorithms, repeat steps 3 and 5.
Related topics
• Multipath LU configuration on page 5-21
• Configuring multipath LUs for individual hosts on page 5-26
• Configuring multipath LUs for individual host groups on page 5-27
• Host Groups subwindow on page A-148
• host-group-name subwindow on page A-162
• Configure Multipath LUs dialog box on page A-88

Managing hosts 5-27

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Configuring multipath LUs for an individual storage system
Load balancing can be set for individual LUs only when the HDLM version of
the host is 5.8 or later. The number of times the same path can be used, can
be set for individual LUs only when the HDLM version of the host is 7.4.1 or
later. The number of times the same path can be used for extended load
balancing (random I/O) can be set for individual LUs only when the HDLM
version of the host is 8.1.2 or later. Dynamic I/O path control can be set for
individual LUs only when the HDLM version of the host is 7.3 or later and the
connected storage subsystem is compatible with dynamic I/O path control.
To configure Multipath LUs for an individual storage system:
1. In the Explorer menu, click Resources and choose Storage systems.
The Storage systems subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree and select the target storage system.
The Storage-system-Name subwindow appears.
3. In the Multipath LUs tabbed-page, select the check boxes of the
multipath LUs to be configured with the same load balancing algorithm,
the same number of times the same path can be used, the number of
times the same path can be used for extended load balancing (random
I/O), or the same dynamic I/O path control setting, and then click the
Configure Multipath LUs button.
The Configure Multipath LUs dialog box appears.
4. Set the load balancing algorithm, the number of times the same path can
be used, the number of times the same path can be used for extended
load balancing (random I/O), or dynamic I/O path control for the selected
multipath LUs.
5. Check the Storage-system-Name subwindow to make sure that the
Multipath LU information has been refreshed.
6. To configure multiple algorithms, repeat steps 3 and 5.
Related topics
• Multipath LU configuration on page 5-21
• Configuring multipath LUs for individual hosts on page 5-26
• Configuring multipath LUs for an individual storage system on page 5-28
• Storage systems subwindow on page A-106
• storage-system-name subwindow on page A-108
• Configure Multipath LUs dialog box on page A-88

Configuring the HDLM operating environment for a host

You can configure the Hitachi Dynamic Link Manager Software (HDLM)
execution environment for each host. Global Link Manager can be used to
configure HDLM in each host remotely without having to log in to each host.
If a host is newly added as a Global Link Manager resource, the HDLM
environment configuration information already configured by the HDLM of

5-28 Managing hosts

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
each host is inherited by Global Link Manager. If necessary, change the HDLM
configuration in the Global Link Manager GUI.
The ability to configure an HDLM environment depends on the host operating
system and HDLM version. From among the configuration items displayed in
the following table, the items that can be configured are those that can be
viewed in the Global Link Manager GUI.

Table 5-3 List of HDLM environment configuration items

HDLM environment
Description
configuration item

Load Balancing In a configuration where multiple paths are connected to an

LU, the path load is distributed when multiple paths are
used for issuing I/Os.
You can set whether to enable load balancing, and set the
processing format and check interval.

Path use times • Load balancing:

You can set the number of times the same path can be
used in load balancing.
• Extended load balancing:
For sequential I/Os: You can set the number of times
the same path can be used for extended load balancing
(sequential I/O).
For random I/Os: You can set the number of times the
same path can be used for extended load balancing
(random I/O).

Path Health Checking Normally, path statuses are checked when I/Os are issued,
but this item checks online paths at regular intervals
regardless of whether an I/O has been issued.
You can set whether to enable the path health checking
function, and set the check interval.

Auto Failback If there are multiple paths connected to an LU and a critical-

level or error-level error is detected for a path in use, the
HDLM failover function switches such paths offline and uses
a path that has an online status to continue system
operations.
After error recovery, the automatic failback function
automatically returns the paths, which were made offline by
the failover function, to an online state.
You can set whether to enable the automatic failback
function, and set the check interval.

Intermittent Error Monitor Intermittent errors are random errors that occur due to
causes such as a poor cable connection. If an intermittent
error occurs when automatic failback is enabled, automatic
failback occurs repeatedly, which might cause a drop in I/O
performance. To avoid such a situation, for paths where an
intermittent error has occurred, intermittent error
monitoring automatically removes these paths from being
subject to automatic failback.

Managing hosts 5-29

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 HDLM environment
Description
configuration item
You can set whether to enable the intermittent error
monitoring function, and set the error monitoring time and
error frequency.

Dynamic I/O path control To prevent a drop in I/O performance, HDLM keeps track of
controller switching on the storage subsystem side, and
dynamically switches the destination controller accordingly.
You can choose whether to enable dynamic I/O path control
at the host level (all storage subsystems connected to the
host) or at the storage subsystem level. You can also set the
checking interval of the dynamic I/O path control function.

Reservation Level To grant a given host exclusive use of an LU, you can make
an exclusive use declaration from that host to the LU. This
function protects such an LU from access by other hosts.
You can set whether to enable the reservation level function,
whether reservation requests are to be ignored, and
whether paths to the LU can be reserved for exclusive
access.

Remove LU If the host operating system is Windows, the Windows plug-

and-play functionality can be used for adding and deleting
LUs and paths while an HDLM-installed host is operating
(dynamic reconfiguration). When the remove LU function is
enabled and all paths that are connected to an LU become
disconnected, the LU is automatically removed from the
managed objects.
You can set whether to enable the remove LU function, and
whether removal is to occur when there are paths that have
the Offline(C) status.

Logging Level Errors detected by HDLM are divided into levels. Logs are
collected corresponding to the error levels and are stored on
each host.
You can set whether to perform log collection, and set the
error level to be used as the filtering standard when
collecting logs.

Trace Level Traces output by HDLM are divided into levels. Depending
on the trace level, traces are output and stored on each
host.
You can set whether to perform trace output, and the trace
level to be used as the filtering standard for output.

Error Log File Size If error log collection is set for an error log level, you can set
the size of the log files to be collected.

Number of Error Log Files If error log collection is set for an error log level, you can set
the number of log files to be collected.

Trace Log File Size If trace output is set for a trace level, you can set the size of
the trace files to be output.

Number of Trace Log Files If trace output is set for a trace level, you can set the
number of trace files to be output.

5-30 Managing hosts

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Configuring the HDLM operating environment for an individual host
To configure the HDLM environment for a host:
1. Perform one of the following steps in the Explorer menu:
¢ Click Resources and choose Hosts.
¢ Click My Groups and choose Host Groups.
The Hosts subwindow or Host Groups subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree, and then select the target host.
The host-name subwindow appears.
3. In the Multipath Configuration tabbed-page, click the Configure
button.
The Configure HDLM - host-name dialog box appears.
4. Set each of the environment configuration items for the host.
5. Check the host-name subwindow to make sure that the HDLM
environment configuration information has been refreshed.
Related topics
• Configuring the HDLM operating environment for a host on page 5-28
• Configuring the HDLM operating environment for multiple hosts on page
5-31
• Hosts subwindow on page A-4
• Host Groups subwindow on page A-148
• host-name subwindow on page A-53
• host-name dialog box on page A-79

Configuring the HDLM operating environment for multiple hosts

To configure the HDLM environment for hosts:
1. Select one of the following in the Explorer menu:
¢ Click Resources and choose Hosts.
¢ Click My Groups and choose Host Groups.
The Hosts subwindow or Host Groups subwindow appears.
2. If the Host Groups subwindow appears, expand the object tree and select
the target host group.
The host-group-name subwindow appears.
3. In the Hosts tabbed-page, select the check boxes for the target hosts
whose HDLM operating environment is to be configured, and then click
the Configure Hosts button.
The Introduction window for the Multi-host Configuration Wizard appears.
4. Click the Next button.
The Configuration Setup window appears.
5. Configure the operating environment.

Managing hosts 5-31

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 If you click View Configuration for a host in the Finish window, the
host-name subwindow appears. Make sure that the HDLM environment
configuration information has been refreshed.
Related topics
• Configuring the HDLM operating environment for a host on page 5-28
• Configuring the HDLM operating environment for an individual host on
page 5-31
• Hosts subwindow on page A-4
• Host Groups subwindow on page A-148
• host-group-name subwindow on page A-162
• Introduction on page A-42
• Configuration Setup on page A-42
• host-name subwindow on page A-53

Configuring alerts for a host

You can set whether to perform alert notification from each host to Global
Link Manager. SNMP traps are used for alert notification and reception. Alerts
cannot be configured for individual multipath management software hosts
because the function is used to receive alert information when Global Link
Manager manages multiple hosts and detects path errors that occur in
individual hosts.
By default, hosts are automatically configured so that alerts are reported
from each host whenever new hosts are added as Global Link Manager
resources or when host information is refreshed. You can modify the alert
configuration for each host individually by setting false in the
server.snmp.auto_set property in the server.properties file of the Global
Link Manager server. Then select hosts and configure alerts for them
separately. Even if you set the alert notification function to Off in the Global
Link Manager GUI, after you set the value of the server.snmp.auto_set
property to true, the alert notification setting will be changed automatically
to On when host information is refreshed. For details about the
server.snmp.auto_set property, see the Hitachi Command Suite Global Link
Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.
Alert notification can be configured only if the HDLM version of the host is 5.8
or later, or when you are using DMP or HP-UX multipath. If the HDLM version
is earlier than 5.8, the Alert tab is not displayed in the host-name subwindow
selected in the Global Link Manager GUI.
To configure alerts for a host:
1. Perform one of the following steps in the Explorer menu:
¢ Click Resources and choose Hosts.
¢ Click My Groups and choose Host Groups.
The Hosts subwindow or Host Groups subwindow appears.

5-32 Managing hosts

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
2. Expand the object tree and select the target host.
The host-name subwindow appears.
3. In the Alert tabbed-page, click the Configure Alerts button.
The Configure Alerts - host-name dialog box appears.
4. Set whether to report alerts from the host.
5. Check the host-name subwindow to make sure that the alert
configuration information has been refreshed.
6. If alerts are configured to be reported, confirm that the alerts are being
reported normally.
An alert (message ID: KAPL04042-I) that indicates changing the alert
setup has finished is reported from configured hosts. In the Explorer
menu, click the Alerts submenu, and check the alert list to confirm that
the alert has been reported.
Related topics
• Managing Alerts
• Hosts subwindow on page A-4
• Host Groups subwindow on page A-148
• host-name subwindow on page A-53
• host-name dialog box on page A-79

Managing hosts 5-33

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
5-34 Managing hosts
Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 6
Managing resource groups
This chapter describes the functions for managing resource groups and
explains how to use these functions.

□ Overview

□ Viewing a list of resource groups

□ Viewing individual resource group information

□ Creating resource groups

□ Editing resource groups

□ Deleting resource groups

□ Adding hosts to a resource group

□ Removing hosts from a resource group

□ Adding users to a resource group

□ Removing users from a resource group

Managing resource groups 6-1

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Overview
Resource groups provide a method for controlling user access by grouping
hosts (resources) according to purpose and assigning specified groups to
specified users.
In Global Link Manager, you can use resource group management functions
for the following purposes:
• Setting the various administrators corresponding to the hosts that belong
to different organizations or business tasks
• Setting administrators into multiple groups when administrators have
multiple business tasks
Resource groups can be managed by users who have the Admin (Global Link
Manager management) permission and users who have access permissions
for all resources. Users who do not have the Admin (Global Link Manager
management) permission can perform operations on hosts in resource groups
assigned to those users, and any attached paths or storage systems only.
The following figure uses an example to show an overview of resource group
management:

6-2 Managing resource groups

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Figure 6-1 Overview of resource group management
The following conditions apply when configuring resource groups:
• Multiple hosts (resources) can be configured for each resource group.
• Users can have access permissions for the hosts of multiple resource
groups (can be affiliated with multiple resource groups).
• Resource groups cannot be layered in a hierarchical structure.

Managing resource groups 6-3

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 • The All Resources group, which has been prepared for managing all
resources, cannot be deleted, and its name cannot be changed. You
cannot create a resource group that has the same name as this group.
• A host cannot belong to multiple resource groups, except the All
Resources group.
• Hosts managed by Global Link Manager are automatically set to the All
Resources group.
• Any user can be added to the All Resources group.
• Users who have the Admin (Global Link Manager management)
permission or users of the built-in account (user ID: System) are set in
the All Resources group so that they have permissions for all resources.
• Except for the built-in account user (user ID: System), users who have
the Admin (user management) permission can belong to the resource
groups only when they also have the Admin (Global Link Manager
management), Modify, or View permission.

Explorer menu items for managing resource groups

The following table shows the Explorer menu items used for managing
resource groups, and which Global Link Manager management permissions
are required for operating these items.

Table 6-1 Explorer menu items for managing resource groups

Explorer menu Permissions

Submenu Command Admin Modify View

Administration Resource Groups Yes No No

Functions for managing resource groups

The following table shows the functions for managing resource groups, and
which Global Link Manager management permissions are required for
operating these functions.

Table 6-2 List of functions for managing resource groups

Permissions
Functions
Admin Modify View

Viewing a list of resource groups Yes No No

Viewing individual resource group information Yes No No

Creating a resource group Yes No No

Editing a resource group Yes No No

Deleting a resource group Yes No No

Adding hosts to a resource group Yes No No

6-4 Managing resource groups

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Permissions
Functions
Admin Modify View

Removing hosts from a resource group Yes No No

Adding users to a resource group Yes No No

Removing users from a resource group Yes No No

Related topics
• Viewing a list of resource groups on page 6-5
• Viewing individual resource group information on page 6-5
• Creating resource groups on page 6-6
• Editing resource groups on page 6-7
• Deleting resource groups on page 6-7
• Adding hosts to a resource group on page 6-8
• Removing hosts from a resource group on page 6-9
• Adding users to a resource group on page 6-10
• Removing users from a resource group on page 6-11

Viewing a list of resource groups

You can view a list of information about all resource groups.
The list contains the number of hosts and the number of users in each
resource group.
To view a list of resource groups:
1. In the Explorer menu, click Administration and choose Resource
Groups.
The Resource Groups subwindow appears with a list of resource groups.
Related topics
• Viewing individual resource group information on page 6-5
• Resource Groups subwindow on page A-187

Viewing individual resource group information

You can view information for each resource group. This information includes:
• Summarized information for the resource group (including the resource
name and the number of hosts and users within each resource group)
• A list of hosts that belong to the resource groups
• A list of users that belong to the resource groups

Managing resource groups 6-5

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Users who have the Admin (Global Link Manager management) permission
are always configured to be in the All Resources group so that they have
permissions for all resources. To check resource group information about
users who have the Admin (Global Link Manager management) permission,
specify and check the All Resources group.
To view resource group information:
1. In the Explorer menu, click Administration and choose Resource
Groups.
The Resource Groups subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree and select the target resource group or the All
Resources group.
The resource-group-name subwindow appears with the resource group
information.
Related topics
• Viewing a list of resource groups on page 6-5
• Resource Groups subwindow on page A-187
• resource-group-name subwindow on page A-189

Creating resource groups

The following procedure describes how to create resource groups.
When creating new resource groups, decide how to divide the groups on the
basis of the organizations, responsibilities, and the relationships with the
responsible users.
You cannot create a resource group named All Resources, because the All
Resources group is the default resource group to which all hosts (resources)
and users who have the Admin (Global Link Manager management)
permission are automatically configured.
To create a resource group:
1. In the Explorer menu, click Administration and choose Resource
Groups.
The Resource Groups subwindow appears.
2. Click the Create Group button.
The Create Resource Group dialog box appears.
3. Register the information for each resource group to be created.
4. Check the Resource Groups subwindow to make sure that the information
for registered resource groups is displayed.
Related topics
• Editing resource groups on page 6-7
• Deleting resource groups on page 6-7
• Adding hosts to a resource group on page 6-8

6-6 Managing resource groups

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 • Removing hosts from a resource group on page 6-9
• Adding users to a resource group on page 6-10
• Removing users from a resource group on page 6-11
• Resource Groups subwindow on page A-187
• Create Resource Group dialog box on page A-188

Editing resource groups

The following procedure describes how to edit resource groups. To edit
resource groups, you need to edit the properties of resource groups.
You cannot edit the All Resources group because it is the default resource
group to which all hosts (resources) and users who have the Admin (Global
Link Manager management) permission are automatically configured.
To edit a resource group:
1. In the Explorer menu, click Administration and choose Resource
Groups.
The Resource Groups subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree and select the target resource group.
The resource-group-name subwindow appears.
3. Click the Edit Properties button.
The Edit Properties - resource-group-name dialog box appears.
4. Edit and refresh the resource group information.
5. Check the resource-group-name subwindow to make sure that the
information for resource groups has been refreshed.
Related topics
• Creating resource groups on page 6-6
• Deleting resource groups on page 6-7

Deleting resource groups

The following procedure describes how to delete resource groups.
You can delete the single resource group that is currently displayed or, from a
list, you can select and delete multiple resource groups at the same time. You
cannot delete the All Resources group, however, because it is the default
resource group to which all hosts (resources) and users who have the Admin
(Global Link Manager management) permission are automatically set.
Related topics
• Creating resource groups on page 6-6
• Editing resource groups on page 6-7

Managing resource groups 6-7

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Deleting individual resource groups
To delete individual resource groups:
1. In the Explorer menu, click Administration and choose Resource
Groups.
The Resource Groups subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree and select the target resource group.
The resource-group-name subwindow appears.
3. Click the Delete Group button.
The Delete Resource Group - resource-group-name dialog box appears.
4. Confirm the resource group information to be deleted and perform the
deletion.
5. Check the Resource Groups subwindow to make sure that the resource
group information has been deleted.
Related topics
• Resource Groups subwindow on page A-187
• resource-group-name subwindow on page A-189
• Delete Resource Groups dialog box on page A-188

Deleting multiple resource groups

To delete multiple resource groups:
1. In the Explorer menu, click Administration and choose Resource
Groups.
The Resource Groups subwindow appears.
2. In the list of resource groups, select the check boxes of the resource
groups to be deleted, and then click the Delete Groups button.
The Delete Resource Groups dialog box appears.
3. Confirm the resource groups to be deleted and perform the deletion.
4. Check the Resource Groups subwindow to make sure that the resource
groups have been deleted.
Related topics
• Resource Groups subwindow on page A-187
• Delete Resource Groups dialog box on page A-188

Adding hosts to a resource group

You can add host resources to a previously created resource group.
The same host cannot be configured for multiple resource groups. You cannot
add hosts to the All Resources group because all hosts are automatically
configured to the All Resources group.

6-8 Managing resource groups

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 To add hosts to a resource group:
1. In the Explorer menu, click Administration and choose Resource
Groups.
The Resource Groups subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree and select the target resource group.
The resource-group-name subwindow appears.
3. In the Hosts tabbed-page, click the Add Hosts button.
The Add Hosts dialog box appears.
4. Select the check boxes of the hosts you are adding to the resource group,
and then execute.
5. Check the resource-group-name subwindow to make sure that the
information for the hosts has been added to the resource group.
Related topics
• Removing hosts from a resource group on page 6-9
• Adding users to a resource group on page 6-10
• Removing users from a resource group on page 6-11
• Resource Groups subwindow on page A-187
• resource-group-name subwindow on page A-189
• Add Hosts dialog box (adding to resources) on page A-27
• Add Hosts dialog box (adding to a host group) on page A-178
• Add Hosts dialog box (adding to a resource group) on page A-191

Removing hosts from a resource group

You can remove host resources from a resource group.
Note that you cannot remove hosts from the All Resources group because all
hosts are automatically configured to the All Resources group.
To remove hosts from a resource group:
1. In the Explorer menu, click Administration and choose Resource
Groups.
The Resource Groups subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree and select the target resource group.
The resource-group-name subwindow appears.
3. In the Hosts tabbed-page, select the check boxes of the hosts you are
removing, and then click the Remove Hosts button.
The Remove Hosts dialog box appears.
4. Confirm the hosts to be removed and execute.
5. Check the resource-group-name subwindow to make sure that the hosts
have been removed from the resource group.
Related topics

Managing resource groups 6-9

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 • Adding hosts to a resource group on page 6-8
• Adding users to a resource group on page 6-10
• Removing users from a resource group on page 6-11
• Resource Groups subwindow on page A-187
• resource-group-name subwindow on page A-189
• Remove Hosts dialog box (removing from resources) on page A-37
• Remove Hosts dialog box (removing from a resource group) on page
A-192

Adding users to a resource group

You can add users to a previously created resource group.
A single user can be assigned to multiple resource groups. Also, users who
have Modify or View permissions can be configured for the All Resources
group. Users who have the Admin (Global Link Manager management)
permission and the built-in account user (user ID: System) do not have to be
added to resource groups because those users are automatically configured
to the All Resources group.
If you change the setting of the correspondence between the user who is
currently logging in and the resource group, the change will be applied the
next time the user logs in.
To add users to a resource group:
1. In the Explorer menu, click Administration and choose Resource
Groups.
The Resource Groups subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree and select the target resource group or the All
Resources group.
The resource-group-name subwindow or the All Resources subwindow
appears.
3. In the Users tabbed-page, click the Add Users button.
The Add Users - resource-group-name dialog box appears.
4. Select the check boxes of the users you are adding to the resource group,
and then execute.
5. Check the resource-group-name subwindow to make sure the information
for the users has been added to the resource group.
Related topics
• Adding hosts to a resource group on page 6-8
• Removing hosts from a resource group on page 6-9
• Removing users from a resource group on page 6-11
• Resource Groups subwindow on page A-187
• resource-group-name subwindow on page A-189

6-10 Managing resource groups

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 • Add Users - resource-group-name dialog box on page A-192

Removing users from a resource group

You can remove users from a resource group.
Note that you cannot remove users who have the Admin (Global Link
Manager management) permission and the built-in account user (user ID:
System) from the All Resource groups because those users are automatically
configured to the All Resources group.
If you change the setting of the correspondence between the user who is
currently logging in and the resource group, the change will be applied the
next time the user logs in.
To remove users from a resource group:
1. In the Explorer menu, click Administration and choose Resource
Groups.
The Resource Groups subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree and select the target resource group or the All
Resources group.
The resource-group-name subwindow or the All Resources subwindow
appears.
3. In the Users tabbed-page, select the check boxes of the users you are
removing, and then click the Remove Users button.
The Remove Users dialog box appears.
4. Confirm the users to be removed, and then execute.
5. Check the resource-group-name subwindow to make sure that the users
have been removed from the resource group.
Related topics
• Adding hosts to a resource group on page 6-8
• Removing hosts from a resource group on page 6-9
• Adding users to a resource group on page 6-10
• Resource Groups subwindow on page A-187
• resource-group-name subwindow on page A-189
• Remove Users dialog box on page A-193

Managing resource groups 6-11

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
6-12 Managing resource groups
Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 7
Managing host groups
This chapter describes the functions for managing host groups and describes
how to use these functions.

□ Overview

□ Viewing a list of host groups

□ Viewing individual host group information

□ Creating host groups

□ Editing host groups

□ Deleting host groups

□ Viewing host information for a host group

□ Adding hosts to a host group

□ Removing hosts from a host group

□ Refreshing host information for host groups

Managing host groups 7-1

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Overview
You can divide hosts managed by Global Link Manager into multiple groups
and arrange those groups in a hierarchical structure as required. Each user
can create groups of hosts to be managed, thus achieving independent user
management.
In Global Link Manager, you can use the functions for managing host groups
for the following purposes:
• Grouping many managed hosts to make finding a particular host
• Managing hosts by hierarchal organization
• Viewing host or path information and changing the path status for
individual groups
The following figure uses an example to show an overview of host group
management:

7-2 Managing host groups

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Figure 7-1 Overview of host group management
The following conditions apply when configuring host groups:
• Multiple hosts can be configured into one host group.
• One host can be configured into multiple host groups.
• When host groups are layered in a hierarchical structure, host groups
cannot be mixed with hosts under a host group.

Explorer menu items for managing host groups

The following table shows the Explorer menu items used for managing host
groups, and which Global Link Manager management permissions are
required for operating these items.

Managing host groups 7-3

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Table 7-1 Explorer menu items for managing host groups

Explorer menu Permissions

Submenu Command Admin Modify View

My Groups Host Groups Yes Yes Yes

Functions for managing host groups

The following table shows the functions for managing host groups, and which
Global Link Manager management permissions are required for operating
these functions.

Table 7-2 List of functions for managing host groups

Permissions
Functions
Admin Modify View

Viewing a list of host groups Yes Yes Yes

Viewing individual host group information Yes Yes Yes

Creating a host group Yes Yes Yes

Editing a host group Yes Yes Yes

Deleting a host group Yes Yes Yes

Viewing host information for host groups Yes Yes Yes

Adding hosts to a host group Yes Yes Yes

Removing hosts from a host group Yes Yes Yes

Refreshing host information for host groups Yes Yes No

Related topics
• Viewing a list of host groups on page 7-5
• Viewing individual host group information on page 7-5
• Creating host groups on page 7-6
• Editing host groups on page 7-7
• Deleting host groups on page 7-7
• Viewing host information for a host group on page 7-8
• Adding hosts to a host group on page 7-9
• Removing hosts from a host group on page 7-9
• Refreshing host information for host groups on page 7-10

7-4 Managing host groups

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Viewing a list of host groups
You can view a list of host groups for all user-created host groups. You can
also use the host group icons to check path errors and the update status of
host information.
• Summarized information for all host groups (the number of hosts and the
number of paths in each path status)
• A list of host groups
• A list of paths for all host groups
• A list of Multipath LUs for all host groups
To view a list of host groups:
1. In the Explorer menu, click My Groups and choose Host Groups.
The Host Groups subwindow appears with a list of host groups.
Related topics
• Viewing individual host group information on page 7-5
• Viewing host information for a host group on page 7-8
• Host Groups subwindow on page A-148

Viewing individual host group information

You can view information for each host group.
When the host group to be displayed is a parent group, you can view the
following information:
¢ Summarized information for host groups under that parent group (the
number of hosts and the number of paths in each path status)
¢ A list of child groups
¢ A list of paths under that parent group
¢ List of Multipath LUs under that parent group
When the host group to be displayed is not layered in a hierarchical structure
or the host group is a child group, you can view the following information:
¢ Summarized information for host groups (the number of hosts and the
number of paths in each path status)
¢ A list of hosts belonging to that host group
¢ A list of paths belonging to that host group
¢ A list of Multipath LUs belonging to that host group
To view host group information:
1. In the Explorer menu, click My Groups and choose Host Groups.
The Host Groups subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree and select the target host group.

Managing host groups 7-5

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 The host-group-name subwindow appears with host group information.
Related topics
• Viewing a list of host groups on page 7-5
• Viewing host information for a host group on page 7-8
• Host Groups subwindow on page A-148
• host-group-name subwindow on page A-162

Creating host groups

The following procedure describes how to create host groups.
When creating new host groups, you must consider the organization and
application when determining the group hierarchy and host group divisions.
To create a host group:
1. In the Explorer menu, click My Groups and choose Host Groups.
The Host Groups subwindow appears.
2. Perform one of the following steps:
¢ If the host groups are not layered in a hierarchical structure or if you
are creating a parent group, skip to step 3.
¢ If you are creating a child group, expand the object tree and select
the target parent group.
The host-group-name subwindow appears.
3. From the Groups tabbed-page or the Objects tabbed-page, click the
Create Group button.
The Create Host Group dialog box appears.
4. Register the information for the host group to be created.
Check the Host Groups subwindow or the host-group-name subwindow to
make sure that the information for the registered host group is displayed.
If you want to add a host to a host group that has been created, proceed
to the next step.
5. To add a host to a host group that has been created, click the Add Hosts
button in the Create Host Group dialog box (result).
The Add Hosts dialog box appears.
6. Select the check box for the host to add to the host group, and then add
that host.
Check that the information for the host group and the host added to the
host group appears in the Host Group subwindow or the host-group-name
subwindow.
Related topics
• Editing host groups on page 7-7
• Deleting host groups on page 7-7
• Adding hosts to a host group on page 7-9

7-6 Managing host groups

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 • Removing hosts from a host group on page 7-9
• Host Groups subwindow on page A-148
• host-group-name subwindow on page A-162
• Create Host Group dialog box on page A-160
• Add Hosts dialog box (adding to resources) on page A-27
• Add Hosts dialog box (adding to a host group) on page A-178
• Add Hosts dialog box (adding to a resource group) on page A-191

Editing host groups

The following procedure describes how to edit host groups. To edit host
groups, you need to edit the properties of host groups.
To edit a host group:
1. In the Explorer menu, click My Groups and choose Host Groups.
The Host Groups subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree and select the target host group.
The host-group-name subwindow appears.
3. Click the Edit Properties button.
The Edit Properties - host-group-name dialog box appears.
4. Edit and then refresh the host group information.
5. Check the host-group-name subwindow to make sure that the host group
information has been refreshed.
Related topics
• Creating host groups on page 7-6
• Deleting host groups on page 7-7
• Host Groups subwindow on page A-148
• host-group-name subwindow on page A-162
• Edit Properties - host-group-name dialog box on page A-177

Deleting host groups

The following procedure describes how to delete host groups.
To delete a host group:
1. In the Explorer menu, click My Groups and choose Host Groups.
The Host Groups subwindow appears.
2. Perform one of the following steps:
¢ If the host group is not layered in a hierarchical structure or if you are
deleting a parent group, skip to step 3.

Managing host groups 7-7

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 ¢ If you are deleting a child group, expand the object tree and select
the target parent group.
The host-group-name subwindow appears.
3. In the Groups tabbed-page, select the check boxes of the host groups
you are deleting, and then click the Delete Groups button.
The Delete Host Groups dialog box appears.
4. Confirm the host groups to be deleted and perform the deletion.
5. Check the Host Groups subwindow or the host-group-name subwindow to
make sure that the host groups have been deleted.
Related topics
• Creating host groups on page 7-6
• Editing host groups on page 7-7
• Host Groups subwindow on page A-148
• host-group-name subwindow on page A-162
• Delete Host Groups dialog box on page A-160

Viewing host information for a host group

You can view the following information for each host:
• Summarized information for a host (including such information as the
host name, operating system, multipath management software version#,
IP address, and the number of paths in each of the path statuses)
• A list of paths
• A list of Multipath LUs
• A list of HBA ports
• HDLM environment configuration information
• Alert configuration information
#
If the HDLM version of a host is earlier than 5.6, only the version and
revision numbers are displayed, and the service pack version and
corrected version information are not displayed. When the host OS is
VMware, the HDLM version of the host is displayed, not that of the remote
management client.
To view host information for a host group:
1. In the Explorer menu, click My Groups and choose Host Groups.
The Host Groups subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree and select the target host.
The host-name subwindow appears with host information for the host
group.
Related topics

7-8 Managing host groups

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 • Viewing a list of host groups on page 7-5
• Viewing individual host group information on page 7-5
• Host Groups subwindow on page A-148
• host-name subwindow on page A-53

Adding hosts to a host group

You can add hosts to a previously created host group.
You can set a single host into multiple host groups. If the host groups are
layered in a hierarchical structure, only child groups can be configured under
host groups that are to become parent groups. Hosts cannot be configured
under parent groups.
To add hosts to a host group:
1. In the Explorer menu, click My Groups and choose Host Groups.
The Host Groups subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree and select the target host group.
The host-group-name subwindow appears.
3. From the Hosts tabbed-page or the Objects tabbed-page, click the Add
Hosts button.
The Add Hosts dialog box appears.
4. Select the check boxes of the hosts you are adding to the host group, and
then execute.
5. Check the host-group-name subwindow to make sure that the hosts
added to the host group are displayed.
Related topics
• Removing hosts from a host group on page 7-9
• Host Groups subwindow on page A-148
• host-group-name subwindow on page A-162
• Add Hosts dialog box (adding to resources) on page A-27
• Add Hosts dialog box (adding to a host group) on page A-178
• Add Hosts dialog box (adding to a resource group) on page A-191

Removing hosts from a host group

You can remove hosts from a host group.
To remove hosts from a host group:
1. In the Explorer menu, click My Groups and choose Host Groups.
The Host Groups subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree and select the target host group.
The host-group-name subwindow appears.

Managing host groups 7-9

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 3. In the Hosts tabbed-page, select the check boxes of the hosts you are
removing, and then click the Remove Hosts button.
The Remove Hosts dialog box appears.
4. Confirm the hosts to be removed and perform the deletion.
5. Check the host-group-name subwindow to make sure that the hosts have
been removed from the host group.
Related topics
• Adding hosts to a host group on page 7-9
• Host Groups subwindow on page A-148
• host-group-name subwindow on page A-162
• Remove Hosts dialog box (removing from resources) on page A-37
• Remove Hosts dialog box (removing from a resource group) on page
A-192

Refreshing host information for host groups

The following procedure describes how to refresh host information for host
groups. When you perform this task, the configuration information for each
host is collected and the most recent information is displayed on the Global
Link Manager graphical-user interface (GUI). For information about how to
refresh host information, see Refreshing host information on page 5-15.
You can refresh host information for the hosts in the host group that is
currently displayed, or for the hosts in multiple host groups selected from a
list.

Refreshing a single host group

To refresh host information for a host group:
1. In the Explorer menu, click My Groups and choose Host Groups.
The Host Groups subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree and select the target host group.
The host-group-name subwindow appears.
3. Click the Refresh Group button.
The Refresh Host Group - host-group-name dialog box appears.
4. Check the host group to be refreshed, and then perform the refresh.
5. Check the host-group-name subwindow to make sure that the host
information has been refreshed.
Related topics
• Configuring alerts for a host on page 5-32
• Refreshing host information on page 5-15
• Refreshing host information for a single host on page 5-18

7-10 Managing host groups

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 • Refreshing host information for multiple hosts on page 5-19
• Refreshing multiple host groups on page 5-20
• Refreshing all hosts connected to a CHA port on page 5-21
• Host Groups subwindow on page A-148
• host-group-name subwindow on page A-162
• Refresh Host Groups dialog box on page A-160

Refreshing multiple host groups

To refresh host information for multiple host groups at once:
1. In the Explorer menu, click My Groups and choose Host Groups.
The Host Groups subwindow appears.
2. In the Groups tabbed-page, select the check boxes of the host groups to
be refreshed, and then click the Refresh Groups button.
The Refresh Host Groups dialog box appears.
3. Check the hosts that belong to the selected host groups, and then
perform the refresh.
4. Check the Host Groups subwindow to make sure that the host group
information has been refreshed.
Related topics
• Configuring alerts for a host on page 5-32
• Refreshing host information on page 5-15
• Refreshing host information for a single host on page 5-18
• Refreshing host information for multiple hosts on page 5-19
• Refreshing a single host group on page 5-20
• Refreshing all hosts connected to a CHA port on page 5-21
• Host Groups subwindow on page A-148
• Refresh Host Groups dialog box on page A-160

Managing host groups 7-11

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
7-12 Managing host groups
Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 8
Managing paths
This chapter describes the functions for managing paths and explains how to
use these functions.

□ Overview

□ Viewing a summary of paths

□ Viewing a list of paths

□ Filtering and viewing a list of paths

□ Switching path status

□ Resetting the number of path I/O counts and I/O errors

□ Viewing a list of storage systems

□ Viewing individual storage systems information

□ Viewing a list of physical storage systems (e.g. of a virtual storage

machine)

□ Viewing physical storage system information (e.g. of a virtual storage

machine)

□ Show list of lost paths

Managing paths 8-1

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Overview
Typically, when paths connecting hosts and storage systems are managed,
multiple online paths are set for a single logical unit to distribute the
workload, and the bandwidth is adjusted by pooling offline paths.
The various functions used to manage paths in Global Link Manager enable
users to perform the following:
• Acquire an understanding of path information for multiple hosts
• Use the icons displayed for the hosts, host groups, and storage systems
to check path errors
• If you are using HDLM for the hosts, or if you are using HP-UX multipath
for multipath management software, display paths by status or check the
number of I/O counts and I/O errors to determine the location of path
errors.
• Control bandwidth by browsing paths and changing their status as
necessary for items such as storage systems and LUs
• Handle errors by switching path statuses for CHA or HBA ports
The status of a path can be switched if you are using one of the following
multi-path management software products:
• HDLM
• HP-UX multipath
The following figure uses an example to show an overview of path
management:

8-2 Managing paths

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Figure 8-1 Overview of path management

Explorer menu items for managing paths

The following table shows the Explorer menu items used for managing
paths, and which Hitachi Global Link Manager Software (Global Link Manager)
management permissions are required for operating these items.

Table 8-1 Explorer menu items for managing paths

Explorer menu Permissions

Submenu Command Admin Modify View

Resources Hosts Yes Yes Yes

Storage systems Yes Yes Yes

My Groups Host Groups Yes Yes Yes

Functions for managing paths

The following table shows the functions for managing paths, and which Global
Link Manager management permissions are required for operating these
functions.

Managing paths 8-3

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Table 8-2 List of functions for managing paths

Permissions
Functions
Admin Modify# View#

Viewing a summary of paths Yes Yes Yes

Viewing a list of paths Yes Yes Yes

Switching a path status Yes Yes No

Resetting the number of path I/O counts and I/O Yes Yes No
errors

Viewing a list of storage systems Yes Yes Yes

Viewing individual storage system information Yes Yes Yes

#
A user with Modify or View permission can perform this function only for
objects (such as paths, HBA ports, and storage systems) that belong to
hosts affiliated with that user.
Related topics
• Viewing a summary of paths on page 8-4
• Viewing a list of paths on page 8-7
• Resetting the number of path I/O counts and I/O errors on page 8-19
• Viewing a list of storage systems on page 8-20
• Viewing individual storage systems information on page 8-20
• Viewing a list of physical storage systems (e.g. of a virtual storage
machine) on page 8-21
• Viewing physical storage system information (e.g. of a virtual storage
machine) on page 8-22

Viewing a summary of paths

You can view summarized information for the number of paths in each path
status for paths that belong to all hosts for which you have access
permission.
Related topics
• Viewing a list of paths on page 8-7

Viewing a summary of all paths

To view a path summary for all paths:
1. In the Explorer menu, click Resources and choose Hosts.
The Hosts subwindow appears with a summary of paths that belong to all
hosts.

8-4 Managing paths

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Related topics
• Viewing a summary of paths on page 8-4
• Viewing a summary of paths for a single host on page 8-5
• Viewing a summary of paths for a host group on page 8-5
• Viewing a summary of paths for a storage system on page 8-6
• Viewing a summary of paths for a physical storage system (e.g. of a
virtual storage machine) on page 8-6
• Hosts subwindow on page A-4

Viewing a summary of paths for a single host

To view a path summary for a single host:
1. In the Explorer menu, perform one of the following steps:
¢ Click Resources and choose Hosts.
¢ Click My Groups and choose Host Groups.
The Hosts subwindow or Host Groups subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree and select the target host.
The host-name subwindow appears with a summary of paths for the host.
Related topics
• Viewing a summary of paths on page 8-4
• Viewing a summary of all paths on page 8-4
• Viewing a summary of paths for a host group on page 8-5
• Viewing a summary of paths for a storage system on page 8-6
• Viewing a summary of paths for a physical storage system (e.g. of a
virtual storage machine) on page 8-6
• Hosts subwindow on page A-4
• Host Groups subwindow on page A-148
• host-name subwindow on page A-53

Viewing a summary of paths for a host group

To view a path summary for a host group:
1. In the Explorer menu, click My Groups and choose Host Groups.
The Host Groups subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree and select the target host group.
The host-group-name subwindow appears with a summary of paths for
the host group.
Related topics
• Viewing a summary of paths on page 8-4
• Viewing a summary of all paths on page 8-4

Managing paths 8-5

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 • Viewing a summary of paths for a single host on page 8-5
• Viewing a summary of paths for a storage system on page 8-6
• Viewing a summary of paths for a physical storage system (e.g. of a
virtual storage machine) on page 8-6
• Host Groups subwindow on page A-148
• host-group-name subwindow on page A-162

Viewing a summary of paths for a storage system

To view a path summary for a storage system:
1. In the Explorer menu, click Resources and choose Storage systems.
The Storage systems subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree and select the target storage system.
The Storage-system-Name subwindow appears with a summary of paths
for the storage system. Select the tab that corresponds to the target
multipath management software as necessary.
Related topics
• Viewing a summary of paths on page 8-4
• Viewing a summary of all paths on page 8-4
• Viewing a summary of paths for a single host on page 8-5
• Viewing a summary of paths for a host group on page 8-5
• Viewing a summary of paths for a physical storage system (e.g. of a
virtual storage machine) on page 8-6
• Storage systems subwindow on page A-106
• storage-system-name subwindow on page A-108

Viewing a summary of paths for a physical storage system (e.g. of a

virtual storage machine)
1. In the Explorer menu, click Resources and then select Physical
Storage Information.
The Storage systems subwindow (physical storage information) appears.
2. Expand the object tree and then select the target storage system.
The Storage-system-Name subwindow (physical storage information)
appears and displays a summary of paths for the physical storage system.
Select the tab that corresponds to the target multipath management
software as necessary.
Related topics
• Viewing a summary of paths on page 8-4
• Viewing a summary of all paths on page 8-4
• Viewing a summary of paths for a single host on page 8-5
• Viewing a summary of paths for a host group on page 8-5

8-6 Managing paths

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 • Viewing a summary of paths for a storage system on page 8-6

Viewing a list of paths

You can view information on paths that belong to all hosts for which you have
access permissions.
Related topics
• Viewing a summary of paths on page 8-4

Viewing a list of paths for a single host

To view a list of paths for a single host:
1. In the Explorer menu, perform one of the following steps:
¢ Click Resources and choose Hosts.
¢ Click My Groups and choose Host Groups.
The Hosts subwindow or Host Groups subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree and select the target host.
The host-name subwindow appears with the Paths tabbed-page
displaying a list of paths for the host.
Related topics
• Viewing a list of paths on page 8-7
• Viewing a list of paths for a host HBA port on page 8-7
• Viewing a list of paths for a host group on page 8-8
• Viewing a list of paths for a storage system on page 8-9
• Viewing a list of paths for a CHA port of a storage system on page 8-9
• Viewing a list of paths for a physical storage system (e.g. of a virtual
storage machine) on page 8-10
• Viewing a list of paths for a CHA port of a physical storage system (e.g. of
a virtual storage machine) on page 8-11
• Viewing a list of paths for a multipath LU on page 8-11
• Viewing a list of paths that have a specific status on page 8-12
• Hosts subwindow on page A-4
• Host Groups subwindow on page A-148
• host-name subwindow on page A-53

Viewing a list of paths for a host HBA port

To view a list of paths for a host HBA port:
1. In the Explorer menu, perform one of the following steps:
¢ Click Resources and choose Hosts.

Managing paths 8-7

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 ¢ Click My Groups and choose Host Groups.
The Hosts subwindow or Host Groups subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree and select the target host.
The host-name subwindow appears.
3. In the HBA Ports tabbed-page, or Port / Channel tabbed-page, select
the check boxes of the HBA ports, and then click the Show Paths button.
The Show Paths - host-name dialog box appears with a list of paths for
the selected HBA port.
Related topics
• Viewing a list of paths on page 8-7
• Viewing a list of paths for a single host on page 8-7
• Viewing a list of paths for a host group on page 8-8
• Viewing a list of paths for a storage system on page 8-9
• Viewing a list of paths for a CHA port of a storage system on page 8-9
• Viewing a list of paths for a physical storage system (e.g. of a virtual
storage machine) on page 8-10
• Viewing a list of paths for a CHA port of a physical storage system (e.g. of
a virtual storage machine) on page 8-11
• Viewing a list of paths for a multipath LU on page 8-11
• Viewing a list of paths that have a specific status on page 8-12
• Hosts subwindow on page A-4
• Host Groups subwindow on page A-148
• host-name subwindow on page A-53
• host-name dialog box on page A-79

Viewing a list of paths for a host group

To view a list of paths for a host group:
1. In the Explorer menu, click My Groups and choose Host Groups.
The Host Groups subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree and select the target host group.
The host-group-name subwindow appears with the Paths tabbed-page
displaying a list of paths for the host group.
Related topics
• Viewing a list of paths on page 8-7
• Viewing a list of paths for a single host on page 8-7
• Viewing a list of paths for a host HBA port on page 8-7
• Viewing a list of paths for a storage system on page 8-9
• Viewing a list of paths for a CHA port of a storage system on page 8-9

8-8 Managing paths

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 • Viewing a list of paths for a physical storage system (e.g. of a virtual
storage machine) on page 8-10
• Viewing a list of paths for a CHA port of a physical storage system (e.g. of
a virtual storage machine) on page 8-11
• Viewing a list of paths for a multipath LU on page 8-11
• Viewing a list of paths that have a specific status on page 8-12
• Hosts subwindow on page A-4
• host-group-name subwindow on page A-162

Viewing a list of paths for a storage system

To view a list of paths for a storage system:
1. In the Explorer menu, click Resources and choose Storage systems.
The Storage systems subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree and select the target storage system.
The Storage-system-Name subwindow appears with the Paths tabbed-
page displaying a list of paths for the storage system. Select the tab that
corresponds to the target multipath management software as necessary.
Related topics
• Viewing a list of paths on page 8-7
• Viewing a list of paths for a single host on page 8-7
• Viewing a list of paths for a host HBA port on page 8-7
• Viewing a list of paths for a host group on page 8-8
• Viewing a list of paths for a CHA port of a storage system on page 8-9
• Viewing a list of paths for a physical storage system (e.g. of a virtual
storage machine) on page 8-10
• Viewing a list of paths for a CHA port of a physical storage system (e.g. of
a virtual storage machine) on page 8-11
• Viewing a list of paths for a multipath LU on page 8-11
• Viewing a list of paths that have a specific status on page 8-12
• Storage systems subwindow on page A-106
• storage-system-name subwindow on page A-108

Viewing a list of paths for a CHA port of a storage system

To view a list of paths for a CHA port of a storage system:
1. In the Explorer menu, click Resources and choose Storage systems.
The Storage systems subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree and select the target storage system.
The Storage-system-Name subwindow appears. Select the tab that
corresponds to the target multipath management software as necessary.

Managing paths 8-9

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 3. In the CHA Ports tabbed-page, or Targets tabbed-page, select the
check boxes of the CHA ports, and then click the Show Paths button.
The Show Paths - Storage-system-Name dialog box appears with a list of
paths for the selected CHA port.
Related topics
• Viewing a list of paths on page 8-7
• Viewing a list of paths for a single host on page 8-7
• Viewing a list of paths for a host HBA port on page 8-7
• Viewing a list of paths for a host group on page 8-8
• Viewing a list of paths for a storage system on page 8-9
• Viewing a list of paths for a physical storage system (e.g. of a virtual
storage machine) on page 8-10
• Viewing a list of paths for a CHA port of a physical storage system (e.g. of
a virtual storage machine) on page 8-11
• Viewing a list of paths for a multipath LU on page 8-11
• Viewing a list of paths that have a specific status on page 8-12
• Storage systems subwindow on page A-106
• storage-system-name subwindow on page A-108
• storage-system-name dialog box on page A-69

Viewing a list of paths for a physical storage system (e.g. of a virtual

storage machine)
1. In the Explorer menu, click Resources and then select Physical
Storage Information.
The Storage systems subwindow (physical storage information) appears.
2. Expand the object tree and then select the target storage system.
The Storage-system-Name subwindow (physical storage information)
appears. The Paths tab lists the paths for the physical storage system.
Select the tab that corresponds to the target multipath management
software as necessary.
Related topics
• Viewing a list of paths on page 8-7
• Viewing a list of paths for a single host on page 8-7
• Viewing a list of paths for a host HBA port on page 8-7
• Viewing a list of paths for a host group on page 8-8
• Viewing a list of paths for a storage system on page 8-9
• Viewing a list of paths for a CHA port of a storage system on page 8-9
• Viewing a list of paths for a CHA port of a physical storage system (e.g. of
a virtual storage machine) on page 8-11
• Viewing a list of paths for a multipath LU on page 8-11

8-10 Managing paths

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 • Viewing a list of paths that have a specific status on page 8-12

Viewing a list of paths for a CHA port of a physical storage system

(e.g. of a virtual storage machine)
1. In the Explorer menu, click Resources and then select Physical
Storage Information.
The Storage systems subwindow (physical storage information) appears.
2. Expand the object tree and then select the target storage system.
The Storage-system-Name subwindow (physical storage information)
appears. Select the tab that corresponds to the target multipath
management software as necessary.
3. In the CHA Ports List tab, select the check boxes of the CHA ports, and
then click the Show Paths button.
The Show Paths dialog box (physical storage information) appears and
lists the paths for each selected CHA port.
Related topics
• Viewing a list of paths on page 8-7
• Viewing a list of paths for a single host on page 8-7
• Viewing a list of paths for a host HBA port on page 8-7
• Viewing a list of paths for a host group on page 8-8
• Viewing a list of paths for a storage system on page 8-9
• Viewing a list of paths for a CHA port of a storage system on page 8-9
• Viewing a list of paths for a physical storage system (e.g. of a virtual
storage machine) on page 8-10
• Viewing a list of paths for a multipath LU on page 8-11
• Viewing a list of paths that have a specific status on page 8-12

Viewing a list of paths for a multipath LU

You can view a list of paths for individual Multipath LUs by displaying a list of
Multipath LUs categorized by host, host group, or storage system.
To view a list of Multipath LU paths:
1. In the Explorer menu, perform one of the following steps:
¢ Click Resources and choose Hosts.
¢ Click Resources and choose Storage systems.
¢ Click My Groups and choose Host Groups.
The Hosts subwindow, Storage systems subwindow, or Host Groups
subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree and select the target host, storage system, or host
group.

Managing paths 8-11

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 The host-name, Storage-system-Name, or host-group-name subwindow
appears. Select the tab that corresponds to the target multipath
management software as necessary.
3. In the Multipath LUs tabbed-page, or Disks tabbed-page, select the
check box of a multi-path LU, and then click the Show Paths button.
One of the following dialog boxes appears with a list of paths for the
selected Multipath LU:
¢ Show Paths - host-name dialog box
¢ Show Paths - Storage-system-Name dialog box
¢ Show Paths - host-group-name dialog box
Related topics
• Viewing a list of paths on page 8-7
• Viewing a list of paths for a single host on page 8-7
• Viewing a list of paths for a host HBA port on page 8-7
• Viewing a list of paths for a host group on page 8-8
• Viewing a list of paths for a storage system on page 8-9
• Viewing a list of paths for a CHA port of a storage system on page 8-9
• Viewing a list of paths for a physical storage system (e.g. of a virtual
storage machine) on page 8-10
• Viewing a list of paths for a CHA port of a physical storage system (e.g. of
a virtual storage machine) on page 8-11
• Viewing a list of paths that have a specific status on page 8-12
• Hosts subwindow on page A-4
• Storage systems subwindow on page A-106
• Host Groups subwindow on page A-148
• host-name subwindow on page A-53
• storage-system-name subwindow on page A-108
• host-group-name subwindow on page A-162
• host-name dialog box on page A-79
• storage-system-name dialog box on page A-69
• host-group-name subwindow on page A-162

Viewing a list of paths that have a specific status

To view a list of paths that have a specific status
1. Display a path summary for a host or storage system:
¢ To view a summary of all paths, click here.
¢ To view a summary of paths for a single host, click here.
¢ To view a summary of paths for a host group, click here.
¢ To view a summary of paths for a storage system, click here.

8-12 Managing paths

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 ¢ To view a summary of paths for a physical storage system (for
example, a virtual storage machine), click here.
2. Click the link for the number of paths in the desired path status shown in
the path summary.
The Show Paths or Show Paths - object-name dialog box appears with a
list of paths for the selected path status.
Related topics
• Viewing a summary of paths on page 8-4
• Viewing a list of paths on page 8-7
• Viewing a list of paths for a single host on page 8-7
• Viewing a list of paths for a host HBA port on page 8-7
• Viewing a list of paths for a host group on page 8-8
• Viewing a list of paths for a storage system on page 8-9
• Viewing a list of paths for a CHA port of a storage system on page 8-9
• Viewing a list of paths for a physical storage system (e.g. of a virtual
storage machine) on page 8-10
• Viewing a list of paths for a CHA port of a physical storage system (e.g. of
a virtual storage machine) on page 8-11
• Viewing a list of paths for a multipath LU on page 8-11
• Show Paths dialog box on page A-9

Filtering and viewing a list of paths

When there is a large volume of path information, it might be helpful to
specify that only certain information is to be displayed.
The following table lists the display conditions that can be specified in order
to filter paths. You can use the AND operation to combine items. Depending
on where the Filter - Path dialog box was opened, some items might not be
displayed.

Table 8-3 Conditions for filtering a list of paths

Multipath management
software
Item Description HP-UX
HDLM multipat
h

Status Equal or not equal to the status Yes Yes

selected from a drop-down list.

LDEV ID Include or do not include a specified Yes Yes

character string.

LDEV Label Include or do not include a specified Yes No

character string.

Managing paths 8-13

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Multipath management
software
Item Description HP-UX
HDLM multipat
h

Storage system Include or do not include a specified Yes Yes

Name character string.

Physical LDEV ID Include or do not include a specified Yes No

character string.

Virtual LDEV ID Include or do not include a specified Yes No

character string.

Physical Storage Include or do not include a specified Yes No

system Name character string.

Virtual Storage Include or do not include a specified Yes No

system Name character string.

Physical CHA Include or do not include a specified Yes No

character string.

Virtual CHA Include or do not include a specified Yes No

character string.

CHA Include or do not include a specified Yes Yes

character string.

Multipath LU Include or do not include a specified Yes Yes

character string.

Host Name Include or do not include a specified Yes Yes

character string.

Disk Number Equal or not equal to the value Yes No

selected from a drop-down list.

HBA Include or do not include a specified Yes Yes

character string.

HBA WWN Include or do not include a specified Yes Yes

character string.

I/O Count Less than, equal to, or greater than Yes Yes
the specified value.

I/O Errors Less than, equal to, or greater than Yes Yes
the specified value.

Type Equal or not equal to the type Yes No

selected from a drop-down list.

SLPR Equal or not equal to the value Yes No

selected from a drop-down list.

CLPR Equal or not equal to the value Yes No

selected from a drop-down list.

Path ID Less than, equal to, or greater than Yes Yes

the specified value.

8-14 Managing paths

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Multipath management
software
Item Description HP-UX
HDLM multipat
h

Path Name Include or do not include a specified Yes Yes

character string.

Intermittent Error Equal or not equal to the value Yes No

selected from a drop-down list.

To filter and view a list of paths:

1. Display a list of paths for a host or storage system.
¢ To view a list of paths for a single host, click here.
¢ To view a list of paths for a host group, click here.
¢ To view a list of paths for a list of host groups, click here.
¢ To view a list of paths for a storage system, click here.
¢ To view a list of paths for a physical storage system (for example, a
virtual storage machine), click here.
2. Click the Filter button.
The Filter - Paths dialog box appears.
3. Specify conditions and execute filtering.
The list of paths filtered according to the specified conditions is displayed.
To clear filtering, click the Filter Off button. Filtering is also cleared when
you perform an operation on the list of paths and then refresh the list,
and when you click an Explorer menu item to move to another
subwindow.
Related topics
• Viewing a list of paths on page 8-7
• Filter - Paths dialog box on page A-104

Switching path status

You can check the statuses of paths for multiple hosts by confirming the
statuses in a list of paths, and switch the status of a path by executing an
online or offline operation.
The status of a path can be switched if you are using one of the following
multi-path management software products:
• HDLM
• HP-UX multipath
To control the bandwidth, paths can be switched online or offline to increase
or decrease the number of paths that perform I/Os. Paths can also be

Managing paths 8-15

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 temporarily switched offline when an error occurs or when replacing
hardware, and then returned to the online state. You can also verify that a
corresponding alternate path exists before you switch a path offline.
The following figure shows path status transitions, caused by a user switching
path statuses, or by automatic detection of an error or recovery:

Figure 8-2 Status transition of HDLM paths

8-16 Managing paths

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Figure 8-3 Status transition of HDLM paths (P-VOL in HAM environment)

Figure 8-4 Status transition of HP-UX multipath paths

Paths in a category displayed in the list of paths can be placed online or
offline.

Managing paths 8-17

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 If you place a path online from Global Link Manager when the path is
physically disconnected, the execution result is displayed in a dialog box.
However, the result shown in the dialog box might differ from the actual
execution result. To check the correct execution result, refresh the host
information after placing a path online.
Related topics
• Viewing a list of paths on page 8-7

Switching paths online

To switch paths online:
1. Display a list of paths for a host or storage system.
¢ To view a list of paths for a single host, click here.
¢ To view a list of paths for a host HBA port, click here.
¢ To view a list of paths for a host group, click here.
¢ To view a list of paths for a storage system, click here.
¢ To view a list of paths for a CHA port of a storage system, click here.
¢ To view a list of paths for a physical storage system (for example, a
virtual storage machine), click here.
¢ To view a list of paths for a CHA port of a physical storage system (for
example, a virtual storage machine), click here.
¢ To view a list of paths for a Multipath LU, click here.
¢ To view a list of paths that have a specific status, click here.
2. From the list of paths, select the check boxes of the paths to be placed in
the Online status, and then click the Set Online button.
The Set Online dialog box appears.
3. Confirm the paths to be placed in the Online status, and then perform
the operation.
4. Check the path list to make sure that the path statuses have changed.
Related topics
• Set Online dialog box on page A-15

Switching paths offline

To switch paths offline:
1. Display a list of paths for a host or storage system.
¢ To view a list of paths for a single host, click here.
¢ To view a list of paths for a host HBA port, click here.
¢ To view a list of paths for a host group, click here.
¢ To view a list of paths for a storage system, click here.
¢ To view a list of paths for a CHA port of a storage system, click here.

8-18 Managing paths

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 ¢ To view a list of paths for a physical storage system (for example, a
virtual storage machine), click here.
¢ To view a list of paths for a CHA port of a physical storage system (for
example, a virtual storage machine), click here.
¢ To view a list of paths for a Multipath LU, click here.
¢ To view a list of paths that have a specific status, click here.
2. From the list of paths, select the check boxes of the paths to be placed in
the Offline(C) status, and then click the Set Offline button.
The Set Offline dialog box appears.
3. Confirm the paths to be placed in the Offline(C) status, and then
perform the operation.
Check the path list to make sure that the path statuses have changed.
If there is a path that cannot be placed in the Offline(C) status because
no alternate path exists (that is, if all paths in the Online status that
access a particular LU would be disabled), the applicable path is
highlighted in the Set Offline dialog box.
Related topics
• Set Offline dialog box on page A-22

Resetting the number of path I/O counts and I/O errors

If you are using HDLM for the hosts, you can reset the number of path I/O
counts and I/O errors that are counted for the HDLM of each host. You can
use Global Link Manager to reset these values remotely without having to log
in to each host.
Resetting the number of I/O counts and I/O errors after you have taken
action to resolve an error, performed hardware maintenance, or changed the
configuration of the HDLM operating environment enables you to check the
I/O counts and errors under normal operating conditions when you refresh
host information. You can also check the operating status of the load-
balancing function in the same way.

To reset the number of I/O counts and I/O errors:

1. In the Explorer menu, perform one of the following steps:
¢ Click Resources and choose Hosts.
¢ Click My Groups and choose Host Groups.
The Hosts subwindow or the Host Groups subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree and select the target host.
The host-name subwindow appears.
3. Click the Reset I/O Count button.
The Reset I/O Count - host-name dialog box appears.
4. Confirm the items to be reset, and then execute.

Managing paths 8-19

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 In the host-name subwindow, confirm that both the number of I/O counts
and the number of I/O errors have been reset to 0.

You can reset the I/O count for a path and the number of I/O errors from the
Refresh Hosts dialog box that is displayed by clicking the Refresh Hosts
button.
Related topics
• Viewing a list of paths on page 8-7
• Hosts subwindow on page A-4
• Host Groups subwindow on page A-148
• host-group-name subwindow on page A-162
• Reset I/O Count - host-name dialog box on page A-88

Viewing a list of storage systems

You can view the following information about the storage systems connected
to all hosts for which you have access permissions. Using the host storage
system icons, you can check path errors and the update status of host
information.
• Summarized information for paths that belong to all storage systems (the
number of paths in each of the path statuses)
• A list of storage systems
To view a list of storage systems:
1. In the Explorer menu, click Resources and choose Storage systems.
The Storage systems subwindow appears with a list of storage system
information.
Related topics
• Viewing individual storage systems information on page 8-20
• Viewing a list of physical storage systems (e.g. of a virtual storage
machine) on page 8-21
• Viewing physical storage system information (e.g. of a virtual storage
machine) on page 8-22
• Storage systems subwindow on page A-106

Viewing individual storage systems information

You can view the following information for each storage system:
• Summarized information for paths (the number of paths in each of the
path statuses)
• A list of paths
• A list of CHA ports

8-20 Managing paths

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 • A list of Multipath LUs
You can view storage system information to check which paths, hosts, or user
applications are connected to a storage system. This information is required
when you need to know which path statuses to switch for operations such as
replacing hardware related to a storage system or controlling the bandwidth
for paths to an individual CHA port.
To view storage system information:
1. In the Explorer menu, click Resources and choose Storage systems.
The Storage systems subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree and select the target storage system.
The Storage-system-Name subwindow appears with storage system
information. Select the tab that corresponds to the target multipath
management software as necessary.
Related topics
• Viewing a list of storage systems on page 8-20
• Viewing a list of physical storage systems (e.g. of a virtual storage
machine) on page 8-21
• Viewing physical storage system information (e.g. of a virtual storage
machine) on page 8-22
• Storage systems subwindow on page A-106
• storage-system-name subwindow on page A-108

Viewing a list of physical storage systems (e.g. of a virtual

storage machine)
You can view the following information about the physical storage systems
connected to all hosts for which you have access permissions. You can check
path errors and the update status of host information by using the icons for
each storage system.
• Summarized information for the paths that belong to all the physical
storage systems (the number of paths in each of the path statuses)
• A list of physical storage systems

To view a list of physical storage systems:

1. In the Explorer menu, click Resources and then select Physical
Storage Information.
The Storage systems subwindow (physical storage information) appears
and lists the physical storage system information.
Related topics
• Viewing a list of storage systems on page 8-20
• Viewing individual storage systems information on page 8-20

Managing paths 8-21

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 • Viewing physical storage system information (e.g. of a virtual storage
machine) on page 8-22
• Storage systems subwindow (physical storage information) on page
A-126

Viewing physical storage system information (e.g. of a

virtual storage machine)
You can view the following information for each physical storage system:
• Summarized information for paths (the number of paths in each of the
path statuses)
• A list of paths
• A list of CHA ports
• A list of Multipath LUs
You can view the physical storage system information to check which paths,
hosts, or user applications are connected to a physical storage system. This
information is required when you need to know which path statuses to switch
for operations such as replacing hardware related to a physical storage
system or controlling the bandwidth for paths to an individual CHA port.

To view the physical storage system information:

1. In the Explorer menu, click Resources and then select Physical
Storage Information.
The Storage systems subwindow (physical storage information) appears.
2. Expand the object tree and then select the target storage system.
The Storage-system-Name subwindow (physical storage information)
appears and displays the physical storage system information. Select the
tab that corresponds to the target multipath management software as
necessary.
Related topics
• Viewing a list of storage systems on page 8-20
• Viewing individual storage systems information on page 8-20
• Viewing a list of physical storage systems (e.g. of a virtual storage
machine) on page 8-21
• Storage systems subwindow (physical storage information) on page
A-126
• storage-system-name subwindow (physical storage information) on page
A-127

8-22 Managing paths

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Show list of lost paths
In the summary area, if you click the number of lost paths, the Show Lost
Paths - host-name dialog box appears.

To display the Show Lost Paths - host-name dialog box:

1. Perform one of the following steps in the Explorer menu:
¢ Click Resources and choose Hosts.
¢ Click My Groups and choose Host Groups.
The Hosts subwindow or Host Groups subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree and select the target host.
The host-name subwindow appears.
3. In the path summary area, click Lost Path.
The Show Lost Paths - host-name dialog box appears.
Note that Lost Path is not displayed when the lost paths are not detected.
Related topics
• Hosts subwindow on page A-4
• Host Groups subwindow on page A-148
• host-name subwindow on page A-53

Managing paths 8-23

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
8-24 Managing paths
Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 9
Managing alerts
This chapter describes the functions for managing alerts and explains how to
use these functions.

□ Overview

□ Viewing a list of alerts

□ Viewing alert filtering

□ Marking alerts as read

□ Marking alerts as unread

□ Deleting alerts

□ Deleting all alerts

□ Alert transfer settings

□ Configuring the lost path check option

□ Configuring email to report alerts

Managing alerts 9-1

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Overview
Global Link Manager is used to manage two types of alerts.
• Alerts reported from the hosts using an SNMP trap
When a path error occurs on hosts managed by Global Link Manager, an
SNMP trap is used to report error information from each host in the form
of an alert.
You can set up the SNMP trap notification function for hosts of HDLM
version 5.8 or later, or if you are using DMP or HP-UX multipath. By
default, the system is configured to report alerts from each host. To
change this setting, use the server.snmp.auto_set property of the
Global Link Manager server server.properties file. For details about the
server.snmp.auto_set property, see the Hitachi Command Suite Global
Link Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.
• Alerts reported if path errors are detected when host information is
updated, or due to a check for lost paths.
Error information can be reported for each host in the form of an alert if a
path error is detected when information about hosts managed by Global
Link Manager is refreshed.
By default, the system is configured to report alerts from each host. To
change this setting, use the server.trouble_detection.enable
property of the Global Link Manager server server.properties file.
For details about the server.trouble_detection.enable property, see
the Hitachi Command Suite Global Link Manager Installation and
Configuration Guide.
Also, by setting the option for checking lost paths, an alert is reported if
degradation of path redundancy is detected for paths that are in a state in
which they can issue I/Os normally, or are in a blocked state due to
operations performed offline. By default, the system is configured not to
report alerts when checking lost paths. To change this setting, see
Configuring the lost path check option on page 9-12.
When an alert is reported, the number of unconfirmed alerts displayed on the
Dashboard menu of the Global Link Manager GUI is refreshed. You can
forward alerts from the Global Link Manager server to the SNMP transfer
destination server, where any desired application can be used to manage the
alerts.
Alerts are collected in the Global Link Manager server, and the collection
results are sent by email to the SMTP server. If multiple alerts with the same
message ID are reported during a specified collection time, only the last alert
is sent to the SMTP server. The default collection time is 10 minutes. To
change the configuration, specify the server.alert_gathering.interval
property in the server.properties file on the Global Link Manager server.
An anonymous address is used by default as the source address of the emails
that are sent from the Global Link Manager server. If you want to change this
source address, specify an address for the
server.alert_email.from.address property in the server.properties file
for the Global Link Manager server. For details about these properties, see

9-2 Managing alerts

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
the Hitachi Command Suite Global Link Manager Installation and
Configuration Guide.

Tip:
• If the host OS is VMware, an alert is not sent when a remote
management client stopped. After starting the remote management
client, do not forget to update the host information.
• If the host OS is VMware, an alert might be received approximately 5
minutes late.
• When there are no more paths left for the LU, the system determines that
the configuration has changed, and the alert will not be reported.
The following figure uses an example to show an overview of alert
management:

Figure 9-1 Overview of alert management

The following table lists the severities of alerts and the corresponding
message IDs.

Table 9-1 Severity of alerts and message IDs

Alert type Severity Message ID Description

Alerts reported Critical KAIF60147-E#2 Sent by the last path

from the hosts via connected to a LU when an
SNMP trap#1 KAIF60157-E#2#3 error occurs on all of the
paths connected to the LU

Managing alerts 9-3

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Alert type Severity Message ID Description

KAPL08026-E#2

Error KAIF60145-E#5 Sent for each path when the

path is in an offline state
KAIF60155-E#3#4

KAIF04057-E Sent for each host when a

failure occurs during fault
monitoring polling between
a remote management
client and a host.

KAPL08022-E Sent for each path when a

path error occurs

KAPL08027-E Sent for each path when an

intermittent path error
occurs

Information KAIF60102-I Sent for each DMP or HP-UX

multipath (for each host)
when the alert settings for
hosts are changed

KAPL04058-I Sent for each host when

fault monitoring polling is
restored.

KAIF60146-I Sent for each path when a

path is recovered
KAIF60156-I

KAPL08032-I

KAPL04042-I Sent for each HDLM (for

each host) when the alert
settings for hosts are
changed

Alerts reported if Critical KAIF20163-E#2 Sent for each host when an

path errors are error occurs on all paths for
detected when an LU
host information is
updated KAIF20105-E For HDLM or HP-UX
multipath:
Sent for each CHA
when the loss of CHA is
detected
For DMP Windows:
Sent for each Target
when the loss of
Target is detected

KAIF20106-E For HDLM or HP-UX

multipath:
Sent for each HBA
WWN when the loss of
HBA WWN is detected
For DMP Windows:

9-4 Managing alerts

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Alert type Severity Message ID Description
Sent for each Port /
Channel when the loss
of Port / Channel is
detected

Error KAIF20164-E Sent for each host when a

path error occurs

KAIF20104-E Sent for each path when a

lost path is detected

#1
If you are using HDLM for the hosts, a host reports the alerts with the
message IDs shown in the table regardless of the filtering level specified
in the error log level in the HDLM environment settings.
#2
The message ID shows that the severity of this message is "Error".
However, the icon displayed in the Dashboard menu and the icon for
Severity in the Alerts subwindow show that the severity of this message
is "Critical". In case of DMP host, this alert might not be notified.
#3
If HP-UX multipath is being used, this message might be sent even after a
path is recovered.
#4
If HP-UX multipath is being used, this message is not sent when a user
performs online or offline operations.
The values specified for receiving alerts and for the maximum number of
alerts to retain are specified in the Global Link Manager server
server.properties file. To transfer alerts, you must specify a transfer
destination server. For details about the server.properties file and how to
transfer alerts, see the Hitachi Command Suite Global Link Manager
Installation and Configuration Guide.

Explorer menu item for managing alerts

The following table shows the Explorer menu item used for managing alerts
and which Global Link Manager management permissions are required for
operating these items.

Table 9-2 Explorer menu item for managing alerts

Explorer menu Permissions

Menu command Admin Modify View

Alerts Yes Yes Yes

Managing alerts 9-5

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Functions for managing alerts
The following table shows the functions for managing alerts and which Global
Link Manager management permissions are required for using these
functions.

Table 9-3 List of functions for managing alerts

Permissions
Functions
Admin Modify# View#

Viewing a list of alerts Yes Yes Yes

Viewing alert filtering Yes Yes Yes

Marking alerts as read Yes Yes No

Marking alerts as unread Yes Yes No

Deleting alerts Yes Yes No

Deleting all alerts Yes No No

Configuring the Lost Path Check option Yes No No

Configuring email that report alerts Yes No No

#
A user with the Modify or View permission can use this function only for
alerts reported by hosts within resource groups associated with that user.
Related topics
• Configuring alerts for a host on page 5-32
• Refreshing host information on page 5-15
• Viewing a list of alerts on page 9-6
• Viewing alert filtering on page 9-7
• Marking alerts as read on page 9-9
• Marking alerts as unread on page 9-10
• Deleting alerts on page 9-10
• Configuring email to report alerts on page 9-12

Viewing a list of alerts

You can view a list of alert information that has been reported by a host.
When there are alerts that have not been confirmed yet, you can view the
alert list and check the error information.

Tip:
• If you delete a managed host, all alerts reported from the host are
deleted. Therefore, before you delete a host, be sure to check all alerts
that are reported.

9-6 Managing alerts

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 • Changing the host name of a management target host or using a different
host name to start a host in a multi-boot environment also changes the
host name that is displayed for alerts, even for alerts that were reported
before the change. If you only want to change the host name but keep
the IP address the same, you should check for unconfirmed alerts before
you make the change.
• When HP-UX multipath is being used, if many errors or error recoveries
occur at the same time on a path connected to a managed host, Global
Link Manager might not be able to display all the alerts about the path
errors or recoveries. To check the most recent path status, refresh host
information.
To view a list of alerts:
1. In the Explorer menu, click Alerts.
The Alerts subwindow appears with a list of alert information. Critical-
level and unread alerts are highlighted.
To view information for the host and storage system from which the error
originated, click the host-name or Storage-system-Name link associated
with the alert. For details about actions to take for reported errors, check
the message ID of the alert (see the multipath management software
documentation).
Related topics
• Viewing alert filtering on page 9-7
• Marking alerts as read on page 9-9
• Marking alerts as unread on page 9-10
• Deleting alerts on page 9-10
• Alerts subwindow on page A-198

Viewing alert filtering

When there is a large volume of alert information or when you are browsing
through alert information, it might be helpful to specify that only certain
information is to be displayed.
The following table lists the display conditions that can be specified in order
to filter the alerts. You can use the AND operation to combine items.

Table 9-4 Viewing alert filtering

Multipath management software

Item Description HP-UX

DMP
HDLM multipa
(Windows)
th

Severity Equal or not equal to the Yes Yes Yes

severity selected from a drop-
down list.

Managing alerts 9-7

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Multipath management software

Item Description HP-UX

DMP
HDLM multipa
(Windows)
th

Read Equal or not equal to a status Yes Yes Yes

selected from the drop-down
list.

Date Relationship (which is earlier or Yes Yes Yes

later) between the time when
an alert occurred and a
specified date (in yyyy-mm-dd
format).

LDEV ID Include or do not include a Yes Yes No

specified character string.

LDEV Label Include or do not include a Yes Yes No

specified character string.

LUN Include or do not include a No No Yes

specified character string.

Storage system Include or do not include a Yes Yes Yes

Name specified character string.

CHA Include or do not include a Yes Yes No

specified character string.

Physical LDEV Include or do not include a Yes No No

ID specified character string.

Physical Storage Include or do not include a Yes No No

system Name specified character string.

Physical CHA Include or do not include a Yes No No

specified character string.

Target Include or do not include a No No Yes

specified character string.

Multipath LU Include or do not include a Yes Yes No

specified character string.

Disk Include or do not include a No No Yes

specified character string.

Host Name Include or do not include a Yes Yes Yes

specified character string.

HBA Include or do not include a Yes Yes No

specified character string.

HBA WWN Include or do not include a Yes Yes No

specified character string.

Port / Channel Include or do not include a No No Yes

specified character string.

Category Equal or not equal to the Yes Yes Yes

category selected from a drop-
down list.

9-8 Managing alerts

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Multipath management software

Item Description HP-UX

DMP
HDLM multipa
(Windows)
th

Component Equal or not equal to the Yes Yes Yes

component type selected from
a drop-down list.

Message ID Include or do not include a Yes Yes Yes

specified character string.

Description Include or do not include a Yes Yes Yes

specified character string.

To filter alerts:
1. In the Explorer menu, choose Alerts.
The Alerts subwindow appears.
2. Click the Filter button.
The Filter - Alerts dialog box appears.
3. Specify conditions and execute filtering.
Alert information filtered according to the specified conditions is displayed
in the Alerts subwindow.
To clear filtering, click the Filter Off button. Filtering is also cleared when
you mark alerts as read, when you delete alerts, and when you click an
Explorer menu item to move to another subwindow.
Related topics
• Viewing a list of alerts on page 9-6
• Marking alerts as read on page 9-9
• Marking alerts as unread on page 9-10
• Deleting alerts on page 9-10
• Alerts subwindow on page A-198
• Filter - Alerts dialog box on page A-208

Marking alerts as read

After you have checked an alert, you can apply a mark to it. This allows you
to manage whether or not alerts have been checked. When you mark an alert
as read, the number of unconfirmed alerts on the Dashboard menu is
refreshed.
Alert read and unread status is common to all Global Link Manager users. If
one user marks an alert as read, all users see that alert as read.
To mark alerts as read:
1. In the Explorer menu, click Alerts.

Managing alerts 9-9

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 The Alerts subwindow appears.
2. Select the check boxes of the alerts to be marked as read, and then click
the Read button.
The alerts change to the read status.
Related topics
• Viewing a list of alerts on page 9-6
• Viewing alert filtering on page 9-7
• Marking alerts as unread on page 9-10
• Deleting alerts on page 9-10
• Alerts subwindow on page A-198

Marking alerts as unread

You can mark read alerts as unread.
Alert read and unread status is common to all Global Link Manager users. If
one user marks an alert as unread, all users see that alert as unread.
To mark alerts as unread:
1. In the Explorer menu, click Alerts.
The Alerts subwindow appears.
2. Select the check boxes of the alerts to be marked as unread, and then
click the Unread button.
The alerts change to the unread status.
Related topics
• Viewing a list of alerts on page 9-6
• Viewing alert filtering on page 9-7
• Marking alerts as read on page 9-9
• Deleting alerts on page 9-10
• Alerts subwindow on page A-198

Deleting alerts
Deleting unnecessary alerts makes it easy to manage an alerts list. If the
maximum number of alerts configured for a Global Link Manager server is
exceeded, the oldest alerts are automatically deleted.
To delete alerts:
1. In the Explorer menu, click Alerts.
The Alerts subwindow appears.
2. Select the check boxes of the alerts to be deleted, and then click the
Delete Alerts button.

9-10 Managing alerts

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 The Delete Alerts dialog box appears.
3. Make sure that the selected alerts are the ones to be deleted, and then
perform the deletion.
4. Check the Alerts subwindow to make sure that the alerts have been
deleted.
Related topics
• Deleting all alerts on page 9-11
• Viewing a list of alerts on page 9-6
• Viewing alert filtering on page 9-7
• Marking alerts as read on page 9-9
• Marking alerts as unread on page 9-10
• Alerts subwindow on page A-198
• Delete Alerts dialog box on page A-205

Deleting all alerts

You can delete all of a particular piece of multipath management software's
alerts at the same time.
To delete all alerts:
1. In the Explorer menu, click Alerts.
The Alerts subwindow appears. Select the tab that corresponds to the
target multipath management software as necessary.
2. Click the Delete All Alerts button.
The Delete Alerts dialog box appears.
3. Make sure that deleting all alerts poses no problems, and then perform
the deletion.
Check the Alerts subwindow to make sure that the alerts have been
deleted.
Related topics
• Deleting alerts on page 9-10
• Viewing a list of alerts on page 9-6
• Viewing alert filtering on page 9-7
• Marking alerts as read on page 9-9
• Marking alerts as unread on page 9-10
• Alerts subwindow on page A-198
• Delete Alerts dialog box on page A-205

Alert transfer settings

You can set the conditions used for transferring alerts.

Managing alerts 9-11

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 To set alerts to be transferred:
1. In the Explorer menu, select Alerts.
The Alerts subwindow appears.
2. Click the Configure Alert Transfer button.
The Configure Alert Transfer dialog box appears.
3. Specify each item, and then click the OK button.
Related topics
• Alerts subwindow on page A-198
• Configure Alert Transfer dialog box on page A-210

Configuring the lost path check option

You can enable or disable the Lost Path Check option.
To configure the Lost Path Check option:
1. In the Explorer menu, select Alerts.
The Alerts subwindow appears.
2. Click the Configure Lost Path Check button.
The Lost Path Check configuration dialog box appears.
3. Select the On check box or the Off check box, and then click the OK
button.
Related topics
• Alerts subwindow on page A-198
• Configure Lost Path Check dialog box on page A-211

Configuring email to report alerts

With Global Link Manager, you can use email to send alerts reported by the
host.
Email addresses are configured for each resource group. If an alert is
reported by a host that is registered in a resource group, an email is sent to
the email address configured for that resource group.
You can also configure whether to send an email based on the severity level
(alert type) of an alert. You can also send combinations of multiple alert
types.
The following table lists the functions for configuring email to report alerts,
and lists which Global Link Manager management permissions are required
for operating these functions.

9-12 Managing alerts

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Table 9-5 List of functions for configuring email to report alerts

Permissions
Functions
Admin Modify View

Displaying a list of email addresses Yes No No

Adding email address Yes No No

Removing email address Yes No No

Configuring email address Yes No No

Configuring SMTP server Yes No No

Displaying resource group information for email Yes No No

address

Adding resource group to email address Yes No No

Removing resource group from email address Yes No No

Configuring alert types to send Yes No No

Related topics
• Adding hosts to a resource group on page 6-8

Displaying a list of email addresses

To display the list of email addresses for reporting alerts:
1. In the Explorer menu, select Alerts.
The Alerts subwindow appears.
2. Click the Configure E-mail Notification button.
The E-mail Notification dialog box appears. In this dialog box, the email
addresses are displayed in a list.
Related topics
• Adding an email address on page 9-13
• Removing email addresses on page 9-14
• Configuring an email address on page 9-15
• Configuring the SMTP server on page 9-15
• Displaying resource group information for email addresses on page 9-16
• Alerts subwindow on page A-198
• E-mail Notification dialog box on page A-212

Adding an email address

To add an email address for reporting alerts:
1. In the Explorer menu, select Alerts.
The Alerts subwindow appears.

Managing alerts 9-13

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 2. Click the Configure E-mail Notification button.
The E-mail Notification dialog box appears.
3. Click the Add E-mail button.
The Add E-mail Address dialog box appears.
4. Enter the email address.
Check that the information for the added email address appears in the E-
mail Notification dialog box. If you want to add a resource group to the
email address, proceed to the next step.
5. To add a resource group to an email address that has been added, click
the Add Resource Groups button in the Add E-mail Address dialog box
(result).
The Add Resource Groups dialog box appears.
6. Select the alert types to be sent, select the check boxes in the Resource
Group List of the resource groups to add to the email address, and then
add those resource groups.
Check that the email address and the information for the resource group
added to the email address are displayed in the E-mail Notification dialog
box and the Modify Resource Group dialog box.
Related topics
• Removing email addresses on page 9-14
• Configuring an email address on page 9-15
• Alerts subwindow on page A-198
• E-mail Notification dialog box on page A-212
• Add E-mail Address dialog box on page A-213
• Add Resource Groups dialog box on page A-215
• Modify Resource Group dialog box on page A-214

Removing email addresses

To remove one or more email addresses registered as alert-notification
destinations:
1. In the Explorer menu, select Alerts.
The Alerts subwindow appears.
2. Click the Configure E-mail Notification button.
The E-mail Notification dialog box appears.
3. Select the check boxes for the email addresses to remove from the E-
mail Address List, and then click the Remove E-mail button.
The Remove E-mail Addresses dialog box appears.
4. Confirm the email addresses to be removed, and then remove those email
addresses.
Confirm that the email addresses have been removed in the E-mail
Notification dialog box.
Related topics

9-14 Managing alerts

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 • Adding an email address on page 9-13
• Configuring an email address on page 9-15
• Alerts subwindow on page A-198
• E-mail Notification dialog box on page A-212
• Remove E-mail Addresses dialog box on page A-213

Configuring an email address

To configure an email address for reporting alerts:
1. In the Explorer menu, select Alerts.
The Alerts subwindow appears.
2. Click the Configure E-mail Notification button.
The E-mail Notification dialog box appears.
3. Click the link to the email address shown in the E-mail Address List.
The Modify E-mail Address dialog box appears.
4. Configure the email address.
Check that the information for the email address has been updated in the
E-mail Notification dialog box and the Modify Resource Group dialog box.
Related topics
• Adding an email address on page 9-13
• Removing email addresses on page 9-14
• Alerts subwindow on page A-198
• E-mail Notification dialog box on page A-212
• Modify E-mail Address dialog box on page A-213
• Modify Resource Group dialog box on page A-214

Configuring the SMTP server

If a firewall is set up between the Global Link Manager server and the
destination server, be sure to set the IP address and port number of the
destination server for the firewall.
To configure the SMTP server required for reporting alerts via email:
1. In the Explorer menu, select Alerts.
The Alerts subwindow appears.
2. Click the Configure E-mail Notification button.
The E-mail Notification dialog box appears.
3. Click the Configure SMTP Server button.
The Configure SMTP Server dialog box appears.
4. Configure the settings for the SMTP server.
5. To send a test email, click the Send Test E-mail button.

Managing alerts 9-15

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 A test email is sent to the email address that is set in the E-mail
Notification dialog box, and the window in which you can check the
execution result appears.
6. If you have changed the existing SMTP server settings, restart Global Link
Manager sever to apply the changes.
Related topics
• Alerts subwindow on page A-198
• E-mail Notification dialog box on page A-212
• Configure SMTP Server dialog box on page A-214

Displaying resource group information for email addresses

To display a list of registered resource group information for email addresses:
1. In the Explorer menu, select Alerts.
The Alerts subwindow appears.
2. Click the Configure E-mail Notification button.
The E-mail Notification dialog box appears.
3. Click the link to the number of resource groups shown in the E-mail
Address List.
The Modify Resource Group dialog box appears. The registered resource
groups for the email addresses that you have selected are shown in the
dialog box.
Related topics
• Adding resource groups to an email address on page 9-16
• Removing a resource group from an email address on page 9-17
• Configuring alert types on page 9-18
• Alerts subwindow on page A-198
• E-mail Notification dialog box on page A-212
• Modify Resource Group dialog box on page A-214

Adding resource groups to an email address

You can add one or more resource groups to email addresses for reporting
alerts. Multiple resource groups can be added to a single email address.
To add resource groups to an email address:
1. In the Explorer menu, select Alerts.
The Alerts subwindow appears.
2. Click the Configure E-mail Notification button.
The E-mail Notification dialog box appears.
3. Click the link to the number of resource groups shown in the E-mail
Address List.

9-16 Managing alerts

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 The Modify Resource Group dialog box appears.
4. Click the Add Groups button.
The Add Resource Groups dialog box appears.
5. Select the alert types to be sent, select the check boxes in the Resource
Group List of the resource groups to add to the email address, and then
add those resource groups.
Check that the information for the resource group added to the email
address appears in the Modify Resource Group dialog box.
Related topics
• Removing a resource group from an email address on page 9-17
• Configuring alert types on page 9-18
• Alerts subwindow on page A-198
• E-mail Notification dialog box on page A-212
• Modify Resource Group dialog box on page A-214
• Add Resource Groups dialog box on page A-215

Removing a resource group from an email address

To remove a resource group from an email address for reporting alerts:
1. In the Explorer menu, select Alerts.
The Alerts subwindow appears.
2. Click the Configure E-mail Notification button.
The E-mail Notification dialog box appears.
3. Click the link to the number of resource groups shown in the E-mail
Address List.
The Modify Resource Group dialog box appears.
4. Select the check boxes for the resource groups to remove from the
Resource Group List, and then click the Remove Groups button.
The Remove Resource Groups dialog box appears.
5. Confirm the resource groups to be removed, and then remove those
resource groups.
Confirm that the resource groups have been removed in the Modify
Resource Group dialog box.
Related topics
• Adding resource groups to an email address on page 9-16
• Configuring alert types on page 9-18
• Alerts subwindow on page A-198
• E-mail Notification dialog box on page A-212
• Modify Resource Group dialog box on page A-214
• Remove Resource Groups dialog box on page A-215

Managing alerts 9-17

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Configuring alert types
To configure alert types to be reported by email for each resource group:
1. In the Explorer menu, select Alerts.
The Alerts subwindow appears.
2. Click the Configure E-mail Notification button.
The E-mail Notification dialog box appears.
3. Click the link to the number of resource groups shown in the E-mail
Address List.
The Modify Resource Group dialog box appears.
4. From the Resource Group List, select the check boxes for the resource
groups to configure, and then click the Modify Alert Type button.
The Modify Alert Type dialog box appears.
5. Select the alert type to be sent, and then configure that alert type.
Confirm that the alert types for the resource groups have been updated in
the Modify Resource Group dialog box.
Related topics
• Adding resource groups to an email address on page 9-16
• Removing a resource group from an email address on page 9-17
• Alerts subwindow on page A-198
• E-mail Notification dialog box on page A-212
• Modify Resource Group dialog box on page A-214
• Modify Alert Type dialog box on page A-216

9-18 Managing alerts

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 10
Managing licenses
This chapter describes the functions for managing licenses and describes how
to use these functions.

□ Overview

□ Viewing license information

□ Editing a license

Managing licenses 10-1

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Overview
In Global Link Manager, licenses that can cover the number of managed hosts
must be registered. If the licenses have not been registered, or if a license
has expired, users cannot log in to the Global Link Manager.
The following license keys are available.

Table 10-1 License key types

License type Description

Permanent license key A license key that allows for permanent use of the product

Temporary license key A license key that is valid for a limited time, such as the
user evaluation period for a product. The license period is
120 days

Emergency license key A temporary license key for use while waiting for a
permanent license key to be issued. The license period is
30 days

Explorer menu items for managing licenses

The following table shows the Explorer menu items used for managing
licenses and which permissions are required for using these items.

Table 10-2 Explorer menu items for managing licenses

Explorer menu Permissions

Admin, Modify,
View (for
Admin (for user
Submenu Command Global Link
management)
Manager
management)

Settings License Info Yes Yes

Functions for managing licenses

The following table shows the functions for managing licenses and which
permissions are required for using these functions.

Table 10-3 List of functions for managing licenses

Permissions
Admin, Modify,
Functions View (for
Admin (for user
Global Link
management)
Manager
management)

Viewing license information Yes Yes

10-2 Managing licenses

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Permissions
Admin, Modify,
Functions View (for
Admin (for user
Global Link
management)
Manager
management)

Editing a license Yes Yes

Related topics
• Viewing license information on page 10-3
• Editing a license on page 10-3

Viewing license information

You can view the following information for configured licenses.
• Global Link Manager version information
• License key type
• Information on the number of license keys registered and the number of
hosts (for permanent license keys)
• Number of days remaining until license expiration (for temporary license
keys and emergency license keys)
To view license information:
1. In the Explorer menu, click Settings and choose License Info.
The License Info subwindow appears with information about the
configured licenses.
Related topics
• Editing a license on page 10-3
• License Info subwindow on page A-219

Editing a license
You can edit information for a configured license.
When a temporary license key or an emergency license key is used, configure
a new license before the existing license expires.
To edit a license:
1. In the Explorer menu, click Settings and choose License Info.
The License Info subwindow appears.
2. Click the Edit License button.
The Edit License dialog box appears.

Managing licenses 10-3

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 3. Edit the license information and refresh.
4. Check the License Info subwindow to make sure that the license
information has been refreshed.
Related topics
• Viewing license information on page 10-3
• License Info subwindow on page A-219
• License, About, and Edit License dialog boxes on page A-220

10-4 Managing licenses

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 11
Setting security
This chapter describes the functions for setting security options during login
and explains how to use these functions.

□ Overview

□ Viewing conditions for passwords

□ Changing conditions for passwords

□ Viewing settings for automatic account lock

□ Changing settings for automatic account lock

□ Viewing a preview of the warning banner

□ Editing a warning banner

□ Deleting a warning banner

Setting security 11-1

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Overview
You can set security options that enhance security during login.
In Global Link Manager, you can use the login security functions to perform
the following:
• Set conditions for the structure of the passwords that are specified, in
order to make it more difficult for third parties to guess user passwords.
• Lock a user account when an invalid password is entered more than a
specified number of times in succession.
• Display a desired (warning banner) in the user login window during login
as a security measure.
You can use the configuration file or Global Link Manager server commands to
set security options. If the Global Link Manager server is running in a cluster
environment, set security options from the Global Link Manager server. For
details on how to set security options in the Global Link Manager server, see
the Hitachi Command Suite Global Link Manager Installation and
Configuration Guide.

Explorer menu items for setting security

The following table shows the Explorer menu item that is used to configure
security settings and the permission that is required.

Table 11-1 Explorer menu items for setting security

Explorer menu Permissions

Admin, Modify,
View (for
Admin (for user
Submenu Command Global Link
management)
Manager
management)

Administration Security Yes No

Functions for setting security

The following table shows the functions that can be used to configure security
settings and the permissions that are required.

11-2 Setting security

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Table 11-2 List of functions for setting security

Permissions
Admin, Modify,
Functions View (for
Admin (for user
Global Link
management)
Manager
management)

Viewing conditions for passwords Yes No

Changing conditions for passwords Yes No

Viewing settings for automatic account lock Yes No

Changing settings for automatic account lock Yes No

Viewing a preview of warning banner Yes No

Editing warning banner Yes No

Deleting warning banner Yes No

Related topics
• Viewing conditions for passwords on page 11-3
• Changing conditions for passwords on page 11-4
• Viewing settings for automatic account lock on page 11-4
• Changing settings for automatic account lock on page 11-5
• Viewing a preview of the warning banner on page 11-6
• Editing a warning banner on page 11-7
• Deleting a warning banner on page 11-7

Viewing conditions for passwords

You can view the following password conditions:
• The minimum length for a password (minimum number of characters)
• The number of characters that must be used in a password (upper-case,
lower-case, numerics, and symbols)
• Whether the password can be the same as the user ID
To view password conditions:
1. In the Explorer menu, choose Administration and then Security.
The Security subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree and choose Password under Security.
The Password subwindow appears. Password conditions are displayed in
the Password subwindow.
Related topics

Setting security 11-3

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 • Changing conditions for passwords on page 11-4
• Security subwindow on page A-194
• Password subwindow on page A-194

Changing conditions for passwords

To enhance security, you can set password conditions to make it more
difficult for third parties to guess user passwords. Password conditions can
include a minimum number of characters and a required combination of
character types. If the Global Link Manager server is running in a cluster
environment, set security options from the Global Link Manager server. For
details about how to configure settings on a Global Link Manager server, see
the Hitachi Command Suite Global Link Manager Installation and
Configuration Guide.
The specified password conditions are applied when a new user is added and
when a password is changed. Because newly set conditions are not applied to
existing user passwords, existing users can continue to log into Global Link
Manager using their existing passwords, even if those passwords do not
conform to the newly established conditions.
To change password conditions:
1. In the Explorer menu, choose Administration and then Security.
The Security subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree and choose Password under Security.
The Password subwindow appears.
3. Click the Edit Settings button.
The Password dialog box appears.
4. Change the password conditions and then apply the changes.
Use the Password subwindow to check that the conditions have been
updated.
Related topics
• Viewing conditions for passwords on page 11-3
• Security subwindow on page A-194
• Password subwindow on page A-194
• Password dialog box on page A-195

Viewing settings for automatic account lock

You can display whether automatic account locking is enabled. If automatic
locking is enabled, the system also displays the number of unsuccessful login
attempts that will trigger account locking.
To view the automatic account lock settings:
1. In the Explorer menu, choose Administration and then Security.

11-4 Setting security

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 The Security subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree and choose Account Lock under Security.
The Account Lock subwindow appears. The automatic account lock
settings are displayed in this subwindow.
Related topics
• Changing settings for automatic account lock on page 11-5
• Security subwindow on page A-194
• Account Lock subwindow on page A-196

Changing settings for automatic account lock

To prevent attempts by unauthorized individuals to log in using the trial-and-
error method of finding the valid password, you can set the system to
automatically lock a user account when an invalid password is entered a
specified number of times in succession. If the Global Link Manager server is
running in a cluster environment, set security options from the Global Link
Manager server. For details about how to configure settings on a Global Link
Manager server, see the Hitachi Command Suite Global Link Manager
Installation and Configuration Guide.
You can specify whether to use the automatic account lock function. When
this function is to be used, you must also set the number of unsuccessful
login attempts that will cause an account to be locked. Note that even when
the automatic account lock function is set, the built-in account (user ID:
System) can never be locked.

If you want to lock an account that is managed by the external authentication

server, you have to manually lock it.
If other Hitachi Command Suite products are being used in addition to Global
Link Manager, successive unsuccessful attempts to log in to any of the Hitachi
Command Suite products are counted in determining the count for applying
automatic account locking for that user account. The count of successive login
failures associated with a specific user account is cleared when login to that
account is successful.
When you change the setting for the number of login failures, the new setting
does not apply retroactively to users who have already exceeded the new
value or to user accounts that are already locked. For example, if you change
the number of login failures from five to two, the account of a user who had
already failed to log in, say, three times in a row would not be locked
immediately. However, if the next attempt (the fourth attempt) to log in to
Global Link Manager under that account is also unsuccessful, the account will
be locked.
Any time an attempt is made to log in to Global Link Manager using an invalid
password for a user account that is already logged into Global Link Manager,
that user account is locked automatically. If this happens, the user can
continue to perform operations until logout, but will be unable to start Tuning
Manager from the Dashboard menu.

Setting security 11-5

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 After an account is locked, the user cannot log in to Global Link Manager until
the account is unlocked. When an attempt is made to log in from a locked-out
account, the standard authentication error is displayed but the user is not
notified that the account is locked. To determine whether a user account is
locked, check the Status field in the list of users.
To change the automatic account lock settings:
1. In the Explorer menu, choose Administration and then Security.
The Security subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree and choose Account Lock under Security.
The Account Lock subwindow appears.
3. Click the Edit Settings button.
The Account Lock dialog box appears.
4. Change the automatic account lock settings and then apply the changes.
Use the Account Lock subwindow to check that the settings have been
updated.
Related topics
• Locking user accounts on page 3-10
• Unlocking user accounts on page 3-11
• Viewing settings for automatic account lock on page 11-4
• Security subwindow on page A-194
• Account Lock subwindow on page A-196
• Account Lock dialog box on page A-196

Viewing a preview of the warning banner

You can preview the warning banner that can be edited in the Global Link
Manager GUI.
To preview the warning banner:
1. In the Explorer menu, choose Administration and then Security.
The Security subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree and choose Warning Banner under Security.
The Warning Banner subwindow appears, in which the current warning
banner is displayed.
Related topics
• Editing a warning banner on page 11-7
• Deleting a warning banner on page 11-7
• Security subwindow on page A-194
• Warning Banner subwindow on page A-197

11-6 Setting security

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Editing a warning banner
As a security measure during login, you can display a message in the user
login window. You can edit the displayed message in HTML format.
You can also set HTML tags by following the guides provided in the Edit
Message dialog box. However, if any of the following applies, you must use
Global Link Manager server commands to set up the warning banner:
• You want to specify a message for a different locale.
• You want to use HTML tags that are not supported by the Global Link
Manager GUI.
• The Global Link Manager server is being used in a cluster environment.
For details about how to set up a warning banner on the Global Link Manager
server, see the Hitachi Command Suite Global Link Manager Installation and
Configuration Guide.
To edit the warning banner:
1. In the Explorer menu, choose Administration and then Security.
The Security subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree and choose Warning Banner under Security.
The Warning Banner subwindow appears.
3. Click the Edit Message button.
The Edit Message dialog box appears.
4. Edit the message to be set up as the warning banner and then apply the
changes.
Clicking the Preview button displays a preview in HTML. Make sure that
the message is displayed correctly, and then apply it.
Related topics
• Viewing a preview of the warning banner on page 11-6
• Deleting a warning banner on page 11-7
• Security subwindow on page A-194
• Warning Banner subwindow on page A-197
• Edit Message dialog box on page A-197

Deleting a warning banner

You can delete the warning banner that is already set up.
To delete the warning banner:
1. In the Explorer menu, choose Administration and then Security.
The Security subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree and choose Warning Banner under Security.
The Warning Banner subwindow appears.

Setting security 11-7

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 3. Click the Edit Message button.
The Edit Message dialog box appears.
4. Click the Delete button to clear the message, and then apply the
deletion.
In the Warning Banner subwindow, make sure that the message has been
deleted.
Related topics
• Viewing a preview of the warning banner on page 11-6
• Editing a warning banner on page 11-7
• Security subwindow on page A-194
• Warning Banner subwindow on page A-197
• Edit Message dialog box on page A-197

11-8 Setting security

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 12
Exporting management information
This chapter describes the functions for batch output of Global Link Manager
management information to a CSV file and explains how to use these
functions.

□ Overview

□ Exporting to a CSV file

Exporting management information 12-1

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Overview
Information about all managed paths can be output to a CSV file, where other
applications can be used to examine that information. The last update time
for the following information is output:
• List of hosts
• List of paths
• List of alerts

Function for exporting information to a CSV file

The following table shows the function used for exporting information to a
CSV file and which Global Link Manager management permissions are
required for performing this operation.

Table 12-1 List of functions for exporting information to a CSV file

Permissions
Function
Admin Modify# View#

Exporting management information to a CSV file Yes Yes Yes

#
A user with the Modify or View permission can use this function only for
objects that belong to hosts within resource groups associated with that
user.
Related topics
• Exporting to a CSV file on page 12-2

Exporting to a CSV file

You can use one operation to output, to a CSV file, a list of hosts, paths, and
alerts managed by Global Link Manager.
The number of items that can be output to a CSV file has increased with each
version of Global Link Manager. By specifying an older version of Global Link
Manager, you can acquire only the items that were output by that version of
Global Link Manager version, allowing you to continue using existing
applications without having to make any changes, even after you have
upgraded Global Link Manager. To output a CSV file in a format of an earlier
Global Link Manager version, use the gui.export.version property of the
Global Link Manager server server.properties file. For details about the
gui.export.version property, see the Hitachi Command Suite Global Link
Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.
The following table describes the items that are output for CSV files.

12-2 Exporting management information

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Table 12-2 Management information items output to CSV files

Output item Description

[ExportCSV] The creation time of the CSV file is output.

[Hosts] The list of hosts displayed in the Hosts subwindow is output.

[Paths] The list of paths displayed in the Show Paths dialog box is output. All of
the paths managed by the user are included in the list.

[Alerts] The list of alerts displayed in the Alerts subwindow is output.

[END] This is output when the CSV output ends normally.

[Error] This is output with an error message if the CSV output ends abnormally.

The following table describes the items output to CSV files and the Global
Link Manager version or versions for which they were output.

Table 12-3 CSV file format for management information

Global Link Manager

Output item
version
"[ExportCSV]" All versions
"Time" All versions
"[Hosts]" All versions
"Name","Last Update 5.0, 5.6, 5.7, 6.0, 6.1
Time","Online","Offline(C)","Offline(E)","Online(E
)","OS","HDLM","IP Address"

"Name","Last Update 6.2

Time","Online","Offline(C)","Offline(E)","Online(E
)","IP Address","OS","Multipath
Software","Version","Enabled","Disabled"

"Name","Last Update 6.3

Time","Online","Offline(C)","Offline(E)","Online(E
)","IP Address","OS","Multipath
Software","Version","Enabled, Healthy","Disabled,
Unhealthy"

"Name","Last Update 7.2

Time","Online","Offline(C)","Offline(E)","Online(E
)","Online(S)"#1,"IP Address","OS","Multipath
Software","Version","Enabled, Healthy","Disabled,
Unhealthy"

"Name","Last Update 7.3, 7.4.1

Time","Online","Offline(C)","Offline(E)","Online(E
)","Online(S)"#1,"IP Address","Agent Service
Port","OS","Multipath
Software","Version","Enabled, Healthy","Disabled,
Unhealthy"

"Name","Last Update 7.6

Time","Online","Offline(C)","Offline(E)","Online(E

Exporting management information 12-3

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Global Link Manager
Output item
version
)","Online(S)"#1,"Online(D)"#1,"IP Address","Agent
Service Port","OS","Multipath
Software","Version","Enabled, Healthy","Disabled,
Unhealthy"

"Name","Last Update 8.0

Time","Online","Offline(C)","Offline(E)","Online(E
)","Online(S)"#2,"Online(D)"#2,"IP Address","Agent
Service Port","OS","Multipath
Software","Version","Enabled, Healthy","Disabled,
Unhealthy"

"[Paths]" All versions

"Status","Intermittent Error","Host Name","HDev 5.0
Name","HBA Port","Path ID","Path Name","Path
Type","Subsystem Name","Ldev","SLPR","CHA
Port","CLPR"

"Status","Intermittent Error","Host 5.6

Name","Multipath LU","HBA Port","Path ID","Path
Name","Path Type","Subsystem
Name","Ldev","SLPR","CHA Port","CLPR"

"Status","LDEV","Subsystem Name","CHA 5.7, 6.0

Port","Multipath LU","Host Name","HBA Port","Path
Type","I/O Count","I/O Errors","SLPR","CLPR","Path
ID","Path Name","Intermittent Error"

"Status","LDEV","Subsystem Name","CHA 6.1

Port","Multipath LU","Host Name","HBA Port","Path
Type","I/O Count","I/O Errors","SLPR","CLPR","Path
ID","Path Name","Intermittent Error","HBA Port
WWN"

"Status","LDEV","LDEV Label","Subsystem Name","CHA 6.2

Port","Multipath LU","Host Name","HBA Port","HBA
Port WWN","Path Type","I/O Count"#3,"I/O
Errors","SLPR","CLPR","Path ID","Path
Name","Intermittent Error","LUN Serial
Number","Operations - Read","Operations -
Write","I/O Size - Read","I/O Size - Unit","I/O
Size - Write","I/O Size - Unit","Avg Time(ms) -
Read","Avg Time(ms) - Write","Array
Port","Metadevice","HBA Controller"

"Status","LDEV","LDEV Label","Subsystem Name","CHA 6.3

Port","Multipath LU","Host Name","HBA Port","HBA
Port WWN","Path Type","I/O Count"#3,"I/O
Errors","SLPR","CLPR","Path ID","Path
Name","Intermittent Error","LUN Serial
Number","Operations - Read","Operations -
Write","I/O Size - Read","I/O Size - Unit","I/O
Size - Write","I/O Size - Unit","Avg Time(ms) -
Read","Avg Time(ms) - Write","Array
Port","Metadevice","HBA
Controller","LUN","Target","Disk","Port /
Channel","Bytes- Read","Bytes- Write","Primary"

12-4 Exporting management information

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Global Link Manager
Output item
version

"Status","LDEV","Org-LDEV ID"#4,"Physical LDEV 7.2, 7.3

ID"#5,"LDEV Label","Subsystem Name","Org-Storage
system Name"#4,"Physical Storage system
Name"#5,"CHA Port","Physical CHA
Port"#5,"Multipath LU","Host Name","HBA Port","HBA
Port WWN","Path Type","I/O Count"#3,"I/O
Errors","SLPR","CLPR","Path ID","Path
Name","Intermittent Error","LUN Serial
Number","Operations - Read","Operations -
Write","I/O Size - Read","I/O Size - Unit","I/O
Size - Write","I/O Size - Unit","Avg Time(ms) -
Read","Avg Time(ms) - Write","Array
Port","Metadevice","HBA
Controller","LUN","Target","Disk","Port /
Channel","Bytes- Read","Bytes- Write","Primary"

"Status","LDEV","Org-LDEV ID"#4,"Physical LDEV 7.4.1, 7.6

ID"#5,"LDEV Label","Subsystem Name","Org-Storage
system Name"#4,"Physical Storage system
Name"#5,"CHA Port","Physical CHA
Port"#5,"Multipath LU","Disk Number","Host
Name","HBA Port","HBA Port WWN","Path Type","I/O
Count"#3,"I/O Errors","SLPR","CLPR","Path
ID","Path Name","Intermittent Error","LUN Serial
Number","Operations - Read","Operations -
Write","I/O Size - Read","I/O Size - Unit","I/O
Size - Write","I/O Size - Unit","Avg Time(ms) -
Read","Avg Time(ms) - Write","Array
Port","Metadevice","HBA
Controller","LUN","Target","Disk","Port /
Channel","Bytes- Read","Bytes- Write","Primary"

"Status","LDEV","LDEV Label","Storage system 8.0

Name","Physical LDEV ID"#6,"Physical Storage
system Name"#6,"Physical CHA Port"#7,"CHA
Port","Multipath LU","Disk Number","Host
Name","HBA Port","HBA Port WWN","Path Type","I/O
Count"#3,"I/O Errors","SLPR","CLPR","Path
ID","Path Name","Intermittent Error","LUN Serial
Number","Operations - Read","Operations -
Write","I/O Size - Read","I/O Size - Unit","I/O
Size - Write","I/O Size - Unit","Avg Time(ms) -
Read","Avg Time(ms) - Write","Array
Port","Metadevice","HBA
Controller","LUN","Target","Disk","Port /
Channel","Bytes- Read","Bytes- Write","Primary"

"[Alerts]" All versions

"Severity","Mark","Date","Host 5.0
Name","Category","Component","Message
ID","Description"

Exporting management information 12-5

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Global Link Manager
Output item
version
"Severity","Mark","Time","Host 5.6
Name","Category","Component","Message
ID","Description"

"Severity","Read","Time","LDEV","Subsystem 5.7, 6.0

Name","CHA Port","Multipath LU","Host Name","HBA
Port","Category","Component","Message
ID","Description"

"Severity","Read","Time","LDEV","Subsystem 6.1
Name","CHA Port","Multipath LU","Host Name","HBA
Port","Category","Component","Message
ID","Description","HBA Port WWN"

"Severity","Read","Time","LDEV","LDEV 6.2
Label","Subsystem Name","CHA Port","Multipath
LU","Host Name","HBA Port","HBA Port
WWN","Category","Component","Message
ID","Description","LUN Serial Number","Array
Port","Metadevice","HBA Controller"

"Severity","Read","Time","LDEV","LDEV 6.3
Label","Subsystem Name","CHA Port","Multipath
LU","Host Name","HBA Port","HBA Port
WWN","Category","Component","Message
ID","Description","LUN Serial Number","Array
Port","Metadevice","HBA
Controller","LUN","Target","Disk","Port / Channel"

"Severity","Read","Time","LDEV","Org-LDEV 7.2, 7.3, 7.4.1, 7.6

ID"#4,"Physical LDEV ID"#5,"LDEV Label","Subsystem
Name","Org-Storage system Name"#4,"Physical Storage
system Name"#5,"CHA Port","Physical CHA
Port"#5,"Multipath LU","Host Name","HBA Port","HBA
Port WWN","Category","Component","Message
ID","Description","LUN Serial Number","Array
Port","Metadevice","HBA
Controller","LUN","Target","Disk","Port / Channel"

"Severity","Read","Time","LDEV","LDEV 8.0
Label","Storage system Name","Physical LDEV
ID"#6,"Physical Storage system Name"#6"Physical
CHA Port"#7,"CHA Port","Multipath LU","Host
Name","HBA Port","HBA Port
WWN","Category","Component","Message
ID","Description","LUN Serial Number","Array
Port","Metadevice","HBA
Controller","LUN","Target","Disk","Port / Channel"

"[END]" All versions

"[Error]" All versions (This is output
when the CSV output ends
abnormally.)

Notes

12-6 Exporting management information

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 ¢ If an error occurs while the CSV file is being output, the output
processing might be stopped, and the file might not be output in a
proper format.
¢ If the gui.ham.view properties in the server.properties file for the
Global Link Manager server are set to true, and the version of the
CSV file format is earlier than 7.2, paths with the Online(S) status and
paths with the Online(D) status are displayed as paths with the
Offline(E) status.
¢ If the gui.ham.view properties in the server.properties file for the
Global Link Manager server are set to true, and the version of the
CSV file format is 7.2 or later and earlier than 7.6, paths with the
Online(D) status are displayed as paths with the Offline(S) status.
#1
This is displayed if the gui.ham.view properties in the
server.properties file for the Global Link Manager server are set to
true. If the gui.ham.view properties are set to false, the paths are
displayed as paths with the Offline(E) status. For details about the
gui.ham.view properties, see the Hitachi Command Suite Global Link
Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.
#2
These items are output if the gui.physical.view and gui.ham.view
properties in the server.properties file of the Global Link Manager
server are true. For details about the gui.physical.view property and
the gui.ham.view property, see the Hitachi Command Suite Global Link
Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.
#3
When DMP is used, the number of read and write requests, which are
issued from the operating system to the storage system, are displayed in
the Global Link Manager GUI, but the total number of requests is only
displayed when the information is output to a CSV file.
#4
This is displayed if the gui.ham.view properties in the
server.properties file for the Global Link Manager server are set to
true. For details about the gui.ham.view properties, see the Hitachi
Command Suite Global Link Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.
#5
This is displayed if the gui.id_take_over.view properties in the
server.properties file for the Global Link Manager server are set to
true. For details about the gui.id_take_over.view properties, see the
Hitachi Command Suite Global Link Manager Installation and
Configuration Guide.
#6
This is displayed if the gui.physical.view properties in the
server.properties file for the Global Link Manager server are set to

Exporting management information 12-7

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 true. For details about the gui.physical.view properties, see the
Hitachi Command Suite Global Link Manager Installation and
Configuration Guide.
#7
These items are output if the gui.physical.view and
gui.id_take_over.view properties in the server.properties file of the
Global Link Manager server are true. For details about the
gui.physical.view property and the gui.id_take_over.view property,
see the Hitachi Command Suite Global Link Manager Installation and
Configuration Guide.
To export path information to a CSV file:
To use the GUI
In the global tasks bar area, click File and then choose Export to specify
the output destination.
The data is exported to the CSV file of the specified destination. The
default file name is Export.csv. For details on file formats, see Table
12-3 CSV file format for management information on page 12-3.
Make sure that the CSV output processing has finished successfully, and
[END] has been output at the end of the file.

Tip: If an error occurred during the output processing of the CSV file, an
error message is not displayed in the Export dialog box. At the end of the
CSV file, [Error] and an error message are output.

To use the CLI

Execute the following command to output a CSV file. This command can
be executed by users who have Admin permissions:
Global-Link-Manager-installation-destination-folder\bin
\hglamexportcsv { -dir CSV-file-output-destination-folder [-v
version-number] [-f CSV-file-name] [-o] | [-h] }
The description of each parameter is as follows:
-dir CSV-file-output-destination-folder
Use an absolute path to specify the output destination of the CSV file.
If the specified folder name contains spaces, enclose the entire path
in double quotation marks (").
-v version-number
Specify the version number of the CSV file output format. If this
parameter is not specified, a CSV file is output in the format with the
version number specified by gui.export.version in
server.properties.
-f CSV-file-name
Specify the name of the CSV file to be output. If the specified file
name contains spaces, enclose the entire name in double quotation
marks ("). However, you cannot specify a space at the end of the
name. Also, the following symbols cannot be used in the file name:

12-8 Exporting management information

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 \, /, :, *, ?, ", <, >, |, %, =, ^, , (comma), ;, &
If this parameter is not specified, a CSV file is output with the default
file name Export.csv.
-o
Specify this parameter to overwrite a file with the same file name as
that to be output to the file output destination. If this parameter is not
specified, an error message is output and processing stops without
overwriting the file with the same name.
-h
Displays the syntax of the hglamexportcsv command.
For details about CSV file formats, see Table 12-3 CSV file format for
management information on page 12-3.

Exporting management information 12-9

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
12-10 Exporting management information
Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 13
Generating reports on path availability
This chapter describes the function used to output, to a CSV file, reports on
path availability and explains how to use this function.

□ Overview

□ Creating a report

Generating reports on path availability 13-1

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Overview
You can output, to a CSV file, information related to the operating record of
paths that belong to a host. For hosts on which HDLM version 5.9 or later has
been installed, you can output data for a maximum of 90 days prior to the
date on which the report is created.
In Global Link Manager, the functions used to output path availability reports
can be used to do the following:
• Acquire details about path errors, such as when path errors occurred,
whether path errors have been recovered, and the types of problems that
occurred while the administrator was unavailable.
• Use an application of your choosing to process and use the output CSV
file.
• Check outside the guaranteed range when the normal number of paths
and path availability per LU are defined in a service level agreement
(SLA).
The following table lists the reports that can be output.

Table 13-1 Report types for path availability information

Report type Description

Path Availability Report Reports on the availability of each path over a

specified period of time. The values that are output are
calculated from path status log information.
If the host OS is VMware, the calculation of path
availability might be inaccurate by approximately five
minutes.

Path Status Log Logs events over a specified period of time such as
those corresponding to path status changes (error
occurrence and recovery) and the starting and
stopping of the HDLM manager.
If the host OS is VMware, the time that is recorded in
the log might have a margin of error of approximately
five minutes.

The path availability information that is used to create reports is acquired

from the HDLM of each host during host information updating and is saved on
the Global Link Manager server as a path status log (the log file that is the
basis of the information that is output in reports covering specified periods of
time).
By default, the path availability information (path status log) is not acquired.
To create a report, you must specify acquisition of this information
beforehand in the server.pathreport.enable property of the Global Link
Manager server server.properties file. For details about enabling and
disabling acquisition of information (server.pathreport.enable property),
and about how to specify the location and size of the file to be saved, see the
Hitachi Command Suite Global Link Manager Installation and Configuration
Guide.

13-2 Generating reports on path availability

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Tip:
• New settings are not applied immediately after you change the enable or
disable setting for acquisition of the availability information on the Global
Link Manager server. In this case, you must apply (update) the host
information to start or stop acquiring path availability information.
• Regardless of whether information acquisition is enabled or disabled
(using the server.pathreport.enable property), a report containing
previously acquired information can be output. If no path availability
information exists for the specified report period, however, the report is
output with no information.
• If the name of the host that is acquiring path availability information is
changed, the host name used when an event occurred will be output to
the path status log. However, the new host name will be output to the
path availability report (that is, information before and after the name
change will be merged and output using the new host name).
• If you delete a host that is acquiring path availability information, the
path availability information will also be deleted. When you want to
change the IP address or port number of a host, you need to delete the
host, and then register the host again. Therefore, in this case, path
information before the change is also deleted.
The following figure uses an example to show an overview of generating
reports on path availability information:

Figure 13-1 Overview of generating reports on path availability

information

Generating reports on path availability 13-3

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Explorer menu items for generating reports on path availability
The following table shows the Explorer menu items used for generating
reports on path availability and the Global Link Manager management
permissions that are required for using these items.

Table 13-2 Explorer menu items for generating reports on path availability

Explorer menu Permissions

Submenu Command Admin Modify View

Resource Host Yes Yes Yes

My Groups Host Groups Yes Yes Yes

Function for generating reports on path availability

The following table shows the function that is used to output reports on path
availability and the Global Link Manager management permissions that are
required for using this item.

Table 13-3 List of functions for generating reports on path availability

information

Permissions
Function
Admin Modify# View#

Creating reports Yes Yes Yes

#
A user who has the Modify or View permission can use this function only
for hosts within resource groups associated with that user.
Related topics
• Refreshing host information on page 5-15
• Creating a report on page 13-4

Creating a report
You can create a path availability report or status log by specifying the host
and the period to be covered by the report. The report can be output to any
directory as a CSV file.

CSV file format

The following tables list the CSV file formats for outputting Table 13-4 CSV
file format for path availability reports on page 13-5 and Table 13-5 CSV
file format for the path status log on page 13-7.

13-4 Generating reports on path availability

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Table 13-4 CSV file format for path availability reports

Output item Description

[Report Type] -- Type of report (displays Path Availability)

[Report Start Date Beginning date of the period covered by the report
Window]
End Date Ending date of the period covered by the report

[Path Host Name Name of host to which the path belongs

Availability]#1
Path Name Path name.
The components of a path name depend on the host's
operating system.
• AIX: HBA-adaptor-number. bus-number.target-
ID.host-LU-number
• HP-UX, Linux, Solaris, Windows, VMware: host-
port-number.bus-number.target-ID.host-LU-
number
If the specified report period includes time during
which acquisition#2 of path availability information for
the host was disabled or during which an error
occurred in the acquired path availability information,
an asterisk (*) is added to the end of the path name.
If the host OS is VMware, an asterisk (*) might be
added to the end of the path name in the following
situations:
• When a remote management client stopped, log
files were overwritten because a large amount of
log files were output to the host and the
maximum size of the log files was exceeded.
• The host was restarted.
Example: 08.1V.00000000000707EF.0002*

Storage Name of the storage system connected to the path.

system Name A storage system name consists of three components
separated by a period:
• vendor-ID: Storage system's vendor
UNKNOWN is displayed if the storage information
cannot be recognized.
• model-ID: Storage system's model name
UNKNOWN is displayed if the storage information
cannot be recognized.
• serial-number: Storage system's serial number
A hyphen (-) is displayed if the storage
information cannot be recognized.

Physical When a path is migrated using a virtual ID, displays

Storage the name of the storage system that is connected by
system Name the migration-destination path.

LDEV ID LDEV number of the storage system connected to the

path

Generating reports on path availability 13-5

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Output item Description

Physical LDEV When a path is migrated using a virtual ID, the LDEV
ID number of the migration destination is displayed.

LDEV Label Label information associated with the LDEV

Path Uptime The period of time the path was operational within the
specified report period.
This is the total time during which the Status was Up
(online status) in the path status log.
Unit: seconds

Path The period of time during which the path was blocked
Downtime or was not recognized within the specified report
period.
This is the total of the following:
• The period of time the Status in the path status
log was Down (Offline(C), Offline(E),
Online(E), Online(S), or Online(D) status)
• Value of Unrecognized Time
Unit: seconds

Unrecognized Of the Path Downtime, the amount of time during

Time which the path was not recognized.
This is the total of the following within the specified
report period:
• The period of time during which the path was not
recognized because it had been deleted after
having been recognized
• The period of time during which the HDLM
manager was stopped
• The period of time from when the HDLM manager
was restarted to when the existing path was
recognized
Unit: seconds

Evaluation A period of time within the specified report time frame

Period used for evaluation when calculating path availability
(Path Uptime + Path Downtime).
The following time periods are excluded:
• Time period for the path to be recognized the first
time
• Time period during which acquisition#2 of path
availability information for the host was disabled
• Time period during which an error existed in the
acquired path availability information
Unit: seconds

Path Path availability during the specified report period

Availability (Path Uptime / Evaluation Period x 100). The
calculation result will be rounded to two decimal places
and then output.
Unit: %

13-6 Generating reports on path availability

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Output item Description

# of Path Number of path errors that occurred in the path during

Errors the specified report period

# of Number of times the HDLM manager shut down during

Shutdowns the specified report period

[Information] -- This is output when no path availability information

exists for the specified report period.

[END] -- This is output when the CSV output ends normally.

[Error] -- This is output with an error message if the CSV output

ends abnormally.

Note
If an error occurs while the CSV file is being output, the output processing
might be stopped, and the file might not be output in a proper format.
#1
Items are sorted in order of Host Name and Path Name, and are each
output on a separate line within the Path Availability area.

#2
By default, acquisition of path availability information (path status log) for
a host is disabled. To change the acquisition setting, use the
server.pathreport.enable property in the server.properties file of
the Global Link Manager server. For details about the
server.pathreport.enable property, see the Hitachi Command Suite
Global Link Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

Table 13-5 CSV file format for the path status log

Output item Description

[Report Type] -- Type of report (displays Path Status Log)

[Report Start Date Beginning date of the period covered by the report
Window]
End Date Ending date of the period covered by the report

[Path Status Time Time at which an event occurred (in the local time of the
Logs]#1 target host)

Host Name Name of host to which the path belongs

Path Name Path name.#2

The components of a path name depend on the host's
operating system:
• AIX: HBA-adaptor-number. bus-number.target-
ID.host-LU-number
• HP-UX, Linux, Solaris, Windows, VMware: host-port-
number.bus-number.target-ID.host-LU-number

Generating reports on path availability 13-7

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Output item Description

Storage Name of the storage system connected to the path.#2

system
A storage system name consists of three components
Name
separated by a period:
• vendor-ID: Storage system's vendor
UNKNOWN is displayed if the storage information cannot
be recognized.
• model-ID: Storage system's model name
UNKNOWN is displayed if the storage information cannot
be recognized.
• serial-number: Storage system's serial number
A hyphen (-) is displayed if the storage information
cannot be recognized.

Physical When a path is migrated using a virtual ID, displays the

Storage name of the storage system that is connected by the
system migration-destination path.
Name

LDEV ID LDEV number of the storage system connected to the

path#2

Physical When a path is migrated using a virtual ID, the LDEV

LDEV ID number of the migration destination is displayed.

LDEV Label Label information associated with the LDEV

Event Event related to a change in the path's status, to an HDLM

manager start or stop operation, or to an operation to
enable or disable acquisition of path availability
information on the host.#2
For details about the output event names, see Table 13-6
List of events output to the path status log on page
13-9.

Status Path status after an event occurs. One of the following is

output:#2
• Up: Online status
• Down: Offline(C), Offline(E), Online(E),
Online(S), or Online(D) status

# of Paths Number of paths connected to the LDEV after an event

occurs#2

Log ID Log ID assigned in the order that events occur. When an

error occurs in path availability information acquired from
the host, a hyphen (-) is output.

Note An error message is output when an error occurs in path

availability information acquired from the host.

[Information] -- This is output when no path availability information exists

for the specified report period.

[END] -- This is output when the CSV output ends normally.

13-8 Generating reports on path availability

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Output item Description

[Error] -- This is output with an error message if the CSV output

ends abnormally.

Note
If an error occurs while the CSV file is being output, the output processing
might be stopped, and the file might not be output in a proper format.
#1
Items are sorted in order of Host Name and Time, and are each output on
a separate line within the Path Status Logs area.

#2
For host-based events (HDLM Shutdown, HDLM Up, Path Status Logging
Enabled, or Path Status Logging Disabled) and errors that occurred in
path availability information acquired from the host, a hyphen (-) is
displayed.

Table 13-6 List of events output to the path status log

Event name Description

Path Detected The path was recognized. This event occurs when one of
the following occurs:
• The HDLM manager recognizes a new path.
• The HDLM manager recognizes an existing path after
the manager restarts.

Path Up The path was recovered from an error. (A path in the

Offline(C), Offline(E), Online(E), Online(S), or
Online(D) status entered the Online status.)

Path Down An error occurred in the path. (A path in the Online

status entered the Offline(C), Offline(E), Online(E),
Online(S), or Online(D) status.)

HDLM Shutdown The HDLM manager on the host stopped.

When the host OS was VMware, the HDLM manger on
the remote management client stopped.

HDLM Up The HDLM manager on the host started.

When the host OS was VMware, the HDLM manager on
the remote management client started.

Path Status Logging Enabled Acquisition# of path availability information of the host
started.

Path Status Logging Disabled Acquisition# of path availability information of the host
stopped.

HDLM Watching Failed When the host OS was VMware, an error occurred while
acquiring path availability information (path status logs)
during the process of fault monitoring polling between
remote management clients and a host.

Generating reports on path availability 13-9

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Event name Description

HDLM Watching Succeeded When the host OS was VMware, host events were
acquired.

VMware Host Start When the host OS was VMware, host started.

#
By default, acquisition of path availability information (path status log) for
a host is disabled. To change the acquisition setting, use the
server.pathreport.enable property in the server.properties file of
the Global Link Manager server. For details about the
server.pathreport.enable property, see the Hitachi Command Suite
Global Link Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.
To process output CSV files to meet the needs of the user, see the following
output definitions, which use EBNF notation:

ReportFile ::= HeaderSection DataSection EndSection

HeaderSection ::= ReportTypeSection ReportWindowSection

ReportTypeSection ::= "[Report Type]" EOL "Path Availability" | "Path Status
Log" EOL
ReportWindowSection ::= "[Report Window]" EOL ReportWindowStartDate
ReportWindowEndDate
ReportWindowStartDate ::= "Start Date" (YYYY-MM-DD) EOL
ReportWindowEndDate ::= "End Date" (YYYY-MM-DD) EOL

DataSection ::= PathAvailabilitySection | PathStatusLogSection

PathAvailabilitySection ::= "[Path Availability]" EOL PathAvailabilityHeaders

PathAvailabilityValue* EOL
PathAvailabilityHeaders ::= "Host Name" "Path Name" "Subsystem Name" "LDEV"
"LDEV Label" "Path Uptime" "Path Downtime" "Unrecognized Time" "Evaluation
Period" "Path Availability" "# of Path Errors" "# of Shutdowns" EOL
PathAvailabilityValue ::= Host Name,Path Name,Subsystem Name,LDEV,Path
Uptime,Path Downtime,Unrecognized Time,Evaluation Period,Path Availability,#
of Path Errors,# of Shutdowns EOL

PathStatusLogSection ::= "[Path Status Logs]" EOL PathStatusLogHeaders

PathStatusLogValue* EOL
PathStatusLogHeaders ::= "Time" "Host Name" "Path Name" "Subsystem Name"
"LDEV" "LDEV Label" "Event" "Status" "# of Paths" "Log ID" "Note" EOL
PathStatusLogValue ::= Time,Host Name,Path Name,Subsystem
Name,LDEV,Event,Status,# of Paths,Log ID,Note EOL

EndSection ::= "[END]" EOL

EOL ::= "\n"
If an error occurred during output of a CSV file, output is stopped and the
following error section (ErrorSection) is added.
ErrorSection ::= EOL EOL ErrorSection_SecHeader ErrorSection_Body EOL
ErrorSection_SecHeader ::= "[Error]" EOL
ErrorSection_Body ::= (message body) " [" (message ID) "]" EOL
If no path activity information exists, the following content is output. The
header section (HeaderSection), data section (DataSection), and end section
(EndSection) are the same as those given above.
ReportFile ::= HeaderSection DataSection InformationSection EndSection
InformationSection ::= EOL EOL InformationSection_SecHeader

13-10 Generating reports on path availability

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 InformationSection_Body EOL
InformationSection_SecHeader ::= "[Information]" EOL
InformationSection_Body :: = (message body) "[" (message ID) "]" EOL

Creating a report
For the end date of the period a report covers, you cannot specify a date later
than the date of the most recent update on the target host. You must update
the host information beforehand.
The default file name is as follows (you can change this file name at the time
of output):
• Path availability report: pathavailability_start-date-of-report-
period.csv
• Path status log: pathstatuslog_start-date-of-report-period.csv

You can create a report by selecting a displayed host or host group or by

selecting multiple hosts or host groups from a displayed list of hosts or host
groups.
Related topics
• Refreshing host information on page 5-15

Creating a single host report

To create path availability information reports, the host must be using HDLM
version 5.9 or later. In versions earlier than 5.9, the Create Report button is
not displayed in the host-name subwindow selected by using the Global Link
Manager GUI.
To create a report:
1. Perform one of the following steps in the Explorer menu:
¢ Click Resources and choose Hosts
¢ Click My Groups and choose Host Groups
The Hosts subwindow or Host Groups subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree and select a target host.
The host-name subwindow appears.
3. Click the Create Report button.
The Create Report dialog box appears.
4. Enter the report type and report window, and then execute the function.
A CSV file is output to the specified directory. For details on file formats,
see Table 13-4 CSV file format for path availability reports on page 13-5
or Table 13-5 CSV file format for the path status log on page 13-7.
Make sure that the CSV output processing finished successfully, and that
[END] has been output at the end of the file.

Generating reports on path availability 13-11

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Tip: If an error occurs during output of the CSV file, no error message is
displayed in the Create Report dialog box. [Error] and an error message
are output at the end of the CSV file.
Related topics
• Creating a report on page 13-4
• Creating a multiple host report on page 13-12
• Creating a single host group report on page 13-13
• Creating a multiple host group report on page 13-13
• Hosts subwindow on page A-4
• Host Groups subwindow on page A-148
• host-name subwindow on page A-53
• Create Report dialog box on page A-51

Creating a multiple host report

To create path availability information reports, the hosts must be using HDLM
version 5.9 or later.
To create a report:
1. Perform one of the following steps in the Explorer menu:
¢ Click Resources and choose Hosts
¢ Click My Groups and choose Host Groups
The Hosts subwindow or Host Groups subwindow appears.
2. If the Host Groups subwindow appears, expand the object tree and
choose a target host group.
The host-group-name subwindow appears.
3. In the Hosts tabbed page, select the check boxes of the hosts for which
you want to create a report, and then click the Create Report button.
The Create Report dialog box appears.
4. Enter the report type and report window, and then execute the function.
A CSV file is output to the specified directory. For details on file formats,
see Table 13-4 CSV file format for path availability reports on page 13-5
or Table 13-5 CSV file format for the path status log on page 13-7.
Make sure that the CSV output processing finished successfully, and that
[END] has been output at the end of the file.

Tip: If an error occurs during output of the CSV file, no error message is
displayed in the Create Report dialog box. [Error] and an error message
are output at the end of the CSV file.
Related topics
• Creating a report on page 13-4
• Creating a single host report on page 13-11

13-12 Generating reports on path availability

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 • Creating a single host group report on page 13-13
• Creating a multiple host group report on page 13-13
• Hosts subwindow on page A-4
• Host Groups subwindow on page A-148
• host-group-name subwindow on page A-162
• Create Report dialog box on page A-51

Creating a single host group report

To create path availability information reports, the hosts must be using HDLM
version 5.9 or later.
To create a report:
1. In the Explorer menu, choose My Group and then Host Groups.
The Host Groups subwindow appears.
2. Expand the object tree and select a target host group.
The host-group-name subwindow appears.
3. Click the Create Report button.
The Create Report dialog box appears.
4. Enter the report type and report window, and then execute the function.
A CSV file is output to the specified directory. For details on file formats,
see Table 13-4 CSV file format for path availability reports on page 13-5
or Table 13-5 CSV file format for the path status log on page 13-7.
Make sure that the CSV output processing has finished successfully, and
that [END] has been output at the end of the file.

Note
If an error occurs during output of the CSV file, no error message is
displayed in the Create Report dialog box. [Error] and an error
message are output at the end of the CSV file.
Related topics
• Creating a report on page 13-4
• Creating a single host report on page 13-11
• Creating a multiple host report on page 13-12
• Creating a multiple host group report on page 13-13
• Host Groups subwindow on page A-148
• host-group-name subwindow on page A-162
• Create Report dialog box on page A-51

Creating a multiple host group report

To create path availability information reports, the hosts must be using HDLM
version 5.9 or later.

Generating reports on path availability 13-13

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 To create a report:
1. In the Explorer menu, choose My Group and then Host Groups.
The Host Groups subwindow appears.
2. In the Groups tabbed-page, select the check boxes of the host groups for
which you want to create a report, and then click the Create Report
button.
The Create Report dialog box appears.
3. Enter the report type and report window, and then execute the function.
A CSV file is output to the specified directory. For details on file formats,
see Table 13-4 CSV file format for path availability reports on page 13-5
or Table 13-5 CSV file format for the path status log on page 13-7.
Make sure that the CSV output processing has finished successfully, and
that [END] has been output at the end of the file.

Tip: If an error occurs during output of the CSV file, no error message is
displayed in the Create Report dialog box. [Error] and an error message
are output at the end of the CSV file.
Related topics
• Creating a report on page 13-4
• Creating a single host report on page 13-11
• Creating a multiple host report on page 13-12
• Creating a single host group report on page 13-13
• Host Groups subwindow on page A-148
• Create Report dialog box on page A-51

13-14 Generating reports on path availability

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 14
Download functionality
This chapter describes the functionality used to download an HDLM installer
and explains how to use this functionality.

□ Overview

□ Downloading the HDLM installer

Download functionality 14-1

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Overview
This section explains how to download the HDLM installer that is stored in the
Global Link Manager server from the client. You can also download the HDLM
installer from the DVD-ROM.
Notes
¢ To download the HDLM installer that is stored in the Global Link
Manager server, the download functionality must be enabled when
Global Link Manager is installed. For details, see the Hitachi Command
Suite Global Link Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.
¢ To download the HDLM installer from the DVD-ROM, you must have
the gui.hdlm_installer.downloadfromdvd.enable property and the
gui.hdlm_installer.fromdvd.location property specified in the
server.properties file in the Global Link Manager server. For details
about these properties, see the Hitachi Command Suite Global Link
Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.
The following table shows the function used for downloading and which Global
Link Manager management permissions are required for performing this
operation.

Table 14-1 List of functions for downloading

Permissions
Function
Admin Modify View

Download the HDLM installer Yes Yes No

Related topics
• Downloading the HDLM installer on page 14-2

Downloading the HDLM installer

This section explains how to download the HDLM installer.

Download procedure
1. In the global tasks bar area, choose Go and then Download.
The Download dialog box appears.
2. Click the download link for the OS in which you want to install HDLM.
The HDLM installer file is downloaded.
Related topics
• Global tasks bar area on page A-2
• Overview on page 14-2

14-2 Download functionality

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 A
GUI reference
This chapter explains Global Link Manager windows and subwindows.

□ Global Link Manager window

□ Global Link Manager subwindow

GUI reference A-1

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Global Link Manager window

Global tasks bar area

You can perform the following operations from the global tasks bar area:
• Output the Global Link Manager management information to a CSV file.
• Close a window.
• Log out from Global Link Manager.
• Download the HDLM installer.
• View Help.
• View the version and license information.

Menu Command Description

File Export Exports information about all hosts that are allocated to the
logged-in user to a CSV-formatted file. The exported host
information contains lists of hosts, paths, and alerts. The CSV
file format (content) differs depending on the Global Link
Manager version. To output a CSV file in a format of an earlier
Global Link Manager version, change the setting of the
gui.export.version property in the server.properties file
of the Global Link Manager server. For details about how to set
up the environment of the Global Link Manager server, see the
Hitachi Command Suite Global Link Manager Installation and
Configuration Guide.

Close Closes the window.

Logout Logs out of Global Link Manager and all other active Hitachi
Storage Command Suite products, and then closes the window.

Go Download Displays a dialog box for downloading the HDLM installer.

Help Online Displays the table of contents for the Global Link Manager
manual Help.

About Displays the About dialog box. The About dialog box displays
license and version information, and lets you register license
information.

Explorer menu
Application-related items (submenus and commands) are displayed in the
Explorer menu. When you select an item in the Explorer menu, information
related to that item appears in the Application bar area and the Application
area.
The following explains the items in the Global Link Manager Explorer menu.

Submenu Command Description

Resource Hosts Used for managing the paths for each host on which HDLM is
s installed. Users who have the Admin (Global Link Manager

A-2 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Submenu Command Description
management) permission can add hosts to and delete hosts
from resources.

Storage Used for managing the paths of each storage system.

systems

Physical Used for managing the paths for each physical storage system
Storage such as a virtual storage machine.
Informati
on

My Host Used for managing paths for each host group.

Groups Groups

Administr Users and Used for managing the users for all Hitachi Command Suite
ation Permissio products. This command appears only when the logged-in user
ns has the Admin (user management) permission.

Resource Used for managing resource groups, and to control access by

Groups users to resources. The Resource Groups command appears
if the logged-in user's account is a built-in account (user ID:
System) or the user has the Admin (Global Link Manager
management) permission.

Security Used for setting security options. This command appears if the
logged-in user has the Admin (user management) permission.

Alerts No Used for managing alert information reported from the hosts.
Command

Settings User Used for editing logged-in user profiles.

Profile

License Used for editing license information.

Info

Dashboard menu
A list of Hitachi Command Suite products is displayed in the Dashboard
menu. Click the GO link to start an installed Hitachi Command Suite product.
If a Hitachi Command Suite product is not installed, its GO link is inactive.
For Global Link Manager-related items, the severity level and number of
alerts that a user has not checked are displayed, with the corresponding icon.

Critical-level alert.

Error-level alert.

The alert information is updated at the following times:

• When alert information is changed in the Alerts subwindow
• When the time set in the gui.indicator.auto_refresh_interval
property in the Global Link Manager server's server.properties
properties file has elapsed

GUI reference A-3

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Tip: If HiCommand Replication Monitor is installed on a machine on which
Device Manager is already installed, HRpM is displayed twice in the
Dashboard menu. The products launched by these items are as follows:
• Upper HRpM: Hitachi Replication Manager Software
• Lower HRpM: HiCommand Replication Monitor
For information about the settings of the Global Link Manager server
environment, see the Hitachi Command Suite Global Link Manager
Installation and Configuration Guide

Global Link Manager subwindow

Subwindows for managing hosts

Hosts subwindow
In the Hosts subwindow, you can:
• View information for all the hosts allocated to logged-in users (View
permission).
• View host information by OS version or by multipath management
software version (View permission).
• Create reports about the paths of multiple hosts simultaneously (View
permission).
• Modify information for several hosts together (Modify permission).
• Add hosts to the resources (Admin permission).
• Delete selected hosts from the resources (Admin permission).
• Set the HDLM operating environment for multiple hosts (Modify
permission).
The Hosts subwindow is organized into the following areas:
• Summary on page A-4
• Hosts tabbed-page on page A-5
• Versions tabbed-page on page A-6
• Configuration tabbed-page on page A-6
• Remote Management Clients tabbed-page on page A-9

Summary
The Summary area lets you view summary information for each host
allocated to the logged-in user.

Item Description

Number of Hosts Displays the number of hosts allocated to the logged-in user.

A-4 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

Number of Refresh Within the hosts allocated to the logged-in user, displays the
Failed Hosts number of hosts for which information failed to be updated.
When you click the number of hosts, the Show Refresh Failed
Hosts dialog box is displayed.

Path Status Displays the statuses (with icons) of all host paths allocated to
the logged-in user. If instances of different multipath
management software are running at the same time, the path
status is displayed for each one. The display shows the number
of paths that have the status Online, Offline(C),
Offline(E), Online(E), Online(S), Online(D), Healthy, or
Unhealthy, as well as the total number of paths. When the
integer indicating the number of paths that have a given status
is clicked, the Show Paths dialog box is displayed.

Hosts tabbed-page
Item Description

Name Displays the host names and icons that indicate their status.
When a host name is clicked, the host-name subwindow for
that host is displayed.

Last Update Time Displays the last update time for the host.

Status Displays icons indicating the statuses of host paths. The

display shows the number of paths that have the status
Online, Offline(C), Offline(E), Online(E), Online(S),
Online(D), Healthy, and Unhealthy.

Lost Path Displays the number of lost paths. If the number of lost paths
is not detected for any host in the hosts list, this item itself is
not displayed.

IP Address Displays the IP address of the host. If the host has both IPv4
and IPv6 addresses, the address that is assigned the higher
priority on the managing host is displayed.

OS Displays the type and version information of the OS installed

on the host. If the host OS is Linux, the kernel version is
displayed.

Multipath Software Displays the name of the multipath management software.

Protocol Displays the communication protocol used between the host

and the Global Link Manager server.

Version Displays multipath management software. If HP-UX multipath

is used, the HP-UX version is displayed.

Add Hosts button Adds hosts to the resources. When the Add Hosts button is
clicked, the Add Hosts dialog box is displayed.

Remove Hosts button Removes hosts from the resources. This button becomes active
when you select a check box in the Hosts tabbed-page.

Refresh Hosts button Refreshes the information of hosts. This button becomes active
when you select a check box in the Hosts tabbed-page.

GUI reference A-5

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

Configure Hosts Used to configure the HDLM functions installed on the host.
button When the Configure Hosts button is clicked, the Multi Host
Configuration Wizard is displayed.

Create Report button Creates a report on the paths of the hosts. This button
becomes active when you select a check box in the Hosts
tabbed-page. Clicking the Create Report button displays the
Create Report dialog box. The report creation function is
supported if HDLM version 5.9 or later has been installed on
the host.

Versions tabbed-page
This page displays a tab for each OS installed on a host. Only the tabs of the
OSs that are installed on the host and that have been allocated to the logged-
in user are displayed.
On each OS tabbed-page, the number of hosts using each version of that OS
and each version of multipath management software is displayed. The
following items are displayed on each OS tabbed-page:

Item Description

OS Displays the version information of the OS installed on a host.

If the host OS is Linux, the kernel version is displayed.

HDLM version-number, Displays the number of hosts that have a combination of the
DMP Windows OS version and the multipath management software version
version-number, or HP- installed. Clicking the number of hosts opens the Show Hosts
UX version-number dialog box. The last row displays the number of hosts that
have each multipath management software version installed on
them.

Total Displays the number of hosts for each OS version.

Configuration tabbed-page
The Configuration tabbed-page displays information about multipath
management software. If instances of different multipath management
software are running at the same time, a subtab is displayed for each
instance of the different multipath management software under this tabbed-
page.

Item Description

HDLM or HDLM and others tabbed-page Displays the settings for the operating
environment for HDLM or HP-UX
multipath. The support status of the HDLM
functions depends on the HDLM version
and the operating system. The HDLM or
HDLM and others tabbed-page displays
only those functions supported by HDLM
or HP-UX multipath.

A-6 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
UNKNOWN is displayed if Global Link
Manager is unable to recognize HDLM or
HP-UX multipath information.
• Name: Displays the host name.
• Version: Displays version information
of HDLM . If HP-UX multipath is used,
the HP-UX version is displayed.
• Load Balancing:
For HDLM:
Displays one of the following for
the set load balancing algorithm
when the load balancing function
is being used:
- Round robin
- Extended round robin
- Least I/Os (in operating
systems other than VMware)
- Extended least I/Os
- Least blocks (in operating
systems other than VMware)
- Extended least blocks
- Most Recently Used (in
VMware)
- Fixed (in VMware)
- Unknown algorithm (in
VMware)
When the host operating system
is VMware, Unknown is displayed
for all other algorithms and n/a is
displayed when no path is
connected.
If a different load balancing policy
is used for each LUN, an asterisk
(*) is appended to indicate that
other load balancing policies are
also in use.
For HP-UX multipath:
Displays one of the following for
the load balancing policy for the
LUN corresponding to the host:
- Round-robin
- Least command load
- Cell aware round robin
- Preferred path
- Preferred target port
- Closest path
- Weighted round-robin
- Path lock down

GUI reference A-7

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
If a different load balancing policy
is used for each LUN, the most-
used load balancing policy is
displayed. To indicate that other
load balancing policies are also in
use, an asterisk (*) is also
appended.
In operating systems other than
VMware, Disabled is displayed when
the load balancing function is not
being used.
• Path Health Checking: If the path
health checking function is enabled,
the execution interval for path health
checking is displayed in minutes. If
the path health checking function is
not being used, Disabled is
displayed.
n/a is displayed in the following
configurations:
- HP-UX multipath
- HDLM on a host running VMware
• Auto Failback: If the auto failback
function is enabled, the interval for
path status checking is displayed in
minutes. If the auto failback function
is not being used, Disabled is
displayed.
n/a is displayed in the following
configurations:
- HP-UX multipath
- HDLM on a host running VMware
• Intermittent Error Monitor:
Displays whether the intermittent-
error monitoring function is used. If
HP-UX multipath is used or the host
OS is VMware and is no path is
connected, n/a is displayed.

DMP Windows tabbed-page Displays the DMP operating environment

settings if Windows is being used on the
host. The DMP Windows tabbed-page
only displays the functions that are
supported by DMP.
UNKNOWN is displayed for a value that
cannot be recognized by Global Link
Manager.
• Name: Displays the host name.
• Version: Displays version information
of DMP.
• LoadBalancePolicy: Displays one of
the following algorithms, which are
used to set the load-balancing policy:

A-8 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
¢ Fail Over Only (Active/
Passive)
¢ Round Robin (Active/Active)
¢ Round Robin with Subset
¢ Dynamic Least Queue Depth
¢ Weighted Paths
¢ Least Blocks
¢ Balanced Path
• TestPathRetryCount: Displays the
test count that is used to determine if
a path has recovered from an error.
• KernelSleepTime: Displays the
recovery time interval (in
milliseconds) for a path where an
error has occurred.
• FailOverRetryCount: Displays the
failover retry count.

Remote Management Clients tabbed-page

This page lists information about remote management clients. If there are no
remote management clients to display, Not managing VMware hosts is
displayed.

Item Description

Host Name/IP Displays the host name or IP address of the remote

Address management client. IPv6 format addresses are enclosed in
square brackets.

Version Displays the version of HDLM that is installed in the remote

management client.

Total Displays the total number of hosts being managed by each

remote management client.

Show Paths dialog box

The Show Paths dialog box is used for managing multiple paths related to a
selected management object.
In the Show Paths dialog box, you can:
• View the status of multiple paths (View permission).
• Modify multiple paths to Online, or Offline(C) (Modify permission).
The status of a path can be switched if you are using one of the following
multi-path management software products:
¢ HDLM
¢ HP-UX multipath

GUI reference A-9

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 The Show Paths dialog box is organized into the following areas:
• Path Status on page A-10
• Paths on page A-10
• DMP Windows tabbed-page on page A-14

Path Status
Displays the statuses (with icons) of paths. The display shows the number of
paths that have the status Online, Offline(C), Offline(E), Online(E),
Online(S), Online(D), Healthy, or Unhealthy, as well as the total number
of paths.

Paths
Displays information about the paths managed by HDLM or HP-UX multipath.

Item Description

Status Displays an icon indicating the status of a path.

LDEV ID For HDLM:

The LDEV number is displayed.
For HP-UX multipath:
The LUN hardware path is displayed.

LDEV Label For HDLM:

Displays label information associated with the LDEV. If
n/a is displayed, Global Link Manager failed to obtain
LDEV label information from Device Manager. A blank is
displayed if the LDEV label information could not be
acquired.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.

Storage system Displays the name of the storage system to which the path is
Name connected. The storage system name is made up of the
following items, delimited by periods:
• vendor-ID: Vendor name of the storage system
UNKNOWN# is displayed if the storage information cannot be
recognized.
• model-ID: Device name of the storage system
UNKNOWN# is displayed if the storage information cannot be
recognized.
• serial-number: Serial number of the storage system
A hyphen (-) is displayed if the storage information cannot
be recognized.

Physical Information Displays the following physical storage system information for
virtual storage machines and other devices:
• LDEV ID:
For HDLM

A-10 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
Displays the ID that is used to identify an LU (an LU
for HDLM), separated by a colon (:) every 2 digits.
For software other than HDLM
Displays n/a.
• Storage system name:
For HDLM
Displays the name of the storage system. If no
information exists, n/a is displayed.
For software other than HDLM
Displays n/a.
• CHA:
For HDLM
When the path is migrated by using a virtual ID, the
number of the CHA port to which the migration
destination path connects is displayed. When a virtual
ID is not used, this item is not displayed.
For software other than HDLM
Displays n/a.

CHA For HDLM:

Displays the CHA port number, which is made up of a
number and an alphabetic character. This number enables
identification of the CHAs mounted on a storage system.
To obtain this number and identify a CHA, use the storage
system management program.
For HP-UX multipath:
The target address is displayed.

Multipath LU For HDLM:

Displays the names of the HDevs connected to the paths.
Regardless of the number of paths, the HDev names are
grouped by their corresponding LUs and displayed in that
order.
¢ If the host OS is Solaris 7, the name (with the slice
number omitted) of the HDev that has an owner path,
and whose path ID is the smallest of all the HDevs
corresponding to the same LU, is displayed.
¢ If the host OS is Windows, the drive letter is
displayed. If no drive letter has been allocated, a
hyphen (-) is displayed.
For HP-UX multipath:
The LUN hardware path is displayed.

Disk Number For HDLM:

If the host OS is Windows, the Windows physical device
number is displayed. If the physical device number cannot
be obtained, a hyphen (-) is displayed. If the host OS is
not Windows, n/a is displayed. Note that this item is not
displayed if no Windows hosts exist.
For HP-UX multipath:

GUI reference A-11

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
This item is not displayed.

Host Name Displays the name of the host that recognizes the path.

HBA For HDLM:

Displays a number that indicates the HBA that connects to
the path. The bus number and the HBA port number are
delimited by a period.
For HP-UX multipath:
The H/W Path is displayed.

HBA WWN For HDLM:

Displays port WWN information for HBAs. For an iSCSI
interface, n/a is displayed because this information cannot
be obtained.
For HP-UX multipath:
The port name obtained by the scsimgr get_info
command is displayed.

I/O Count For HDLM:

Displays the total number of I/O counts for the path. n/a is
displayed if I/O count information could not be obtained.
For HP-UX multipath:
The total number of processed I/Os that have been
obtained by the scsimgr get_stat command is displayed.

I/O Errors For HDLM:

Displays the total number of I/O errors for the path.
For HP-UX multipath:
The number of I/O failures obtained by the scsimgr
get_stat command is displayed.

Type For HDLM:

Displays one of the following as the path attribute:
¢ Owner: The path is subject to owner control, and is
preferentially used for accessing the LU.
¢ Non-owner: The path goes through a channel
adapter, other than channel adapters under owner
control.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.
A hyphen is displayed if the path is connected to storage
systems from other companies.

SLPR For HDLM:

Displays the number (in the range 0-31) of the SLPR to
which the LU belongs. A hyphen is displayed if the HDLM
version of the managed host is prior to 5.6 or if the LU to
be displayed is in a storage system that does not support
the storage logical partition function.
For HP-UX multipath:

A-12 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
n/a is displayed.

CLPR For HDLM:

Displays the number (in the range 0-31) of the CLPR to
which the CHA belongs. A hyphen is displayed if the HDLM
version of the host is prior to 5.6 or if the CHA to be
displayed is mounted on a storage system that does not
support the cache logical partition function.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.

Path ID For HDLM:

Displays the path management PATH_ID. This is allocated
each time a managed host is restarted or a path
configuration is changed.
For HP-UX multipath:
The instance number obtained by the ioscan -kfnNC
lunpath command is displayed.

Path Name Displays the path name that connects the host to the LU. If
HP-UX multipath is used, the lunpath hardware path obtained
by the ioscan -m hwpath command is displayed. The items
that make up the path name depend on the host OS. The
display format of the path name for each OS is shown below:
• AIX:
HBA-adapter-number.bus-number.target-ID.host-LU-
number
• HP-UX, Linux, Solaris, Windows, VMware:
host-port-number.bus-number.target-ID.host-LU-
number
• HP-UX (for HP-UX multipath):
host-port-number.target-port-WWN.host-LU-number
To modify the system configuration or upgrade the hardware,
browse the path names and check the affected paths. If HDLM
is in use, the displayed items that make up a path name differ
depending on the host OS. For details about the items
displayed as the components of path names in each OS, see
the command reference in the HDLM manual.

Intermittent Error For HDLM:

Displays information related to intermittent errors. One of
the following is displayed:
¢ -: Indicates that the intermittent error monitoring
function is not supported at this time or that the HDLM
manager is stopped.
¢ Number (0 or greater): Indicates the number of errors
that occurred during intermittent error monitoring.
¢ *: Indicates that an intermittent error was detected,
but that it is not subject to auto failback.
¢ n/a: Indicates that the host OS is VMware and no
path is connected.

GUI reference A-13

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.

Set Online button Changes the status of paths to Online. This button becomes
active when you select a check box for a path.

Set Offline button Changes the status of paths to Offline(C). This button
becomes active when you select a check box for a path.

Set Online(D) button Changes the status of the paths to Online(D). This button
becomes active when you select a check box for paths that can
be set to Online(D).
This item is displayed when the gui.physical.view properties
in the server.properties file for the Global Link Manager
server are set to true. For details about the
gui.physical.view properties, see the Hitachi Command
Suite Global Link Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

#
If UNKNOWN is displayed for the storage system name, check the status of
the path connected to the host. Make sure that the path is in the Online
status, and then update the host information.

DMP Windows tabbed-page

Displays information about a path belonging to a Windows host running DMP.

Item Description

Status Displays an icon indicating the status of a path.

LUN Displays the LUN.

Storage system Displays the name of the storage system to which the path is
Name connected. The storage system name is made up of the
following items, delimited by periods:
• vendor-ID: Vendor name of the storage system
• product-ID: Product ID of the storage system
• serial-number: Serial number of the storage system

Target Displays the target number. The target number is made up of a

number and an alphabetic character. This number enables
identification of the targets mounted on a storage system. To
identify a target, check this number using the storage system
management program.

Disk Displays the names of the physical disks connected to the

paths. Regardless of the number of paths, the physical disk
names are grouped by their corresponding LUs and displayed
in that order.

Host Name Displays the name of the host that recognizes the path.

A-14 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

Port / Channel Displays a number that indicates the HBA that connects to the
path. This item is displayed in the Pport-IDCchannel-ID
format.

Operations Displays the total number of I/O counts for the path.
• Reads: Displays the number of read requests issued by
the OS to the storage system.
• Writes: Displays the number of write requests issued by
the OS to the storage system.

Bytes Displays the path I/O data size in bytes.

• Reads: Displays the amount of data issued by the OS to
the storage system for read requests.
• Writes: Displays the amount of data issued by the OS to
the storage system for write requests.

Primary Displays the primary path setting. One of the following settings
is displayed:
• YES
• NO
• -

Path Name Displays the path name that connects the host to the LU. The
following shows the display format of the path name:

Path path-number-port-/-channel-number-target-number-LUN
To modify the system configuration or upgrade the hardware,
browse the path names and check the affected paths.

Set Online dialog box

The Set Online dialog box is used for changing the status of selected paths to
Online. In the Paths list, check the paths whose status you want to change
to Online.

The Set Online setting can be selected when HDLM or HP-UX multipath is
used for the multipath management software.
When you use HDLM as the multipath management software on a host using
VMware as its operating system, operations on the host can take several
(approximately 3) minutes to complete for every 100 paths.
If the status of paths in the Online(S) status or the Online(D) status is
changed to the Online status, the status of paths that have the Online(S)
status or the Online(D) status in the same LU will be also changed to the
Online status.

The items displayed in the Set Online dialog box are explained below.

Item Description

Status Displays an icon indicating the status of a path.

GUI reference A-15

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

LDEV ID For HDLM:

Displays the logical device number.
For HP-UX multipath:
The LUN hardware path is displayed.
LDEV ID is displayed when HDLM or HP-UX multipath is used
for the multipath management software.

LDEV Label For HDLM:

Displays label information associated with the LDEV. If
n/a is displayed, Global Link Manager failed to obtain
LDEV label information from Device Manager. A blank is
displayed if the LDEV label information could not be
acquired.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.
LDEV Label is displayed when HDLM or HP-UX multipath is
used for the multipath management software.

Storage system Displays the name of the storage system to which the path is
Name connected. The storage system name is made up of the
following items, delimited by periods:
• vendor-ID: Vendor name of the storage system
For HDLM or HP-UX multipath, UNKNOWN# is displayed if the
storage information cannot be recognized.
• For HDLM or HP-UX multipath
model-ID: Device name of the storage system
UNKNOWN# is displayed if the storage information cannot be
recognized.
• serial-number: Serial number of the storage system
For HDLM or HP-UX multipath, a hyphen (-) is displayed if
the storage information cannot be recognized.

Physical Information Displays the following physical storage system information for
virtual storage machines and other devices:
• LDEV ID:
For HDLM
Displays the ID that is used to identify an LU (an LU
for HDLM), separated by a colon (:) every 2 digits.
For software other than HDLM
Displays n/a.
• Storage system name:
For HDLM
Displays the name of the storage system. If no
information exists, n/a is displayed.
For software other than HDLM
Displays n/a.
• CHA:
For HDLM

A-16 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
When the path is migrated by using a virtual ID, the
number of the CHA port to which the migration
destination path connects is displayed. When a virtual
ID is not used, this item is not displayed.
For software other than HDLM
Displays n/a.

CHA Displays the CHA port number, which is made up of a number

and an alphabetic character. This number enables identification
of the CHAs mounted on a storage system. To obtain this
number and identify a CHA, use the storage system
management program.

Multipath LU Displays the names of the HDevs connected to the paths.

Regardless of the number of paths, the HDev names are
grouped by their corresponding LUs and displayed in that
order.
• If the host OS is Solaris 7, the name (with the slice
number omitted) of the HDev that has an owner path, and
whose path ID is the smallest of all the HDevs
corresponding to the same LU, is displayed.
• If the host OS is Windows, the drive letter is displayed. If
no drive letter has been allocated, a hyphen (-) is
displayed.

Disk Number For HDLM:

If the host OS is Windows, the Windows physical device
number is displayed. If the physical device number cannot
be obtained, a hyphen (-) is displayed. If the host OS is
not Windows, n/a is displayed. Note that this item is not
displayed if no Windows hosts exist.
For HP-UX multipath:
This item is not displayed.

Host Name Displays the name of the host that recognizes the path.

HBA Displays a number that indicates the HBA that connects to the
path. The bus number and the HBA port number are delimited
by a period.

HBA WWN For HDLM:

Displays port WWN information for HBAs. For an iSCSI
interface, n/a is displayed because this information cannot
be obtained.
For HP-UX multipath:
The port name obtained by the scsimgr get_info
command is displayed.
HBA WWN is displayed when HDLM or HP-UX multipath is
used for the multipath management software.

I/O Count Displays the total number of I/O counts for the path. n/a is
displayed if I/O count information could not be obtained. If HP-
UX multipath is used, the total number of processed I/Os that
have been obtained by the scsimgr get_stat command is
displayed.

GUI reference A-17

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

I/O Errors For HDLM:

Displays the total number of I/O errors for the path.
For HP-UX multipath:
The number of I/O failures obtained by the scsimgr
get_stat command is displayed.
I/O Errors is displayed when HDLM or HP-UX multipath is
used for the multipath management software.

Type For HDLM:

Displays one of the following as the path attribute:
¢ Owner: The path is subject to owner control, and is
preferentially used for accessing the LU.
¢ Non-owner: The path goes through a channel
adapter, other than channel adapters under owner
control.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.
A hyphen is displayed if the path is connected to storage
systems from other companies. Type is displayed when HDLM
or HP-UX multipath is used for the multipath management
software.

SLPR For HDLM:

Displays the number (in the range 0-31) of the SLPR to
which the LU belongs. A hyphen is displayed if the HDLM
version of the managed host is prior to 5.6 or if the LU to
be displayed is in a storage system that does not support
the storage logical partition function.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.
SLPR is displayed when HDLM or HP-UX multipath is used for
the multipath management software.

CLPR For HDLM:

Displays the number (in the range 0-31) of the CLPR to
which the CHA belongs. A hyphen is displayed if the HDLM
version of the host is prior to 5.6 or if the CHA to be
displayed is mounted on a storage system that does not
support the cache logical partition function.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.
CLPR is displayed when HDLM or HP-UX multipath is used for
the multipath management software.

Path ID For HDLM:

Displays the path management PATH_ID. This is allocated
each time a managed host is restarted or a path
configuration is changed.
For HP-UX multipath:

A-18 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
The instance number obtained by the ioscan -kfnNC
lunpath command is displayed.
Path ID is displayed when HDLM or HP-UX multipath is used
for the multipath management software.

Path Name Displays the path name that connects the host to the LU. If
HP-UX multipath is used, the lunpath hardware path obtained
by the ioscan -m hwpath command is displayed. The items
that make up the path name depend on the host OS. The
display format of the path name for each OS is shown below:
• AIX:
HBA-adapter-number.bus-number.target-ID.host-LU-
number
• HP-UX, Linux, Solaris, VMware (if HDLM is in use),
Windows:
host-port-number.bus-number.target-ID.host-LU-
number
• HP-UX (if HP-UX multipath is in use):
host-port-number.target-port-WWN.host-LU-number
To modify the system configuration or upgrade the hardware,
browse the path names and check the affected paths. If HDLM
is in use, the displayed items that make up a path name differ
depending on the host OS. For details about the items
displayed as the components of path names in each OS, see
the command reference in the HDLM manual.

Intermittent Error For HDLM:

Displays information related to intermittent errors. One of
the following is displayed:
¢ -: Indicates that the intermittent error monitoring
function is not supported at this time or that the HDLM
manager is stopped.
¢ Number (0 or greater): Indicates the number of errors
that occurred during intermittent error monitoring.
¢ *: Indicates that an intermittent error was detected,
but that it is not subject to auto failback.
¢ n/a: Indicates that the host OS is VMware and no
path is connected.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.
Intermittent Error is displayed when HDLM or HP-UX
multipath is used for the multipath management software.

Yes, I've confirmed The OK button becomes active when you select a check box.
information above.
check box

#
If UNKNOWN is displayed for the storage system name, check the status of
the path connected to the host. Make sure that the path is in the Online
status, and then update the host information.

GUI reference A-19

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Set Online(D) dialog box
The Set Online(D) dialog box is used for changing the status of selected paths
to Online(D). In the Paths list, check the paths whose status you want to
change to Online(D).

Online(D) settings can be performed on paths for primary volumes (P-VOLs)

in the HAM environment where the error occurred, where HDLM is used as
multipath management software and if true is set for the
gui.physical.view properties in the server.properties file for Global Link
Manager server. For details about the gui.physical.view properties, see the
Hitachi Command Suite Global Link Manager Installation and Configuration
Guide.
If the operating system of the host is VMware, performing operations on the
host will take several minutes (about 3 minutes) per 100 paths.
Note that Online(D) is set per LU instead of per path.
The items displayed in the Set Online(D) dialog box are explained below.

Item Description

Status Displays an icon indicating the status of a path.

LDEV ID Displays the logical device number.

LDEV Label Displays label information associated with the LDEV. If n/a is
displayed, Global Link Manager failed to obtain LDEV label
information from Device Manager. A blank is displayed if the
LDEV label information could not be acquired.

Storage system Displays the name of the storage system to which the path is
Name connected. The storage system name is made up of the
following items, delimited by periods:
• vendor-ID: Vendor name of the storage system
• model-ID: Device name of the storage system
• serial-number: Serial number of the storage system

Physical Information Displays the following physical storage system information for
virtual storage machines and other devices:
• LDEV ID:
Displays the ID that is used to identify an LU (an LU for
HDLM), separated by a colon (:) every 2 digits.
• Storage system name:
Displays the name of the storage system. If no information
exists, n/a is displayed.
• CHA:
When the path is migrated by using a virtual ID, the
number of the CHA port to which the migration destination
path connects is displayed. When a virtual ID is not used,
this item is not displayed.

CHA Displays the CHA port number, which is made up of a number

and an alphabetic character. This number enables identification
of the CHAs mounted on a storage system. To obtain this

A-20 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
number and identify a CHA, use the storage system
management program.

Multipath LU Displays the names of the HDevs connected to the paths.

Regardless of the number of paths, the HDev names are
grouped by their corresponding LUs and displayed in that
order.
• If the host OS is Solaris 7, the name (with the slice
number omitted) of the HDev that has an owner path, and
whose path ID is the smallest of all the HDevs
corresponding to the same LU, is displayed.
• If the host OS is Windows, the drive letter is displayed. If
no drive letter has been allocated, a hyphen (-) is
displayed.

Disk Number If the host OS is Windows, the Windows physical device

number is displayed. If the physical device number cannot be
obtained, a hyphen (-) is displayed. If the host OS is not
Windows, n/a is displayed. Note that this item is not displayed
if no Windows hosts exist.

Host Name Displays the name of the host that recognizes the path.

HBA Displays a number that indicates the HBA that connects to the
path. The bus number and the HBA port number are delimited
by a period.

HBA WWN Displays port WWN information for HBAs. For an iSCSI
interface, n/a is displayed because this information cannot be
obtained.

I/O Count or Displays the total number of I/O counts for the path. n/a is
Operations displayed if I/O count information could not be obtained.

I/O Errors Displays the total number of I/O errors for the path.

Type Displays one of the following as the path attribute:

• Owner: The path is subject to owner control, and is
preferentially used for accessing the LU.
• Non-owner: The path goes through a channel adapter,
other than channel adapters under owner control.
A hyphen is displayed if the path is connected to storage
systems from other companies.

SLPR Displays the number (in the range 0-31) of the SLPR to which
the LU belongs. A hyphen is displayed if the HDLM version of
the managed host is prior to 5.6 or if the LU to be displayed is
in a storage system that does not support the storage logical
partition function.

CLPR Displays the number (in the range 0-31) of the CLPR to which
the CHA belongs. A hyphen is displayed if the HDLM version of
the host is prior to 5.6 or if the CHA to be displayed is mounted
on a storage system that does not support the cache logical
partition function.

Path ID Displays the path management PATH_ID. This is allocated each

time a managed host is restarted or a path configuration is
changed.

GUI reference A-21

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

Path Name Displays the path name that connects the host to the LU. The
items that make up the path name depend on the host OS. The
display format of the path name for each OS is shown below:
• AIX:
HBA-adapter-number.bus-number.target-ID.host-LU-
number
• Linux, Solaris, VMware (if HDLM is in use), Windows:
host-port-number.bus-number.target-ID.host-LU-
number
To modify the system configuration or upgrade the hardware,
browse the path names and check the affected paths. If HDLM
is in use, the displayed items that make up a path name differ
depending on the host OS. For details about the items
displayed as the components of path names in each OS, see
the command reference in the HDLM manual.

Intermittent Error Displays information related to intermittent errors. One of the

following is displayed:
• -: Indicates that the intermittent error monitoring function
is not supported at this time or that the HDLM manager is
stopped.
• Number (0 or greater): Indicates the number of errors
that occurred during intermittent error monitoring.
• *: Indicates that an intermittent error was detected, but
that it is not subject to auto failback.
• n/a: Indicates that the host OS is VMware and no path is
connected.

Yes, I've confirmed The OK button becomes active when you select a check box.
information above.
check box

Set Offline dialog box

The Set Offline dialog box is used to change the status of the selected paths
to Offline(C). However, if only one online path is connected to an LU, you
cannot change the online path to offline. Of the selected paths, paths that
cannot be changed to offline are indicated in red font. In the Paths list, check
the paths whose status you want to change to Offline(C).

The Set Offline setting can be selected when HDLM or HP-UX multipath is
used for the multipath management software.
When you use HDLM as the multipath management software on a host using
VMware as its operating system, operations on the host can take several
(approximately 3) minutes to complete for every 100 paths.
The items displayed in the Set Offline dialog box are explained below.

Item Description

Status Displays an icon indicating the status of a path.

A-22 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

LDEV ID For HDLM:

Displays the logical device number.
For HP-UX multipath:
The LUN hardware path is displayed.
LDEV ID is displayed when HDLM or HP-UX multipath is used
for the multipath management software.

LDEV Label For HDLM:

Displays label information associated with the LDEV. If
n/a is displayed, Global Link Manager failed to obtain
LDEV label information from Device Manager. A blank is
displayed if the LDEV label information could not be
acquired.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.
LDEV Label is displayed when HDLM or HP-UX multipath is
used for the multipath management software.

Storage system Name Displays the name of the storage system to which the path is
connected. The storage system name is made up of the
following items, delimited by periods:
• vendor-ID: Vendor name of the storage system
For HDLM or HP-UX multipath, UNKNOWN# is displayed if
the storage information cannot be recognized.
• For HDLM or HP-UX multipath
model-ID: Device name of the storage system
UNKNOWN# is displayed if the storage information cannot be
recognized.
• serial-number: Serial number of the storage system
For HDLM or HP-UX multipath, a hyphen (-) is displayed if
the storage information cannot be recognized.

Physical Information Displays the following physical storage system information for
virtual storage machines and other devices:
• LDEV ID:
For HDLM
Displays the ID that is used to identify an LU (an LU
for HDLM), separated by a colon (:) every 2 digits.
For software other than HDLM
Displays n/a.
• Storage system name:
For HDLM
Displays the name of the storage system. If no
information exists, n/a is displayed.
For software other than HDLM
Displays n/a.
• CHA:
For HDLM

GUI reference A-23

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
When the path is migrated by using a virtual ID, the
number of the CHA port to which the migration
destination path connects is displayed. When a virtual
ID is not used, this item is not displayed.
For software other than HDLM
Displays n/a.

CHA Displays the CHA port number, which is made up of a number

and an alphabetic character. This number enables
identification of the CHAs mounted on a storage system. To
obtain this number and identify a CHA, use the storage system
management program.

Multipath LU Displays the names of the HDevs connected to the paths.

Regardless of the number of paths, the HDev names are
grouped by their corresponding LUs and displayed in that
order.
• If the host OS is Solaris 7, the name (with the slice
number omitted) of the HDev that has an owner path, and
whose path ID is the smallest of all the HDevs
corresponding to the same LU, is displayed.
• If the host OS is Windows, the drive letter is displayed. If
no drive letter has been allocated, a hyphen (-) is
displayed.

Disk Number For HDLM:

If the host OS is Windows, the Windows physical device
number is displayed. If the physical device number cannot
be obtained, a hyphen (-) is displayed. If the host OS is
not Windows, n/a is displayed. Note that this item is not
displayed if no Windows hosts exist.
For HP-UX multipath:
This item is not displayed.

Host Name Displays the name of the host that recognizes the path.

HBA Displays a number that indicates the HBA that connects to the
path. The bus number and the HBA port number are delimited
by a period.

HBA WWN For HDLM:

Displays port WWN information for HBAs. For an iSCSI
interface, n/a is displayed because this information cannot
be obtained.
For HP-UX multipath:
The port name obtained by the scsimgr get_info
command is displayed.
HBA WWN is displayed when HDLM or HP-UX multipath is
used for the multipath management software.

I/O Count Displays the total number of I/O counts for the path. n/a is
displayed if I/O count information could not be obtained. If
HP-UX multipath is used, the total number of processed I/Os
that have been obtained by the scsimgr get_stat command
is displayed.

A-24 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

I/O Errors For HDLM:

Displays the total number of I/O errors for the path.
For HP-UX multipath:
The number of I/O failures obtained by the scsimgr
get_stat command is displayed.
I/O Errors is displayed when HDLM or HP-UX multipath is
used for the multipath management software.

Type For HDLM:

Displays one of the following as the path attribute:
¢ Owner: The path is subject to owner control, and is
preferentially used for accessing the LU.
¢ Non-owner: The path goes through a channel
adapter, other than channel adapters under owner
control.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.
Type is displayed when HDLM or HP-UX multipath is used for
the multipath management software.
A hyphen is displayed if the path is connected to storage
systems from other companies.

SLPR For HDLM:

Displays the number (in the range 0-31) of the SLPR to
which the LU belongs. A hyphen is displayed if the HDLM
version of the managed host is prior to 5.6 or if the LU to
be displayed is in a storage system that does not support
the storage logical partition function.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.
SLPR is displayed when HDLM or HP-UX multipath is used for
the multipath management software.

CLPR For HDLM:

Displays the number (in the range 0-31) of the CLPR to
which the CHA belongs. A hyphen is displayed if the HDLM
version of the host is prior to 5.6 or if the CHA to be
displayed is mounted on a storage system that does not
support the cache logical partition function.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.
CLPR is displayed when HDLM or HP-UX multipath is used for
the multipath management software.

Path ID For HDLM:

Displays the path management PATH_ID. This is allocated
each time a managed host is restarted or a path
configuration is changed.
For HP-UX multipath:

GUI reference A-25

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
The instance number obtained by the ioscan -kfnNC
lunpath command is displayed.
Path ID is displayed when HDLM or HP-UX multipath is used
for the multipath management software.

Path Name Displays the path name that connects the host to the LU. If
HP-UX multipath is used, the lunpath hardware path obtained
by the ioscan -m hwpath command is displayed. The items
that make up the path name depend on the host OS. The
display format of the path name for each OS is shown below:
• AIX:
HBA-adapter-number.bus-number.target-ID.host-LU-
number
• HP-UX, Linux, Solaris, VMware (if HDLM is in use),
Windows:
host-port-number.bus-number.target-ID.host-LU-
number
• HP-UX (if HP-UX multipath is in use):
host-port-number.target-port-WWN.host-LU-number
To modify the system configuration or upgrade the hardware,
browse the path names and check the affected paths. If HDLM
is in use, the displayed items that make up a path name differ
depending on the host OS. For details about the items
displayed as the components of path names in each OS, see
the command reference in the HDLM manual.

Intermittent Error For HDLM:

Displays information related to intermittent errors. One of
the following is displayed:
¢ -: Indicates that the intermittent error monitoring
function is not supported at this time or that the
HDLM manager is stopped.
¢ Number (0 or greater): Indicates the number of
errors that occurred during intermittent error
monitoring.
¢ *: Indicates that an intermittent error was detected,
but that it is not subject to auto failback.
¢ n/a: Indicates that the host OS is VMware and no
path is connected.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.
Intermittent Error is displayed when HDLM or HP-UX
multipath is used for the multipath management software.

Yes, I've confirmed The OK button becomes active when you select a check box.
information above.
check box

A-26 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 If UNKNOWN is displayed for the storage system name, check the status of
the path connected to the host. Make sure that the path is in the Online
status, and then update the host information.

Add Hosts dialog box (adding to resources)

The Add Hosts dialog box is used for adding hosts to resources.
To add a host:
• Specify the IP address range of the host.
• Directly enter the host information.
• Specify the import file that contains the host information.
Items marked with an asterisk (*) must be specified.

Tip: If hosts are in a cluster configuration, all hosts in the cluster must be
registered.

The Add Hosts dialog box is organized into the following areas:
• Network Scan tabbed-page on page A-27
• Manual Entry tabbed-page on page A-29
• Import tabbed-page on page A-30

Network Scan tabbed-page

In this page, you can collectively add those hosts, within the specified IP
address range, that have not previously been added to resources. You can
specify no more than 256 IP addresses at one time.

Item Description

Scan Now tabbed-page A Scan Now scan is a network scan executed promptly, on
demand, by the user. Specify the IP address range for which a
network scan is to be executed.
• *Start IP Address: Enter an IP address from which the
network scan starts. To use an IP address in IPv4 format,
specify a value in the range from 0.0.0.1 to
255.255.255.255. However, you cannot specify 127.0.0.1.
To use an IP address in IPv6 format, specify a value in the
range from 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 to
FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF.
• *End IP Address: Enter an IP address at which the
network scan ends. To use an IP address in IPv4 format,
specify a value in the range from 0.0.0.1 to
255.255.255.255. The number of IP addresses that can be
specified must not exceed 256, starting with the value
specified for *Start IP Address and counting up.
However, you cannot specify 127.0.0.1. To use an IP
address in IPv6 format, specify a value in the range from
0:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 to

GUI reference A-27

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF. The
number of IP addresses that can be specified must not
exceed 256, starting with the value specified for *Start IP
Address. Note that the IP address format specified for
*End IP Address must be the same as for *Start IP
Address.
• *Agent Service Port: If a value is entered in *Start IP
Address and *End IP Address, the default port number
(24041) that is used for the daemon process (or service) in
HDLM's Hitachi Command Suite Common Agent
Component is entered automatically. In the following
cases, enter a port number, using an integer in the range
from 1 to 65535:
¢ The HDLM version is earlier than 5.8 and the version
of Device Manager agent in use is earlier than 05-00.
¢ The HDLM version is 5.8 or later or the version of
Device Manager agent in use is 05-00 or later, and the
port number specified in the server.agent.port
property (agent service port) has been changed in the
server.properties file.
If you are using an HDLM version earlier than 5.8 and you
also use the Device Manager agent, check the value
specified for the server.agent.port property by referring
to the Hitachi Device Manager Agent Installation Guide or
Hitachi Command Suite Administrator Guide. If the HDLM
version in use is 5.8 or later, check the value by referring
to the Hitachi Command Suite Global Link Manager
Installation and Configuration Guide.
If the host operating system is VMware and the multipath
management software is HDLM, replace the existing value
with that of the Hitachi Command Suite Common Agent
Component on the remote management client, in the
following format. As the port number, specify an integer
from 1 to 65535.
- Host Name or IP Address:Port number
• Remote Port: If the HDLM version is earlier than 5.8 and
the version of Device Manager agent in use is earlier than
05-00, specify the port number to be used by the Web
server functionality, using an integer in the range from 1
to 65535. Check the value specified for the
server.http.port property by referring to the Hitachi
Device Manager Agent Installation Guide. If the version of
HDLM you are using is 5.8 or later or the version of the
Device Manager agent you are using is 05-00 or later,
there is no need to specify the remote port.
• Yes, I've confirmed information above. check box:
The OK button becomes active when you select a check
box.
• View Scan Results button: Click this button to check the
execution status of Scan Now and the execution result log
of previously executed Scan Now scans.

A-28 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

Scheduled Scan A Scheduled Scan is a network scan that is to be periodically

tabbed-page executed based on a user-specified schedule. This tabbed page
displays a list of network scan schedule settings.
• Start IP Address: Displays the IP address from which the
network scan starts.
• End IP Address: Displays the IP address at which the
network scan ends.
• Agent Service Port: Displays the agent service port used
to connect with HDLM.
• Remote Port: Displays the remote port used to connect
with HDLM.
• Interval: Displays the interval at which the network scan
is to be executed.
• Scan Day: Displays the date on which the network scan is
to be executed.
• Scan Time: Displays the time at which the network scan
is to be executed.
• Schedule Writer: Displays the user ID of the user who
added the schedule settings.
• Add Schedule button: Click this button to add the
schedule settings.
• Edit Schedule button: Select the check box of a schedule
setting to be edited, and then click this button. Select a
single check box only.
• Delete Schedule button: Select the check box of a
schedule setting to be deleted, and then click this button.
• View Scan Results button: Click this button to check the
execution status of Scheduled Scan and the execution
result log.

Manual Entry tabbed-page

Item Description

*IP Address or Host Enter the IP address or name of the host to be added. When
Name specifying an IP address in IPv4 format, you cannot specify
0.0.0.0, 127.0.0.1, or localhost (case-insensitive). When
specifying an IP address in IPv6 format, you cannot specify
0:0:0:0:0:0:0:1.

*Agent Service Port If a value is entered in *IP Address or Host Name, the
default port number (24041) that is used for the daemon
process (or service) in HDLM's Hitachi Command Suite
Common Agent Component is entered automatically. In the
following cases, enter the port number as an integer in the
range from 1 to 65535:
• HDLM version is earlier than 5.8 and the version of Device
Manager agent in use is earlier than 05-00.
• HDLM version is 5.8 or later or the version of Device
Manager agent in use is 05-00 or later, and the port

GUI reference A-29

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
number specified in the server.agent.port property
(agent service port) has been changed in the
server.properties file.
If you are using an HDLM version earlier than 5.8 and you also
use the Device Manager agent, check the value specified for
the server.agent.port property by referring to the Hitachi
Device Manager Agent Installation Guide or Hitachi Command
Suite Administrator Guide. If the HDLM version in use is 5.8 or
later, check the value by referring to the Hitachi Command
Suite Global Link Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.
If the host operating system is VMware and the multipath
management software is HDLM, replace the existing value with
that of the Hitachi Command Suite Common Agent Component
on the remote management client, in the following format. As
the port number, specify an integer from 1 to 65535.
- Host Name or IP Address:Port number

Remote Port If the HDLM version is earlier than 5.8 and the version of
Device Manager agent in use is earlier than 05-00, specify the
port number to be used by the Web server functionality, as an
integer in the range from 1 to 65535. Check the value specified
for the server.http.port property by referring to the Hitachi
Device Manager Agent Installation Guide. If the version of
HDLM you are using is 5.8 or later or the version of the Device
Manager agent you are using is 05-00 or later, there is no
need to specify the remote port.

Import tabbed-page
Item Description

*File To Be Imported: Specify the import file that contains the information for the
hosts to be added. To specify the import file, enter the file
name manually or select the file to be imported by using the
Browse button. The file to be imported must be a CSV file that
contains the following items for each host:
• IP address or name of the host#1
• Agent service port number (integer in the range 1-65535):
The port number used by the daemon process (or service)
of the Device Manager Agent or HDLM Hitachi Command
Suite Common Agent Component#2, or if the host
operating system is VMware and the multipath
management software is HDLM, the connection target of
the remote management client.
• Remote port number (integer in the range 1-65535):
Specify the port number to be used by the Device Manager
agent or HDLM Hitachi Command Suite Common Agent
Component for the Web server functionality.#3
The format of the import file is as follows:
Import file format

IP-address-or-host-name-1,agent-service-port-1,remote-
port-1

A-30 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
IP-address-or-host-name-2,agent-service-port-2,remote-
port-2
:
IP-address-or-host-name-n,agent-service-port-n,remote-
port-n
The requirements for a CSV file are as follows:
• The CSV file must contain at least one line of text.
• A line may contain only the linefeed character.
• Comment lines are allowed. A one-line comment begins
with a hash mark (#). All text between the hash mark and
the end of the line is treated as a comment. If a comment
is to span multiple lines, each line must begin with a hash
mark.
• Commas can be preceded or followed by any number of
spaces.
Example:

# A application host
210.145.108.1,24041
hostnameXX,24041
# B application host
hostnameYY,23013,23011
:
210.145.108.10,24041

#1
When specifying an IP address in IPv4 format, you cannot specify
0.0.0.0, 127.0.0.1, or localhost (case-insensitive). When specifying
an IP address in IPv6 format, you cannot specify 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:1.

#2
If the Device Manager agent is being used, check the value specified for
the server.agent.port property by referring to the Hitachi Device
Manager Agent Installation Guide or Hitachi Command Suite
Administrator Guide. If HDLM HiCommand Suite Common Agent
Component is being used, check the value by referring to the Hitachi
Command Suite Global Link Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.
#3
Check the value specified for the server.http.port property by referring
to the Hitachi Device Manager Agent Installation Guide or Hitachi
Command Suite Administrator Guide. If the version of HDLM you are
using is 5.8 or later or the version of the Device Manager agent you are
using is 05-00 or later, there is no need to specify the remote port.

Network Scan Results (scan-type) dialog box

This topic describes the Network Scan Results (scan-type) dialog box. There
are two scan types: Scan Now, and Scheduled Scan.
In Results, the execution status of the network scan and execution results
will be displayed. Check the following items. For information about the causes

GUI reference A-31

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 of errors and appropriate actions to take, see the Hitachi Command Suite
Global Link Manager Messages.

Item Description

Scheduled Time Displays the date and time at which the network scan specified
in a schedule is executed. This item is not displayed for Scan
Now.

Start IP Address Displays the IP address specified in the Scan Now or

Scheduled Scan tabbed pages from which the network scan
starts. If the host has both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses, the
address that is assigned the higher priority on the managing
host is displayed.

End IP Address Displays the IP address specified in the Scan Now or

Scheduled Scan tabbed pages at which the network scan
ends. If the host has both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses, the
address that is assigned the higher priority on the managing
host is displayed.

Status Displays the execution status of the network scan. One of the
following is displayed:
• Complete: Indicates that the network scan was
completed.
• Processing: Indicates that the network scan is ongoing.
• Aborted: Indicates that the network scan was suspended.
• Error: Indicates that an error occurred during execution of
the network scan.

Started Time Displays the date and time at which the network scan started.

Ended Time Displays the date and time at which the network scan ended.

Host Added As a result of the execution of the network scan, displays a

message that indicates the number of hosts that were added to
the resources. If any attempt to add a host to the resources
ended with a warning or error, the number of such hosts is
displayed as well. For details about the network scan execution
results, click the message.

Refresh Screen button Click this button to refresh the display contents in the dialog
box.

Network Scan Results Detail (scan-type) dialog box

This topic describes the Network Scan Results Detail (scan-type) dialog box.
There are two scan types: Scan Now and Scheduled Scan.
In Scan Results, the results of adding a host to resources will be displayed.
Check the items below. For information about the causes of errors and
appropriate actions to take, see the Hitachi Command Suite Global Link
Manager Messages.

A-32 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

Result Displays the processing result. Success, Warning, or Error is

displayed with the respective icon. The meanings of the icons are
as follows:

Icon Processing Result

Indicates that processing was successful.

Indicates that processing ended with a warning.

Clicking Warning displays a warning dialog box
in which you can check the warning message.

Indicates that processing failed. Clicking Error

displays an error dialog box in which you can
check the error message.

Specified Host Displays the IP addresses in the range for which the network
scan has been executed. The following items are not displayed:
• The IP addresses of hosts that have already been added to
the resources
• The IP addresses of hosts that have failed to connect with
Hitachi Command Suite Common Agent Component or the
Device Manager agent.
• IP addresses 127.0.0.1 and 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:1
If the host has both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses, the address that is
assigned the higher priority on the managing host is displayed.

Registered Host Displays information about hosts that have been registered in the
resources. If processing failed, a hyphen (-) is displayed.
• Name: Displays the name of the host that has been
registered in the resources.
• IP Address: Displays the IP address of the host that has
been registered in the resources. If the host has both IPv4
and IPv6 addresses, the address that is assigned the higher
priority on the managing host is displayed.
• Agent Service Port: Displays the port number used for the
daemon process (or service) by the host registered in the
resources. If the host operating system is VMware and the
multipath management software is HDLM, this item displays
the connection target of the remote management client.
• Remote Port: Displays the port number that is to be used
for the Web server functionality by the host registered in the
resources.
• Protocol: Displays the communication protocol used
between the host and the Global Link Manager server.

Message ID When processing fails, a message ID is displayed. Clicking this

message ID displays an error dialog box or a warning dialog box.
Check the message in the displayed dialog box.

GUI reference A-33

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Add Network Scan Schedule dialog box
The Add Network Scan Schedule dialog box is used to add schedule settings
for a network scan. In Schedule Configuration, enter schedule information
to be added. Items marked with an asterisk (*) must be specified.
The items displayed in the Add Network Scan Schedule dialog box are
explained below.

Item Description

*Start IP Address Enter an IP address from which the network scan starts. To use
an IP address in IPv4 format, specify a value in the range from
0.0.0.1 to 255.255.255.255. However, you cannot specify
127.0.0.1. To use an IP address in IPv6 format, specify a value
in the range from 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 to
FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF.

*End IP Address Enter an IP address at which the network scan ends. To use an
IP address in IPv4 format, specify a value in the range from
0.0.0.1 to 255.255.255.255. The number of IP addresses
that can be specified must not exceed 256, starting with the
value specified for *Start IP Address and counting up.
However, you cannot specify 127.0.0.1. To use an IP address
in IPv6 format, specify a value in the range from
0:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 to
FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF. The number of
IP addresses that can be specified must not exceed 256,
starting with the value specified for *Start IP Address. Note
that the IP address format specified for *End IP Address
must be the same as for *Start IP Address.

*Agent Service Port If a value is entered in *Start IP Address and *End IP

Address, the default port number (24041) that is used for the
daemon process (or service) in HDLM's Hitachi Command Suite
Common Agent Component is entered automatically. In the
following cases, enter the port number as an integer in the
range from 1 to 65535:
• The HDLM version is earlier than 5.8 and the version of
Device Manager agent in use is earlier than 05-00.
• The HDLM version is 5.8 or later or the version of Device
Manager agent in use is 05-00 or later, and the port
number specified in the server.agent.port property
(agent service port) has been changed in the
server.properties file.
If you are using an HDLM version earlier than 5.8 and you also
use the Device Manager agent, check the value specified for
the server.agent.port property by referring to the Hitachi
Device Manager Agent Installation Guide or Hitachi Command
Suite Administrator Guide. If the HDLM version in use is 5.8 or
later, check the value by referring to the Hitachi Command
Suite Global Link Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.
Note
You cannot specify information about the connection target
for a remote management client.

Remote Port If the HDLM version is earlier than 5.8 and the version of
Device Manager agent in use is earlier than 05-00, specify the

A-34 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
port number to be used by the Web server functionality, using
an integer in the range from 1 to 65535. Check the value
specified for the server.http.port property by referring to
the Hitachi Device Manager Agent Installation Guide. If the
version of HDLM you are using is 5.8 or later or the version of
the Device Manager agent you are using is 05-00 or later,
there is no need to specify the remote port.

Scan Time Specify the time at which the network scan is to be executed.
You can select the time from a drop-down list that displays 15-
minute intervals.

Interval Specify the interval used to execute the network scan. Select
one of the following option buttons:
• Daily option button
Executes a network scan every day. If you select the Daily
option button, the Everyday option button and Weekday
option button become active. You can choose whether to
execute a network scan every day from Monday through
Sunday or only on weekdays from Monday through Friday.
• Weekly option button
Executes a network scan every week. Selecting the
Weekly option button displays a drop-down list from
which you can select the day of the week on which a
network scan is to be executed.
• Monthly option button
Executes a network scan every month. Selecting the
Monthly option button displays a drop-down list from
which you can select the date on which a network scan is
to be executed. To execute a network scan at the
beginning of the month, select First. To execute this scan
at the end of the month, select Last. For any numeric
date, select a number from 1 to 31.

Edit Network Scan Schedule dialog box

The Edit Network Scan Schedule dialog box is used to edit schedule settings
for a network scan. Use Schedule Configuration to enter new schedule
information. Items marked with an asterisk (*) must be specified.
The items displayed in the Edit Network Scan Schedule dialog box are
explained below.

Item Description

*Start IP Address Enter an IP address from which the network scan starts. To use
an IP address in IPv4 format, specify a value in the range from
0.0.0.1 to 255.255.255.255. However, you cannot specify
127.0.0.1. To use an IP address in IPv6 format, specify a value
in the range from 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 to
FFFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF.

GUI reference A-35

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

*End IP Address Enter an IP address at which the network scan ends. To use an
IP address in IPv4 format, specify a value in the range from
0.0.0.1 to 255.255.255.255. The number of IP addresses
that can be specified must not exceed 256, starting with the
value specified for *Start IP Address and counting up.
However, you cannot specify 127.0.0.1. To use an IP address
in IPv6 format, specify a value in the range from
0:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 to
FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF. The number of
IP addresses that can be specified must not exceed 256,
starting with the value specified for *Start IP Address. Note
that the IP address format specified for *End IP Address
must be the same as for *Start IP Address.

*Agent Service Port If a value is entered in *Start IP Address and *End IP

Address, the default port number (24041) that is used for the
daemon process (or service) in HDLM's Hitachi Command Suite
Common Agent Component is entered automatically. In the
following cases, enter the port number as an integer in the
range from 1 to 65535:
• The HDLM version is earlier than 5.8 and the version of
Device Manager agent in use is earlier than 05-00.
• The HDLM version is 5.8 or later or the version of Device
Manager agent in use is 05-00 or later, and the port
number specified in the server.agent.port property
(agent service port) has been changed in the
server.properties file.
If you are using an HDLM version earlier than 5.8 and you also
use the Device Manager agent, check the value specified for
the server.agent.port property by referring to the Hitachi
Device Manager Agent Installation Guide or Hitachi Command
Suite Administrator Guide. If the HDLM version in use is 5.8 or
later, check the value by referring to the Hitachi Command
Suite Global Link Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

Remote Port If the HDLM version is earlier than 5.8 and the version of
Device Manager agent in use is earlier than 05-00, specify the
port number to be used by the Web server functionality, using
an integer in the range from 1 to 65535. Check the value
specified for the server.http.port property by referring to
the Hitachi Device Manager Agent Installation Guide. If the
version of HDLM you are using is 5.8 or later or the version of
the Device Manager agent you are using is 05-00 or later,
there is no need to specify the remote port.

Scan Time Specify the time at which the network scan is to be executed.
You can select the time from a drop-down list that displays 15-
minute intervals.

Interval Specify the interval used to execute the network scan. Select
one of the following option buttons:
• Daily option button
Executes a network scan every day. If you select the Daily
option button, the Everyday option button and Weekday
option button become active. You can choose whether to

A-36 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
execute a network scan every day from Monday through
Sunday or only on weekdays from Monday through Friday.
• Weekly option button
Executes a network scan every week. Selecting the
Weekly option button displays a drop-down list from
which you can select the day of the week on which a
network scan is to be executed.
• Monthly option button
Executes a network scan every month. Selecting the
Monthly option button displays a drop-down list from
which you can select the date on which a network scan is
to be executed. To execute a network scan at the
beginning of a month, select First; at the end of a month,
select Last. For any numeric date, select a number from 1
to 31.

Delete Network Scan Schedule dialog box

The Delete Network Scan Schedule dialog box is used to delete schedule
settings for a network scan. Check the message.

Remove Hosts dialog box (removing from resources)

The Remove Hosts dialog box is used for removing selected hosts from
resources. In the Host List, check the hosts to be removed.
The items displayed in the Remove Hosts dialog box are explained below.

Tip: If you remove hosts from resources, all alert information of the removed
hosts will be removed. Check the alert information of the hosts that you want
to remove before removing hosts.

Item Description

Name Displays the host name.

IP Address Displays the IP address of the host. If the host has both IPv4
and IPv6 addresses, the address that is assigned the higher
priority on the managing host is displayed.

OS Displays the type and version information of the OS installed

on the host. If the host OS is Linux, the kernel version is
displayed.

Multipath Software Displays the name of the multipath management software.

Protocol Displays the communication protocol used between the host

and the Global Link Manager server.

Version Displays version information for the multipath management

software. If HP-UX multipath is used, the HP-UX version is
displayed.

GUI reference A-37

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Refresh Hosts dialog box
The Refresh Hosts dialog box changes the path configuration of the selected
host, and refreshes the host information.
• Change Path Configuration on page A-38
• Reset on page A-38
• Refresh the GAD non-preferred path option on page A-38
• Host List on page A-38

Change Path Configuration

This item is displayed when the host to be refreshed has HDLM (and the
operating system is not VMware). The items are explained below.

Item Description

Change Path If you want to add paths dynamically, select the Adds a Path
Configuration: Dynamically check box. If you want to delete paths
dynamically, select the Deletes a Path Dynamically check
box.

Reset
This item appears if the hosts to be refreshed includes a host that supports
the reset I/O count function or a host for which a lost path exists. The items
are explained below.

Item Description

Reset: To reset the I/O count and the I/O error count for all paths
connected to the host, select the Reset I/O Count check box.
To reset the number of lost paths, select the Reset the Lost
paths check box.

Refresh the GAD non-preferred path option

This item is displayed when the version of HDLM is 8.0.1 or later and when
global storage virtualization is being used. The item is explained below.

Item Description

Refresh the GAD non- To refresh the GAD non-preferred path option, select the
preferred path option Refresh the GAD non-preferred path option check box.

Host List
Check the information of the host you want to refresh. The items are
explained below.

A-38 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

Name Displays the host name.

IP Address Displays the IP address of the host. If the host has both IPv4
and IPv6 addresses, the address that is assigned the higher
priority on the managing host is displayed.

OS Displays the type and version information of the OS installed

on the host. If the host OS is Linux, the kernel version is
displayed.

Multipath Software Displays the name of the multipath management software.

Protocol Displays the communication protocol used between the host

and the Global Link Manager server.

Version Displays version information for the multipath management

software. If HP-UX multipath is used, the HP-UX version is
displayed.

Last Update Time Displays the last update time for the host.

Yes, I've confirmed The OK button becomes active when you select a check box.
information above
check box

Adds a Path Dynamically - host-name/Deletes a Path Dynamically - host-name

dialog box
Paths that were added or deleted dynamically are displayed in Paths. The
items are explained below.

Item Description

Add/Delete Displays Add or Delete to indicate whether the paths were

added or deleted in the change to the path configuration.

Status Displays an icon indicating the status of a path.

LDEV ID The LDEV number is displayed.

Storage system Displays the name of the storage system to which the path is
Name connected. The storage system name is made up of the
following items, delimited by periods:
• vendor-ID: Vendor name of the storage system
• model-ID: Device name of the storage system
• serial-number: Serial number of the storage system

Physical Information Displays the following physical storage system information for
virtual storage machines and other devices:
• LDEV ID:
For HDLM
Displays the ID that is used to identify an LU (an LU
for HDLM), separated by a colon (:) every 2 digits.
For software other than HDLM
Displays n/a.

GUI reference A-39

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
• Storage system name:
For HDLM
Displays the name of the storage system. If no
information exists, n/a is displayed.
For software other than HDLM
Displays n/a.
• CHA:
For HDLM
When the path is migrated by using a virtual ID, the
number of the CHA port to which the migration
destination path connects is displayed. When a virtual
ID is not used, this item is not displayed.
For software other than HDLM
Displays n/a.

CHA Displays the CHA port number, which is made up of a number

and an alphabetic character. This number enables identification
of the CHAs mounted on a storage system. To obtain this
number and identify a CHA, use the storage system
management program.

Multipath LU Displays the names of the HDevs connected to the paths.

Regardless of the number of paths, the HDev names are
grouped by their corresponding LUs and displayed in that
order.
• If the host OS is Solaris 7, the name (with the slice
number omitted) of the HDev that has an owner path, and
whose path ID is the smallest of all the HDevs
corresponding to the same LU, is displayed.
• If the host OS is Windows, the drive letter is displayed. If
no drive letter has been allocated, a hyphen (-) is
displayed.

Host Name Displays the name of the host that recognizes the path.

HBA Displays a number that indicates the HBA that connects to the
path. The bus number and the HBA port number are delimited
by a period.

HBA WWN Displays port WWN information for HBAs. For an iSCSI
interface, n/a is displayed because this information cannot be
obtained.

Type Displays one of the following as the path attribute:

• Owner: The path is subject to owner control, and is
preferentially used for accessing the LU.
• Non-owner: The path goes through a channel adapter,
other than channel adapters under owner control.
A hyphen is displayed if the path is connected to storage
systems from other companies.

Path ID Displays the path management PATH_ID. This is allocated each

time a managed host is restarted or a path configuration is
changed.

A-40 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

Path Name Displays the path name that connects the host to the LU. The
items that make up the path name depend on the host OS. The
display format of the path name for each OS is shown below:
• AIX:
HBA-adapter-number.bus-number.target-ID.host-LU-
number
• Linux, Solaris, Windows, VMware:
host-port-number.bus-number.target-ID.host-LU-
number
To modify the system configuration or upgrade the hardware,
browse the path names and check the affected paths. If HDLM
is in use, the displayed items that make up a path name differ
depending on the host OS. For details about the items
displayed as the components of path names in each OS, see
the command reference in the HDLM manual.

Show Refresh Failed Hosts dialog box

The hosts for which information failed to be updated are displayed in Hosts.
The items are explained below.

Item Description

Name Displays the host name.

Last Refresh Success Displays the

Time date and time when the host information was last updated.

First Refresh Failure Displays the

Time date and time when the host information was first updated but
information failed to be updated.

IP Address Displays the IP address of the host. If the host has both IPv4
and IPv6 addresses, the address that is assigned the higher
priority on the managing host is displayed.

OS Displays the type and version information of the OS installed

on the host. If the host OS is Linux, the kernel version is
displayed.

Multipath Software Displays the name of the multipath management software.

Version Displays version information for the multipath management

software. If HP-UX multipath is used, the HP-UX version is
displayed.

Multihost Configuration wizard

The Multihost Configuration Wizard is used to simultaneously set the HDLM
operating environments for hosts selected using the Hosts tabbed-page of
the host subwindow or the Hosts tabbed-page of the host-group-name
subwindow. The items displayed in the Multihost Configuration Wizard are
explained below.

GUI reference A-41

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 The Multihost Configuration wizard is organized into the following areas:
• Introduction on page A-42
• Configuration Setup on page A-42
• Confirm on page A-49
• Finish on page A-50

Introduction
This displays the procedures to set the HDLM operating environment. The
item displayed here is explained below.

Item Description

Do not show this When you select this check box, the Introduction window is not
message again check displayed when the Multihost Configuration Wizard is
box displayed.

Configuration Setup
Sets the HDLM operating environment. The support status of the HDLM
functions differ depending on the HDLM version and the OS. Only the
functions supported by the HDLM on the host are displayed and can be set.
The item displayed here is explained below.

Item Description

Load Balancing: Sets the load balancing function. From the drop-down list,
select the load balancing algorithm.
• No change: The load balancing settings are not changed.
• Disabled (in operating systems other than VMware): Load
balancing function is not in use.
• Round Robin, Least I/Os, and Least Blocks: These
algorithms switch the path to use each time an I/O is
issued. The path to use is determined as follows:
¢ Round Robin
The path is selected in order from among all
connected paths.
¢ Least I/Os (in operating systems other than
VMware)
The path that has the least number of I/Os being
processed is selected from among all connected paths.
¢ Least Blocks (in operating systems other than
VMware)
The path that has the least number of I/O blocks
being processed is selected from among all connected
paths.
• Extended Round Robin, Extended Least I/Os, and
Extended Least Blocks: These algorithms determine
which path to allocate based on a judgment of whether the
I/O to be issued has continuity with the immediately

A-42 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
preceding I/O (whether the I/Os are sequential). If the I/O
has continuity with the previous I/O, the path to which the
previous I/O was distributed will be used. If a specified
number of I/Os has been issued to a path, processing
switches to the next path. If the I/O does not have
continuity with the previous I/O, these algorithms switch
the path to be used each time an I/O is issued, as in the
Round Robin, Least I/Os, and Least Blocks algorithms.
¢ Extended Round Robin
The path is selected in order from among all
connected paths.
¢ Extended Least I/Os
The path that has the least number of I/Os being
processed is selected from among all connected paths.
¢ Extended Least Blocks
The path that has the least number of I/O blocks
being processed is selected from among all connected
paths.
• Most Recently Used (in VMware): The most recently
used path is selected.
• Fixed (in VMware): The preferred path to the disk is used
whenever available. You can select this algorithm when
only one host is selected, and Fixed is specified as the load
balancing setting for the host.
• Unknown algorithm (in VMware): You can select this
algorithm when only one host is selected, and Unknown
algorithm is set as the load balancing setting for that host.
• UNKNOWN (in VMware): Unknown is displayed for all
other algorithms. You can select this setting when the load
balancing setting of the selected host is UNKNOWN.
Select the load balancing algorithm most suitable for the data
access patterns in your system environment. If there are no
recognizable data access patterns, we recommend applying the
Extended Least I/Os algorithm.
Notes:
¢ Some I/O operations managed by HDLM can be
distributed across all paths, and some cannot. Thus,
you should be aware that even if you specify the
Round Robin algorithm, I/O operations cannot
always be allocated uniformly across all paths.
¢ If the host's OS is HP-UX, paths are not changed for
consecutive I/Os starting at VxFS, regardless of the
type of load balancing.
¢ When the host operating system is VMware, if you
change the load balancing setting from one of the
following, you cannot change it back again.
- Fixed
- Unknown algorithm
- UNKNOWN

Path use times: Sets the number of times the same path can be used.

GUI reference A-43

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
Load balancing:
• No change: The settings for the number of times the
same path can be used in load balancing are not changed.
• Change: The load balancing algorithm specifies the
number of times the same path can be used for I/O. A
value in the range from 0 to 999999 can be specified. If
the same value is specified for the selected hosts, the
value that is already set is displayed by default.
If the host OS is VMware, this item is not displayed.
Extended load balancing:
• For sequential I/Os:
¢ No change: The settings for the number of times the
same path can be used for extended load balancing
(sequential I/O) are not changed.
¢ Change: The extended load balancing algorithm
specifies the number of times the same path can be
used for sequential I/O.
• For random I/Os:
¢ No change: The settings for the number of times the
same path can be used for extended load balancing
(random I/O) are not changed.
¢ Change: The extended load balancing algorithm
specifies the number of times the same path can be
used for random I/O.
A value in the range from 0 to 999999 (if the host OS is not
VMware) or from 1 to 999999 (if host OS is VMware) can be
specified. If the same value is specified for the selected hosts,
the value that is already specified is displayed by default.

Path Health Sets the path health checking function. When you want to use
Checking: the path health checking function, select Enabled from the
drop-down list. It is recommended that the path health
checking function be used, because errors can be detected
readily in a path even when no I/O has been issued, such as
for non-owner paths or a path in a standby host of a cluster
system.

Checking Interval When the path health checking function is used, set the
interval for execution of path health checking, in minutes
(required). Set a value in the range 1-1440, as appropriate to
the usage environment.
When the check interval is changed, the new interval takes
effect immediately. If the check interval is shortened and the
time since the previous execution of path health checking has
already exceeded the new setting for the check interval, path
health checking begins immediately.

Auto Failback: Sets the auto failback function. When you want to use the auto
failback function, select Enabled from the drop-down list. The
following explains the advantages and disadvantages of using
the auto failback function.
Advantage

A-44 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
¢ Error paths are assigned the Online status
automatically.
Disadvantage
¢ Paths to which the user intentionally assigns the error
status (Offline(E)), such as for maintenance work,
might be assigned the Online status automatically.
¢ If an intermittent error occurs between storage and a
path, the path status might alternate back and forth
between having the Offline status and the Online
status, causing a drop in I/O performance.#

Checking Interval When the auto failback function is used, set the interval for
execution of path health checking in minutes (required). Set a
value in the range 1-21440, as appropriate to the usage
environment.

Intermittent Error The intermittent error monitoring function can be set only
Monitor: when the auto failback function is used. When auto failback is
enabled to avoid degradation in I/O performance because of an
intermittent error, it is recommended that intermittent error
monitoring be enabled. When you want to use the intermittent-
error monitoring function, select Enabled from the drop-down
list.

Monitoring Interval When the intermittent error monitoring function is used, set
the error monitoring time, in minutes. Set a value in the range
1-1440, as appropriate for the usage environment.

Number of Times When the intermittent error monitoring function is used,

specify the number of times an error can occur. Set a value in
the range 1-99, as appropriate for the usage environment. If
the error frequency is set to a value of 2 or more, the following
condition must be satisfied:
Error monitoring time for intermittent errors >= check-
interval-for-auto-failback x error-frequency-specified-for-
intermittent-error-monitoring
An error will result if this condition is not satisfied. If this error
occurs, modify either the auto failback check interval, the
intermittent error monitoring time, or the error frequency
specified for intermittent error monitoring.
If the error frequency is set to a value of 1, the above
condition need not be satisfied.
Monitoring is performed for each path. An intermittent error is
recognized to have occurred when for a given path the
specified number of errors have occurred between the time
that intermittent error monitoring is started and the specified
time has been reached. Paths for which intermittent errors
have occurred are not subject to auto failback. Moreover,
intermittent error monitoring is started at the point that the
path recovers from the error by auto failback.
If the error monitoring time or the error frequency is changed
during intermittent error monitoring, the count for the error
frequency from before the modification and the time that has
passed since the start of monitoring are reset to 0. From there,
monitoring starts with the changed settings.

GUI reference A-45

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
If the error monitoring time or the error frequency is changed
other than during intermittent error monitoring, the new error
monitoring time will take effect at the point that the next auto
failback is successful. Because the error frequency and the
time passed are not counted when error monitoring is not in
progress, there is no change to these values.
If the auto failback function is set to Disabled, intermittent
error monitoring is disabled.

Dynamic I/O path Configures the dynamic I/O path control function. Select one of
control the following option buttons:
• No change option button:
This option leaves the dynamic I/O path control function
unchanged. If you select this option, the drop-down list for
configuring dynamic I/O path control becomes unavailable.
• System option button:
Select this option to configure the dynamic I/O path
control function at the host level. The settings apply to all
LUs corresponding to the multipath LUs connected to the
host.
• Storage system option button:
Select this option to configure the dynamic I/O path
control function at the storage system level. The settings
apply to all LUs corresponding to the multipath LUs of the
selected storage system.
If you select the System or Storage system option button,
the drop-down list for configuring dynamic I/O path control
becomes unavailable. The available settings for the dynamic
I/O path control function are as follows:
• Disabled: Dynamic I/O path control is disabled.
• Enabled: Dynamic I/O path control is enabled.
Dynamic I/O path control Configuration:
Click the downward arrow or Dynamic I/O path control
Configuration to display the storage systems for which
you can set dynamic I/O path control. The Dynamic I/O
path control Configuration label only appears if you
select the Storage system option button. Select a check
box to enable dynamic I/O path control for the storage
system.
The items in this area are described below.
Storage systems
¢ Name: Displays the names of the storage systems to
which paths are connected and the icons that indicate
their status. A storage system name is made up of the
following three items, delimited by periods:
- vendor-ID: Vendor name of the storage system
- model-ID: Device name of the storage system
- serial-number: Serial number of the storage system
¢ Serial Number: Displays the serial number of the
storage system.

A-46 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
¢ Dynamic I/O path control: Displays the dynamic
I/O path control setting for each storage system.
An asterisk (*) indicates that other dynamic I/O path
control settings are in use in the system.
¢ Checking Interval: By default, this field displays the
interval for checking the host. If you have selected
multiple hosts with different checking intervals, this
field is blank.
To specify a checking interval directly, select the
Change check box and specify a value from 1 to 1440
(in minutes) to suit your environment. You must enter
a value if you select the check box.
If the host OS is VMware, the minimum value of the
checking interval you can specify is 5.

Reservation Level: Set the reservation control method for an LU. The following
describes the settings for reservation level.
• No change: The reservation level settings are not
changed.
• Ignore reservation: Reservation requests are ignored,
and LUs are not reserved. This is used when one of the
following conditions is met:
A host is connected to a storage system that does not
support persistent reservation.
An LU is shared by multiple hosts, and an application is
executed that uses an exclusive lock mechanism.
• Persistent reservation: Changes a reservation to a
persistent reservation.
The recommended value is Persistent reservation. If HDLMs
are used in a cluster configuration, prepare the reservation
level for each host in the cluster.

Remove LU: Set the remove LU function. The following lists and explains
the settings for remove LU.
• No change: The LU dynamic removal function settings are
not changed.
• Disabled: Even if an error has occurred in all paths for an
LU, if all paths have been switched, and if the LU is
removed, the LU is not removed as an HDLM management
object. The paths acquire the Offline(E) or the
Online(E) status. These operations are the same as for
HDLM version 5.1 and earlier.
• Enabled: If all paths for an LU have been switched, the LU
is removed as an HDLM management object. However, if
the switched paths include paths that have the
Offline(C) status, the LU is not removed as an HDLM
management object. Recover removed LUs by repairing
the physical errors and performing a disk rescan.
• Remove LU even if there are Offline(C) paths: If all
paths for an LU have been switched, the LU is removed as
an HDLM management object, even if the switched paths
include Offline(C) paths. Recover removed LUs by
repairing the physical errors and performing a disk rescan.

GUI reference A-47

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
To use the same function as for HDLM version 5.1 and earlier,
it is recommended that Disabled be set.

Logging Level From the drop-down list, select the level of error information to
be collected in the error log. The following values are available:
• No change
• Do not collect an error log
• Error or higher level
• Warning or higher level
• Information or higher level
• Information or higher level(include maintenance
information)
We recommend that you set the logging level to Information
or higher level so that all error information can be collected.
The logging level can be set for the following log files:
• HDLM manager (dlmmgr[1-16].log)
• HDLM GUI log (dlmgui[1-2].log)

Trace Level From the drop-down list, select the trace output level. The
following values are available:
• No change
• Do not output any trace
• Error information only
• Summary of program operation
• Details of program operation
• All information
The recommended value is Do not output any trace, but
when an error occurs you might need to change the trace level
to Error information only or higher, and collect log data
again.
The maximum amount of information is output to the log when
the trace level is set to All information. If a large quantity of
information is output to the log, file wraparound occurs, and
the time until the old log is removed is shortened.
The trace level can be set for trace file hdlmtr[1-64].log. If
the host's HDLM version is earlier than 5.6, the trace level can
be set for trace files hntr2[1-16].log or hntr[1-16].log.

Error Log: Changes the error log file size and amount. From the drop-
down list, select the setting that you want to change.
When you want to change a setting, enter the error log file size
or amount in the text box. Once all log files have reached the
set size, wraparound occurs on the oldest log file, and new
information is overwritten.

File Size Set the error log file size, in kilobytes. Specify a value in the
range 100-2000000. However, if the HDLM version is prior to
5.6 (5.6.2 if the host OS is Linux), specify a value in the range
100-9900. The file size can be set for HDLM manager log files
(dlmmgr[1-16].log) and HDLM GUI log files
(dlmgui[1-2].log).

A-48 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

Number of Files Set the number of error log files, in the range 2-16. The
recommended value is 2. The only log files for which the
number of files can be set are HDLM manager log files
(dlmmgr[1-16].log). The number of log files for HDLM GUI
(dlmgui[1-2].log) is fixed at 2.

Trace Log: Changes the trace file size and amount. From the drop-down
list, select the setting that you want to change.
When you want to change a setting, enter the trace file size or
amount in the text box. When specifying a value smaller than
the set value, a message is displayed to ask whether you want
to continue processing. If processing is continued, existing
trace files are deleted and a new trace files are created. Trace
files are a fixed length. Therefore, even if the written trace
information does not reach the set file size, the file size for
each output trace file is always fixed. If traces are written to all
of the trace files, wraparound occurs on the oldest trace file,
and a new trace is overwritten.

File Size Set the trace file size, in kilobytes. Specify a value in the range
100-16000. The recommended value is 1000. The file size can
be set for hdlmtr[1-64].log trace files.

Number of Files Sets the number of trace files, in the range 2-64. The
recommended value is 4. The trace files for which the number
of files can be set are the hdlmtr[1-64].log files.

#
When auto failback is enabled to avoid degradation in I/O performance
because of an intermittent error, it is recommended that intermittent
error monitoring be enabled. Intermittent error monitoring can be set
only when auto failback is enabled.

Confirm
This displays the settings of the HDLM operating environment. Check the
settings.

Item Description

Load Balancing: Displays the selected load balancing algorithm.

Path use times: Displays the settings for the number of times the same path
can be used.
Either of the following is displayed:
• No change
• Change
When Change is specified, the number of times the same
path can be used is displayed.

Path Health If you use path health checking, this item shows the interval
Checking: (in minutes) at which path health checking takes place.

GUI reference A-49

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

Auto Failback: If you use auto failback, this item shows the interval (in
minutes) at which the path status is checked.

Intermittent Error If you use intermittent error monitoring, this item shows the
Monitor: error monitoring interval and the number of times an error has
occurred. If the intermittent error monitor function is not being
used, Disabled is displayed.
• Monitoring Interval: Displays the error monitoring time
(in minutes).
• Number of Times: Displays the number of times an error
has occurred (count).

Dynamic I/O path This area displays the dynamic I/O path control configuration.
control: • Displays the selected dynamic I/O path control option.
One of the following items is displayed:
¢ Enabled
¢ Disabled
¢ No change
If you did not select the Storage system option button, No
change is displayed.
• Checking Interval: When you use dynamic I/O path
control and select the Change check box, the interval (in
minutes) at which checking takes place is displayed.

Reservation Level: Displays the selected reservation level.

Remove LU: If you use LU dynamic removal, the dynamic removal setting is
displayed.

Logging Level: Displays the level of error information logged to the error log
file.

Trace Level: Displays the selected trace output level.

Error Log: Displays the size and number of error log files.
• File Size: The size (in KB) of each error log file.
• Number of Files: The number of error log files.

Trace Log: Displays the size and number of trace files.

• File Size: The size (in KB) of each trace file.
• Number of Files: The number of trace files.

Yes. I have confirmed The Confirm button becomes active when you select this
the above check box.
information and wish
to configure the
hosts. check box

Finish
This displays the result of configuring the HDLM operating environment.
Check the items below. If processing failed, check the error message. For
information about the error cause and appropriate actions to take, see the
Hitachi Command Suite Global Link Manager Messages.

A-50 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

Result Displays the processing result. An icon indicates success or

failure. The meanings of the icons are as follows:

Icon Processing Result

Indicates that the processing was successful.

Indicates that the processing failed. Clicking

Error displays an error dialog box in which an
error message can be checked.

Name Displays the host names.

IP Address Displays the IP addresses of the hosts. If the host has both IPv4
and IPv6 addresses, the address that is assigned the higher
priority on the managing host is displayed.

OS Displays the type and version information for the OS installed on

the host. If the host OS is Linux, the kernel version is displayed.

Multipath Software Displays the name of the multipath management software.

Version Displays version information for the multipath management

software.

Message ID Displays the message ID when processing has failed. Clicking the
message ID displays an error dialog box in which the error
message can be checked.

Last Update Time Displays the last update time for the host.

Configuration Click View Configuration to display the host-name subwindow

where you can check the HDLM operating environment settings.

Configure Error Click this button when you want to reset the HDLM operating
Hosts button environment for a host where processing has failed.

Create Report dialog box

This dialog box is used to output a CSV file containing such information as the
path activity rate and path failure log information. This information is useful
for checking for Service Level Agreement (SLA) violations and for checking
the status of failures that occurred while the administrator was not available.
You can create a report that covers up to 90 days. The report creation
function is supported if HDLM version 5.9 or later has been installed on the
host.
The Create Report dialog box is organized into the following areas:
• Report Setting on page A-51
• Hosts on page A-52

Report Setting
Set the type and period of the report that is to be created.

GUI reference A-51

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

Report Type Select the type of report to be created from the drop-down list.
Available report types are as follows:
• Path Availability: Obtains statistical information about
the activity status for each path, based on the path status
for the period specified in Report Window. This report
provides such information as the path activity rate,
operation time, cumulative down time, and number of
errors.
If the host OS is VMware, the calculation of path
availability might be inaccurate by approximately five
minutes.
• Path Status Log: Outputs log information about events
that occurred during the period specified in Report
Window. This report provides such information as
changes to the path status caused by events (such as
occurrence and recovery of path failures and start and
termination of HDLM manager) and the number of paths
that are active per LDEV.
If the host OS is VMware, the time that is recorded in the
log might have a margin of error of approximately five
minutes.

Report Window Specify the period to be covered by the report.

• Start Date: Specify the report start date. The permitted
date is from 90 days in the past to the day before the
report creation date.
• End Date: Specify the report end date. The permitted
date is from the date specified in Start Date to the day
before the report creation date. If the specified date does
not include the time of the most recent modification of a
host, an error results. Check Hosts for each host's last
modified time.

Hosts
Displays information about the selected hosts. Check the hosts for which the
report is to be created. A host whose HDLM version is earlier than 5.9 cannot
be included in a report.

Item Description

Name Displays the host names.

IP Address Displays the IP addresses of the hosts. If the host has both
IPv4 and IPv6 addresses, the address that is assigned the
higher priority on the managing host is displayed.

OS Displays the type and version information for the OS installed

on the host. If the host OS is Linux, the kernel version is
displayed.

Multipath Software Displays the name of the multipath management software.

A-52 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

Version Displays multipath management software. If HP-UX multipath

is used, the HP-UX version is displayed.

Last Update Time Displays the last update time for the host.

Show Hosts dialog box

The Show Hosts dialog box displays a summary of hosts. The items displayed
in the Show Hosts dialog box are explained below.

Item Description

Name Displays the host name.

IP Address Displays the IP address of the host. If the host has both IPv4
and IPv6 addresses, the address that is assigned the higher
priority on the managing host is displayed.

OS Displays the type and version information of the OS installed

on the host. If the host OS is Linux, the kernel version is
displayed.

Multipath Software Displays the name of the multipath management software.

Version Displays multipath management software. If HP-UX multipath

is used, the HP-UX version is displayed.

host-name subwindow
In the host-name subwindow, you can:
• Display the host's path, multipath LU, and HBA port information (View
permission).
• Create a report about the host's path (View permission).
You can perform this operation only when HDLM version 5.9 or later has
been installed on the host.
• Reset the I/O count of the host (Modify permission).
You can perform this operation only when HDLM is used for the multipath
management software.
• Update host information (Modify permission).
• Modify the status of paths associated with the host (Modify permission).
• Start up an operating environment and alert notification for the multipath
management software on the host (Modify permission).
Only alert-notification can be started up when DMP is used for the
multipath management software.
The host-name subwindow is organized into the following areas:
• Application bar area on page A-54
• Summary on page A-54
• Paths tabbed-page on page A-55

GUI reference A-53

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 • Multipath LUs tabbed-page on page A-60
• Disks tabbed-page on page A-63
• HBA Ports tabbed-page on page A-64
• Port / Channel tabbed-page on page A-65
• Multipath Configuration tabbed-page on page A-65
• Alert tabbed-page on page A-69

Application bar area

Item Description

Refresh Host button Updates host information.

Reset I/O Count Resets the I/O count and I/O error count of all paths connected
button to the host. This item is inactive when no paths are connected.

Create Report button Creates a report on the paths of the host. Clicking this button
displays the Create Report dialog box. The Create Report
button is displayed when the version of HDLM running on the
host is 5.9 or later.

Summary
Item Description

IP Address Displays the IP address of the host. If the host has both IPv4
and IPv6 addresses, the address that is assigned the higher
priority on the managing host is displayed.

OS Displays the type and version information of the OS installed

on the host. If the host OS is Linux, the kernel version is
displayed.

Multipath Software Displays the name of the multipath management software.

Version Displays version information for the multipath management

software. If HP-UX multipath is used, the HP-UX version is
displayed.

Agent Service Port The port number used by the daemon process (or service) of
the Device Manager Agent or HDLM Hitachi Command Suite
Common Agent Component, or if the host operating system is
VMware and the multipath management software is HDLM, the
connection target of the remote management client.
The display format of the remote management client
connection target is shown below.
- Host Name or IP Address:Port number

Remote Port Displays the port number to be used by the Device Manager
agent or HDLM Hitachi Command Suite Common Agent
Component for the Web server functionality.

Last Update Time Displays the last update time for the host information.

A-54 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

Path Status Displays the statuses (with icons) of paths connected to the
host. The display shows the number of paths that have the
status Online, Offline(C), Offline(E), Online(E),
Online(S), Online(D), Healthy, or Unhealthy, as well as the
total number of paths. When the integer indicating the number
of paths that have a given status is clicked, the Show Paths -
dialog box is displayed.

Lost Path Displays the number of lost paths. This item is not displayed
when the number of lost paths is not detected. If you click the
integer indicating the number of lost paths, the Show Lost
Paths - host-name Dialog Box is displayed.

Paths tabbed-page
Item Description

Status Displays an icon indicating the status of a path.

LDEV ID For HDLM:

Displays the logical device number.
For HP-UX multipath:
The LUN hardware path is displayed.
LDEV ID is displayed when HDLM or HP-UX multipath is used
for the multipath management software.

LDEV Label For HDLM:

Displays label information associated with the LDEV. If
n/a is displayed, Global Link Manager failed to obtain
LDEV label information from Device Manager. A blank is
displayed if the LDEV label information could not be
acquired.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.
LDEV Label is displayed when HDLM or HP-UX multipath is
used for the multipath management software.

LUN Displays the LUN. LUN is displayed when DMP is used for the
multipath management software with Windows as the OS.

Storage system Displays the name of the storage system to which the path is
Name connected. The storage system name is made up of the
following items, delimited by periods:
• vendor-ID: Vendor name of the storage system
For HDLM or HP-UX multipath, UNKNOWN# is displayed if the
storage information cannot be recognized.
• For HDLM or HP-UX multipath
model-ID: Device name of the storage system
UNKNOWN# is displayed if the storage information cannot be
recognized.
• For DMP

GUI reference A-55

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
product-ID: Product ID of the storage system
• serial-number: Serial number of the storage system
For HDLM or HP-UX multipath, a hyphen (-) is displayed if
the storage information cannot be recognized.

Physical Information Displays the following physical storage system information for
virtual storage machines and other devices:
• LDEV ID:
For HDLM
Displays the ID that is used to identify an LU (an LU
for HDLM), separated by a colon (:) every 2 digits. If
no information exists, n/a is displayed.
For software other than HDLM
Displays n/a.
• Storage system name:
For HDLM
Displays the name of the storage system. If no
information exists, n/a is displayed.
For software other than HDLM
Displays n/a.
• CHA:
For HDLM
When the path is migrated by using a virtual ID, the
number of the CHA port to which the migration
destination path connects is displayed. When a virtual
ID is not used, this item is not displayed.
For software other than HDLM
Displays n/a.

CHA, or Target Displays the CHA port number, which is made up of a number
and an alphabetic character. This number enables identification
of the CHAs mounted on a storage system. To obtain this
number and identify a CHA, use the storage system
management program.

Multipath LU, or Disk Displays the names of the HDevs connected to the paths.
Regardless of the number of paths, the HDev names are
grouped by their corresponding LUs and displayed in that
order.
If the host OS is Solaris 7, the name (with the slice number
omitted) of the HDev that has an owner path, and whose path
ID is the smallest of all the HDevs corresponding to the same
LU, is displayed. If the host OS is Windows and HDLM is being
used, the drive letter is displayed. If no drive letter has been
allocated, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Disk Number For HDLM:

If the host OS is Windows, the Windows physical device
number is displayed. If the physical device number cannot
be obtained, a hyphen (-) is displayed. If the host OS is

A-56 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
not Windows, n/a is displayed. Note that this item is not
displayed if no Windows hosts exist.
For DMP and HP-UX multipath:
This item is not displayed.

Host Name Displays the name of the host that recognizes the path.

HBA, or Port / Displays a number that indicates the HBA that connects to the
Channel path. The HBA display format is shown below.
• HDLM: bus-number.HBA-port-number
• HP-UX multipath:
host-port-number
• DMP (in Windows): Pport-IDCchannel-ID

HBA WWN For HDLM:

Displays port WWN information for HBAs. For an iSCSI
interface, n/a is displayed because this information cannot
be obtained.
For HP-UX multipath:
The port name obtained by the scsimgr get_info
command is displayed.
HBA WWN is displayed when HDLM or HP-UX multipath is
used for the multipath management software.

I/O Count or Displays the total number of I/O counts for the path. n/a is
Operations displayed if I/O count information could not be obtained. If HP-
UX multipath is used, the total number of processed I/Os that
have been obtained by the scsimgr get_stat command is
displayed.
If DMP is used for the multipath management software, the
information below is displayed.
• Reads: Displays the number of read requests issued by
the OS to the storage system.
• Writes: Displays the number of write requests issued by
the OS to the storage system.

I/O Errors For HDLM:

Displays the total number of I/O errors for the path.
For HP-UX multipath:
The number of I/O failures obtained by the scsimgr
get_stat command is displayed.
I/O Errors is displayed when HDLM or HP-UX multipath is
used for the multipath management software.

Bytes Displays the path I/O data size in bytes. Bytes is displayed
when DMP is used for the multipath management software with
Windows as the OS.
• Reads: Displays the amount of data issued by the OS to
the storage system for read requests.
• Writes: Displays the amount of data issued by the OS to
the storage system for write requests.

GUI reference A-57

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

Type For HDLM:

Displays one of the following as the path attribute:
¢ Owner: The path is subject to owner control, and is
preferentially used for accessing the LU.
¢ Non-owner: The path goes through a channel
adapter, other than channel adapters under owner
control.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.
A hyphen is displayed if the path is connected to storage
systems from other companies. Type is displayed when HDLM
or HP-UX multipath is used for the multipath management
software.

SLPR For HDLM:

Displays the number (in the range 0-31) of the SLPR to
which the LU belongs. A hyphen is displayed if the HDLM
version of the managed host is prior to 5.6 or if the LU to
be displayed is in a storage system that does not support
the storage logical partition function.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.
SLPR is displayed when HDLM or HP-UX multipath is used for
the multipath management software.

CLPR For HDLM:

Displays the number (in the range 0-31) of the CLPR to
which the CHA belongs. A hyphen is displayed if the HDLM
version of the host is prior to 5.6 or if the CHA to be
displayed is mounted on a storage system that does not
support the cache logical partition function.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.
CLPR is displayed when HDLM or HP-UX multipath is used for
the multipath management software.

Path ID For HDLM:

Displays the path management PATH_ID. This is allocated
each time a managed host is restarted or a path
configuration is changed.
For HP-UX multipath:
The instance number obtained by the ioscan -kfnNC
lunpath command is displayed.
Path ID is displayed when HDLM or HP-UX multipath is used
for the multipath management software.

Primary Displays the primary path setting. Either of the following

settings is displayed:
• YES
• NO

A-58 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
• -
Primary is displayed when DMP is used for the multipath
management software with Windows as the OS.

Path Name Displays the path name that connects the host to the LU. If
HP-UX multipath is used, the lunpath hardware path obtained
by the ioscan -m hwpath command is displayed. The items
that make up the path name depend on the host OS. The
display format of the path name is shown below.
• HDLM (in AIX):
HBA-adapter-number.bus-number.target-ID.host-LU-
number
• HDLM (in HP-UX, Linux, Solaris , Windows, VMware):
host-port-number.bus-number.target-ID.host-LU-
number
• HP-UX multipath (in HP-UX):
host-port-number.target-port-WWN.host-LU-number
• DMP (in Windows):
Path path-number-port-/-channel-number-target-
number-LUN
To modify the system configuration or upgrade the hardware,
browse the path names and check the affected paths. If HDLM
is in use, the displayed items that make up a path name differ
depending on the host OS. For details about the items
displayed as the components of path names in each OS, see
the command reference in the HDLM manual.

Intermittent Error For HDLM:

Displays information related to intermittent errors. One of
the following is displayed:
¢ -: Indicates that the intermittent error monitoring
function is not supported at this time or that the HDLM
manager is stopped.
¢ Number (0 or greater): Indicates the number of errors
that occurred during intermittent error monitoring.
¢ *: Indicates that an intermittent error was detected,
but that it is not subject to auto failback.
¢ n/a: Indicates that the host OS is VMware and no
path is connected.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.
Intermittent Error is displayed when HDLM or HP-UX
multipath is used for the multipath management software.

Set Online button Changes the status of paths to Online. This button becomes
active when you select a check box for a path. The Set Online
button is displayed when HDLM or HP-UX multipath is used for
the multipath management software.

Set Offline button Changes the status of paths to Offline(C). This button
becomes active when you select a check box for a path. The

GUI reference A-59

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
Set Offline button is displayed when HDLM or HP-UX
multipath is used for the multipath management software.

Set Online(D) button Changes the status of the paths to Online(D). This button
becomes active when you select a check box for paths that can
be set to Online(D).
This item is displayed when the gui.physical.view properties
in the server.properties file for the Global Link Manager
server are set to true. For details about the
gui.physical.view properties, see the Hitachi Command
Suite Global Link Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

Filter button Filters information in the Paths list. Clicking this button
displays the Filter - Paths dialog box.

Filter Off button Cancels the filtering conditions that were set in the Filter -
Paths dialog box.

#
If UNKNOWN is displayed for the storage system name, check the status of
the path connected to the host. Make sure that the path is in the Online
status, and then update the host information.

Multipath LUs tabbed-page

The Multipath LUs tabbed-page is displayed when HDLM or HP-UX multipath
is used for the multipath management software.

Item Description

Multipath LU For HDLM:

Displays the names of the HDevs. Regardless of the
number of paths, the HDev names are grouped by their
corresponding LUs and displayed in that order.
¢ If the host OS is or Solaris 7, the name (with the slice
number omitted) of the HDev that has an owner path,
and whose path ID is the smallest of all the HDevs
corresponding to the same LU, is displayed.
¢ If the host OS is Windows, the drive letter is
displayed. If no drive letter has been allocated, a
hyphen (-) is displayed.
For HP-UX multipath:
The LUN hardware path is displayed.

Disk Number For HDLM:

If the host OS is Windows, the Windows physical device
number is displayed. If the physical device number cannot
be obtained, a hyphen (-) is displayed. If the host OS is
not Windows, n/a is displayed. Note that this item is not
displayed if no Windows hosts exist.
For HP-UX multipath:
This item is not displayed.

A-60 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

Host Name Displays the name of the host that manages the multipath LU.

Load Balancing For HDLM:

Displays one of the following for the set load balancing
algorithm when the load balancing function is being used:
- Round robin
- Extended round robin
- Least I/Os (in operating systems other than VMware)
- Extended least I/Os
- Least blocks (in operating systems other than VMware)
- Extended least blocks
- Most Recently Used (in VMware)
- Fixed (in VMware)
- Unknown algorithm (in VMware)
When the host operating system is VMware, Unknown is
displayed for all other algorithms.
For HP-UX multipath:
Displays one of the following for the load balancing policy
for the LUN corresponding to the host:
- Round-robin
- Least command load
- Cell aware round robin
- Preferred path
- Preferred target port
- Closest path
- Weighted round-robin
- Path lock down
In operating systems other than VMware, Disabled is
displayed when the load balancing function is not being used.

Path use times If Round robin, Least I/Os, or Least blocks is applied for
the load balancing algorithm, the maximum number of times
the same path can be used is displayed. If Extended round
robin, Extended least I/Os, or Extended least blocks is
applied for the load balancing algorithm, the maximum number
of times the same path can be used for sequential I/O is
displayed.

Random I/Os Path If Extended round robin, Extended least I/Os, or

use times Extended least blocks is applied for the load balancing
algorithm, the maximum number of times the same path can
be used for random I/O is displayed.

Dynamic I/O path Displays one of the following as the dynamic I/O path control
control setting for the multipath LU. Note that this item is not
displayed when the storage systems connected to the host do
not support dynamic I/O path control.
• Disabled: Dynamic I/O path control is disabled.
• Enabled: Dynamic I/O path control is enabled.

GUI reference A-61

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

Status Displays icons indicating the statuses of paths connected to the

multipath LU. The display shows the number of paths that have
the status Online, Offline(C), Offline(E), Online(E),
Online(S), or Online(D).

Storage system Displays the name of the storage system that contains the
Name multipath LU. The storage system name is made up of the
following three items, delimited by periods:
• vendor-ID: Vendor name of storage system
UNKNOWN# is displayed if the storage information cannot be
recognized.
• model-ID: Device name of storage system
UNKNOWN# is displayed if the storage information cannot be
recognized.
• serial-number: Serial number of storage system
A hyphen (-) is displayed if the storage information cannot
be recognized.

LDEV ID For HDLM:

Displays the logical device number.
For HP-UX multipath:
The LUN hardware path is displayed.

Physical Information Displays the following physical storage system information for
virtual storage machines and other devices:
• Storage system name:
For HDLM
Displays the storage system name. If multiple storage
system names exist, an asterisk (*) is displayed. If no
storage system name exists, n/a is displayed.
For software other than HDLM
Displays n/a.
• LDEV ID:
For HDLM
Displays the ID that is used to identify an LU (an LU
for HDLM), separated by a colon (:) every 2 digits. If
multiple LDEV IDs exist, an asterisk (*) is displayed. If
no LDEV ID exists, n/a is displayed.
For software other than HDLM
Displays n/a.

LDEV Label For HDLM:

Displays label information associated with the LDEV. If n/a
is displayed, Global Link Manager failed to obtain LDEV
label information from Device Manager. A blank is
displayed if the LDEV label information could not be
acquired.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.

A-62 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

Configure Multipath Click here to set the following items for a multipath LU: the
LUs button load balancing algorithm, the number of times the same path
can be used, the number of times the same path can be used
for extended load balancing (random I/O), or dynamic I/O path
control. If the host OS is Solaris 7, the selected algorithm is set
for all LUs corresponding to the selected multipath LUs. This
button becomes available when you select the check box for a
multipath LU in the Multipath LUs page in order to set the
load balancing algorithm, the number of times the same path
can be used, the number of times the same path can be used
for extended load balancing (random I/O), or dynamic I/O path
control. When the Configure Multipath LUs button is clicked,
the Configure Multipath LUs dialog box is displayed.
The Configure Multipath LUs button appears when the HDLM
installed on the host supports setting the load balancing
algorithm, the number of times the same path can be used,
the number of times the same path can be used for extended
load balancing (random I/O), or dynamic I/O path control for
individual LUs. This functionality is supported by hosts where
HDLM version 5.8 or later installed. Setting the number of
times the same path can be used is supported for each LU on
hosts running HDLM version 7.4.1 or later. The function for
setting the number of times the same path can be used for
extended load balancing (random I/O) is supported for
individual LUs on hosts running HDLM version 8.1.2 or later.
Dynamic I/O path control is supported for individual LUs on
hosts running HDLM version 7.3 or later.

Show Paths button Displays the status of paths connected to multipath LUs. In the
Multipath LUs list, when you select the check box of a
multipath LU whose path status you want to display, the Show
Paths button is displayed as active. When the Show Paths
button is clicked, the Show Paths - host-name dialog box is
displayed.

#
If UNKNOWN is displayed for the storage system name, check the status of
the path connected to the host. Make sure that the path is in the Online
status, and then update the host information.

Disks tabbed-page
The Disks tabbed-page is displayed in Windows when the multipath
management software is DMP.

Item Description

Disk Displays the physical disk name. Regardless of the number of

paths, the physical disk names are grouped by their
corresponding LUs and displayed in that order.

Host Name Displays the name of the host managing the disks.

LoadBalancePolicy Displays one of the following algorithms, which are used to set
the load-balancing policy:

GUI reference A-63

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
• Fail Over Only (Active/Passive)
• Round Robin (Active/Active)
• Round Robin with Subset
• Dynamic Least Queue Depth
• Weighted Paths
• Least Blocks
• Balanced Path

Status Displays the statuses of paths connected to the disk as icons.

Displays the amounts of paths with Healthy and Unhealthy
statuses.

Storage system Displays the name of the storage system containing the disks.
Name The storage system name is made up of the following three
items, delimited by periods:
• vendor-ID: Vendor name of storage system
• product-ID: Product ID of the storage system
• serial-number: Serial number of storage system

LUN Displays the LUN.

Show Paths button Used to display the status of paths connected to the disk. This
button becomes activated when a check box, for the disks
whose path status is displayed, is selected under Disks. When
the Show Paths button is clicked, the Show Paths - host-
name dialog box is displayed.

HBA Ports tabbed-page

The HBA Ports tabbed-page is displayed when HDLM or HP-UX multipath is
used for the multipath management software.

Item Description

HBA Port For HDLM:

Displays a number that indicates the HBA that connects to
a path and an icon that indicates the HBA status. The bus
number and the HBA port number are delimited by a
period.
For HP-UX multipath:
The H/W Path and an icon that indicates the H/W Path
status are displayed.

HBA WWN For HDLM:

Displays port WWN information for HBAs. For an iSCSI
interface, n/a is displayed because this information cannot
be obtained.
For HP-UX multipath:
The port name obtained by the scsimgr get_info
command is displayed.

A-64 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

Show Paths button Displays the status of paths connected to a particular HBA
port. The Show Paths button becomes active when you select
a check box for an HBA port in the HBA Ports list. When the
Show Paths button is clicked, the Show Paths - host-name
dialog box is displayed.

Port / Channel tabbed-page

The Port / Channel tabbed-page is displayed in Windows when the
multipath management software is DMP.

Item Description

Port / Channel Displays a number that indicates the HBA that connects to a
path. This item is displayed in the Pport-IDCchannel-ID
format.

Show Paths button Used to display the status of paths connected to specific ports/
channels. This button becomes activated when a check box, for
the port/channel whose path status is displayed, is selected
under Port / Channel. When the Show Paths button is
clicked, the Show Paths - host-name dialog box is displayed.

Multipath Configuration tabbed-page

The Multipath Configuration tabbed-page displays the operating
environment settings for multipath management software. This tabbed-page
displays only the functions that are supported by the multipath management
software running on the selected host.
UNKNOWN is displayed for a value that cannot be recognized by Global Link
Manager.

Item Description

Load Balancing For HDLM:

Displays one of the following for the set load balancing
algorithm when the load balancing function is being used:
- Round robin
- Extended round robin
- Least I/Os (in operating systems other than VMware)
- Extended least I/Os
- Least blocks (in operating systems other than VMware)
- Extended least blocks
- Most Recently Used (in VMware)
- Fixed (in VMware)
- Unknown algorithm (in VMware)

GUI reference A-65

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
When the host operating system is VMware, Unknown is
displayed for all other algorithms and n/a is displayed
when no path is connected.
If a different load balancing policy is used for each LUN, an
asterisk (*) is appended to indicate that other load
balancing policies are also in use.
For HP-UX multipath:
Displays one of the following for the load balancing policy
for the LUN corresponding to the host:
- Round-robin
- Least command load
- Cell aware round robin
- Preferred path
- Preferred target port
- Closest path
- Weighted round-robin
- Path lock down
If a different load balancing policy is used for each LUN,
the most-used load balancing policy is displayed. To
indicate that other load balancing policies are also in use,
an asterisk (*) is also appended.
In operating systems other than VMware, Disabled is
displayed when the load balancing function is not being used.
Load Balancing is displayed when HDLM or HP-UX multipath
is used for the multipath management software.

Path use times • Load Balancing:

If Round Robin, Least I/Os, or Least blocks is applied
for the load balancing algorithm, the maximum number of
times the same path can be used is displayed.
• Extended load balancing:
For sequential I/Os: If Extended round robin,
Extended least I/Os, or Extended least blocks is
applied for the load balancing algorithm, the maximum
number of times the same path can be used for sequential
I/O is displayed.
For random I/Os: If Extended round robin, Extended
least I/Os, or Extended least blocks is applied for the
load balancing algorithm, the maximum number of times
the same path can be used for random I/O is displayed.
If different numbers are used for each LUN, an asterisk (*) is
appended to indicate that the number of times the same path
can be used differs for another LUN.

Path Health Checking If the path health checking function is enabled, the interval for
button checking path health is displayed in minutes. If the path health
checking function is not being used, Disabled is displayed.
Path Health Checking is displayed when HDLM is used for the
multipath management software.

Auto Failback If the auto failback function is enabled, the interval for
checking path status is displayed in minutes. If the auto

A-66 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
failback function is not being used, Disabled is displayed.
Auto Failback is displayed when HDLM is used for the
multipath management software.

Intermittent Error When the intermittent error monitor function is being used, the
Monitor interval for error monitoring and the number of times an error
has occurred is displayed. If the intermittent error monitor
function is not being used, Disabled is displayed.
Intermittent Error Monitor is displayed when HDLM is used
for the multipath management software.
• Monitoring Interval: Displays the error monitoring time
(in minutes).
• Number of Times: Displays the number of times an error
has occurred (count).

Dynamic I/O path If you are using the dynamic I/O path control function, this
control item displays the interval (in minutes) at which dynamic I/O
path control is performed. If you are not using the function,
Disabled is displayed.
• Dynamic I/O path control: Displays the dynamic I/O
path control setting.
If you use different settings for different multipath LUs, an
asterisk (*) is appended to indicate that other dynamic I/O
path control settings are also in use.
• Checking Interval: If you are using the dynamic I/O path
control function, this item displays the interval (in minutes)
at which dynamic I/O path control is performed.
The Dynamic I/O path control item appears when you use
HDLM as your multipath management software and both of the
following conditions are met:
• The HDLM version is 7.3 or later.
• The storage systems connected to the host support
dynamic I/O path control.

Reservation Level If a reservation level has been set, the reservation level is
displayed (one of the following):
• Ignore reservation
• Persistent reservation
Reservation Level is displayed when HDLM is used for the
multipath management software.

Remove LU When the remove LU function is being used, the setting is

displayed (one of the following):
• Disabled
• Enabled
• Remove LU even if there are Offline(C) paths
Remove LU is displayed when HDLM is used for the multipath
management software.

Logging Level Displays the information level set for logging (one of the
following):
• Do not collect an error log
• Error or higher level

GUI reference A-67

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
• Warning or higher level
• Information or higher level
• Information or higher level(include maintenance
information)
Logging Level is displayed when HDLM is used for the
multipath management software.

Trace Level Displays the set trace output level (one of the following):
• Do not output any trace
• Error information only
• Summary of program operation
• Details of program operation
• All information
Trace Level is displayed when HDLM is used for the multipath
management software.

Error Log Displays the size and number of log files that have been set. If
setting the number of files is not supported, the number of files
is not displayed.
• File Size: Displays the size (in kilobytes) set for the error
log files. The value displayed will be in the range
100-2000000.
• Number of Files: Displays the number of set log files (in
the range 2-16).
Error Log is displayed when HDLM is used for the multipath
management software.

Trace Log Displays the size and number of set trace files. If setting the
number of trace files is not supported, the number of files is
not displayed.
• File Size: Displays the size (in kilobytes) of the set trace
files. The displayed value will be in the range 100-16000.
• Number of Files: Displays the number of set trace files
(in the range 2-64).
Trace Log is displayed when HDLM is used for the multipath
management software.

Storage system Displays the name of the storage system to which the path is
Name connected. The storage system name is made up of the
following three items, delimited by periods:
• vendor-ID: Vendor name of storage system
• product-ID: Product ID of the storage system
• serial-number: Serial number of storage system
Storage system Name is displayed when DMP is used for the
multipath management software with Windows as the OS.

TestPathRetryCount Displays the test count that is used to determine if a path has
recovered from an error. TestPathRetryCount is displayed
when DMP is used for the multipath management software with
Windows as the OS.

A-68 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

ScsiCmdTimeOut Displays the SCSI command standby time until the disk device
responds. ScsiCmdTimeOut is displayed when DMP is used for
the multipath management software with Windows as the OS.

KernelSleepTime Displays the recovery time interval (in milliseconds) for a path
where an error has occurred. KernelSleepTime is displayed
when DMP is used for the multipath management software with
Windows as the OS.

FailOverRetryCount Displays the failover retry count. FailOverRetryCount is

displayed when DMP is used for the multipath management
software with Windows as the OS.

Configure button Sets the HDLM function. When the Configure button is clicked,
the Configure HDLM - host-name dialog box is displayed. The
Configure button is displayed when HDLM is used for the
multipath management software.

Alert tabbed-page
The Alert tabbed-page displays the settings for the alert notification function.
The Alert tabbed-page is displayed when the HDLM on the host supports the
alert notification function. This function is supported by hosts running HDLM
version 5.8 or later, DMP, or HP-UX multipath.

Item Description

Alert Notification When the alert notification function is set, On is displayed.

When the alert function is not set, Off is displayed. If the host
OS is VMware and is no path is connected, n/a is displayed.

Destination button Displays the destination for alert notification. For the
destination of the alert notification, the Global Link Manager
server is specified.
• IP Address: Displays the IP address of the Global Link
Manager server. If the host has both IPv4 and IPv6
addresses, the address that is assigned the higher priority
on the managing host is displayed.
• Port: Displays the port number of the Global Link Manager
server.
• Community: Displays the set SNMP community name.
Note that this item is not displayed if the SNMP version is
version 3.
• Version: Displays the set SNMP version.

Configure Alerts Sets the alert notification function. When the Configure
button Alerts button is clicked, the Configure Alerts - host-name
dialog box is displayed.

storage-system-name dialog box

The Storage-system-Name dialog box displays information about a storage
system. The Storage-system-Name dialog box is organized into the following
areas:

GUI reference A-69

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 • Path Status on page A-70
• HDLM or HDLM and others tabbed-page on page A-70
• DMP Windows tabbed-page on page A-77

Path Status
Displays the statuses (with icons) of paths connected to the storage system.
If instances of different multipath management software are running at the
same time, the path status is displayed for each one. The display shows the
number of paths that have the status Online, Offline(C), Offline(E),
Online(E), Online(S), Online(D), Healthy, or Unhealthy, as well as the
total number of paths.

HDLM or HDLM and others tabbed-page

This tabbed-page displays information about the configuration of the host on
which HDLM or HP-UX multipath is running.

Item Description

Paths tabbed-page Displays information about the paths connected to the storage
system.
• Status: Displays an icon indicating the status of a path.
• LDEV ID:
For HDLM:
Displays the logical device number.
For HP-UX multipath:
The LUN hardware path is displayed.
• LDEV Label:
For HDLM:
Displays label information associated with the LDEV. If
n/a is displayed, Global Link Manager failed to obtain
LDEV label information from Device Manager. A blank
is displayed if the LDEV label information could not be
acquired.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.
• Storage system Name: Displays the name of the storage
system that contains the multipath LU. The storage system
name is made up of the following three items, delimited by
periods:
¢ vendor-ID: Vendor name of storage system
UNKNOWN# is displayed if the storage information
cannot be recognized.
¢ model-ID: Device name of storage system
UNKNOWN# is displayed if the storage information
cannot be recognized.
¢ serial-number: Serial number of storage system

A-70 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Item Description
A hyphen (-) is displayed if the storage information
cannot be recognized.
• Physical Information:
Displays the following physical storage system information
for virtual storage machines and other devices:
¢ LDEV ID:
For HDLM
Displays the ID that is used to identify an LU (an LU
for HDLM), separated by a colon (:) every 2 digits.
For software other than HDLM
Displays n/a.
¢ Storage system name:
For HDLM
Displays the name of the storage system. If no
information exists, n/a is displayed.
For software other than HDLM
Displays n/a.
¢ CHA:
For HDLM
When the path is migrated by using a virtual ID, the
number of the CHA port to which the migration
destination path connects is displayed. When a virtual
ID is not used, this item is not displayed.
For software other than HDLM
Displays n/a.
• CHA:
For HDLM:
Displays the CHA port number, which is made up of a
number and an alphabetic character. This number
enables identification of the CHAs mounted on a
storage system. To obtain this number and identify a
CHA, use the storage system management program.
For HP-UX multipath:
The target address is displayed.
• Multipath LU:
For HDLM:
Displays the names of the HDevs connected to the
paths. Regardless of the number of paths, the HDev
names are grouped by their corresponding LUs and
displayed in that order.
- If the host OS is Solaris 7, the name (with the slice
number omitted) of the HDev that has an owner path,
and whose path ID is the smallest of all the HDevs
corresponding to the same LU, is displayed.
- If the host OS is Windows, the drive letter is
displayed. If no drive letter has been allocated, a
hyphen (-) is displayed.

GUI reference A-71

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
For HP-UX multipath:
The LUN hardware path is displayed.
• Disk Number:
For HDLM:
If the host OS is Windows, the Windows physical
device number is displayed. If the physical device
number cannot be obtained, a hyphen (-) is
displayed. If the host OS is not Windows, n/a is
displayed. Note that this item is not displayed if no
Windows hosts exist.
For HP-UX multipath:
This item is not displayed.
• Host Name: Displays the name of the host that
recognizes the path.
• HBA:
For HDLM:
Displays a number that indicates the HBA that
connects to the path. The bus number and the HBA
port number are delimited by a period.
For HP-UX multipath:
The H/W Path is displayed.
• HBA WWN:
For HDLM:
Displays port WWN information for HBAs. For an iSCSI
interface, n/a is displayed because this information
cannot be obtained.
For HP-UX multipath:
The port name obtained by the scsimgr get_info
command is displayed.
• I/O Count:
For HDLM:
Displays the total number of I/O counts for the path.
n/a is displayed if I/O count information could not be
obtained.
For HP-UX multipath:
The total number of processed I/Os that have been
obtained by the scsimgr get_stat command is
displayed.
• I/O Errors:
For HDLM:
Displays the total number of I/O errors for the path.
For HP-UX multipath:
The number of I/O failures obtained by the scsimgr
get_stat command is displayed.
• Type:
For HDLM:

A-72 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Item Description
Displays one of the following as the path attribute:
- Owner: The path is subject to owner control, and is
preferentially used for accessing the LU.
- Non-owner: The path goes through a channel
adapter, other than channel adapters under owner
control.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.
A hyphen is displayed if the path is connected to storage
systems from other companies.
• SLPR:
For HDLM:
Displays the number (in the range 0-31) of the SLPR
to which the LU belongs. A hyphen is displayed if the
HDLM version of the managed host is prior to 5.6 or if
the LU to be displayed is in a storage system that
does not support the storage logical partition function.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.
• CLPR:
For HDLM:
Displays the number (in the range 0-31) of the CLPR
to which the CHA belongs. A hyphen is displayed if the
HDLM version of the host is prior to 5.6 or if the CHA
to be displayed is mounted on a storage system that
does not support the cache logical partition function.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.
• Path ID:
For HDLM:
Displays the path management PATH_ID. This is
allocated each time a managed host is restarted or a
path configuration is changed.
For HP-UX multipath:
The instance number obtained by the ioscan -kfnNC
lunpath command is displayed.
• Path Name: Displays the path name that connects the
host to the LU. If HP-UX multipath is used, the lunpath
hardware path obtained by the ioscan -m hwpath
command is displayed. The items that make up the path
name depend on the host OS. The display format of the
path name for each OS is shown below:
¢ AIX:
HBA-adapter-number.bus-number.target-ID.host-
LU-number
¢ HP-UX, Linux, Solaris, Windows, VMware:
host-port-number.bus-number.target-ID.host-LU-
number

GUI reference A-73

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
¢ HP-UX (for HP-UX multipath):
host-port-number.target-port-WWN.host-LU-number
To modify the system configuration or upgrade the
hardware, browse the path names and check the affected
paths. If HDLM is in use, the displayed items that make up
a path name differ depending on the host OS. For details
about the items displayed as the components of path
names in each OS, see the command reference in the
HDLM manual.
• Intermittent Error:
For HDLM:
Displays information related to intermittent errors.
One of the following is displayed:
- -: Indicates that the intermittent error monitoring
function is not supported at this time or that the HDLM
manager is stopped.
- Number (0 or greater): Indicates the number of
errors that occurred during intermittent error
monitoring.
- *: Indicates that an intermittent error was detected,
but that it is not subject to auto failback.
- n/a: Indicates that the host OS is VMware and no
path is connected.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.

Multipath LUs tabbed- Displays multipath LU information related to paths connected

page to the storage system.
• Multipath LU:
For HDLM:
Displays the names of the HDevs. Regardless of the
number of paths, the HDev names are grouped by
their corresponding LUs and displayed in that order.
- If the host OS is Solaris 7, the name (with the slice
number omitted) of the HDev that has an owner path,
and whose path ID is the smallest of all the HDevs
corresponding to the same LU, is displayed.
- If the host OS is Windows, the drive letter is
displayed. If no drive letter has been allocated, a
hyphen (-) is displayed.
For HP-UX multipath:
The LUN hardware path is displayed.
• Disk Number:
For HDLM:
If the host OS is Windows, the Windows physical
device number is displayed. If the physical device
number cannot be obtained, a hyphen (-) is
displayed. If the host OS is not Windows, n/a is
displayed. Note that this item is not displayed if no
Windows hosts exist.

A-74 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Item Description
For HP-UX multipath:
This item is not displayed.
• Host Name: Displays the name of the host that
recognizes the multipath LU.
• Load Balancing:
For HDLM:
Displays one of the following for the set load balancing
algorithm when the load balancing function is being
used:
- Round robin
- Extended round robin
- Least I/Os (in operating systems other than
VMware)
- Extended least I/Os
- Least blocks (in operating systems other than
VMware)
- Extended least blocks
- Most Recently Used (in VMware)
- Fixed (in VMware)
- Unknown algorithm (in VMware)
When the host operating system is VMware, Unknown
is displayed for all other algorithms.
For HP-UX multipath:
Displays one of the following for the load balancing
policy for the LUN corresponding to the host:
- Round-robin
- Least command load
- Cell aware round robin
- Preferred path
- Preferred target port
- Closest path
- Weighted round-robin
- Path lock down
In operating systems other than VMware, Disabled is
displayed when the load balancing function is not being
used.
• Path use times:
If Round robin, Least I/Os, or Least blocks is applied
for the load balancing algorithm, the maximum number of
times the same path can be used is displayed. If
Extended round robin, Extended least I/Os, or
Extended least blocks is applied for the load balancing
algorithm, the maximum number of times the same path
can be used for sequential I/O is displayed.
• Random I/Os Path use times:

GUI reference A-75

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
If Extended round robin, Extended least I/Os, or
Extended least blocks is applied for the load balancing
algorithm, the maximum number of times the same path
can be used for random I/O is displayed.
• Dynamic I/O path control: Displays one of the following
as the dynamic I/O path control setting for the multipath
LU. Note that this item is not displayed when the storage
systems connected to the host do not support dynamic I/O
path control.
¢ Disabled: Dynamic I/O path control is disabled.
¢ Enabled: Dynamic I/O path control is enabled.
• Status: Displays icons indicating the statuses of paths
connected to the multipath LU. The display shows the
number of paths in each of the statuses Online,
Offline(C), Offline(E), Online(E), Online(S), and
Online(D).
• Storage system Name: Displays the name of the storage
system that contains the LU that corresponds to the
multipath LU. The storage system name is made up of the
following three items, delimited by periods:
¢ vendor-ID: Vendor name of the storage system
UNKNOWN# is displayed if the storage information
cannot be recognized.
¢ model-ID: Device name of the storage system
UNKNOWN# is displayed if the storage information
cannot be recognized.
¢ serial-number: Serial number of the storage system
A hyphen (-) is displayed if the storage information
cannot be recognized.
• Physical Information;
Displays the following physical storage system information
for virtual storage machines and other devices:
¢ Storage system name:
For HDLM
Displays the storage system name. If multiple storage
system names exist, an asterisk (*) is displayed. If no
storage system name exists, n/a is displayed.
For software other than HDLM
Displays n/a.
¢ LDEV ID:
For HDLM
Displays the ID that is used to identify an LU (an LU
for HDLM), separated by a colon (:) every 2 digits. If
multiple LDEV IDs exist, an asterisk (*) is displayed. If
no LDEV ID exists, n/a is displayed.
For software other than HDLM
Displays n/a.
• LDEV ID:

A-76 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
For HDLM:
Displays the logical device number.
For HP-UX multipath:
The LUN hardware path is displayed.
• LDEV Label:
For HDLM:
Displays label information associated with the LDEV. If
n/a is displayed, Global Link Manager failed to obtain
LDEV label information from Device Manager. A blank
is displayed if the LDEV label information could not be
acquired.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.

#
If UNKNOWN is displayed for the storage system name, check the status of
the path connected to the host. Make sure that the path is in the Online
status, and then update the host information.

DMP Windows tabbed-page

This tabbed-page displays information about the configuration of a Windows
host running DMP.

Item Description

Paths tabbed-page Displays information on the paths connected to the storage

system.
• Status: Displays an icon indicating the status of a path.
• LUN: Displays the LUN.
• Storage system Name: Displays the name of the storage
system to which the path is connected. The storage
system name is made up of the following three items,
delimited by periods:
¢ vendor-ID: Vendor name of storage system
¢ product-ID: Product ID of the storage system
¢ serial-number: Serial number of storage system
• Target: Displays the target number. The target number is
made up of a number and an alphabetic character. This
number enables identification of the targets mounted on a
storage system. To identify a target, check this number
using the storage system management program.
• Disk: Displays the names of the physical disks connected
to the paths. Regardless of the number of paths, the
physical disk names are grouped by their corresponding
LUs and displayed in that order.
• Host Name: Displays the name of the host that
recognizes the path.

GUI reference A-77

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
• Port / Channel: Displays a number that indicates the
HBA that connects to the path. This item is displayed in
the Pport-IDCchannel-ID format.
• Operations: Displays the total number of I/O counts for
the path.
¢ Reads: Displays the number of read requests issued
by the OS to the storage system.
¢ Writes: Displays the number of write requests issued
by the OS to the storage system.
• Bytes: Displays the path I/O data size in bytes.
¢ Reads: Displays the amount of data issued by the OS
to the storage system for read requests.
¢ Writes: Displays the amount of data issued by the OS
to the storage system for write requests.
• Primary: Displays the primary path setting. Either of the
following settings is displayed:
¢ YES
¢ NO
¢ -
• Path Name: Displays the path name that connects the
host and the LU. The display format of the path name is
shown below:
Path path-number-port-/-channel-number-target-
number-LUN
To modify the system configuration or upgrade the
hardware, browse the path names and check the affected
paths.

Disk tabbed-page Displays disk information related to the paths connected to the
storage systems.
• Disk: Displays the physical disk name. Regardless of the
number of paths, the physical disk names are grouped by
their corresponding LUs and displayed in that order.
• Host Name: Displays the name of the host managing the
disk.
• LoadBalancePolicy: Displays one of the following
algorithms, which are used to set the load-balancing
policy:
¢ Fail Over Only (Active/Passive)
¢ Round Robin (Active/Active)
¢ Round Robin with Subset
¢ Dynamic Least Queue Depth
¢ Weighted Paths
¢ Least Blocks
¢ Balanced Path
• Status: Displays the status of a path connected to the
disk as icons. Displays the amounts of paths with Healthy
and Unhealthy statuses.

A-78 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
• Storage system Name: Displays the name of the storage
system containing the disk. The storage system name is
made up of the following three items, delimited by
periods:
¢ vendor-ID: Vendor name of storage system
¢ product-ID: Product ID of the storage system
¢ serial-number: Serial number of storage system
• LUN: Displays the LUN.

host-name dialog box

The host-name dialog box displays a summary of a host. The host-name
dialog box is organized into the following areas:
• Summary on page A-79
• Paths tabbed-page on page A-80
• Multipath LUs tabbed-page on page A-84
• Disks tabbed-page on page A-87

Summary
Item Description

IP Address Displays the IP address of the host. If the host has both IPv4
and IPv6 addresses, the address that is assigned the higher
priority on the managing host is displayed.

OS Displays the type and version information of the OS installed

on the host. If the host OS is Linux, the kernel version is
displayed.

Multipath Software Displays the name of the multipath management software.

Version Displays version information for the multipath management

software. If HP-UX multipath is used, the HP-UX version is
displayed.

Agent Service Port The port number used by the daemon process (or service) of
the Device Manager Agent or HDLM Hitachi Command Suite
Common Agent Component, or if the host operating system is
HDLM VMware, the connection target of the remote
management client.
The display format of the remote management client
connection target is shown below.
- Host Name or IP Address:Port number

Remote Port Displays the port number to be used by the Device Manager
agent or HDLM Hitachi Command Suite Common Agent
Component for the Web server functionality.

Last Update Time Displays the last update time for the host information.

Path Status Displays the statuses (with icons) of paths connected to the
host. The display shows the number of paths that have the

GUI reference A-79

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
status Online, Offline(C), Offline(E), Online(E),
Online(S), Online(D), Healthy, and Unhealthy, as well as
the total number of paths.

Paths tabbed-page
Item Description

Status This tabbed-page displays an icon indicating the status of a

path.

LDEV ID For HDLM:

Displays the logical device number.
For HP-UX multipath:
The LUN hardware path is displayed.
LDEV ID is displayed when HDLM or HP-UX multipath is used
for the multipath management software.

LDEV Label For HDLM:

Displays label information associated with the LDEV. If n/a
is displayed, Global Link Manager failed to obtain LDEV
label information from Device Manager. A blank is
displayed if the LDEV label information could not be
acquired.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.
LDEV Label is displayed when HDLM or HP-UX multipath is
used for the multipath management software.

LUN Displays the LUN. LUN is displayed when DMP is used for the
multipath management software with Windows as the OS.

Storage system Displays the name of the storage system to which the path is
Name connected. The storage system name is made up of the
following items, delimited by periods:
• vendor-ID: Vendor name of the storage system
For HDLM or HP-UX multipath, UNKNOWN# is displayed if the
storage information cannot be recognized.
• For HDLM or HP-UX multipath
model-ID: Device name of the storage system
UNKNOWN# is displayed if the storage information cannot be
recognized.
• For DMP
product-ID: Product ID of the storage system
• serial-number: Serial number of the storage system
For HDLM or HP-UX multipath, a hyphen (-) is displayed if
the storage information cannot be recognized.

Physical Information Displays the following physical storage system information for
virtual storage machines and other devices:

A-80 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
• LDEV ID:
For HDLM
Displays the ID that is used to identify an LU (an LU
for HDLM), separated by a colon (:) every 2 digits. If
no information exists, n/a is displayed.
For software other than HDLM
Displays n/a.
• Storage system name:
For HDLM
Displays the name of the storage system. If no
information exists, n/a is displayed.
For software other than HDLM
Displays n/a.
• CHA:
For HDLM
When the path is migrated by using a virtual ID, the
number of the CHA port to which the migration
destination path connects is displayed. When a virtual
ID is not used, this item is not displayed.
For software other than HDLM
Displays n/a.

CHA, or Target Displays the CHA port number, which is made up of a number
and an alphabetic character. This number enables identification
of the CHAs mounted on a storage system. To obtain this
number and identify a CHA, use the storage system
management program.

Multipath LU, or Disk Displays the names of the HDevs connected to the paths.
Regardless of the number of paths, the HDev names are
grouped by their corresponding LUs and displayed in that
order.
• If the host OS is Solaris 7, the name (with the slice
number omitted) of the HDev that has an owner path, and
whose path ID is the smallest of all the HDevs
corresponding to the same LU, is displayed.
• If the host OS is Windows and HDLM is being used, the
drive letter is displayed. If no drive letter has been
allocated, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Disk Number For HDLM:

If the host OS is Windows, the Windows physical device
number is displayed. If the physical device number cannot
be obtained, a hyphen (-) is displayed. If the host OS is
not Windows, n/a is displayed. Note that this item is not
displayed if no Windows hosts exist.
For DMP and HP-UX multipath:
This item is not displayed.

Host Name Displays the name of the host that recognizes the path.

GUI reference A-81

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

HBA, or Port / Displays a number that indicates the HBA that connects to the
Channel path. The HBA display format is shown below.
• HDLM: bus-number.HBA-port-number
• HP-UX multipath:
host-port-number
• DMP (in Windows): Pport-IDCchannel-ID

HBA WWN For HDLM:

Displays port WWN information for HBAs. For an iSCSI
interface, n/a is displayed because this information cannot
be obtained.
For HP-UX multipath:
The port name obtained by the scsimgr get_info
command is displayed.
HBA WWN is displayed when HDLM or HP-UX multipath is
used for the multipath management software.

I/O Count or Displays the total number of I/O counts for the path. n/a is
Operations displayed if I/O count information could not be obtained. If HP-
UX multipath is used, the total number of processed I/Os that
have been obtained by the scsimgr get_stat command is
displayed. If DMP is used for the multipath management
software, the information below is displayed.
• Reads: Displays the number of read requests issued by
the OS to the storage system.
• Writes: Displays the number of write requests issued by
the OS to the storage system.

I/O Errors For HDLM:

Displays the total number of I/O errors for the path.
For HP-UX multipath:
The number of I/O failures obtained by the scsimgr
get_stat command is displayed.
I/O Errors is displayed when HDLM or HP-UX multipath is
used for the multipath management software.

Bytes Displays the path I/O data size in bytes. Bytes is displayed
when DMP is used for the multipath management software with
Windows as the OS.
• Reads: Displays the amount of data issued by the OS to
the storage system for read requests.
• Writes: Displays the amount of data issued by the OS to
the storage system for write requests.

Type For HDLM:

Displays one of the following as the path attribute:
¢ Owner: The path is subject to owner control, and is
preferentially used for accessing the LU.
¢ Non-owner: The path goes through a channel
adapter, other than channel adapters under owner
control.

A-82 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.
A hyphen is displayed if the path is connected to storage
systems from other companies. Type is displayed when HDLM
or HP-UX multipath is used for the multipath management
software.

SLPR For HDLM:

Displays the number (in the range 0-31) of the SLPR to
which the LU belongs. A hyphen is displayed if the HDLM
version of the managed host is prior to 5.6 or if the LU to
be displayed is in a storage system that does not support
the storage logical partition function.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.
SLPR is displayed when HDLM or HP-UX multipath is used for
the multipath management software.

CLPR For HDLM:

Displays the number (in the range 0-31) of the CLPR to
which the CHA belongs. A hyphen is displayed if the HDLM
version of the host is prior to 5.6 or if the CHA to be
displayed is mounted on a storage system that does not
support the cache logical partition function.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.
CLPR is displayed when HDLM or HP-UX multipath is used for
the multipath management software.

Path ID For HDLM:

Displays the path management PATH_ID. This is allocated
each time a managed host is restarted or a path
configuration is changed.
For HP-UX multipath:
The instance number obtained by the ioscan -kfnNC
lunpath command is displayed.
Path ID is displayed when HDLM or HP-UX multipath is used
for the multipath management software.

Primary Displays the primary path setting. Either of the following

settings is displayed:0
• YES
• NO
• -
Primary is displayed when DMP is used for the multipath
management software with Windows as the OS.

Path Name Displays the path name that connects the host to the LU. If
HP-UX multipath is used, the lunpath hardware path obtained
by the ioscan -m hwpath command is displayed. The items
that make up the path name depend on the host OS. The
display format of the path name for each OS is shown below:

GUI reference A-83

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
• HDLM (in AIX):
HBA-adapter-number.bus-number.target-ID.host-LU-
number
• HDLM (in HP-UX, Linux, Solaris, Windows, VMware):
host-port-number.bus-number.target-ID.host-LU-
number
• HP-UX (if HP-UX multipath is in use):
host-port-number.target-port-WWN.host-LU-number
• DMP (in Windows):
Path path-number-port-/-channel-number-target-
number-LUN
To modify the system configuration or upgrade the hardware,
browse the path names and check the affected paths. If HDLM
is in use, the displayed items that make up a path name differ
depending on the host OS. For details about the items
displayed as the components of path names in each OS, see
the command reference in the HDLM manual.

Intermittent Error For HDLM:

Displays information related to intermittent errors. One of
the following is displayed:
¢ -: Indicates that the intermittent error monitoring
function is not supported at this time or that the HDLM
manager is stopped.
¢ Number (0 or greater): Indicates the number of errors
that occurred during intermittent error monitoring.
¢ *: Indicates that an intermittent error was detected,
but that it is not subject to auto failback.
¢ n/a: Indicates that the host OS is VMware and no
path is connected.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.
Intermittent Error is displayed when HDLM or HP-UX
multipath is used for the multipath management software.

#
If UNKNOWN is displayed for the storage system name, check the status of
the path connected to the host. Make sure that the path is in the Online
status, and then update the host information.

Multipath LUs tabbed-page

The Multipath LUs tabbed-page is displayed when HDLM or HP-UX multipath
is used for the multipath management software.

Item Description

Multipath LU For HDLM:

A-84 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
Displays the names of the HDevs. Regardless of the
number of paths, the HDev names are grouped by their
corresponding LUs and displayed in that order.
¢ If the host OS is or Solaris 7, the name (with the slice
number omitted) of the HDev that has an owner path,
and whose path ID is the smallest of all the HDevs
corresponding to the same LU, is displayed.
¢ If the host OS is Windows, the drive letter is
displayed. If no drive letter has been allocated, a
hyphen (-) is displayed.
For HP-UX multipath:
The LUN hardware path is displayed.

Disk Number For HDLM:

If the host OS is Windows, the Windows physical device
number is displayed. If the physical device number cannot
be obtained, a hyphen (-) is displayed. If the host OS is
not Windows, n/a is displayed. Note that this item is not
displayed if no Windows hosts exist.
For HP-UX multipath:
This item is not displayed.

Host Name Displays the name of the host that manages the multipath LU.

Load Balancing For HDLM:

Displays one of the following for the set load balancing
algorithm when the load balancing function is being used:
- Round robin
- Extended round robin
- Least I/Os (in operating systems other than VMware)
- Extended least I/Os
- Least blocks (in operating systems other than VMware)
- Extended least blocks
- Most Recently Used (in VMware)
- Fixed (in VMware)
- Unknown algorithm (in VMware)
When the host operating system is VMware, Unknown is
displayed for all other algorithms.
For HP-UX multipath:
Displays one of the following for the load balancing policy
for the LUN corresponding to the host:
- Round-robin
- Least command load
- Cell aware round robin
- Preferred path
- Preferred target port
- Closest path
- Weighted round-robin

GUI reference A-85

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
- Path lock down
In operating systems other than VMware, Disabled is
displayed when the load balancing function is not being used.

Path use times If Round robin, Least I/Os, or Least blocks is applied for
the load balancing algorithm, the maximum number of times
the same path can be used is displayed. If Extended round
robin, Extended least I/Os, or Extended least blocks is
applied for the load balancing algorithm, the maximum number
of times the same path can be used for sequential I/O is
displayed.

Random I/Os Path If Extended round robin, Extended least I/Os, or

use times Extended least blocks is applied for the load balancing
algorithm, the maximum number of times the same path can
be used for random I/O is displayed.

Dynamic I/O path Displays one of the following as the dynamic I/O path control
control setting for the multipath LU. Note that this item is not
displayed when the storage systems connected to the host do
not support dynamic I/O path control.
• Disabled: Dynamic I/O path control is disabled.
• Enabled: Dynamic I/O path control is enabled.

Status Displays icons indicating the statuses of paths connected to the

multipath LU. The display shows the number of paths that have
the status Online, Offline(C), Offline(E), Online(E),
Online(S), or Online(D).

Storage system Displays the name of the storage system that contains the
Name multipath LU. The storage system name is made up of the
following three items, delimited by periods:
• vendor-ID: Vendor name of storage system
UNKNOWN# is displayed if the storage information cannot be
recognized.
• model-ID: Device name of storage system
UNKNOWN# is displayed if the storage information cannot be
recognized.
• serial-number: Serial number of storage system
A hyphen (-) is displayed if the storage information cannot
be recognized.

Physical Information Displays the following physical storage system information for
virtual storage machines and other devices:
• Storage system name:
For HDLM
Displays the storage system name. If multiple storage
system names exist, an asterisk (*) is displayed. If no
storage system name exists, n/a is displayed.
For software other than HDLM
Displays n/a.
• LDEV ID:
For HDLM

A-86 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
Displays the ID that is used to identify an LU (an LU
for HDLM), separated by a colon (:) every 2 digits. If
multiple LDEV IDs exist, an asterisk (*) is displayed. If
no LDEV ID exists, n/a is displayed.
For software other than HDLM
Displays n/a.

LDEV ID For HDLM:

Displays the logical device number.
For HP-UX multipath:
The LUN hardware path is displayed.

LDEV Label For HDLM:

Displays label information associated with the LDEV. If n/a
is displayed, Global Link Manager failed to obtain LDEV
label information from Device Manager. A blank is
displayed if the LDEV label information could not be
acquired.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.

#
If UNKNOWN is displayed for the storage system name, check the status of
the path connected to the host. Make sure that the path is in the Online
status, and then update the host information.

Disks tabbed-page
The Disks tabbed-page is displayed in Windows when the multipath
management software is DMP.

Item Description

Disk Displays the physical disk name. Regardless of the number of

paths, the physical disk names are grouped by their
corresponding LUs and displayed in that order.

Host Name Displays the name of the host managing the disk.

LoadBalancePolicy Displays one of the following algorithms, which are used to set
the load-balancing policy:
• Fail Over Only (Active/Passive)
• Round Robin (Active/Active)
• Round Robin with Subset
• Dynamic Least Queue Depth
• Weighted Paths
• Least Blocks
• Balanced Path

GUI reference A-87

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

Status Displays the statuses of paths connected to the disk as icons.

Displays the number of paths with Healthy and Unhealthy
statuses.

Storage system Displays the name of the storage system containing the disk.
Name The storage system name is made up of the following three
items, delimited by periods:
• vendor-ID: Vendor name of storage system
• product-ID: Product ID of the storage system
• serial-number: Serial number of storage system

LUN Displays the LUN.

Reset I/O Count - host-name dialog box

The Reset I/O Count - host-name dialog box is used to reset the I/O count
and I/O error count of all paths connected to the host to 0. Check the
message. The I/O count reset function is supported when HDLM is used for
the multipath management software.

Configure Multipath LUs dialog box

In the Configure Multipath LUs dialog box, you can configure load balancing,
the number of times the same path can be used, the number of times the
same path can be used for extended load balancing (random I/O), and
dynamic I/O path control for individual LUs that correspond to a multipath LU
selected in the Multipath LUs page.
The conditions that must be satisfied to set each function are described
below.

Function Conditions

Setting load balancing The HDLM version is 5.8 or later.

for individual LUs

Setting the number of • The HDLM version is 7.4.1 or later.

times the same path • The host OS is not VMware.
can be used for
individual LUs

Setting the number of • The HDLM version is 8.1.2 or later.

times the same path • The host OS is not VMware.
can be used for
extended load balancing
(random I/O) for
individual LUs

Setting dynamic I/O • The HDLM version is 7.3 or later.

path control for • The storage systems connected to the host support
individual LUs dynamic I/O path control.

The Configure Multipath LUs dialog box is organized into the following areas:

A-88 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
• Load balancing configuration on page A-89
• Dynamic I/O path control on page A-91
• Multipath LUs on page A-91

Load balancing configuration

The load balancing configuration is used for setting the load balancing
algorithm. If the host OS is Solaris 7, the settings are applied to all LUs
corresponding to the selected multipath LUs. When the host OS is VMware,
operations on the host might take several minutes (approximately 3 minutes)
per 100 LUs to complete.

Item Description

Load Balancing From the drop-down list, select the load balancing algorithm.
The following settings are displayed by default.
• When dynamic I/O path control or the functionality for
setting the number of times the same path can be used is
enabled: No Change
• When dynamic I/O path control or the functionality for
setting the number of times the same path can be used is
disabled and the host OS is VMware: Extended Round
Robin
• When dynamic I/O path control or the functionality for
setting the number of times the same path can be used is
disabled and the host OS is not VMware: Disabled
• Disabled (in operating systems other than VMware): Load
balancing function is not in use.
• Round Robin, Least I/Os, and Least Blocks: These
algorithms switch the path to use each time an I/O is
issued. The path to use is determined as follows:
¢ Round Robin
The path is selected in order from among all
connected paths.
¢ Least I/Os (in operating systems other than
VMware)
The path that has the least number of I/Os being
processed is selected from among all connected paths.
¢ Least Blocks (in operating systems other than
VMware)
The path that has the least number of I/O blocks
being processed is selected from among all connected
paths.
• Extended Round Robin, Extended Least I/Os, and
Extended Least Blocks: These algorithms determine
which path to allocate based on a judgment of whether the
I/O to be issued has continuity with the immediately
preceding I/O (whether the I/Os are sequential). If the I/O
has continuity with the previous I/O, the path to which the
previous I/O was distributed will be used. If a specified
number of I/Os has been issued to a path, processing
switches to the next path. If the I/O does not have
continuity with the previous I/O, these algorithms switch

GUI reference A-89

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
the path to be used each time an I/O is issued, as in the
Round Robin, Least I/Os, and Least Blocks algorithms.
¢ Extended Round Robin
The path is selected in order from among all
connected paths.
¢ Extended Least I/Os
The path that has the least number of I/Os being
processed is selected from among all connected paths.
¢ Extended Least Blocks
The path that has the least number of I/O blocks
being processed is selected from among all connected
paths.
• Following setting in the host (in operating systems
other than VMware): The algorithm set for the host that
recognizes the selected multipath LU is used.
• Most Recently Used (in VMware): The most recently
used path is selected.
• No change: The load balancing settings are not changed.
You can choose this setting when the HDLM version is 7.3
or later and the storage systems connected to the host
support dynamic I/O path control.
Select the load balancing algorithm most suitable for the data
access patterns in your system environment. If there are no
recognizable data access patterns, we recommend applying the
Extended Least I/Os algorithm.
Notes:
¢ Some I/O operations managed by HDLM can be
distributed across all paths, and some cannot. Thus,
you should be aware that even if you specify the
Round Robin algorithm, I/O operations cannot
always be allocated uniformly across all paths.
¢ If the host's OS is HP-UX, paths are not changed for
consecutive I/Os starting at VxFS, regardless of the
type of load balancing.
¢ When the host operating system is VMware, if you
change the load balancing setting from one of the
following, you cannot change it back again.
- Fixed
- Unknown algorithm
- UNKNOWN

Path use times: Sets the number of times the same path can be used.
• No change: Do not change the number of times the same
path can be used.
• Change: Change the settings for the number of times the
same path can be used. In the text box, specify a value in
the range from 0 to 999999.
• Following setting in the host: Uses the value set for the
host that identifies the selected multipath LUs.

A-90 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

Random I/Os Path Sets the number of times the same path can be used for
use times: extended load balancing (random I/O).
• No change: Do not change the number of times the same
path can be used for extended load balancing (random
I/O).
• Change: Change the settings for the number of times the
same path can be used for extended load balancing
(random I/O). In the text box, specify a value in the range
from 0 to 999999.
• Following setting in the host: Uses the value set for the
host that identifies the selected multipath LUs.

Dynamic I/O path control

Sets the dynamic I/O path control function. If the host OS is Solaris 7, the
settings are applied to all LUs corresponding to the selected multipath LUs.
When the host OS is VMware, operations on the host might take several
minutes (approximately 3 minutes) per 100 LUs to complete.

Item Description

Dynamic I/O path Sets the dynamic I/O path control function. To enable the
control dynamic I/O path control function, select Enabled from the
drop-down list. The advantages and disadvantages of dynamic
I/O path control are as follows:
Advantage
You can prevent I/O performance from deteriorating.
Disadvantage
HDLM needs to update the host information each time the
controller is checked.

Multipath LUs
Displays information for the multipath LUs that can be selected. Check the
multipath LUs for which the load balancing function is to be set.

Item Description

Multipath LU Displays the names of the HDevs connected to the paths.

Regardless of the number of paths, the HDev names are sorted
by their corresponding LUs and displayed in that order.
• If the host OS is Solaris 7, the name (with the slice
number omitted) of the HDev that has an owner path, and
whose path ID is the smallest of all the HDevs
corresponding to the same LU, is displayed.
• If the host OS is Windows, the drive letter is displayed. If
no drive letter has been allocated, a hyphen (-) is
displayed.

GUI reference A-91

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

Load Balancing Displays the load balancing algorithm set for the LU
corresponding to the multipath LU.

Path use times Displays the settings for the number of times the same path
can be used.

Random I/Os Path Displays the settings for the number of times the same path
use times can be used for extended load balancing (random I/O).

Dynamic I/O path Displays the dynamic I/O path control setting for the LU
control corresponding to the multipath LU.

Host Name Displays the name of the host that manages the multipath LU.

Configure HDLM - host-name dialog box

The Configure HDLM - host-name dialog box is used for setting the HDLM
operating environment. The support status of the HDLM functions depends on
the HDLM version and the OS. Only the functions supported by the HDLM on
the host are displayed and can be set. When the host OS is VMware,
operations on the host might take several minutes (approximately 3 minutes)
per 100 LUs to complete.
The items displayed in the Configure HDLM - host-name dialog box are
explained below.

Item Description

Load Balancing Sets the load balancing function. From the drop-down list,
select the load balancing algorithm.
• Disabled (in operating systems other than VMware): The
load balancing function is not in use.
• Round Robin, Least I/Os, and Least Blocks: These
algorithms switch the path to use each time an I/O is
issued. The path to use is determined as follows:
¢ Round Robin
The path is selected in order from among all
connected paths.
¢ Least I/Os (in operating systems other than
VMware)
The path that has the least number of I/Os being
processed is selected from among all connected paths.
¢ Least Blocks (in operating systems other than
VMware)
The path that has the least number of I/O blocks
being processed is selected from among all connected
paths.
• Extended Round Robin, Extended Least I/Os, and
Extended Least Blocks: These algorithms determine
which path to allocate based on a judgment of whether the
I/O to be issued has continuity with the immediately
preceding I/O (whether the I/Os are sequential). If the I/O
has continuity with the previous I/O, the path to which the

A-92 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Item Description
previous I/O was distributed will be used. If a specified
number of I/Os has been issued to a path, processing
switches to the next path. If the I/O does not have
continuity with the previous I/O, these algorithms switch
the path to be used each time an I/O is issued, as in the
Round Robin, Least I/Os, and Least Blocks algorithms.
¢ Extended Round Robin
The path is selected in order from among all
connected paths.
¢ Extended Least I/Os
The path that has the least number of I/Os being
processed is selected from among all connected paths.
¢ Extended Least Blocks
The path that has the least number of I/O blocks
being processed is selected from among all connected
paths.
• Most Recently Used (in VMware): The most recently
used path is selected.
• Fixed (in VMware): The preferred path to the disk is used
whenever available. You can select this algorithm when
only one host is selected, and Fixed is specified as the load
balancing setting for the host.
• Unknown algorithm (in VMware):
You can select this algorithm when only one host is
selected, and Unknown algorithm is set as the load
balancing setting for that host.
• UNKNOWN (in VMware):
Unknown is displayed for all other algorithms. You can
select this setting when the load balancing setting of the
selected host is UNKNOWN.
Select the load balancing algorithm most suitable for the data
access patterns in your system environment. If there are no
recognizable data access patterns, we recommend applying the
Extended Least I/Os algorithm.
Notes:
¢ Some I/O operations managed by HDLM can be
distributed across all paths, and some cannot. Thus,
you should be aware that, even if you specify the
Round Robin algorithm, I/O operations cannot
always be allocated uniformly across all paths.
¢ If the host OS is HP-UX, paths are not changed for
consecutive I/Os starting at VxFS, regardless of the
type of load balancing.
¢ If the host OS is VMware, if you change the load
balancing setting from one of the following, you
cannot change it back again.
- Fixed
- Unknown algorithm
- UNKNOWN

GUI reference A-93

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

Path use times: Sets the number of times the same path can be used.
• Load balancing
The load balancing algorithm specifies the number of times
the same path can be used for I/O. A value in the range
from 0 to 999999 can be specified. The value that is
already set is displayed by default. If Round Robin,
Least I/Os, or Least Blocks is selected for load
balancing algorithm, you can specify a value for this item.
If the host OS is VMware, this item is not displayed.
• Extended load balancing
For sequential I/Os: The extended load balancing
algorithm specifies the number of times the same path can
be used for sequential I/O.
For random I/Os: The extended load balancing
algorithm specifies the number of times the same path can
be used for random I/O.
A value in the range from 0 to 999999 (when the host OS
is not VMware) or from 1 to 999999 (when host OS is
VMware) can be specified. The value that is already set is
displayed by default. If Extended round robin,
Extended least I/Os , or Extended least blocks is
selected for the load balancing algorithm, you can specify
a value for this item.

Path Health Checking Sets the path health checking function. When the path health
checking function is to be used, select the Enabled check box.
It is recommended that the path health checking function be
used, because errors can be detected readily in a path even
when no I/O has been issued, such as for non-owner paths or
a path in a standby host of a cluster system.

Checking Interval When the path health checking function is used, set the
interval for execution of path health checking, in minutes
(required). Set a value in the range 1-1440, as appropriate to
the usage environment.
When the check interval is changed, the new interval takes
effect immediately. If the check interval is shortened and the
time since the previous execution of path health checking has
already exceeded the new setting for the check interval, path
health checking begins immediately.

Auto Failback Sets the auto failback function. When the auto failback function
is to be used, select the Enabled check box. When it is not to
be used, do not select the Enabled check box. The following
explains the advantages and disadvantages of using the auto
failback function.
Advantage
Error paths are assigned the Online status automatically.
Disadvantage
¢ Paths to which the user intentionally assigns the error
status (Offline(E)), such as for maintenance work,
might be assigned the Online status automatically.

A-94 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
¢ If an intermittent error occurs between storage and a
path, the path status might alternate back and forth
between having the Offline status and the Online
status, causing a drop in I/O performance.#1

Checking Interval When the auto failback function is used, set the interval for
execution of path health checking in minutes (required). Set a
value in the range 1-1440, as appropriate to the usage
environment.

Intermittent Error The intermittent error monitoring function can be set only
Monitor when the auto failback function is used. When auto failback is
enabled to avoid degradation in I/O performance because of an
intermittent error, it is recommended that intermittent error
monitoring be enabled. Select the Enabled check box to use
the intermittent error monitoring function.

Monitoring Interval When the intermittent error monitoring function is used, set
the error monitoring time, in minutes. Set a value in the range
1-1440, as appropriate for the usage environment.

Number of Times When the intermittent error monitoring function is used,

specify the number of times an error can occur. Set a value in
the range 1-99, as appropriate for the usage environment.
If the error frequency is set to a value of 2 or more, the
following condition must be satisfied:
Error monitoring time for intermittent errors >= check-
interval-for-auto-failback x error-frequency-specified-for-
intermittent-error-monitoring
An error will result if this condition is not satisfied. If this error
occurs, modify either the auto failback check interval, the
intermittent error monitoring time, or the error frequency
specified for intermittent error monitoring.
If the error frequency is set to a value of 1, the above
condition need not be satisfied.
Monitoring is performed for each path. An intermittent error is
recognized to have occurred when for a given path the
specified number of errors have occurred between the time
that intermittent error monitoring is started and the specified
time has been reached. Paths for which intermittent errors
have occurred are not subject to auto failback. Moreover,
intermittent error monitoring is started at the point that the
path recovers from the error by auto failback.
If the error monitoring time or the error frequency is changed
during intermittent error monitoring, the count for the error
frequency from before the modification and the time that has
passed since the start of monitoring are reset to 0. From there,
monitoring starts with the changed settings.
If the error monitoring time or the error frequency is changed
other than during intermittent error monitoring, the new error
monitoring time will take effect at the point that the next auto
failback is successful. Because the error frequency and the
time passed are not counted when error monitoring is not in
progress, there is no change to these values.

GUI reference A-95

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
If the auto failback function is set to Disabled, intermittent
error monitoring is disabled.

Dynamic I/O path Configures the dynamic I/O path control function. Select one of
control: the following option buttons:
• No change option button:
This option leaves the dynamic I/O path control function
unchanged. If you select this option, the drop-down list for
configuring dynamic I/O path control becomes unavailable.
• System option button:
Select this option to configure the dynamic I/O path
control function at the host level. The settings apply to all
LUs corresponding to the multipath LUs connected to the
host.
• Storage system option button:
Select this option to configure the dynamic I/O path
control function at the storage system level. The settings
apply to all LUs corresponding to the multipath LUs of the
selected storage system.
If you select the System or Storage system option button,
the drop-down list for configuring dynamic I/O path control
becomes unavailable. The available settings for the dynamic
I/O path control function are as follows:
• Disabled: Dynamic I/O path control is disabled.
• Enabled: Dynamic I/O path control is enabled.
Dynamic I/O path control Configuration:
Click the downward arrow or Dynamic I/O path control
Configuration to display the storage systems for which
you can set dynamic I/O path control. The Dynamic I/O
path control Configuration label only appears if you
select the Storage system option button. Select a check
box to enable dynamic I/O path control for the storage
system.
The items in this area are described below.
Storage systems
¢ Name: Displays the names of the storage systems to
which paths are connected and the icons that indicate
their status. A storage system name is made up of the
following three items, delimited by periods:
- vendor-ID: Vendor name of the storage system
UNKNOWN#2 is displayed if the storage information
cannot be recognized.
- model-ID: Device name of the storage system
UNKNOWN#2 is displayed if the storage information
cannot be recognized.
- serial-number: Serial number of the storage system
A hyphen (-) is displayed if the storage information
cannot be recognized.
¢ Serial Number: Displays the serial number of the
storage system.

A-96 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
¢ Dynamic I/O path control: Displays the dynamic
I/O path control setting for each storage system.
An asterisk (*) indicates that other dynamic I/O path
control settings are in use in the system.
¢ Checking Interval: By default, this item displays the
checking interval value. If you have selected multiple
hosts with different checking intervals, this field is
blank.
To specify a checking interval directly, select the
Change check box and specify a value from 1 to 1440
(in minutes) to suit your environment. You must enter
a value if you select the check box.
If the host OS is VMware, the minimum value of the
checking interval you can specify is 5.

Reservation Level Set the reservation control method for an LU. The following the
reservation-level settings.
• Ignore reservation: Reservation requests are ignored,
and LUs are not reserved. This is used when one of the
following conditions is met:
A host is connected to a storage system that does not
support persistent reservation.
An LU is shared by multiple hosts, and an application is
executed that uses an exclusive lock mechanism.
• Persistent reservation: Changes a reservation to a
persistent reservation.
The recommended value is Persistent reservation. If HDLMs
are used in a cluster configuration, prepare the reservation
level for each host in the cluster.

Remove LU Set the remove LU function. The following lists and explains
the settings for remove LU.
• Disabled: Even if an error has occurred in all paths for an
LU, if all paths have been switched, and if the LU is
removed, the LU is not removed as an HDLM management
object. The paths acquire the Offline(E) or the
Online(E) status. These operations are the same as for
HDLM version 5.1 and earlier.
• Enabled: If all paths for an LU have been switched, the LU
is removed as an HDLM management object. However, if
the switched paths include paths that have the
Offline(C) status, the LU is not removed as an HDLM
management object. Recover removed LUs by repairing
the physical errors and performing a disk rescan.
• Remove LU even if there are Offline(C) paths: If all
paths for an LU have been switched, the LU is removed as
an HDLM management object, even if the switched paths
include Offline(C) paths. Recover removed LUs by
repairing the physical errors and performing a disk rescan.
To use the same function as for HDLM version 5.1 and earlier,
it is recommended that Disabled be set.

GUI reference A-97

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

Logging Level From the drop-down list, select the level of error information to
be collected in the error log. The following values are available:
• Do not collect an error log
• Error or higher level
• Warning or higher level
• Information or higher level
• Information or higher level(include maintenance
information)
We recommend that you set the logging level to Information
or higher level so that all error information can be collected.
The logging level can be set for the following log files:
• HDLM manager (dlmmgr[1-16].log)
• HDLM GUI log (dlmgui[1-2].log)

Trace Level From the drop-down list, select the trace output level. The
following values are available:
• Do not output any trace
• Error information only
• Summary of program operation
• Details of program operation
• All information
The recommended value is Do not output any trace, but
when an error occurs you might need to change the trace level
to Error information only or higher, and collect log data
again.
The maximum amount of information is output to the log when
the trace level is set to All information. If a large quantity of
information is output to the log, file wraparound occurs, and
the time until the old log is removed is shortened.
The trace level can be set for trace file hdlmtr[1-64].log. If
the host's HDLM version is earlier than 5.6, the trace level can
be set for trace files hntr2[1-16].log or hntr[1-16].log.

Error Log Enter the size and number of error log files in the text boxes.
Once all log files have reached the set size, wraparound occurs
on the oldest log file, and new information is overwritten.

*File Size Set the error log file size, in kilobytes. Specify a value in the
range 100-2000000. However, if the HDLM version is prior to
5.6 (5.6.2 if the host OS is Linux), specify a value in the range
100-9900. The file size can be set for HDLM manager log files
(dlmmgr[1-16].log) and HDLM GUI log files
(dlmgui[1-2].log).

*Number of Files Set the number of error log files, in the range 2-16. The
recommended value is 2. The only log files for which the
number of files can be set are HDLM manager log files
(dlmmgr[1-16].log). The number of log files for HDLM GUI
(dlmgui[1-2].log) is fixed at 2.

A-98 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

Trace Log Enter the size and number of trace files in the text boxes.
When specifying a value smaller than the set value, a message
is displayed to ask whether you want to continue processing. If
processing is continued, existing trace files are deleted and a
new trace files are created. Trace files are a fixed length.
Therefore, even if the written trace information does not reach
the set file size, the file size for each output trace file is always
fixed. If traces are written to all of the trace files, wraparound
occurs on the oldest trace file, and a new trace is overwritten.

*File Size Set the trace file size, in kilobytes. Specify a value in the range
100-16000. The recommended value is 1000. The file size can
be set for hdlmtr[1-64].log trace files.

*Number of Files Sets the number of trace files, in the range 2-64. The
recommended value is 4. The trace files for which the number
of files can be set are the hdlmtr[1-64].log files.

#1
When auto failback is enabled to avoid degradation in I/O performance
because of an intermittent error, it is recommended that intermittent
error monitoring be enabled. Intermittent error monitoring can be set
only when auto failback is enabled.
#2
If UNKNOWN is displayed for the storage system name, check the status of
the path connected to the host. Make sure that the path is in the Online
status, and then update the host information.

Storage System Setting Results dialog box

This dialog box shows the processing results when you click Storage
Systems in the results window after configuring dynamic I/O path control in
the HDLM - host-name dialog box or Multihost Configuration Wizard.
• Configure Storage Systems on page A-99
• Storage Systems on page A-99

Configure Storage Systems

Check the message and the following items.

Item Description

Dynamic I/O path Displays the results of setting dynamic I/O path control.
control Configuration

Storage Systems
Check the following items: If processing failed, check the error message. For
information about the error cause and appropriate actions to take, see the
Hitachi Command Suite Global Link Manager Messages.

GUI reference A-99

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

Result Displays the processing result. An icon indicates success or

failure. The meanings of the icons are as follows:

Icon Processing Result

Processing was successful.

Processing failed. Clicking Error displays an

error dialog box in which an error message can
be checked.

Name Displays the names of the storage systems to which paths are
connected. A storage system name is made up of the following
three items, delimited by periods:
• vendor-ID: Vendor name of the storage system
UNKNOWN is displayed if the storage information cannot be
recognized.
• model-ID: Device name of the storage system
UNKNOWN is displayed if the storage information cannot be
recognized.
• serial-number: Serial number of the storage system
A hyphen (-) is displayed if the storage information cannot
be recognized.

Serial Number Displays the serial number of the storage system.

Dynamic I/O path Displays the dynamic I/O path control setting for each storage
control system.

Message ID Displays the message ID when the processing has failed. Clicking
the message ID displays the error dialog box in which an error
message can be checked.

Configure Alerts - host-name dialog box

The Configure Alerts - host-name dialog box is used for setting the alert
notification function for each host. If HDLM is being used in a cluster
configuration, set the alert notification function for all the hosts that make up
the cluster. The alert notification function can be set in HDLM version 5.8 or
later, DMP, or HP-UX multipath.
If you want to set the alert notification function for each host, you must set
the value of the server.snmp.auto_set property to false (Off) in the
server.properties file of the Global Link Manager server. Even if you set
the alert notification function to Off in the Configure Alerts - host-name dialog
box, if you specify the value of the server.snmp.auto_set property to true
(On) in the server.properties file, the alert notification setting will
automatically be changed to On when a host is added to Global Link Manager
resource or host information is refreshed. For information about the settings
of the Global Link Manager server environment, see the Hitachi Command
Suite Global Link Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

A-100 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 The items displayed in the Configure Alerts - host-name dialog box are
explained below.

Item Description

Alert Notification Sets whether to report alert information. If alerts are to be

reported, select the On button. If the alert notification function
is used, alerts are issued, from the host to the server specified
as the destination, when a path status transition occurs, such
as when an error occurs.

Destination Displays the destination for alert notifications. The destination

is predetermined to be the Global Link Manager server. For
each item, the value specified for the Global Link Manager
server is displayed as inactive.
• IP Address: Displays the IP address of the Global Link
Manager server. If the host has both IPv4 and IPv6
addresses, the address that is assigned the higher priority
on the managing host is displayed.
• Port: Displays the port number of the Global Link Manager
server.
• Community: Displays the set SNMP community name.
Note that this item is not displayed if the SNMP version is
version 3.
• Version: Displays the set SNMP version.

Show Lost Paths - host-name dialog box

The Show Lost Paths - host-name dialog box displays the lost paths related to
the host.
The items displayed in the Show Lost Paths - host-name dialog box are
explained below.
• Paths (for HDLM or HP-UX multipath) on page A-101
• Paths (for DMP Windows) on page A-103

Paths (for HDLM or HP-UX multipath)

Displays information about the paths managed by HDLM or HP-UX multipath.

Item Description

Status Displays an icon indicating the status of a path.

Detected Time Displays the date and time when lost paths are detected.

LDEV ID For HDLM:

The LDEV number is displayed.
For HP-UX multipath:
The LUN hardware path is displayed.

Storage system Displays the name of the storage system to which the path is
Name connected. The storage system name is made up of the
following items, delimited by periods:

GUI reference A-101

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
• vendor-ID: Vendor name of the storage system
UNKNOWN is displayed if the storage information cannot be
recognized.
• model-ID: Device name of the storage system
UNKNOWN is displayed if the storage information cannot be
recognized.
• serial-number: Serial number of the storage system
A hyphen (-) is displayed if the storage information cannot
be recognized.

Physical Information Displays the following physical storage system information for
virtual storage machines and other devices:
• LDEV ID:
For HDLM
Displays the ID that is used to identify an LU (an LU
for HDLM), separated by a colon (:) every 2 digits.
For software other than HDLM
Displays n/a.
• Storage system name:
For HDLM
Displays the name of the storage system. If no
information exists, n/a is displayed.
For software other than HDLM
Displays n/a.
• CHA:
For HDLM
When the path is migrated by using a virtual ID, the
number of the CHA port to which the migration
destination path connects is displayed. When a virtual
ID is not used, this item is not displayed.
For software other than HDLM
Displays n/a.

CHA For HDLM:

Displays the CHA port number, which is made up of a
number and an alphabetic character. This number enables
identification of the CHAs mounted on a storage system.
To obtain this number and identify a CHA, use the storage
system management program.
For HP-UX multipath:
The target address is displayed.

Multipath LU For HDLM:

Displays the names of the HDevs connected to the paths.
Regardless of the number of paths, the HDev names are
grouped by their corresponding LUs and displayed in that
order.
¢ If the host OS is Solaris 7, the name (with the slice
number omitted) of the HDev that has an owner path,

A-102 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
and whose path ID is the smallest of all the HDevs
corresponding to the same LU, is displayed.
¢ If the host OS is Windows, the drive letter is
displayed. If no drive letter has been allocated, a
hyphen (-) is displayed.
For HP-UX multipath:
The LUN hardware path is displayed.

HBA For HDLM:

Displays a number that indicates the HBA that connects to
the path. The bus number and the HBA port number are
delimited by a period.
For HP-UX multipath:
The H/W Path is displayed.

HBA WWN For HDLM:

Displays port WWN information for HBAs. For an iSCSI
interface, n/a is displayed because this information cannot
be obtained.
For HP-UX multipath:
The port name obtained by the scsimgr get_info
command is displayed.

Type For HDLM:

Displays one of the following as the path attribute:
¢ Owner: The path is subject to owner control, and is
preferentially used for accessing the LU.
¢ Non-owner: The path goes through a channel
adapter, other than channel adapters under owner
control.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.
A hyphen is displayed if the path is connected to storage
systems from other companies.

Paths (for DMP Windows)

Displays information about a path belonging to a Windows host running DMP.

Item Description

Status Displays an icon indicating the status of a path.

Detected Time Displays the date and time when lost paths are detected.

LUN Displays the LUN.

Storage system Displays the name of the storage system to which the path is
Name connected. The storage system name is made up of the
following items, delimited by periods:
• vendor-ID: Vendor name of the storage system

GUI reference A-103

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
• product-ID: Product ID of the storage system
• serial-number: Serial number of the storage system

Target Displays the target number. The target number is made up of a

number and an alphabetic character. This number enables
identification of the targets mounted on a storage system. To
identify a target, check this number using the storage system
management program.

Disk Displays the names of the physical disks connected to the

paths. Regardless of the number of paths, the physical disk
names are grouped by their corresponding LUs and displayed
in that order.

Port / Channel Displays a number that indicates the HBA that connects to the
path. This item is displayed in the Pport-IDCchannel-ID
format.

Primary Displays the primary path setting. One of the following settings
is displayed:
• YES
• NO
• -

Filter - Paths dialog box

The Filter - Paths dialog box is used to set filtering conditions for items in the
Paths list. The filtering conditions are entered in Filtering Conditions.
The items displayed in the Filter - Paths dialog box are explained below.

Item Description

Attribute From the drop-down list, select an item to be specified as a

filtering condition. The following lists and describes the items
that can be specified. Depending on where the Filter - Path
dialog box was opened, some items might not be displayed.
• Status: Specifies the path status.
• LDEV ID:
For HDLM:
Specifies the LDEV number.
For HP-UX multipath:
Specifies the LUN hardware path.
• LDEV Label: Specifies the label information attached to
the LDEV. LDEV Label can be specified if HDLM is used for
the multipath management software.
• Storage system Name: Specifies the name of the
storage system.
• Physical LDEV ID or Virtual LDEV ID: Specifies the
LDEV number. Physical LDEV ID or Virtual LDEV ID can
be specified if HDLM is used for the multipath management
software.

A-104 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Item Description
• Physical Storage system Name or Virtual Storage
system Name: Specifies the name of the storage system.
Physical Storage system Name or Virtual Storage
system Name can be specified if HDLM is used for the
multipath management software.
• Physical CHA or Virtual CHA: Specifies the CHA port
number. Physical CHA or Virtual CHA can be specified if
HDLM is used for the multipath management software.
• CHA: Specifies the CHA port number.
• Multipath LU: Specifies the HDev names.
• Host Name: Specifies the host name.
• Disk Number: Specifies the Windows physical device
number, if the host OS is Windows. Disk Number can be
specified if HDLM is used for the multipath management
software.
• HBA: Specifies the number for identifying the HBA. The
bus number and the HBA port number are delimited by a
period.
• HBA WWN:
For HDLM:
Specifies the WWN for the HBA port.
For HP-UX multipath:
Specifies the port name.
• I/O Count:
For HDLM:
Specifies the number of path I/Os.
For HP-UX multipath:
Specifies the total number of processed I/Os.
• I/O Errors:
For HDLM:
Specifies the number of I/O errors for the path.
For HP-UX multipath:
Specifies the number of I/O failures.
• Type: Specifies the path attributes. Type can be specified
if HDLM is used for the multipath management software.
• SLPR: Specifies the SLPR to which the LU belongs. SLPR
can be specified if HDLM is used for the multipath
management software.
• CLPR: Specifies the CLPR to which the CHA belongs. CLPR
can be specified if HDLM is used for the multipath
management software.
• Path ID:
For HDLM:
Specifies the path management PATH_ID.
For HP-UX multipath:
Specifies the instance number.
• Path Name:

GUI reference A-105

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
For HDLM:
AIX: HBA-adapter-number.bus-number.target-
ID.host-LU-number
Other than AIX: host-port-number.bus-
number.target-ID.host-LU-number
For HP-UX multipath:
host-port-number.target-port-WWN.host-LU-
number
• Intermittent Error: Specifies the number of intermittent
errors. Intermittent Error can be specified if HDLM is
used for the multipath management software.

Operators Select the operator for the filtering condition. The available
operators depend on the item selected in Attribute. The
following lists and describes the available operators.
• is or is not: Filtering is executed on the condition that the
item selected in Attribute has the same or different value
from the value specified in Value.
• contains or does not contain: Filtering is executed on
the condition that the item selected in Attribute contains
or does not contain the value specified in Value.
• <=, >=, or =: Filtering is executed within the specified
range. You can select these operators when specifying a
numerical value.

Value Displays a text box or a drop-down list depending on the item

specified in Attribute.
In the text box, enter the value that is to be used for the
filtering condition.
The drop-down list displays values for the item specified in
Attribute. You can select one of these values as the filtering
condition. For example, if you specified Status in Attribute,
the drop-down list for Value displays the values for Status
(such as Online, Offline(C), or Offline(E)).

- button Deletes the corresponding condition. If there is only one row of

conditions, the condition is displayed as inactive.

+ button Adds a row for entering a new condition. When multiple

conditions are set, filtering is executed by the AND condition.

Clear button Discards the edited filtering conditions and restores the
conditions to their initial settings.

Reset button Discards the edited filtering conditions and restores the
conditions that were in effect when the dialog box was opened.

Subwindows for managing paths on storage systems

Storage systems subwindow

In the Storage systems subwindow, you can:

A-106 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
• Display the status of paths connected to all storage systems allocated to
the logged-in user (View permission).
• Display a list of storage systems connected to the hosts allocated to the
logged-in user (View permission).
The Storage systems subwindow is organized into the following areas:
• Summary on page A-107
• Storage systems on page A-107

Summary
Item Description

Number of Storage Displays the number of storage systems allocated to the

systems logged-in user.

Path Status Displays the statuses (with icons) of paths connected to all
hosts allocated to the logged-in user. If instances of different
multipath management software are running at the same time,
the path status is displayed for each one. The display shows
the number of paths that have the status Online, Offline(C),
Offline(E), Online(E), Online(S), Online(D), Healthy, or
Unhealthy, as well as the total number of paths. When the
integer indicating the number of paths that have a given status
is clicked, the Show Paths dialog box is displayed.

Storage systems
Item Description

Name Displays the names of the storage systems to which paths are
connected and the icons that indicate their status. A storage
system name is made up of the following three items,
delimited by periods:
• vendor-ID: Vendor name of the storage system
For HDLM or HP-UX multipath, UNKNOWN# is displayed if the
storage information cannot be recognized.
• For HDLM or HP-UX multipath
model-ID: Device name of the storage system
UNKNOWN# is displayed if the storage information cannot be
recognized.
• For DMP
product-ID: Product ID of the storage system
• serial-number: Serial number of the storage system
For HDLM or HP-UX multipath, a hyphen (-) is displayed if
the storage information cannot be recognized.
When a storage system name is clicked, the Storage-system-
Name subwindow for that storage system is displayed.

Serial Number Displays the serial number of the storage system.

GUI reference A-107

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 #
If UNKNOWN is displayed for the storage system name, check the status of
the path connected to the host. Make sure that the path is in the Online
status, and then update the host information.

storage-system-name subwindow
In the Storage-system-Name subwindow, you can do the following:
• Display information about the paths, CHA ports, and multipath LUs
related to the storage system (View permission).
• Change the status of paths related to the storage system (Modify
permission).
• Refresh the host information for each CHA port (Modify permission).
The Storage-system-Name subwindow is organized into the following areas:
• Path Status on page A-108
• HDLM or HDLM and others tabbed-page on page A-108
• DMP Windows tabbed-page on page A-119

Path Status
Displays the statuses (with icons) of paths connected to the storage system.
The display shows the number of paths that have the status Online,
Offline(C), Offline(E), Online(E), Online(S), Online(D), Healthy, or
Unhealthy, as well as the total number of paths. When the integer indicating
the number of paths that have a given status is clicked, the Show Paths -
Storage-system-Name dialog box is displayed.

HDLM or HDLM and others tabbed-page

This tabbed-page displays information about the configuration of the host on
which HDLM or HP-UX is running.

Item Description

Hosts tabbed-page The Hosts tabbed-page is displayed in the Storage-system-

Name subwindow when a host is registered in the selected
storage system.
• Name: Displays the host names and icons that indicate
the host status. Clicking a host name displays the host-
name subwindow for that host.
• Last Update Time: Displays the last update time for the
host information.
• Status: Displays icons indicating the statuses of host
paths. The display shows the number of paths in each of
the statuses Online, Offline(C), Offline(E),
Online(E), Online(S), and Online(D).

A-108 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
• IP Address: Displays the IP address of the host. If the
host has both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses, the address that is
assigned the higher priority on the managing host is
displayed.
• OS: Displays the type and version information for the OS
installed on the host. If the OS is Linux, the kernel version
is displayed.
• Multipath Software: Displays the name of the multipath
management software.
• Protocol: Displays the communication protocol used
between the host and the Global Link Manager server.
• Version: Displays version information of HDLM. If HP-UX
multipath is used, the HP-UX version is displayed.

Paths tabbed-page Displays information about the paths connected to the storage
system.
• Status: Displays an icon indicating the status of a path.
• LDEV ID:
For HDLM:
Displays the logical device number.
For HP-UX multipath:
The LUN hardware path is displayed.
• LDEV Label:
For HDLM:
Displays label information associated with the LDEV. If
n/a is displayed, Global Link Manager failed to obtain
LDEV label information from Device Manager. A blank
is displayed if the LDEV label information could not be
acquired.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.
• Storage system Name: Displays the name of the storage
system that contains the multipath LU. The storage system
name is made up of the following three items, delimited by
periods:
¢ vendor-ID: Vendor name of storage system
UNKNOWN# is displayed if the storage information
cannot be recognized.
¢ model-ID: Device name of storage system
UNKNOWN# is displayed if the storage information
cannot be recognized.
¢ serial-number: Serial number of storage system
A hyphen (-) is displayed if the storage information
cannot be recognized.
• Physical Information:
Displays the following physical storage system information
for virtual storage machines and other devices:
¢ LDEV ID:

GUI reference A-109

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
For HDLM
Displays the ID that is used to identify an LU (an LU
for HDLM), separated by a colon (:) every 2 digits.
For software other than HDLM
Displays n/a.
¢ Storage system name:
For HDLM
Displays the name of the storage system. If no
information exists, n/a is displayed.
For software other than HDLM
Displays n/a.
¢ CHA:
For HDLM
When the path is migrated by using a virtual ID, the
number of the CHA port to which the migration
destination path connects is displayed. When a virtual
ID is not used, this item is not displayed.
For software other than HDLM
Displays n/a.
• CHA:
For HDLM:
Displays the CHA port number, which is made up of a
number and an alphabetic character. This number
enables identification of the CHAs mounted on a
storage system. To obtain this number and identify a
CHA, use the storage system management program.
For HP-UX multipath:
The target address is displayed.
• Physical CHA:
For HDLM:
When a path is migrated using a virtual ID, displays
the number of the CHA port that is connected by the
migration-destination path. When a virtual ID is not
used, n/a is displayed.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.
This item is displayed when a virtual ID is used.
• Multipath LU:
For HDLM:
Displays the names of the HDevs connected to the
paths. Regardless of the number of paths, the HDev
names are grouped by their corresponding LUs and
displayed in that order.
- If the host OS is Solaris 7, the name (with the slice
number omitted) of the HDev that has an owner path,
and whose path ID is the smallest of all the HDevs
corresponding to the same LU, is displayed.

A-110 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Item Description
- If the host OS is Windows, the drive letter is
displayed. If no drive letter has been allocated, a
hyphen (-) is displayed.
For HP-UX multipath:
The LUN hardware path is displayed.
• Disk Number:
For HDLM:
If the host OS is Windows, the Windows physical
device number is displayed. If the physical device
number cannot be obtained, a hyphen (-) is
displayed. If the host OS is not Windows, n/a is
displayed. Note that this item is not displayed if no
Windows hosts exist.
For HP-UX multipath:
This item is not displayed.
• Host Name: Displays the name of the host that
recognizes the path.
• HBA:
For HDLM:
Displays a number that indicates the HBA that
connects to the path. The bus number and the HBA
port number are delimited by a period.
For HP-UX multipath:
The H/W Path is displayed.
• HBA WWN:
For HDLM:
Displays port WWN information for HBAs. For an iSCSI
interface, n/a is displayed because this information
cannot be obtained.
For HP-UX multipath:
The port name obtained by the scsimgr get_info
command is displayed.
• I/O Count:
For HDLM:
Displays the total number of I/O counts for the path.
n/a is displayed if I/O count information could not be
obtained.
For HP-UX multipath:
The total number of processed I/Os that have been
obtained by the scsimgr get_stat command is
displayed.
• I/O Errors:
For HDLM:
Displays the total number of I/O errors for the path.
For HP-UX multipath:
The number of I/O failures obtained by the scsimgr
get_stat command is displayed.

GUI reference A-111

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
• Type:
For HDLM:
Displays one of the following as the path attribute:
- Owner: The path is subject to owner control, and is
preferentially used for accessing the LU.
- Non-owner: The path goes through a channel
adapter, other than channel adapters under owner
control.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.
A hyphen is displayed if the path is connected to storage
systems from other companies.
• SLPR:
For HDLM:
Displays the number (in the range 0-31) of the SLPR
to which the LU belongs. A hyphen is displayed if the
HDLM version of the managed host is prior to 5.6 or if
the LU to be displayed is in a storage system that
does not support the storage logical partition function.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.
• CLPR:
For HDLM:
Displays the number (in the range 0-31) of the CLPR
to which the CHA belongs. A hyphen is displayed if the
HDLM version of the host is prior to 5.6 or if the CHA
to be displayed is mounted on a storage system that
does not support the cache logical partition function.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.
• Path ID:
For HDLM:
Displays the path management PATH_ID. This is
allocated each time a managed host is restarted or a
path configuration is changed.
For HP-UX multipath:
The instance number obtained by the ioscan -kfnNC
lunpath command is displayed.
• Path Name: Displays the path name that connects the
host to the LU. If HP-UX multipath is used, the lunpath
hardware path obtained by the ioscan -m hwpath
command is displayed. The items that make up the path
name depend on the host OS. The display format of the
path name for each OS is shown below:
¢ AIX:
HBA-adapter-number.bus-number.target-ID.host-
LU-number
¢ HP-UX, Linux, Solaris, Windows, VMware:

A-112 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
host-port-number.bus-number.target-ID.host-LU-
number
¢ HP-UX (for HP-UX multipath):
host-port-number.target-port-WWN.host-LU-
number
To modify the system configuration or upgrade the
hardware, browse the path names and check the affected
paths. If HDLM is in use, the displayed items that make up
a path name differ depending on the host OS. For details
about the items displayed as the components of path
names in each OS, see the command reference in the
HDLM manual.
• Intermittent Error:
For HDLM:
Displays information related to intermittent errors.
One of the following is displayed:
- -: Indicates that the intermittent error monitoring
function is not supported at this time or that the HDLM
manager is stopped.
- Number (0 or greater): Indicates the number of
errors that occurred during intermittent error
monitoring.
- *: Indicates that an intermittent error was detected,
but that it is not subject to auto failback.
- n/a: Indicates that the host OS is VMware and no
path is connected.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.
• Set Online button: Changes the status of paths to
Online. This button becomes active when you select a
check box for a path.
• Set Offline button: Changes the status of paths to
Offline(C). This button becomes active when you select
a check box for a path.
• Set Online(D) button: Changes the status of the paths to
Online(D). This button becomes active when you select a
check box for paths that can be set to Online(D). This
item is displayed when the gui.physical.view properties
in the server.properties file for the Global Link Manager
server are set to true. For details about the
gui.physical.view properties, see the Hitachi Command
Suite Global Link Manager Installation and Configuration
Guide.
• Filter button: Filters information in the Paths list. Clicking
this button displays the Filter - Paths dialog box.
• Filter Off button: Cancels the filtering conditions that
were set in the Filter - Paths dialog box.

CHA Ports tabbed- • CHA Port:

page For HDLM:

GUI reference A-113

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
Displays the storage system's CHA port numbers and
icons that indicate the CHA port status. A CHA port
number is made up of a number and an alphabetic
character. The number identifies the CHAs mounted
on a storage system. To identify a CHA port number,
use the storage system management program.
For HP-UX multipath:
The target address and an icon that indicates the
status of the target address are displayed.
• Physical CHA:
For HDLM:
When a path is migrated using a virtual ID, displays
the number of the CHA port that is connected by the
migration-destination path. When a virtual ID is not
used, n/a is displayed.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.
This item is displayed when a virtual ID is used.
• Show Paths button: Displays information about the paths
connected to the CHA ports. The Show Paths button
becomes active when you select a check box in the CHA
Port list. When the Show Paths button is clicked, the
Show Paths - Storage-system-Name dialog box is
displayed.
• Refresh Hosts button: Click this button to refresh
information about hosts connected by paths for each CHA
port. This button becomes active when you select a check
box.

Multipath LUs tabbed- Displays multipath LU information related to paths connected

page to the storage system.
• Multipath LU:
For HDLM:
Displays the names of the HDevs. Regardless of the
number of paths, the HDev names are grouped by
their corresponding LUs and displayed in that order.
- If the host OS is Solaris 7, the name (with the slice
number omitted) of the HDev that has an owner path,
and whose path ID is the smallest of all the HDevs
corresponding to the same LU, is displayed.
- If the host OS is Windows, the drive letter is
displayed. If no drive letter has been allocated, a
hyphen (-) is displayed.
For HP-UX multipath:
The LUN hardware path is displayed.
• Disk Number:
For HDLM:
If the host OS is Windows, the Windows physical
device number is displayed. If the physical device

A-114 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Item Description
number cannot be obtained, a hyphen (-) is
displayed. If the host OS is not Windows, n/a is
displayed. Note that this item is not displayed if no
Windows hosts exist.
For HP-UX multipath:
This item is not displayed.
• Host Name: Displays the name of the host that
recognizes the multipath LU.
• Load Balancing:
For HDLM:
Displays one of the following for the set load balancing
algorithm when the load balancing function is being
used:
- Round robin
- Extended round robin
- Least I/Os (in operating systems other than
VMware)
- Extended least I/Os
- Least blocks (in operating systems other than
VMware)
- Extended least blocks
- Most Recently Used (in VMware)
- Fixed (in VMware)
- Unknown algorithm (in VMware)
When the host operating system is VMware, Unknown
is displayed for all other algorithms.
For HP-UX multipath:
Displays one of the following for the load balancing
policy for the LUN corresponding to the host:
- Round-robin
- Least command load
- Cell aware round robin
- Preferred path
- Preferred target port
- Closest path
- Weighted round-robin
- Path lock down
In operating systems other than VMware, Disabled is
displayed when the load balancing function is not being
used.
• Path use times:
If Round robin, Least I/Os, or Least blocks is applied
for the load balancing algorithm, the maximum number of
times the same path can be used is displayed. If
Extended round robin, Extended least I/Os, or
Extended least blocks is applied for the load balancing

GUI reference A-115

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
algorithm, the maximum number of times the same path
can be used for sequential I/O is displayed.
• Random I/Os Path use times:
If Extended round robin, Extended least I/Os, or
Extended least blocks is applied for the load balancing
algorithm, the maximum number of times the same path
can be used for random I/O is displayed.
• Dynamic I/O path control: Displays one of the following
as the dynamic I/O path control setting for the multipath
LU. Note that this item is not displayed when the storage
systems connected to the host do not support dynamic I/O
path control.
¢ Disabled: Dynamic I/O path control is disabled.
¢ Enabled: Dynamic I/O path control is enabled.
• Status: Displays icons indicating the statuses of paths
connected to the multipath LU. The display shows the
number of paths in each of the statuses Online,
Offline(C), Offline(E), Online(E), Online(S), and
Online(D).
• Storage system Name: Displays the name of the storage
system that contains the LU that corresponds to the
multipath LU. The storage system name is made up of the
following three items, delimited by periods:
¢ vendor-ID: Vendor name of the storage system
UNKNOWN# is displayed if the storage information
cannot be recognized.
¢ model-ID: Device name of the storage system
UNKNOWN# is displayed if the storage information
cannot be recognized.
¢ serial-number: Serial number of the storage system
A hyphen (-) is displayed if the storage information
cannot be recognized.
• LDEV ID:
For HDLM:
Displays the logical device number.
For HP-UX multipath:
The LUN hardware path is displayed.
• Physical Information:
Displays the following physical storage system information
for virtual storage machines and other devices:
¢ Storage system name:
For HDLM
Displays the name of the storage system. If no
information exists, n/a is displayed.
For software other than HDLM
Displays n/a.
¢ LDEV ID:

A-116 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
For HDLM
Displays the ID that is used to identify an LU (an LU
for HDLM), separated by a colon (:) every 2 digits.
For software other than HDLM
Displays n/a.
• LDEV Label:
For HDLM:
Displays label information associated with the LDEV. If
n/a is displayed, Global Link Manager failed to obtain
LDEV label information from Device Manager. A blank
is displayed if the LDEV label information could not be
acquired.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.
• Configure Multipath LUs button: Click here to set the
following items for a multipath LU: the load balancing
algorithm, the number of times the same path can be
used, or dynamic I/O path control. If the host OS is Solaris
7, the selected algorithm is set for all LUs corresponding to
the selected multipath LUs. This button becomes available
when you select the check box for a multipath LU in the
Multipath LUs page in order to set a load balancing
algorithm, the number of times the same path can be
used, or dynamic I/O path control. When the Configure
Multipath LUs button is clicked, the Configure Multipath
LUs dialog box is displayed. The function for setting the
load balancing algorithm for individual LUs is supported by
hosts that have HDLM version 5.8 or later installed.
Setting the number of times the same path can be used is
supported for each LU on hosts running HDLM version
7.4.1 or later. Dynamic I/O path control is supported for
individual LUs on hosts running HDLM version 7.3 or later.
• Show Paths button: Displays the status of paths
connected to multipath LUs. The Show Paths button
becomes active when you select a check box in the
Multipath LUs list. When the Show Paths button is
clicked, the Show Paths - Storage-system-Name dialog
box is displayed.

Configuration tabbed- Displays the settings for the operating environment for HDLM
page or HP-UX multipath. The support status of the HDLM functions
depends on the HDLM version and the operating system. The
Configuration tabbed-page displays only those functions
supported by HDLM or HP-UX multipath.
UNKNOWN is displayed if Global Link Manager is unable to
recognize HDLM or HP-UX multipath information.
• Name: Displays the host name.
• Version: Displays version information of HDLM. If HP-UX
multipath is used, the HP-UX version is displayed.
• Load Balancing:
For HDLM:

GUI reference A-117

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
Displays one of the following for the set load balancing
algorithm when the load balancing function is being
used:
- Round robin
- Extended round robin
- Least I/Os (in operating systems other than
VMware)
- Extended least I/Os
- Least blocks (in operating systems other than
VMware)
- Extended least blocks
- Most Recently Used (in VMware)
- Fixed (in VMware)
- Unknown algorithm (in VMware)
When the host operating system is VMware, Unknown
is displayed for all other algorithms and n/a is
displayed when no path is connected.
If a different load balancing policy is used for each
LUN, an asterisk (*) is appended to indicate that other
load balancing policies are also in use.
For HP-UX multipath:
Displays one of the following for the load balancing
policy for the LUN corresponding to the host:
- Round-robin
- Least command load
- Cell aware round robin
- Preferred path
- Preferred target port
- Closest path
- Weighted round-robin
- Path lock down
If a different load balancing policy is used for each
LUN, the most-used load balancing policy is displayed.
To indicate that other load balancing policies are also
in use, an asterisk (*) is also appended.
In operating systems other than VMware, Disabled is
displayed when the load balancing function is not being
used.
• Path Health Checking: If the path health checking
function is enabled, the execution interval for path health
checking is displayed in minutes. If the path health
checking function is not being used, Disabled is displayed.
n/a is displayed in the following configurations:
- HP-UX multipath
- HDLM on a host running VMware
• Auto Failback: If the auto failback function is enabled,
the interval for path status checking is displayed in

A-118 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
minutes. If the auto failback function is not being used,
Disabled is displayed.
n/a is displayed in the following configurations:
- HP-UX multipath
- HDLM on a host running VMware
• Intermittent Error Monitor: Displays whether the
intermittent-error monitoring function is used. If HP-UX
multipath is used or the host OS is VMware and no path is
connected, n/a is displayed.

Physical Storage • Name: Displays the names of the storage systems to

systems tabbed-page which paths are connected and the icons that indicate their
status. A storage system name is made up of the following
three items, delimited by periods:
¢ vendor-ID: Vendor name of the storage system
¢ model-ID: Device name of the storage system
¢ serial-number: Serial number of the storage system
If you click a storage system name, the Storage-system-
Name Dialog Box (for physical storage system information)
appears.
• Serial Number:
Displays the serial number of the storage system.

#
If UNKNOWN is displayed for the storage system name, check the status of
the path connected to the host. Make sure that the path is in the Online
status, and then update the host information.

DMP Windows tabbed-page

This tabbed-page displays information about the configuration of a Windows
host running DMP.

Item Description

Hosts tabbed-page The Hosts tabbed-page is displayed in the Storage-system-

Name subwindow when a host is registered in the selected
storage system.
• Name: Displays the host names and icons that indicate
the host status. Clicking a host name displays the host-
name subwindow for that host.
• Last Update Time: Displays the last update time for the
host information.
• Status: Displays icons indicating the statuses of host
paths. The display shows the number of paths in each of
the statuses Healthy, and Unhealthy.
• IP Address: Displays the IP address of the host. If the
host has both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses, the address that is
assigned the higher priority on the managing host is
displayed.

GUI reference A-119

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
• OS: Displays the type and version information for the OS
installed on the host.
• Multipath Software: Displays DMP.
• Protocol: Displays the communication protocol used
between the host and the Global Link Manager server.
• Version: Displays version information of DMP.

Paths tabbed-page Displays information about the paths connected to the storage
system.
• Status: Displays an icon indicating the status of a path.
• LUN: Displays the LUN.
• Storage system Name: Displays the name of the storage
system to which the path is connected. The storage
system name is made up of the following three items,
delimited by periods:
¢ vendor-ID: Vendor name of storage system
¢ product-ID: Product ID of the storage system
¢ serial-number: Serial number of storage system
• Target: Displays the target number. The target number is
made up of a number and an alphabetic character. This
number enables identification of the targets mounted on a
storage system. To identify a target, check this number
using the storage system management program.
• Disk: Displays the names of the physical disks connected
to the paths. Regardless of the number of paths, the
physical disk names are grouped by their corresponding
LUs and displayed in that order.
• Host Name: Displays the name of the host that
recognizes the path.
• Port / Channel: Displays a number that indicates the
HBA that connects to the path. This item is displayed in
the Pport-IDCchannel-ID format.
• Operations: Displays the total number of I/O counts for
the path.
¢ Reads: Displays the number of read requests issued
by the OS to the storage system.
¢ Writes: Displays the number of write requests issued
by the OS to the storage system.
• Bytes: Displays the path I/O data size in bytes.
¢ Reads: Displays the amount of data issued by the OS
to the storage system for read requests.
¢ Writes: Displays the amount of data issued by the OS
to the storage system for write requests.
• Primary: Displays the primary path setting. One of the
following settings is displayed:
¢ YES
¢ NO
¢ -

A-120 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
• Path Name: Displays the path name that connects the
host and the LU. The display format of the path name is
shown below:
Path path-number-port-/-channel-number-target-
number-LUN
To modify the system configuration or upgrade the
hardware, browse the path names and check the affected
paths.

Targets tabbed-page • Target: Displays the target number. The target number is
made up of a number and an alphabetic character. This
number enables identification of the targets mounted on a
storage system. To identify a target, check this number
using the storage system management program.
• Show Paths button: Used to display the information of
paths connected to the target. This button becomes
activated when a check box, for the target whose path
information is displayed, is selected under Targets. When
the Show Paths button is clicked, the Show Paths -
Storage-system-Name dialog box is displayed.
• Refresh Hosts button: Click this button to refresh
information about hosts connected by paths for each
target. This button becomes active when you select a
check box.

Disk tabbed-page Displays disk information related to the paths connected to the
storage systems.
• Disk: Displays the physical disk name. Regardless of the
number of paths, the physical disk names are grouped by
their corresponding LUs and displayed in that order.
• Host Name: Displays the name of the host managing the
disk.
• LoadBalancePolicy: Displays one of the following
algorithms, which are used to set the load-balancing
policy:
¢ Fail Over Only (Active/Passive)
¢ Round Robin (Active/Active)
¢ Round Robin with Subset
¢ Dynamic Least Queue Depth
¢ Weighted Paths
¢ Least Blocks
¢ Balanced Path
• Status: Displays the statuses of paths connected to the
disk as icons. Displays the amounts of paths with Healthy
and Unhealthy statuses.
• Storage system Name: Displays the name of the storage
system containing the disk. The storage system name is
made up of the following three items, delimited by
periods:
¢ vendor-ID: Vendor name of storage system
¢ product-ID: Product ID of the storage system

GUI reference A-121

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
¢ serial-number: Serial number of storage system
• LUN: Displays the LUN.
• Show Paths button: Used to display the status of paths
connected to the disk. This button becomes activated
when a check box, for the disk whose path status is
displayed, is selected under Disk. When the Show Paths
button is clicked, the Show Paths - Storage-system-Name
dialog box is displayed.

Configuration tabbed- Displays the DMP operating environment settings. The

page Configuration tabbed-page only displays that functions that
are supported by DMP.
UNKNOWN is displayed for a value that cannot be recognized
by Global Link Manager.
• Name: Displays the host name.
• Version: Displays version information of DMP.
• LoadBalancePolicy: Displays one of the following
algorithms, which are used to set the load-balancing
policy:
¢ Fail Over Only (Active/Passive)
¢ Round Robin (Active/Active)
¢ Round Robin with Subset
¢ Dynamic Least Queue Depth
¢ Weighted Paths
¢ Least Blocks
¢ Balanced Path
• TestPathRetryCount: Displays the test count that is used
to determine if a path has recovered from an error.
• KernelSleepTime: Displays the recovery time interval (in
milliseconds) for a path where an error has occurred.
• FailOverRetryCount: Displays the failover retry count.

storage-system-name dialog box (physical storage information)

This dialog box displays detailed storage system information. The items are
explained below.
• Path Status on page A-122
• Paths tabbed-page on page A-123
• Multipath LUs tabbed-page on page A-125

Path Status
Displays the statuses (with icons) of paths. The display shows the number of
paths that have the status Online, Offline(C), Offline(E), or Online(E),
as well as the total number of paths.

A-122 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Paths tabbed-page
Item Description

Status This tabbed-page displays an icon indicating the status of a

path.

LDEV ID Displays the logical device number.

LDEV Label Displays label information associated with the LDEV. If n/a is
displayed, Global Link Manager failed to obtain LDEV label
information from Device Manager. A blank is displayed if the
LDEV label information could not be acquired.

Storage system Displays the name of the storage system to which the path is
Name connected. The storage system name is made up of the
following items, delimited by periods:
• vendor-ID: Vendor name of the storage system
• model-ID: Device name of the storage system
• serial-number: Serial number of the storage system

Virtual Information Displays the following storage system information for virtual
storage machines and other devices:
• LDEV ID: Displays the LDEV number.
• Storage system Name: Displays the name of the storage
system to which the path connects.
• CHA: When the path is migrated by using a virtual ID, the
number of the CHA port to which the migration destination
path connects is displayed. When a virtual ID is not used,
this item is not displayed.

CHA Displays the CHA port number, which is made up of a number

and an alphabetic character. This number enables identification
of the CHAs mounted on a storage system. To obtain this
number and identify a CHA, use the storage system
management program.

Multipath LU Displays the names of the HDevs connected to the paths.

Regardless of the number of paths, the HDev names are
grouped by their corresponding LUs and displayed in that order.
• If the host OS is Solaris 7, the name (with the slice number
omitted) of the HDev that has an owner path, and whose
path ID is the smallest of all the HDevs corresponding to
the same LU, is displayed.
• If the host OS is Windows and HDLM is being used, the
drive letter is displayed. If no drive letter has been
allocated, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Disk Number If the host OS is Windows, the Windows physical device number
is displayed. If the physical device number cannot be obtained,
a hyphen (-) is displayed. If the host OS is not Windows, n/a is
displayed. Note that this item is not displayed if no Windows
hosts exist.

Host Name Displays the name of the host that recognizes the path.

HBA Displays a number that indicates the HBA that connects to the
path. The HBA display format is shown below.
• bus-number.HBA-port-number

GUI reference A-123

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

HBA WWN Displays port WWN information for HBAs. For an iSCSI
interface, n/a is displayed because this information cannot be
obtained.

I/O Count Displays the total number of I/O counts for the path. n/a is
displayed if I/O count information could not be obtained.

I/O Errors Displays the total number of I/O errors for the path.

Type Displays one of the following as the path attribute:

• Owner: The path is subject to owner control, and is
preferentially used for accessing the LU.
• Non-owner: The path goes through a channel adapter,
other than channel adapters under owner control.

SLPR Displays the number (in the range 0-31) of the SLPR to which
the LU belongs. A hyphen is displayed if the HDLM version of
the managed host is prior to 5.6 or if the LU to be displayed is
in a storage system that does not support the storage logical
partition function.

CLPR Displays the number (in the range 0-31) of the CLPR to which
the CHA belongs. A hyphen is displayed if the HDLM version of
the host is prior to 5.6 or if the CHA to be displayed is mounted
on a storage system that does not support the cache logical
partition function.

Path ID Displays the path management PATH_ID. This is allocated each

time a managed host is restarted or a path configuration is
changed.

Path Name Displays the path name that connects the host to the LU. The
items that make up the path name depend on the host OS. The
display format of the path name for each OS is shown below:
• HDLM (in AIX):
HBA-adapter-number.bus-number.target-ID.host-LU-
number
• HDLM (in Linux, Solaris, Windows, VMware):
host-port-number.bus-number.target-ID.host-LU-
number
To modify the system configuration or upgrade the hardware,
browse the path names and check the affected paths. The
displayed items that make up a path name differ depending on
the host OS. For details about the items displayed as the
components of path names in each OS, see the command
reference in the HDLM manual.

Intermittent Error Displays information related to intermittent errors. One of the

following is displayed:
• -: Indicates that the intermittent error monitoring function
is not supported at this time or that the HDLM manager is
stopped.
• Number (0 or greater): Indicates the number of errors that
occurred during intermittent error monitoring.
• *: Indicates that an intermittent error was detected, but
that it is not subject to auto failback.

A-124 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
• n/a: Indicates that the host OS is VMware and no path is
connected.

Multipath LUs tabbed-page

Item Description

Multipath LU Displays the names of the HDevs. Regardless of the number of

paths, the HDev names are grouped by their corresponding
LUs and displayed in that order.
• If the host OS is or Solaris 7, the name (with the slice
number omitted) of the HDev that has an owner path, and
whose path ID is the smallest of all the HDevs
corresponding to the same LU, is displayed.
• If the host OS is Windows, the drive letter is displayed. If
no drive letter has been allocated, a hyphen (-) is
displayed.

Disk Number If the host OS is Windows, the Windows physical device

number is displayed. If the physical device number cannot be
obtained, a hyphen (-) is displayed. If the host OS is not
Windows, n/a is displayed. Note that this item is not displayed
if no Windows hosts exist.

Host Name Displays the name of the host that manages the multipath LU.

Load Balancing Displays one of the following for the set load balancing
algorithm when the load balancing function is being used:
- Round robin
- Extended round robin
- Least I/Os (in operating systems other than VMware)
- Extended least I/Os
- Least blocks (in operating systems other than VMware)
- Extended least blocks
- Most Recently Used (in VMware)
- Fixed (in VMware)
- Unknown algorithm (in VMware)
When the host operating system is VMware, Unknown is
displayed for all other algorithms.
In operating systems other than VMware, Disabled is
displayed when the load balancing function is not being used.

Path use times If Round robin, Least I/Os, or Least blocks is applied for
the load balancing algorithm, the maximum number of times
the same path can be used is displayed. If Extended round
robin, Extended least I/Os, or Extended least blocks is
applied for the load balancing algorithm, the maximum number
of times the same path can be used for sequential I/O is
displayed.

GUI reference A-125

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

Random I/Os Path If Extended round robin, Extended least I/Os, or

use times Extended least blocks is applied for the load balancing
algorithm, the maximum number of times the same path can
be used for random I/O is displayed.

Status Displays icons indicating the statuses of paths connected to the

multipath LU. The display shows the number of paths that have
the status Online, Offline(C), Offline(E), Online(E),
Online(S), or Online(D).

Storage system Displays the name of the storage system that contains the
Name multipath LU. The storage system name is made up of the
following three items, delimited by periods:
• vendor-ID: Vendor name of storage system
• model-ID: Device name of storage system
• serial-number: Serial number of storage system

LDEV ID Displays the logical device number.

Virtual Information Displays the following storage system information for virtual
storage machines and other devices:
• Storage system Name: Displays the name of the storage
system that contains the multipath LU.
• LDEV ID: Displays the LDEV number.

LDEV Label Displays label information associated with the LDEV. If n/a is
displayed, Global Link Manager failed to obtain LDEV label
information from Device Manager. A blank is displayed if the
LDEV label information could not be acquired.

Subwindows for managing paths on storage systems (physical

storage information)

Storage systems subwindow (physical storage information)

In the Storage systems subwindow, you can:
• Display the status of paths connected to all storage systems allocated to
the logged-in user (View permission).
• Display a list of storage systems connected to the hosts allocated to the
logged-in user (View permission).
The Storage systems subwindow is organized into the following areas:
• Summary on page A-127
• Storage systems on page A-127

A-126 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Summary
Item Description

Number of Storage Displays the number of storage systems allocated to the

systems logged-in user.

Path Status Displays the statuses (with icons) of paths connected to all
hosts allocated to the logged-in user. If instances of different
multipath management software are running at the same time,
the path status is displayed for each one. The display shows
the number of paths that have the status Online, Offline(C),
Offline(E), or Online(E), as well as the total number of
paths. When the integer indicating the number of paths that
have a given status is clicked, Show Paths dialog box (physical
storage information) on page A-134 is displayed.

Storage systems
Item Description

Name Displays the names of the storage systems to which paths are
connected and the icons that indicate their status. A storage
system name is made up of the following three items,
delimited by periods:
• vendor-ID: Vendor name of the storage system
• model-ID: Device name of the storage system
• serial-number: Serial number of the storage system
When a storage system name is clicked, storage-system-name
subwindow (physical storage information) on page A-127 is
displayed.

Serial Number Displays the serial number of the storage system.

storage-system-name subwindow (physical storage information)

In the Storage-system-Name subwindow, you can do the following:
• Display information about the paths, CHA ports, and multipath LUs
related to the storage system (View permission).
• Change the status of paths related to the storage system (Modify
permission).
The items displayed in the Storage-system-Name subwindow (physical
storage system information) are explained below:
• Path Status on page A-127

Path Status
Displays the statuses (with icons) of paths connected to the storage system.
The display shows the number of paths that have the status Online,
Offline(C), Offline(E), Online(E), Online(S), Online(D), Healthy, or
Unhealthy, as well as the total number of paths. When the integer indicating

GUI reference A-127

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 the number of paths that have a given status is clicked, the Show Paths -
Storage-system-Name dialog box is displayed.
Host configuration information items are described below.

Item Description

Hosts tabbed-page The Hosts tabbed-page is displayed in the Storage-system-

Name subwindow when a host is registered in the selected
storage system.
• Name: Displays the host names and icons that indicate
the host status. Clicking a host name displays the host-
name subwindow for that host.
• Last Update Time: Displays the last update time for the
host information.
• Status: Displays icons indicating the statuses of host
paths. The display shows the number of paths in each of
the statuses Online, Offline(C), Offline(E),
Online(E), Online(S), and Online(D).
• IP Address: Displays the IP address of the host. If the
host has both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses, the address that
is assigned the higher priority on the managing host is
displayed.
• OS: Displays the type and version information for the OS
installed on the host. If the OS is Linux, the kernel version
is displayed.
• Multipath Software: Displays the name of the multipath
management software.
• Protocol: Displays the communication protocol used
between the host and the Global Link Manager server.
• Version: Displays version information of HDLM.

Paths tabbed-page Displays information about the paths connected to the storage
system.
• Status: Displays an icon indicating the status of a path.
• LDEV ID: Displays the logical device number.
• LDEV Label:
Displays label information associated with the LDEV. If
n/a is displayed, Global Link Manager failed to obtain
LDEV label information from Device Manager. A blank is
displayed if the LDEV label information could not be
acquired.
• Storage system Name: Displays the name of the
storage system that contains the multipath LU. The
storage system name is made up of the following three
items, delimited by periods:
¢ vendor-ID: Vendor name of storage system
¢ model-ID: Device name of storage system
¢ serial-number: Serial number of storage system
• Virtual Information: Displays the following storage
system information for virtual storage machines and other
devices:
¢ LDEV ID: Displays the LDEV number.

A-128 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Item Description
¢ Storage system Name: Displays the name of the
storage system to which the path connects.
¢ CHA: When the path is migrated by using a virtual
ID, the number of the CHA port to which the
migration destination path connects is displayed.
When a virtual ID is not used, this item is not
displayed.
• CHA:
Displays the CHA port number, which is made up of a
number and an alphabetic character. This number enables
identification of the CHAs mounted on a storage system.
To obtain this number and identify a CHA, use the storage
system management program.
• Multipath LU:
Displays the names of the HDevs connected to the paths.
Regardless of the number of paths, the HDev names are
grouped by their corresponding LUs and displayed in that
order.
- If the host OS is Solaris 7, the name (with the slice
number omitted) of the HDev that has an owner path, and
whose path ID is the smallest of all the HDevs
corresponding to the same LU, is displayed.
- If the host OS is Windows, the drive letter is displayed.
If no drive letter has been allocated, a hyphen (-) is
displayed.
• Disk Number:
If the host OS is Windows, the Windows physical device
number is displayed. If the physical device number cannot
be obtained, a hyphen (-) is displayed. If the host OS is
not Windows, n/a is displayed. Note that this item is not
displayed if no Windows hosts exist.
• Host Name: Displays the name of the host that
recognizes the path.
• HBA:
Displays a number that indicates the HBA that connects to
the path. The bus number and the HBA port number are
delimited by a period.
• HBA WWN:
Displays port WWN information for HBAs. For an iSCSI
interface, n/a is displayed because this information cannot
be obtained.
• I/O Count:
Displays the total number of I/O counts for the path. n/a
is displayed if I/O count information could not be
obtained.
• I/O Errors:
Displays the total number of I/O errors for the path.
• Type:
Displays one of the following as the path attribute:

GUI reference A-129

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
- Owner: The path is subject to owner control, and is
preferentially used for accessing the LU.
- Non-owner: The path goes through a channel adapter,
other than channel adapters under owner control.
• SLPR:
Displays the number (in the range 0-31) of the SLPR to
which the LU belongs. A hyphen is displayed if the HDLM
version of the managed host is prior to 5.6 or if the LU to
be displayed is in a storage system that does not support
the storage logical partition function.
• CLPR:
Displays the number (in the range 0-31) of the CLPR to
which the CHA belongs. A hyphen is displayed if the HDLM
version of the host is prior to 5.6 or if the CHA to be
displayed is mounted on a storage system that does not
support the cache logical partition function.
• Path ID:
Displays the path management PATH_ID. This is allocated
each time a managed host is restarted or a path
configuration is changed.
• Path Name: Displays the path name that connects the
host to the LU. If HP-UX multipath is used, the lunpath
hardware path obtained by the ioscan -m hwpath
command is displayed. The items that make up the path
name depend on the host OS. The display format of the
path name for each OS is shown below:
¢ AIX:
HBA-adapter-number.bus-number.target-ID.host-
LU-number
¢ Linux, Solaris, Windows, VMware:
host-port-number.bus-number.target-ID.host-
LU-number
To modify the system configuration or upgrade the
hardware, browse the path names and check the affected
paths. If HDLM is in use, the displayed items that make
up a path name differ depending on the host OS. For
details about the items displayed as the components of
path names in each OS, see the command reference in
the HDLM manual.
• Intermittent Error:
Displays information related to intermittent errors. One of
the following is displayed:
- -: Indicates that the intermittent error monitoring
function is not supported at this time or that the HDLM
manager is stopped.
- Number (0 or greater): Indicates the number of errors
that occurred during intermittent error monitoring.
- *: Indicates that an intermittent error was detected, but
that it is not subject to auto failback.

A-130 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
- n/a: Indicates that the host OS is VMware and no path
is connected.
• Set Online button: Changes the status of paths to
Online. This button becomes active when you select a
check box for a path.
• Set Offline button: Changes the status of paths to
Offline(C). This button becomes active when you select
a check box for a path.
• Set Online(D) button: Changes the status of the paths to
Online(D). This button becomes active when you select a
check box for paths that can be set to Online(D). This
item is displayed when the gui.physical.view properties
in the server.properties file for the Global Link Manager
server are set to true. For details about the
gui.physical.view properties, see the Hitachi Command
Suite Global Link Manager Installation and Configuration
Guide.
• Filter button: Filters information in the Paths list.
Clicking this button displays the Filter - Paths dialog box.
• Filter Off button: Cancels the filtering conditions that
were set in the Filter - Paths dialog box.

CHA Ports tabbed-page • CHA Port:

Displays the storage system's CHA port numbers and
icons that indicate the CHA port status. A CHA port
number is made up of a number and an alphabetic
character. The number identifies the CHAs mounted on a
storage system. To identify a CHA port number, use the
storage system management program.
• Virtual CHA Port:
When a path is migrated by using a virtual ID, the number
of the CHA port to which the migration destination path
connects is displayed. When a virtual ID is not used, this
item is not displayed.
• Show Paths button: Displays information about the paths
connected to the CHA ports. The Show Paths button
becomes active when you select a check box in the CHA
Port list. When the Show Paths button is clicked, the
Show Paths Dialog Box (for Physical Storage Information)
is displayed.
• Show Hosts button:
Click this button to check information about hosts. In the
CHA Port list, when you select the check box of the CHA
port whose host information is to be checked, the Show
Hosts button becomes active. Click the Show Hosts
button to display the Show Hosts Dialog Box.

Multipath LUs tabbed- Displays multipath LU information related to paths connected

page to the storage system.
• Multipath LU:
Displays the names of the HDevs. Regardless of the
number of paths, the HDev names are grouped by their
corresponding LUs and displayed in that order.

GUI reference A-131

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
- If the host OS is Solaris 7, the name (with the slice
number omitted) of the HDev that has an owner path, and
whose path ID is the smallest of all the HDevs
corresponding to the same LU, is displayed.
- If the host OS is Windows, the drive letter is displayed.
If no drive letter has been allocated, a hyphen (-) is
displayed.
• Disk Number:
If the host OS is Windows, the Windows physical device
number is displayed. If the physical device number cannot
be obtained, a hyphen (-) is displayed. If the host OS is
not Windows, n/a is displayed. Note that this item is not
displayed if no Windows hosts exist.
• Host Name: Displays the name of the host that
recognizes the multipath LU.
• Load Balancing:
Displays one of the following for the set load balancing
algorithm when the load balancing function is being used:
- Round robin
- Extended round robin
- Least I/Os (in operating systems other than VMware)
- Extended least I/Os
- Least blocks (in operating systems other than VMware)
- Extended least blocks
- Most Recently Used (in VMware)
- Fixed (in VMware)
- Unknown algorithm (in VMware)
When the host operating system is VMware, Unknown is
displayed for all other algorithms.
In operating systems other than VMware, Disabled is
displayed when the load balancing function is not being
used.
• Path use times:
If Round robin, Least I/Os, or Least blocks is applied
for the load balancing algorithm, the maximum number of
times the same path can be used is displayed. If
Extended round robin, Extended least I/Os, or
Extended least blocks is applied for the load balancing
algorithm, the maximum number of times the same path
can be used for sequential I/O is displayed.
• Random I/Os Path use times:
If Extended round robin, Extended least I/Os, or
Extended least blocks is applied for the load balancing
algorithm, the maximum number of times the same path
can be used for random I/O is displayed.
• Status: Displays icons indicating the statuses of paths
connected to the multipath LU. The display shows the
number of paths in each of the statuses Online,

A-132 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
Offline(C), Offline(E), Online(E), Online(S), and
Online(D).
• Storage system Name: Displays the name of the
storage system that contains the LU that corresponds to
the multipath LU. The storage system name is made up of
the following three items, delimited by periods:
¢ vendor-ID: Vendor name of the storage system
UNKNOWN is displayed if the storage information cannot
be recognized.
¢ model-ID: Device name of the storage system
UNKNOWN is displayed if the storage information cannot
be recognized.
¢ serial-number: Serial number of the storage system
A hyphen (-) is displayed if the storage information
cannot be recognized.
• LDEV ID: Displays the logical device number.
• Virtual Information:
Displays the following storage system information for
virtual storage machines and other devices:
¢ Storage system Name: Displays the name of the
storage system that contains the multipath LU.
¢ LDEV ID: Displays the LDEV number.
• LDEV Label:
Displays label information associated with the LDEV. If
n/a is displayed, Global Link Manager failed to obtain
LDEV label information from Device Manager. A blank is
displayed if the LDEV label information could not be
acquired.
• Show Paths button: Displays the status of paths
connected to multipath LUs. The Show Paths button
becomes active when you select a check box in the
Multipath LUs list. When the Show Paths button is
clicked, the Show Paths Dialog Box (for Physical Storage
Information) is displayed.

Virtual Storage Displays a list of storage systems that were virtualized by

Machines tabbed-page using a storage system.
• Name:
Displays the names of the storage systems to which paths
are connected and the icons that indicate their status. A
storage system name is made up of the following three
items, delimited by periods:
¢ vendor-ID: Vendor name of the storage system
¢ model-ID: Device name of the storage system
¢ serial-number: Serial number of the storage system
If you click a storage system name, the Storage-system-
Name Dialog Box (for Virtual Storage Machines
information) appears.
• Serial Number:

GUI reference A-133

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
Displays the serial number of the storage system.

Show Paths dialog box (physical storage information)

The Show Paths dialog box is used for managing multiple paths related to a
selected management object.
In the Show Paths dialog box, you can:
• View the status of multiple paths (View permission).
• Change the status of multiple paths to Online or Offline(C) (Modify
permission).
You can perform this operation only when HDLM is in use.
The Show Paths dialog box is organized into the following areas:
• Path Status on page A-134
• Paths on page A-134

Path Status
Displays the statuses (with icons) of paths. The display shows the number of
paths that have the status Online, Offline(C), Offline(E), Online(E),
Online(S), or Online(D), as well as the total number of paths.

Paths
Displays information about the paths managed by HDLM.

Item Description

Status Displays an icon indicating the status of a path.

LDEV ID The LDEV number is displayed.

LDEV Label Displays label information associated with the LDEV. If n/a is
displayed, Global Link Manager failed to obtain LDEV label
information from Device Manager. A blank is displayed if the
LDEV label information could not be acquired.

Storage system Displays the name of the storage system to which the path is
Name connected. The storage system name is made up of the
following items, delimited by periods:
• vendor-ID: Vendor name of the storage system
UNKNOWN is displayed if the storage information cannot be
recognized.
• model-ID: Device name of the storage system
UNKNOWN is displayed if the storage information cannot be
recognized.
• serial-number: Serial number of the storage system

A-134 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
A hyphen (-) is displayed if the storage information cannot
be recognized.

Virtual Information Displays the following storage system information for virtual
storage machines and other devices:
• LDEV ID: Displays the LDEV number.
• Storage system Name: Displays the name of the storage
system to which the path connects.
• CHA: When the path is migrated by using a virtual ID, the
number of the CHA port to which the migration destination
path connects is displayed. When a virtual ID is not used,
this item is not displayed.

CHA Displays the CHA port number, which is made up of a number

and an alphabetic character. This number enables identification
of the CHAs mounted on a storage system. To obtain this
number and identify a CHA, use the storage system
management program.

Multipath LU Displays the names of the HDevs connected to the paths.

Regardless of the number of paths, the HDev names are
grouped by their corresponding LUs and displayed in that
order.
• If the host OS is Solaris 7, the name (with the slice
number omitted) of the HDev that has an owner path, and
whose path ID is the smallest of all the HDevs
corresponding to the same LU, is displayed.
• If the host OS is Windows, the drive letter is displayed. If
no drive letter has been allocated, a hyphen (-) is
displayed.

Disk Number If the host OS is Windows, the Windows physical device

number is displayed. If the physical device number cannot be
obtained, a hyphen (-) is displayed. If the host OS is not
Windows, n/a is displayed. Note that this item is not displayed
if no Windows hosts exist.

Host Name Displays the name of the host that recognizes the path.

HBA Displays a number that indicates the HBA that connects to the
path. The bus number and the HBA port number are delimited
by a period.

HBA WWN Displays port WWN information for HBAs. For an iSCSI
interface, n/a is displayed because this information cannot be
obtained.

I/O Count Displays the total number of I/O counts for the path. n/a is
displayed if I/O count information could not be obtained.

I/O Errors Displays the total number of I/O errors for the path.

Type Displays one of the following as the path attribute:

• Owner: The path is subject to owner control, and is
preferentially used for accessing the LU.
• Non-owner: The path goes through a channel adapter,
other than channel adapters under owner control.

GUI reference A-135

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

SLPR Displays the number (in the range 0-31) of the SLPR to which
the LU belongs. A hyphen is displayed if the HDLM version of
the managed host is prior to 5.6 or if the LU to be displayed is
in a storage system that does not support the storage logical
partition function.

CLPR Displays the number (in the range 0-31) of the CLPR to which
the CHA belongs. A hyphen is displayed if the HDLM version of
the host is prior to 5.6 or if the CHA to be displayed is mounted
on a storage system that does not support the cache logical
partition function.

Path ID Displays the path management PATH_ID. This is allocated each

time a managed host is restarted or a path configuration is
changed.

Path Name Displays the path name that connects the host to the LU. The
items that make up the path name depend on the host OS. The
display format of the path name for each OS is shown below:
• AIX:
HBA-adapter-number.bus-number.target-ID.host-LU-
number
• Linux, Solaris, Windows, VMware:
host-port-number.bus-number.target-ID.host-LU-
number
To modify the system configuration or upgrade the hardware,
browse the path names and check the affected paths. If HDLM
is in use, the displayed items that make up a path name differ
depending on the host OS. For details about the items
displayed as the components of path names in each OS, see
the command reference in the HDLM manual.

Intermittent Error Displays information related to intermittent errors. One of the

following is displayed:
• -: Indicates that the intermittent error monitoring function
is not supported at this time or that the HDLM manager is
stopped.
• Number (0 or greater): Indicates the number of errors
that occurred during intermittent error monitoring.
• *: Indicates that an intermittent error was detected, but
that it is not subject to auto failback.
• n/a: Indicates that the host OS is VMware and no path is
connected.

Set Online button Changes the status of paths to Online. This button becomes
active when you select a check box for a path.

Set Offline button Changes the status of paths to Offline(C). This button
becomes active when you select a check box for a path.

Set Online(D) button Changes the status of the paths to Online(D). This button
becomes active when you select a check box for paths that can
be set to Online(D).
This item is displayed when the gui.physical.view properties
in the server.properties file for the Global Link Manager

A-136 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
server are set to true. For details about the
gui.physical.view properties, see the Hitachi Command
Suite Global Link Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

Set Online/Offline dialog box (physical storage information)

The Set Online/Offline dialog box is used to change the status of the selected
paths to Online or Offline. In the Paths list, check the paths whose status is
to be changed to Online or Offline.
This setting can be configured when the multipath management software in
use is HDLM.
If the host OS is VMware, operations on the host take a few minutes
(approximately 3 minutes) to complete for every 100 paths.
The items displayed in the Set Online/Offline dialog box are explained below.

Item Description

Status Displays an icon indicating the status of a path.

LDEV ID Displays the logical device number.

LDEV Label Displays label information associated with the LDEV. If n/a is
displayed, Global Link Manager failed to obtain LDEV label
information from Device Manager. A blank is displayed if the
LDEV label information could not be acquired.

LUN Serial Number Displays the LUN serial number.

Storage system Displays the name of the storage system to which the path is
Name connected. The storage system name is made up of the
following items, delimited by periods:
• vendor-ID: Vendor name of the storage system
If the storage information cannot be recognized, UNKNOWN
is displayed.
• model-ID: Device name of the storage system
UNKNOWN is displayed if the storage information cannot be
recognized.
• serial-number: Serial number of the storage system
If the storage information cannot be recognized, a hyphen
(-) is displayed.

Virtual Information Displays the following storage system information for virtual
storage machines and other devices:
• LDEV ID: Displays the LDEV number.
• Storage system Name: Displays the name of the storage
system to which the path connects.
• CHA: When the path is migrated by using a virtual ID, the
number of the CHA port to which the migration destination
path connects is displayed. When a virtual ID is not used,
this item is not displayed.

GUI reference A-137

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

CHA Displays the CHA port number, which is made up of a number

and an alphabetic character. This number enables identification
of the CHAs mounted on a storage system. To obtain this
number and identify a CHA, use the storage system
management program.

Multipath LU Displays the names of the HDevs connected to the paths.

Regardless of the number of paths, the HDev names are
grouped by their corresponding LUs and displayed in that
order.
• If the host OS is Solaris 7, the name (with the slice
number omitted) of the HDev that has an owner path, and
whose path ID is the smallest of all the HDevs
corresponding to the same LU, is displayed.
• If the host OS is Windows, the drive letter is displayed. If
no drive letter has been allocated, a hyphen (-) is
displayed.

Disk Number If the host OS is Windows, the Windows physical device

number is displayed. If the physical device number cannot be
obtained, a hyphen (-) is displayed. If the host OS is not
Windows, n/a is displayed. Note that this item is not displayed
if no Windows hosts exist.

Host Name Displays the name of the host that recognizes the path.

HBA Displays a number that indicates the HBA that connects to the
path. The bus number and the HBA port number are delimited
by a period.

HBA WWN Displays port WWN information for HBAs. For an iSCSI
interface, n/a is displayed because this information cannot be
obtained.

I/O Count Displays the total number of I/O counts for the path. n/a is
displayed if I/O count information could not be obtained.

I/O Errors Displays the total number of I/O errors for the path.

Type Displays one of the following as the path attribute:

• Owner: The path is subject to owner control, and is
preferentially used for accessing the LU.
• Non-owner: The path goes through a channel adapter,
other than channel adapters under owner control.

SLPR Displays the number (in the range 0-31) of the SLPR to which
the LU belongs. A hyphen is displayed if the HDLM version of
the managed host is prior to 5.6 or if the LU to be displayed is
in a storage system that does not support the storage logical
partition function.

CLPR Displays the number (in the range 0-31) of the CLPR to which
the CHA belongs. A hyphen is displayed if the HDLM version of
the host is prior to 5.6 or if the CHA to be displayed is mounted
on a storage system that does not support the cache logical
partition function.

A-138 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

Path ID Displays the path management PATH_ID. This is allocated each

time a managed host is restarted or a path configuration is
changed.

Path Name Displays the path name that connects the host to the LU. The
display format of the path name for each OS is shown below:
• AIX:
HBA-adapter-number.bus-number.target-ID.host-LU-
number
• Linux, Solaris, VMware (if HDLM is in use), Windows:
host-port-number.bus-number.target-ID.host-LU-
number
To modify the system configuration or upgrade the hardware,
browse the path names and check the affected paths. The
displayed items that make up a path name differ depending on
the host OS. For details about the items displayed as the
components of path names in each OS, see the command
reference in the HDLM manual.

Intermittent Error • -: Indicates that the intermittent error monitoring function

is not supported at this time or that the HDLM manager is
stopped.
• Number (0 or greater): Indicates the number of errors
that occurred during intermittent error monitoring.
• *: Indicates that an intermittent error was detected, but
that it is not subject to auto failback.
• n/a: Indicates that the host OS is VMware and no path is
connected.

Yes, I've confirmed The OK button becomes active when you select a check box.
information above.
check box

Refresh Hosts dialog box (host connected to a CHA port)

The Refresh Hosts dialog box is used for refreshing the information for
selected hosts. In the Host List, check the host information to be refreshed.
The items displayed in the Refresh Hosts dialog box are explained below.

Item Description

Name Displays the host name.

IP Address Displays the IP address of the host. If the host has both IPv4
and IPv6 addresses, the address that is assigned the higher
priority on the managing host is displayed.

OS Displays the type and version information of the OS installed

on the host. If the host OS is Linux, the kernel version is
displayed.

Multipath Software Displays the name of the multipath management software.

GUI reference A-139

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

Protocol Displays the communication protocol used between the host

and the Global Link Manager server.

Version Displays version information for the multipath management

software.

Last Update Time Displays the last update time for the host.

Yes, I've confirmed The OK button becomes active when you select a check box.
information above
check box

host-name dialog box (physical storage information)

This dialog box displays detailed host information. The items are explained
below.
• Summary on page A-140
• Paths tabbed-page on page A-141
• Multipath LUs tabbed-page on page A-143

Summary
Item Description

IP Address Displays the IP address of the host. If the host has both IPv4
and IPv6 addresses, the address that is assigned the higher
priority on the managing host is displayed.

OS Displays the type and version information of the OS installed

on the host. If the host OS is Linux, the kernel version is
displayed.

Multipath Software Displays the name of the multipath management software.

Version Displays version information for the multipath management

software.

Agent Service Port If the OS is not VMware, the port number that is used by the
daemon process (or service) of Device Manager Agent or
HDLM Hitachi Command Suite Common Agent Component is
displayed. If the OS is VMware, the connection target of the
remote management client is displayed.
The display format of the remote management client
connection target is shown below.
- Host Name or IP Address:Port number

Remote Port Displays the port number to be used by the Device Manager
agent or HDLM Hitachi Command Suite Common Agent
Component for the Web server functionality.

Last Update Time Displays the last update time for the host information.

Path Status Displays the statuses (with icons) of paths connected to the
host. The display shows the number of paths that have the
status Online, Offline(C), Offline(E), Online(E),

A-140 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
Online(S), and Online(D), as well as the total number of
paths.

Paths tabbed-page
Item Description

Status This tabbed-page displays an icon indicating the status of a

path.

LDEV ID Displays the logical device number.

LDEV Label Displays label information associated with the LDEV. If n/a is
displayed, Global Link Manager failed to obtain LDEV label
information from Device Manager. A blank is displayed if the
LDEV label information could not be acquired.

Storage system Displays the name of the storage system to which the path is
Name connected. The storage system name is made up of the
following items, delimited by periods:
• vendor-ID: Vendor name of the storage system
UNKNOWN is displayed if the storage information cannot be
recognized.
• model-ID: Device name of the storage system
UNKNOWN is displayed if the storage information cannot be
recognized.
• serial-number: Serial number of the storage system
A hyphen (-) is displayed if the storage information cannot
be recognized.

Virtual Information Displays the following storage system information for virtual
storage machines and other devices:
• LDEV ID: Displays the LDEV number.
• Storage system Name: Displays the name of the storage
system to which the path connects.
• CHA: When the path is migrated by using a virtual ID, the
number of the CHA port to which the migration destination
path connects is displayed. When a virtual ID is not used,
this item is not displayed.

CHA Displays the CHA port number, which is made up of a number

and an alphabetic character. This number enables identification
of the CHAs mounted on a storage system. To obtain this
number and identify a CHA, use the storage system
management program.

Multipath LU Displays the names of the HDevs connected to the paths.

Regardless of the number of paths, the HDev names are
grouped by their corresponding LUs and displayed in that order.
• If the host OS is Solaris 7, the name (with the slice number
omitted) of the HDev that has an owner path, and whose
path ID is the smallest of all the HDevs corresponding to
the same LU, is displayed.

GUI reference A-141

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
• If the host OS is Windows and HDLM is being used, the
drive letter is displayed. If no drive letter has been
allocated, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Disk Number If the host OS is Windows, the Windows physical device number
is displayed. If the physical device number cannot be obtained,
a hyphen (-) is displayed. If the host OS is not Windows, n/a is
displayed. Note that this item is not displayed if no Windows
hosts exist.

Host Name Displays the name of the host that recognizes the path.

HBA Displays a number that indicates the HBA that connects to the
path. The HBA display format is shown below.
• bus-number.HBA-port-number

HBA WWN Displays port WWN information for HBAs. For an iSCSI
interface, n/a is displayed because this information cannot be
obtained.

I/O Count Displays the total number of I/O counts for the path. n/a is
displayed if I/O count information could not be obtained.

I/O Errors Displays the total number of I/O errors for the path.

Type Displays one of the following as the path attribute:

• Owner: The path is subject to owner control, and is
preferentially used for accessing the LU.
• Non-owner: The path goes through a channel adapter,
other than channel adapters under owner control.

SLPR Displays the number (in the range 0-31) of the SLPR to which
the LU belongs. A hyphen is displayed if the HDLM version of
the managed host is prior to 5.6 or if the LU to be displayed is
in a storage system that does not support the storage logical
partition function.

CLPR Displays the number (in the range 0-31) of the CLPR to which
the CHA belongs. A hyphen is displayed if the HDLM version of
the host is prior to 5.6 or if the CHA to be displayed is mounted
on a storage system that does not support the cache logical
partition function.

Path ID Displays the path management PATH_ID. This is allocated each

time a managed host is restarted or a path configuration is
changed.

Path Name Displays the path name that connects the host to the LU. The
items that make up the path name depend on the host OS. The
display format of the path name for each OS is shown below:
• HDLM (in AIX):
HBA-adapter-number.bus-number.target-ID.host-LU-
number
• HDLM (in Linux, Solaris, Windows, VMware):
host-port-number.bus-number.target-ID.host-LU-
number
To modify the system configuration or upgrade the hardware,
browse the path names and check the affected paths. The

A-142 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
displayed items that make up a path name differ depending on
the host OS. For details about the items displayed as the
components of path names in each OS, see the command
reference in the HDLM manual.

Intermittent Error Displays information related to intermittent errors. One of the

following is displayed:
• -: Indicates that the intermittent error monitoring function
is not supported at this time or that the HDLM manager is
stopped.
• Number (0 or greater): Indicates the number of errors that
occurred during intermittent error monitoring.
• *: Indicates that an intermittent error was detected, but
that it is not subject to auto failback.
• n/a: Indicates that the host OS is VMware and no path is
connected.

Multipath LUs tabbed-page

Item Description

Multipath LU Displays the names of the HDevs. Regardless of the number of

paths, the HDev names are grouped by their corresponding
LUs and displayed in that order.
• If the host OS is or Solaris 7, the name (with the slice
number omitted) of the HDev that has an owner path, and
whose path ID is the smallest of all the HDevs
corresponding to the same LU, is displayed.
• If the host OS is Windows, the drive letter is displayed. If
no drive letter has been allocated, a hyphen (-) is
displayed.

Disk Number If the host OS is Windows, the Windows physical device

number is displayed. If the physical device number cannot be
obtained, a hyphen (-) is displayed. If the host OS is not
Windows, n/a is displayed. Note that this item is not displayed
if no Windows hosts exist.

Host Name Displays the name of the host that manages the multipath LU.

Load Balancing Displays one of the following for the set load balancing
algorithm when the load balancing function is being used:
- Round robin
- Extended round robin
- Least I/Os (in operating systems other than VMware)
- Extended least I/Os
- Least blocks (in operating systems other than VMware)
- Extended least blocks
- Most Recently Used (in VMware)
- Fixed (in VMware)
- Unknown algorithm (in VMware)

GUI reference A-143

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
When the host operating system is VMware, Unknown is
displayed for all other algorithms.
In operating systems other than VMware, Disabled is
displayed when the load balancing function is not being used.

Path use times If Round robin, Least I/Os, or Least blocks is applied for
the load balancing algorithm, the maximum number of times
the same path can be used is displayed. If Extended round
robin, Extended least I/Os, or Extended least blocks is
applied for the load balancing algorithm, the maximum number
of times the same path can be used for sequential I/O is
displayed.

Random I/Os Path If Extended round robin, Extended least I/Os, or

use times Extended least blocks is applied for the load balancing
algorithm, the maximum number of times the same path can
be used for random I/O is displayed.

Dynamic I/O path Displays one of the following as the dynamic I/O path control
control setting for the multipath LU. Note that this item is not
displayed when the storage systems connected to the host do
not support dynamic I/O path control.
• Disabled: Dynamic I/O path control is disabled.
• Enabled: Dynamic I/O path control is enabled.

Status Displays icons indicating the statuses of paths connected to the

multipath LU. The display shows the number of paths that have
the status Online, Offline(C), Offline(E), Online(E),
Online(S), or Online(D).

Storage system Displays the name of the storage system that contains the
Name multipath LU. The storage system name is made up of the
following three items, delimited by periods:
• vendor-ID: Vendor name of storage system
UNKNOWN is displayed if the storage information cannot be
recognized.
• model-ID: Device name of storage system
UNKNOWN is displayed if the storage information cannot be
recognized.
• serial-number: Serial number of storage system
A hyphen (-) is displayed if the storage information cannot
be recognized.

LDEV ID Displays the logical device number.

Virtual Information Displays the following storage system information for virtual
storage machines and other devices:
• Storage system Name: Displays the name of the storage
system that contains the multipath LU.
• LDEV ID: Displays the LDEV number.

LDEV Label Displays label information associated with the LDEV. If n/a is
displayed, Global Link Manager failed to obtain LDEV label
information from Device Manager. A blank is displayed if the
LDEV label information could not be acquired.

A-144 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
storage-system-name dialog box (virtual storage machines information)
This dialog box displays detailed storage system information. The items are
explained below.
• Path Status on page A-145
• Paths tabbed-page on page A-145
• Multipath LUs tabbed-page on page A-147

Path Status
Displays the statuses (with icons) of paths. The display shows the number of
paths that have the status Online, Offline(C), Offline(E), Online(E),
Online(S), or Online(D), as well as the total number of paths.

Paths tabbed-page
Item Description

Status This tabbed-page displays an icon indicating the status of a

path.

LDEV ID Displays the logical device number.

LDEV Label Displays label information associated with the LDEV. If n/a is
displayed, Global Link Manager failed to obtain LDEV label
information from Device Manager. A blank is displayed if the
LDEV label information could not be acquired.

Storage system Displays the name of the storage system to which the path is
Name connected. The storage system name is made up of the
following items, delimited by periods:
• vendor-ID: Vendor name of the storage system
• model-ID: Device name of the storage system
• serial-number: Serial number of the storage system

Physical Information Displays the following storage system information for virtual
storage machines and other devices:
• LDEV ID: Displays the LDEV number.
• Storage system Name: Displays the name of the storage
system to which the path connects.
• CHA: When the path is migrated by using a virtual ID, the
number of the CHA port to which the migration destination
path connects is displayed. When a virtual ID is not used,
this item is not displayed.

CHA Displays the CHA port number, which is made up of a number

and an alphabetic character. This number enables identification
of the CHAs mounted on a storage system. To obtain this
number and identify a CHA, use the storage system
management program.

Multipath LU Displays the names of the HDevs connected to the paths.

Regardless of the number of paths, the HDev names are
grouped by their corresponding LUs and displayed in that order.

GUI reference A-145

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
• If the host OS is Solaris 7, the name (with the slice number
omitted) of the HDev that has an owner path, and whose
path ID is the smallest of all the HDevs corresponding to
the same LU, is displayed.
• If the host OS is Windows and HDLM is being used, the
drive letter is displayed. If no drive letter has been
allocated, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Disk Number If the host OS is Windows, the Windows physical device number
is displayed. If the physical device number cannot be obtained,
a hyphen (-) is displayed. If the host OS is not Windows, n/a is
displayed. Note that this item is not displayed if no Windows
hosts exist.

Host Name Displays the name of the host that recognizes the path.

HBA Displays a number that indicates the HBA that connects to the
path. The HBA display format is shown below.
• bus-number.HBA-port-number

HBA WWN Displays port WWN information for HBAs. For an iSCSI
interface, n/a is displayed because this information cannot be
obtained.

I/O Count Displays the total number of I/O counts for the path. n/a is
displayed if I/O count information could not be obtained.

I/O Errors Displays the total number of I/O errors for the path.

Type Displays one of the following as the path attribute:

• Owner: The path is subject to owner control, and is
preferentially used for accessing the LU.
• Non-owner: The path goes through a channel adapter,
other than channel adapters under owner control.

SLPR Displays the number (in the range 0-31) of the SLPR to which
the LU belongs. A hyphen is displayed if the HDLM version of
the managed host is prior to 5.6 or if the LU to be displayed is
in a storage system that does not support the storage logical
partition function.

CLPR Displays the number (in the range 0-31) of the CLPR to which
the CHA belongs. A hyphen is displayed if the HDLM version of
the host is prior to 5.6 or if the CHA to be displayed is mounted
on a storage system that does not support the cache logical
partition function.

Path ID Displays the path management PATH_ID. This is allocated each

time a managed host is restarted or a path configuration is
changed.

Path Name Displays the path name that connects the host to the LU. The
items that make up the path name depend on the host OS. The
display format of the path name for each OS is shown below:
• HDLM (in AIX):
HBA-adapter-number.bus-number.target-ID.host-LU-
number
• HDLM (in Linux, Solaris, Windows, VMware):

A-146 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
host-port-number.bus-number.target-ID.host-LU-
number
To modify the system configuration or upgrade the hardware,
browse the path names and check the affected paths. The
displayed items that make up a path name differ depending on
the host OS. For details about the items displayed as the
components of path names in each OS, see the command
reference in the HDLM manual.

Intermittent Error Displays information related to intermittent errors. One of the

following is displayed:
• -: Indicates that the intermittent error monitoring function
is not supported at this time or that the HDLM manager is
stopped.
• Number (0 or greater): Indicates the number of errors that
occurred during intermittent error monitoring.
• *: Indicates that an intermittent error was detected, but
that it is not subject to auto failback.
• n/a: Indicates that the host OS is VMware and no path is
connected.

Multipath LUs tabbed-page

Item Description

Multipath LU Displays the names of the HDevs. Regardless of the number of

paths, the HDev names are grouped by their corresponding
LUs and displayed in that order.
• If the host OS is or Solaris 7, the name (with the slice
number omitted) of the HDev that has an owner path, and
whose path ID is the smallest of all the HDevs
corresponding to the same LU, is displayed.
• If the host OS is Windows, the drive letter is displayed. If
no drive letter has been allocated, a hyphen (-) is
displayed.

Disk Number If the host OS is Windows, the Windows physical device

number is displayed. If the physical device number cannot be
obtained, a hyphen (-) is displayed. If the host OS is not
Windows, n/a is displayed. Note that this item is not displayed
if no Windows hosts exist.

Host Name Displays the name of the host that manages the multipath LU.

Load Balancing Displays one of the following for the set load balancing
algorithm when the load balancing function is being used:
- Round robin
- Extended round robin
- Least I/Os (in operating systems other than VMware)
- Extended least I/Os
- Least blocks (in operating systems other than VMware)
- Extended least blocks

GUI reference A-147

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
- Most Recently Used (in VMware)
- Fixed (in VMware)
- Unknown algorithm (in VMware)
When the host operating system is VMware, Unknown is
displayed for all other algorithms.
In operating systems other than VMware, Disabled is
displayed when the load balancing function is not being used.

Path use times If Round robin, Least I/Os, or Least blocks is applied for
the load balancing algorithm, the maximum number of times
the same path can be used is displayed. If Extended round
robin, Extended least I/Os, or Extended least blocks is
applied for the load balancing algorithm, the maximum number
of times the same path can be used for sequential I/O is
displayed.

Random I/Os Path If Extended round robin, Extended least I/Os, or

use times Extended least blocks is applied for the load balancing
algorithm, the maximum number of times the same path can
be used for random I/O is displayed.

Status Displays icons indicating the statuses of paths connected to the

multipath LU. The display shows the number of paths that have
the status Online, Offline(C), Offline(E), Online(E),
Online(S), or Online(D).

Storage system Displays the name of the storage system that contains the
Name multipath LU. The storage system name is made up of the
following three items, delimited by periods:
• vendor-ID: Vendor name of storage system
• model-ID: Device name of storage system
• serial-number: Serial number of storage system

LDEV ID Displays the logical device number.

Physical Information Displays the following physical storage system information for
virtual storage machines and other devices:
• Storage system Name: Displays the name of the storage
system that contains the multipath LU.
• LDEV ID: Displays the LDEV number.

LDEV Label Displays label information associated with the LDEV. If n/a is
displayed, Global Link Manager failed to obtain LDEV label
information from Device Manager. A blank is displayed if the
LDEV label information could not be acquired.

Subwindows for managing host groups

Host Groups subwindow

In the Host Groups subwindow, you can perform the following operations:
• Display a list of host groups (View permission).
• Create host groups (View permission).

A-148 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
• Delete host groups (View permission).
• Create a report on the hosts' paths for each host group (View
permission).
You can perform this operation when HDLM version 5.9 or later has been
installed on the host.
• Refresh the information about the hosts in individual host groups (Modify
permission).
All users who have Global Link Manager-operating permissions can manage
host groups. A host group is a group of hosts to which users have been
assigned. By creating host groups, you can manage many hosts efficiently.
The Host Groups subwindow is organized into the following areas:
• Summary on page A-149
• Groups tabbed-page on page A-149
• HDLM or HDLM and others tabbed-page on page A-150
• DMP Windows tabbed-page on page A-158

Summary
Item Description

Number of Hosts Displays the number of hosts registered in the host group.

Path Status Displays the statuses (with icons) of paths connected to hosts
registered in the host groups. If instances of different
multipath management software are running at the same time,
the path status is displayed for each one. The display shows
the number of paths that have the status Online, Offline(C),
Offline(E), Online(E), Online(S), Online(D), Healthy, or
Unhealthy as well as the total number of paths. When the
integer indicating the number of paths in a given status is
clicked, the Show Paths - Host Groups dialog box is displayed.

Groups tabbed-page
Item Description

Name This tabbed-page displays the host group names and the icons
that indicate their status. When a host group name is clicked,
the host-group-name subwindow for that host group is
displayed.

Status Displays icons indicating the statuses of paths registered in the

host group. The display shows the number of paths in each of
the statuses Online, Offline(C), Offline(E), Online(E),
Online(S), Online(D), Healthy, and Unhealthy.

Description Displays a description of the host group.

Create Group button Used to create host groups. Clicking the Create Group button
displays the Create Host Group dialog box.

GUI reference A-149

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

Delete Groups button Used to delete host groups. To delete a host group, select the
check box for the relevant group.

Refresh Groups button Used to refresh the information of hosts registered in host
groups. To refresh host information, select the check boxes for
the relevant host groups.

Create Report button Creates a report on the paths of the hosts registered in the
host groups. This button becomes active when you select a
check box. Clicking the Create Report button displays the
Create Report dialog box. The report creation function can be
used when HDLM version 5.9 or later has been installed on the
host.

HDLM or HDLM and others tabbed-page

This tabbed-page displays information about the configuration of the host on
which HDLM or HP-UX multipath is running.

Item Description

Paths tabbed-page Displays the information of paths that are to be connected to

the hosts registered in all host groups.
• Status: Displays an icon indicating the status of a path.
• LDEV ID:
For HDLM:
Displays the logical device number.
For HP-UX multipath:
The LUN hardware path is displayed.
• LDEV Label:
For HDLM:
Displays label information associated with the LDEV. If
n/a is displayed, Global Link Manager failed to obtain
LDEV label information from Device Manager. A blank
is displayed if the LDEV label information could not be
acquired.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.
• Storage system Name: Displays the name of the storage
system that contains the multipath LU. The storage system
name is made up of the following three items, delimited by
periods:
¢ vendor-ID: Vendor name of storage system
UNKNOWN# is displayed if the storage information
cannot be recognized.
¢ model-ID: Device name of storage system
UNKNOWN# is displayed if the storage information
cannot be recognized.
¢ serial-number: Serial number of storage system

A-150 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Item Description
A hyphen (-) is displayed if the storage information
cannot be recognized.
• Physical Information:
Displays the following physical storage system information
for virtual storage machines and other devices:
¢ LDEV ID:
For HDLM
Displays the ID that is used to identify an LU (an LU
for HDLM), separated by a colon (:) every 2 digits.
For software other than HDLM
Displays n/a.
¢ Storage system name:
For HDLM
Displays the name of the storage system. If no
information exists, n/a is displayed.
For software other than HDLM
Displays n/a.
¢ CHA:
For HDLM
When the path is migrated by using a virtual ID, the
number of the CHA port to which the migration
destination path connects is displayed. When a virtual
ID is not used, this item is not displayed.
For software other than HDLM
Displays n/a.
• CHA:
For HDLM:
Displays the CHA port number, which is made up of a
number and an alphabetic character. This number
enables identification of the CHAs mounted on a
storage system. To obtain this number and identify a
CHA, use the storage system management program.
For HP-UX multipath:
The target address is displayed.
• Multipath LU:
For HDLM:
Displays the names of the HDevs connected to the
paths. Regardless of the number of paths, the HDev
names are grouped by their corresponding LUs and
displayed in that order.
- If the host OS is Solaris 7, the name (with the slice
number omitted) of the HDev that has an owner path,
and whose path ID is the smallest of all the HDevs
corresponding to the same LU, is displayed.
- If the host OS is Windows, the drive letter is
displayed. If no drive letter has been allocated, a
hyphen (-) is displayed.

GUI reference A-151

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
For HP-UX multipath:
The LUN hardware path is displayed.
• Disk Number:
For HDLM:
If the host OS is Windows, the Windows physical
device number is displayed. If the physical device
number cannot be obtained, a hyphen (-) is
displayed. If the host OS is not Windows, n/a is
displayed. Note that this item is not displayed if no
Windows hosts exist.
For HP-UX multipath:
This item is not displayed.
• Host Name: Displays the name of the host that
recognizes the path.
• HBA:
For HDLM:
Displays a number that indicates the HBA that
connects to the path. The bus number and the HBA
port number are delimited by a period.
For HP-UX multipath:
The H/W Path is displayed.
• HBA WWN:
For HDLM:
Displays port WWN information for HBAs. For an iSCSI
interface, n/a is displayed because this information
cannot be obtained.
For HP-UX multipath:
The port name obtained by the scsimgr get_info
command is displayed.
• I/O Count:
For HDLM:
Displays the total number of I/O counts for the path.
n/a is displayed if I/O count information could not be
obtained.
For HP-UX multipath:
The total number of processed I/Os that have been
obtained by the scsimgr get_stat command is
displayed.
• I/O Errors:
For HDLM:
Displays the total number of I/O errors for the path.
For HP-UX multipath:
The number of I/O failures obtained by the scsimgr
get_stat command is displayed.
• Type:
For HDLM:

A-152 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Item Description
Displays one of the following as the path attribute:
- Owner: The path is subject to owner control, and is
preferentially used for accessing the LU.
- Non-owner: The path goes through a channel
adapter, other than channel adapters under owner
control.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.
A hyphen is displayed if the path is connected to storage
systems from other companies.
• SLPR:
For HDLM:
Displays the number (in the range 0-31) of the SLPR
to which the LU belongs. A hyphen is displayed if the
HDLM version of the managed host is prior to 5.6 or if
the LU to be displayed is in a storage system that
does not support the storage logical partition function.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.
• CLPR:
For HDLM:
Displays the number (in the range 0-31) of the CLPR
to which the CHA belongs. A hyphen is displayed if the
HDLM version of the host is prior to 5.6 or if the CHA
to be displayed is mounted on a storage system that
does not support the cache logical partition function.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.
• Path ID:
For HDLM:
Displays the path management PATH_ID. This is
allocated each time a managed host is restarted or a
path configuration is changed.
For HP-UX multipath:
The instance number obtained by the ioscan -kfnNC
lunpath command is displayed.
• Path Name: Displays the path name that connects the
host to the LU. If HP-UX multipath is used, the lunpath
hardware path obtained by the ioscan -m hwpath
command is displayed. The items that make up the path
name depend on the host OS. The display format of the
path name for each OS is shown below:
¢ AIX:
HBA-adapter-number.bus-number.target-ID.host-
LU-number
¢ HP-UX, Linux, Solaris, Windows, VMware:
host-port-number.bus-number.target-ID.host-LU-
number

GUI reference A-153

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
¢ HP-UX (for HP-UX multipath):
host-port-number.target-port-WWN.host-LU-number
To modify the system configuration or upgrade the
hardware, browse the path names and check the affected
paths. If HDLM is in use, the displayed items that make up
a path name differ depending on the host OS. For details
about the items displayed as the components of path
names in each OS, see the command reference in the
HDLM manual.
• Intermittent Error:
For HDLM:
Displays information related to intermittent errors.
One of the following is displayed:
- -: Indicates that the intermittent error monitoring
function is not supported at this time or that the HDLM
manager is stopped.
- Number (0 or greater): Indicates the number of
errors that occurred during intermittent error
monitoring.
- *: Indicates that an intermittent error was detected,
but that it is not subject to auto failback.
- n/a: Indicates that the host OS is VMware and no
path is connected.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.
• Set Online button: Changes the status of paths to
Online. This button becomes active when you select a
check box for a path.
• Set Offline button: Changes the status of paths to
Offline(C). This button becomes active when you select
a check box for a path.
• Set Online(D) button: Changes the status of the paths to
Online(D). This button becomes active when you select a
check box for paths that can be set to Online(D). This
item is displayed when the gui.physical.view properties
in the server.properties file for the Global Link Manager
server are set to true. For details about the
gui.physical.view properties, see the Hitachi Command
Suite Global Link Manager Installation and Configuration
Guide.
• Filter button: Filters information in the Paths list. Clicking
this button displays the Filter - Paths dialog box.
• Filter Off button: Cancels the filtering conditions that
were set in the Filter - Paths dialog box.

Multipath LUs Displays the information of multipath LUs related to the hosts
tabbed-page registered in all host groups.
• Multipath LU:
For HDLM:

A-154 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Item Description
Displays the names of the HDevs. Regardless of the
number of paths, the HDev names are grouped by
their corresponding LUs and displayed in that order.
- If the host OS is Solaris 7, the name (with the slice
number omitted) of the HDev that has an owner path,
and whose path ID is the smallest of all the HDevs
corresponding to the same LU, is displayed.
- If the host OS is Windows, the drive letter is
displayed. If no drive letter has been allocated, a
hyphen (-) is displayed.
For HP-UX multipath:
The LUN hardware path is displayed.
• Disk Number:
For HDLM:
If the host OS is Windows, the Windows physical
device number is displayed. If the physical device
number cannot be obtained, a hyphen (-) is
displayed. If the host OS is not Windows, n/a is
displayed. Note that this item is not displayed if no
Windows hosts exist.
For HP-UX multipath:
This item is not displayed.
• Host Name: Displays the name of the host that manages
the multipath LU.
• Load Balancing: Displays one of the following for the set
load balancing algorithm when the load balancing function
is being used:
For HDLM:
Displays one of the following for the set load balancing
algorithm when the load balancing function is being
used:
- Round robin
- Extended round robin
- Least I/Os (in operating systems other than
VMware)
- Extended least I/Os
- Least blocks (in operating systems other than
VMware)
- Extended least blocks
- Most Recently Used (in VMware)
- Fixed (in VMware)
- Unknown algorithm (in VMware)
When the host operating system is VMware, Unknown
is displayed for all other algorithms.
For HP-UX multipath:
Displays one of the following for the load balancing
policy for the LUN corresponding to the host:
- Round-robin

GUI reference A-155

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
- Least command load
- Cell aware round robin
- Preferred path
- Preferred target port
- Closest path
- Weighted round-robin
- Path lock down
In operating systems other than VMware, Disabled is
displayed when the load balancing function is not
being used.
• Path use times:
If Round robin, Least I/Os, or Least blocks is applied
for the load balancing algorithm, the maximum number of
times the same path can be used is displayed. If
Extended round robin, Extended least I/Os, or
Extended least blocks is applied for the load balancing
algorithm, the maximum number of times the same path
can be used for sequential I/O is displayed.
• Random I/Os Path use times:
If Extended round robin, Extended least I/Os, or
Extended least blocks is applied for the load balancing
algorithm, the maximum number of times the same path
can be used for random I/O is displayed.
• Dynamic I/O path control: Displays one of the following
as the dynamic I/O path control setting for the multipath
LU. Note that this item is not displayed when the storage
systems connected to the host do not support dynamic I/O
path control.
¢ Disabled: Dynamic I/O path control is disabled.
¢ Enabled: Dynamic I/O path control is enabled.
• Status: Displays icons indicating the statuses of paths
connected to the multipath LU. The display shows the
number of paths in each of the statuses Online,
Offline(C), Offline(E), Online(E), Online(S), and
Online(D).
• Storage system Name: Displays the name of the storage
system that contains the LU that corresponds to the
multipath LU. The storage system name is made up of the
following three items, delimited by periods:
¢ vendor-ID: Vendor name of the storage system
UNKNOWN# is displayed if the storage information
cannot be recognized.
¢ model-ID: Device name of the storage system
UNKNOWN# is displayed if the storage information
cannot be recognized.
¢ serial-number: Serial number of the storage system
A hyphen (-) is displayed if the storage information
cannot be recognized.
• LDEV ID:

A-156 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Item Description
For HDLM:
Displays the logical device number.
For HP-UX multipath:
The LUN hardware path is displayed.
• Physical Information:
Displays the following physical storage system information
for virtual storage machines and other devices:
¢ Storage system name:
For HDLM
Displays the name of the storage system. If no
information exists, n/a is displayed.
For software other than HDLM
Displays n/a.
¢ LDEV ID:
For HDLM
Displays the ID that is used to identify an LU (an LU
for HDLM), separated by a colon (:) every 2 digits.
For software other than HDLM
Displays n/a.
• LDEV Label:
For HDLM:
Displays label information associated with the LDEV. If
n/a is displayed, Global Link Manager failed to obtain
LDEV label information from Device Manager. A blank
is displayed if the LDEV label information could not be
acquired.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.
• Configure Multipath LUs button: Click here to set the
following items for a multipath LU: the load balancing
algorithm, the number of times the same path can be
used, or dynamic I/O path control. If the host OS is Solaris
7, the selected algorithm is set for all LUs corresponding to
the selected multipath LUs. This button becomes available
when you select the check box for a multipath LU in the
Multipath LUs page in order to set a load balancing
algorithm, the number of times the same path can be
used, or dynamic I/O path control. When the Configure
Multipath LUs button is clicked, the Configure Multipath
LUs dialog box is displayed. The function for setting the
load balancing algorithm for individual LUs is supported by
hosts that have HDLM version 5.8 or later installed.
Setting the number of times the same path can be used is
supported for each LU on hosts running HDLM version
7.4.1 or later. Dynamic I/O path control is supported for
individual LUs on hosts running HDLM version 7.3 or later.
• Show Paths button: Displays the status of paths
connected to multipath LUs. The Show Paths button
becomes active when you select a check box in the

GUI reference A-157

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
Multipath LUs list. When the Show Paths button is
clicked, the Show Paths - host-group-name dialog box is
displayed.

#
If UNKNOWN is displayed for the storage system name, check the status of
the path connected to the host. Make sure that the path is in the Online
status, and then update the host information.

DMP Windows tabbed-page

This tabbed-page displays information about the configuration of a Windows
host running DMP.

Item Description

Paths tabbed-page Displays the information of paths that are to be connected to

the hosts registered in all host groups.
• Status: Displays an icon indicating the status of a path.
• LUN: Displays the LUN.
• Storage system Name: Displays the name of the storage
system to which the path is connected. The storage
system name is made up of the following three items,
delimited by periods:
¢ vendor-ID: Vendor name of storage system
¢ product-ID: Product ID of the storage system
¢ serial-number: Serial number of storage system
• Target: Displays the target number. The target number is
made up of a number and an alphabetic character. This
number enables identification of the targets mounted on a
storage system. To identify a target, check this number
using the storage system management program.
• Disk: Displays the names of the physical disks connected
to the paths. Regardless of the number of paths, the
physical disk names are grouped by their corresponding
LUs and displayed in that order.
• Host Name: Displays the name of the host that
recognizes the path.
• Port / Channel: Displays a number that indicates the
HBA that connects to the path. This item is displayed in
the Pport-IDCchannel-ID format.
• Operations: Displays the total number of I/O counts for
the path.
¢ Reads: Displays the number of read requests issued
by the OS to the storage system.
¢ Writes: Displays the number of write requests issued
by the OS to the storage system.
• Bytes: Displays the path I/O data size in bytes.
¢ Reads: Displays the amount of data issued by the OS
to the storage system for read requests.

A-158 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
¢ Writes: Displays the amount of data issued by the OS
to the storage system for write requests.
• Primary: Displays the primary path setting. Either of the
following settings is displayed:
¢ YES
¢ NO
¢ -
• Path Name: Displays the path name that connects the
host and the LU. The display format of the path name is
shown below:
Path path-number-port-/-channel-number-target-
number-LUN
To modify the system configuration or upgrade the
hardware, browse the path names and check the affected
paths.

Disk tabbed-page Displays disk information related to the hosts registered in all
host groups.
• Disk: Displays the physical disk name. Regardless of the
number of paths, the physical disk names are grouped by
their corresponding LUs and displayed in that order.
• Host Name: Displays the name of the host managing the
disk.
• LoadBalancePolicy: Displays one of the following
algorithms, which are used to set the load-balancing
policy:
¢ Fail Over Only (Active/Passive)
¢ Round Robin (Active/Active)
¢ Round Robin with Subset
¢ Dynamic Least Queue Depth
¢ Weighted Paths
¢ Least Blocks
¢ Balanced Path
• Status: Displays the statuses of paths connected to the
disk as icons. Displays the amounts of paths with Healthy
and Unhealthy statuses.
• Storage system Name: Displays the name of the storage
system containing the disk. The storage system name is
made up of the following three items, delimited by
periods:
¢ vendor-ID: Vendor name of storage system
¢ product-ID: Product ID of the storage system
¢ serial-number: Serial number of storage system
• LUN: Displays the LUN.
• Show Paths button: Used to display the status of paths
connected to the disk. This button becomes activated
when a check box, for the disk whose path status is
displayed, is selected under Disk. When the Show Paths

GUI reference A-159

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
button is clicked, the Show Paths - host-group-name
dialog box is displayed.

Create Host Group dialog box

The Create Host Group dialog box is used for creating a host group. Enter a
name and a description for the host group in the Host Group Properties.
Items marked with an asterisk (*) must be specified.
The items displayed in the Create Host Group dialog box are explained below.

Item Description

*Name Enter a name for the host group that is to be created. The
length of the name cannot exceed 50 characters. Line feed
characters, tab characters, and the following single-byte
characters cannot be used:
\ / , ; : ? * " < > | .

Description Enter a description for the host group. The length of the
description cannot exceed 255 characters.

Delete Host Groups dialog box

The Delete Host Groups dialog box is used for deleting host groups. In the
Host Group List, check the host groups to be deleted.
The items displayed in the Delete Host Groups dialog box are explained
below.

Item Description

Name Displays the host group name.

Status Displays icons indicating the statuses of paths connected to

hosts registered in the host group. The display shows the
number of paths in each of the statuses Online, Offline(C),
Offline(E), Online(E), Online(S), Online(D), Healthy, and
Unhealthy.

Description Displays a description of the host group.

Refresh Host Groups dialog box

The Refresh Hosts dialog box changes the path configuration of the selected
host group, and refreshes the host group information.
• Change Path Configuration on page A-161
• Reset on page A-161
• Refresh the GAD non-preferred path option on page A-161
• Host List on page A-161

A-160 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Change Path Configuration
This item is displayed when the host group to be refreshed has HDLM (and
the operating system is not VMware). The items are explained below.

Item Description

Change Path If you want to add paths dynamically, select the Adds a Path
Configuration: Dynamically check box. If you want to delete paths
dynamically, select the Deletes a Path Dynamically check
box.

Reset
This item appears if the hosts to be refreshed include a host that supports the
reset I/O count function or a host for which a lost path exists. The items are
explained below.

Item Description

Reset: To reset the I/O count and I/O error count of all paths
connected to the host, select the Reset I/O Count check box.
To reset the number of lost paths, select the Reset the Lost
paths check box.

Refresh the GAD non-preferred path option

This item is displayed when the version of HDLM is 8.0.1 or later and when
global storage virtualization is being used. The item is explained below.

Item Description

Refresh the GAD non- To refresh the GAD non-preferred path option, select the
preferred path option Refresh the GAD non-preferred path option check box.

Host List
Check the information of the host you want to refresh. The items are
explained below.

Item Description

Name Displays the host name.

IP Address Displays the IP address of the host. If the host has both IPv4
and IPv6 addresses, the address that is assigned the higher
priority on the managing host is displayed.

OS Displays the type and version information of the OS installed

on the host. If the host OS is Linux, the kernel version is
displayed.

Multipath Software Displays the name of the multipath management software.

GUI reference A-161

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

Protocol Displays the communication protocol used between the host

and the Global Link Manager server.

Version Displays version information for the multipath management

software. If HP-UX multipath is used, the HP-UX version is
displayed.

Last Update Time Displays the last update time for the host.

Yes, I've confirmed The OK button becomes active when you select a check box.
information above
check box

host-group-name subwindow
In a host-group-name subwindow, you can:
• Display information about the paths, multipath LUs, and HBA ports
related to the hosts for each host group (View permission).
• Edit host groups (View permission).
• Delete host groups (View permission).
• Create host groups or add hosts to a host group (View permission).
• Delete host groups or remove hosts from a host group (View permission).
• Create a report about the paths for each host group (View permission).
You can perform this operation only when HDLM version 5.9 or later has
been installed on the host.
• Update host information for each host group (Modify permission).
• Set the HDLM operating environment for each host group (Modify
permission).
• Change the path status of hosts in a host group (Modify permission).
The host-group-name subwindows are organized into the following areas:
• Application bar area on page A-162
• Summary on page A-163
• Objects tabbed-page on page A-163
• Groups tabbed-page on page A-163
• HDLM or HDLM and others tabbed-page on page A-164
• DMP Windows tabbed-page on page A-174

Application bar area

Item Description

Edit Properties button Enables you to edit a host group. Clicking this button displays
the Edit Properties - host-group-name dialog box.

Delete Group button Deletes the host group.

A-162 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

Refresh Group button Updates information about all the hosts registered in the host
group.

Create Report button Creates a report on the paths of the hosts registered in the
host group. Clicking this button displays the Create Report
dialog box.

Summary
Item Description

Number of Hosts Displays the number of hosts registered in the host group.

Path Status Displays the statuses (with icons) of paths connected to hosts
registered in the host group. If instances of different multipath
management software are running at the same time, the path
status is displayed for each one. The display shows the number
of paths that have the status Online, Offline(C),
Offline(E), Online(E), Online(S), Online(D), Healthy, or
Unhealthy, as well as the total number of paths. When the
integer indicating the number of paths in a given status is
clicked, the Show Paths - host-group-name dialog box is
displayed.

Objects tabbed-page
If nothing has been registered in the selected host group, the Objects
tabbed-page is displayed in a host-group-name subwindow. This tabbed-page
can be used for creating host groups or adding hosts to a host group.

Item Description

Create Group button Used to create host groups to the host group and placing them
in multiple layers. Clicking the Create Group button displays
the Create Host Group dialog box

Add Hosts button Used to add hosts to the host group. Clicking the Add Hosts
button displays the Add Hosts dialog box.

Groups tabbed-page
If host groups have been registered in the selected host group, the Groups
tabbed-page is displayed in a host-group-name subwindow.

Item Description

Name Displays the host group names and icons that indicate the host
group status. Clicking a host group name displays the host-
group-name subwindow for that host group.

Status Displays icons indicating the statuses of paths connected to

hosts registered in the host groups. The display shows the
number of paths in each of the statuses Online, Offline(C),

GUI reference A-163

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
Offline(E), Online(E), Online(S), Online(D), Healthy, and
Unhealthy.

Description Displays a description of the host group.

Create Group button Used to create host groups. Clicking the Create Group button
displays the Create Host Group dialog box.

Delete Groups button Used to delete host groups. This button becomes active when
you select a check box.

Refresh Groups button Used to refresh the host information registered in host groups.
This button becomes active when you select a check box.

Create Report button Creates a report on the paths of the hosts registered in the
host groups. This button becomes active when you select a
check box in the Groups tabbed-page. Clicking the Create
Report button displays the Create Report dialog box. The
report creation function is supported if HDLM version 5.9 or
later has been installed on the host.

HDLM or HDLM and others tabbed-page

This tabbed-page displays information about the configuration of the host on
which HDLM or HP-UX multipath is running.

Item Description

Hosts tabbed-page If hosts have been registered in the selected host group, the
Hosts tabbed-page is displayed in a host-group-name
subwindow.
• Name: Displays the host names and icons that indicate
the host status. Clicking a host name displays the host-
name subwindow for that host.
• Last Update Time: Displays the last update time for the
host information.
• Status: Displays icons indicating the statuses of host
paths. The display shows the number of paths in each of
the statuses Online, Offline(C), Offline(E),
Online(E), Online(S), and Online(D).
• Lost Path: Displays the number of lost paths. If the
number of lost paths is not detected for any host in the
hosts list, this item itself is not displayed.
• IP Address: Displays the IP address of the host. If the
host has both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses, the address that is
assigned the higher priority on the managing host is
displayed.
• OS: Displays the type and version information for the OS
installed on the host. If the OS is Linux, the kernel version
is displayed.
• Multipath Software: Displays HDLM.
• Protocol: Displays the communication protocol used
between the host and the Global Link Manager server.

A-164 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
• Version: Displays version information for the version
information of HDLM. If HP-UX multipath is used, the HP-
UX version is displayed.
• Add Hosts button: Used to add hosts to the host group.
Clicking the Add Hosts button displays the Add Hosts
dialog box.
• Remove Hosts button: Used to remove hosts from the
host group. This button becomes active when you select a
check box in the Hosts list.
• Refresh Hosts button: Used to refresh the information
about hosts. This button becomes active when you select a
check box in the Hosts list.
• Configure Hosts button: Used to configure the HDLM
functions installed on the host. This button becomes active
when you select a check box in the Hosts list. When the
Configure Hosts button is clicked, the Multi Host
Configuration Wizard is displayed.
• Create Report button: Creates a report on the paths of
the hosts registered in the host group. This button
becomes active when you select a check box in the Hosts
tabbed-page. Clicking the Create Report button displays
the Create Report dialog box. The report creation function
is supported if HDLM version 5.9 or later has been installed
on the host.

Paths tabbed-page Displays information about the paths connected to the hosts
registered in a host group.
• Status: Displays an icon indicating the status of a path.
• LDEV ID:
For HDLM:
Displays the logical device number.
For HP-UX multipath:
The LUN hardware path is displayed.
• LDEV Label:
For HDLM:
Displays label information associated with the LDEV. If
n/a is displayed, Global Link Manager failed to obtain
LDEV label information from Device Manager. A blank
is displayed if the LDEV label information could not be
acquired.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.
• Storage system Name: Displays the name of the storage
system that contains the multipath LU. The storage system
name is made up of the following three items, delimited by
periods:
¢ vendor-ID: Vendor name of storage system
UNKNOWN# is displayed if the storage information
cannot be recognized.
¢ model-ID: Device name of storage system

GUI reference A-165

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
UNKNOWN# is displayed if the storage information
cannot be recognized.
¢ serial-number: Serial number of storage system
A hyphen (-) is displayed if the storage information
cannot be recognized.
• Physical Information:
Displays the following physical storage system information
for virtual storage machines and other devices:
¢ LDEV ID:
For HDLM
Displays the ID that is used to identify an LU (an LU
for HDLM), separated by a colon (:) every 2 digits.
For software other than HDLM
Displays n/a.
¢ Storage system name:
For HDLM
Displays the name of the storage system. If no
information exists, n/a is displayed.
For software other than HDLM
Displays n/a.
¢ CHA:
For HDLM
When the path is migrated by using a virtual ID, the
number of the CHA port to which the migration
destination path connects is displayed. When a virtual
ID is not used, this item is not displayed.
For software other than HDLM
Displays n/a.
• CHA:
For HDLM:
Displays the CHA port number, which is made up of a
number and an alphabetic character. This number
enables identification of the CHAs mounted on a
storage system. To obtain this number and identify a
CHA, use the storage system management program.
For HP-UX multipath:
The target address is displayed.
• Multipath LU:
For HDLM:
Displays the names of the HDevs connected to the
paths. Regardless of the number of paths, the HDev
names are grouped by their corresponding LUs and
displayed in that order.
- If the host OS is Solaris 7, the name (with the slice
number omitted) of the HDev that has an owner path,
and whose path ID is the smallest of all the HDevs
corresponding to the same LU, is displayed.

A-166 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Item Description
- If the host OS is Windows, the drive letter is
displayed. If no drive letter has been allocated, a
hyphen (-) is displayed.
For HP-UX multipath:
The LUN hardware path is displayed.
• Disk Number:
For HDLM:
If the host OS is Windows, the Windows physical
device number is displayed. If the physical device
number cannot be obtained, a hyphen (-) is
displayed. If the host OS is not Windows, n/a is
displayed. Note that this item is not displayed if no
Windows hosts exist.
For HP-UX multipath:
This item is not displayed.
• Host Name: Displays the name of the host that
recognizes the path.
• HBA:
For HDLM:
Displays a number that indicates the HBA that
connects to the path. The bus number and the HBA
port number are delimited by a period.
For HP-UX multipath:
The H/W Path is displayed.
• HBA WWN:
For HDLM:
Displays port WWN information for HBAs. For an iSCSI
interface, n/a is displayed because this information
cannot be obtained.
For HP-UX multipath:
The port name obtained by the scsimgr get_info
command is displayed.
• I/O Count:
For HDLM:
Displays the total number of I/O counts for the path.
For HP-UX multipath:
The total number of processed I/Os that have been
obtained by the scsimgr get_stat command is
displayed.
• I/O Errors:
For HDLM:
Displays the total number of I/O errors for the path.
n/a is displayed if I/O count information could not be
obtained.
For HP-UX multipath:
The number of I/O failures obtained by the scsimgr
get_stat command is displayed.

GUI reference A-167

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
• Type:
For HDLM:
Displays one of the following as the path attribute:
- Owner: The path is subject to owner control, and is
preferentially used for accessing the LU.
- Non-owner: The path goes through a channel
adapter, other than channel adapters under owner
control.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.
A hyphen is displayed if the path is connected to storage
systems from other companies.
• SLPR:
For HDLM:
Displays the number (in the range 0-31) of the SLPR
to which the LU belongs. A hyphen is displayed if the
HDLM version of the managed host is prior to 5.6 or if
the LU to be displayed is in a storage system that
does not support the storage logical partition function.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.
• CLPR:
For HDLM:
Displays the number (in the range 0-31) of the CLPR
to which the CHA belongs. A hyphen is displayed if the
HDLM version of the host is prior to 5.6 or if the CHA
to be displayed is mounted on a storage system that
does not support the cache logical partition function.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.
• Path ID:
For HDLM:
Displays the path management PATH_ID. This is
allocated each time a managed host is restarted or a
path configuration is changed.
For HP-UX multipath:
The instance number obtained by the ioscan -kfnNC
lunpath command is displayed.
• Path Name: Displays the path name that connects the
host to the LU. If HP-UX multipath is used, the lunpath
hardware path obtained by the ioscan -m hwpath
command is displayed. The items that make up the path
name depend on the host OS. The display format of the
path name for each OS is shown below:
¢ AIX:
HBA-adapter-number.bus-number.target-ID.host-
LU-number
¢ HP-UX, Linux, Solaris, Windows, VMware:

A-168 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
host-port-number.bus-number.target-ID.host-LU-
number
¢ HP-UX (for HP-UX multipath):
host-port-number.target-port-WWN.host-LU-number
To modify the system configuration or upgrade the
hardware, browse the path names and check the affected
paths. If HDLM is in use, the displayed items that make up
a path name differ depending on the host OS. For details
about the items displayed as the components of path
names in each OS, see the command reference in the
HDLM manual.
• Intermittent Error:
For HDLM:
Displays information related to intermittent errors.
One of the following is displayed:
- -: Indicates that the intermittent error monitoring
function is not supported at this time or that the HDLM
manager is stopped.
- Number (0 or greater): Indicates the number of
errors that occurred during intermittent error
monitoring.
- *: Indicates that an intermittent error was detected,
but that it is not subject to auto failback.
- n/a: Indicates that the host OS is VMware and no
path is connected.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.
• Set Online button: Changes the status of paths to
Online. This button becomes active when you select a
check box for a path.
• Set Offline button: Changes the status of paths to
Offline(C). This button becomes active when you select
a check box for a path.
• Set Online(D) button: Changes the status of the paths to
Online(D). This button becomes active when you select a
check box for paths that can be set to Online(D). This
item is displayed when the gui.physical.view properties
in the server.properties file for the Global Link Manager
server are set to true. For details about the
gui.physical.view properties, see the Hitachi Command
Suite Global Link Manager Installation and Configuration
Guide.
• Filter button: Filters information in the Paths list. Clicking
this button displays the Filter - Paths dialog box.
• Filter Off button: Cancels the filtering conditions that
were set in the Filter - Paths dialog box.

Multipath LUs tabbed- Displays multipath LU information related to paths connected

page to the hosts registered in a host group.
• Multipath LU:

GUI reference A-169

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
For HDLM:
Displays the names of the HDevs. Regardless of the
number of paths, the HDev names are grouped by
their corresponding LUs and displayed in that order.
- If the host OS is Solaris 7, the name (with the slice
number omitted) of the HDev that has an owner path,
and whose path ID is the smallest of all the HDevs
corresponding to the same LU, is displayed.
- If the host OS is Windows, the drive letter is
displayed. If no drive letter has been allocated, a
hyphen (-) is displayed.
For HP-UX multipath:
The LUN hardware path is displayed.
• Disk Number:
For HDLM:
If the host OS is Windows, the Windows physical
device number is displayed. If the physical device
number cannot be obtained, a hyphen (-) is
displayed. If the host OS is not Windows, n/a is
displayed. Note that this item is not displayed if no
Windows hosts exist.
For HP-UX multipath:
This item is not displayed.
• Host Name: Displays the name of the host that
recognizes the multipath LU.
• Load Balancing:
For HDLM:
Displays one of the following for the set load balancing
algorithm when the load balancing function is being
used:
- Round robin
- Extended round robin
- Least I/Os (in operating systems other than
VMware)
- Extended least I/Os
- Least blocks (in operating systems other than
VMware)
- Extended least blocks
- Most Recently Used (in VMware)
- Fixed (in VMware)
- Unknown algorithm (in VMware)
When the host operating system is VMware, Unknown
is displayed for all other algorithms.
For HP-UX multipath:
Displays one of the following for the load balancing
policy for the LUN corresponding to the host:
- Round-robin

A-170 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Item Description
- Least command load
- Cell aware round robin
- Preferred path
- Preferred target port
- Closest path
- Weighted round-robin
- Path lock down
In operating systems other than VMware, Disabled is
displayed when the load balancing function is not being
used.
• Path use times:
If Round robin, Least I/Os, or Least blocks is applied
for the load balancing algorithm, the maximum number of
times the same path can be used is displayed. If
Extended round robin, Extended least I/Os, or
Extended least blocks is applied for the load balancing
algorithm, the maximum number of times the same path
can be used for sequential I/O is displayed.
• Random I/Os Path use times:
If Extended round robin, Extended least I/Os, or
Extended least blocks is applied for the load balancing
algorithm, the maximum number of times the same path
can be used for random I/O is displayed.
• Dynamic I/O path control: Displays one of the following
as the dynamic I/O path control setting for the multipath
LU. Note that this item is not displayed when the storage
systems connected to the host do not support dynamic I/O
path control.
¢ Disabled: Dynamic I/O path control is disabled.
¢ Enabled: Dynamic I/O path control is enabled.
• Status: Displays icons indicating the statuses of paths
connected to the multipath LU. The display shows the
number of paths in each of the statuses Online,
Offline(C), Offline(E), Online(E), Online(S), and
Online(D).
• Storage system Name: Displays the name of the storage
system that contains the LU that corresponds to the
multipath LU. The storage system name is made up of the
following three items, delimited by periods:
¢ vendor-ID: Vendor name of the storage system
UNKNOWN# is displayed if the storage information
cannot be recognized.
¢ model-ID: Device name of the storage system
UNKNOWN# is displayed if the storage information
cannot be recognized.
¢ serial-number: Serial number of the storage system
A hyphen (-) is displayed if the storage information
cannot be recognized.
• LDEV ID:

GUI reference A-171

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
For HDLM:
Displays the logical device number.
For HP-UX multipath:
The LUN hardware path is displayed.
• Physical Information:
Displays the following physical storage system information
for virtual storage machines and other devices:
¢ Storage system name:
For HDLM
Displays the name of the storage system. If no
information exists, n/a is displayed.
For software other than HDLM
Displays n/a.
¢ LDEV ID:
For HDLM
Displays the ID that is used to identify an LU (an LU
for HDLM), separated by a colon (:) every 2 digits.
For software other than HDLM
Displays n/a.
• LDEV Label:
For HDLM:
Displays label information associated with the LDEV. If
n/a is displayed, Global Link Manager failed to obtain
LDEV label information from Device Manager. A blank
is displayed if the LDEV label information could not be
acquired.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.
• Configure Multipath LUs button: Click here to set the
following items for a multipath LU: the load balancing
algorithm, the number of times the same path can be
used, or dynamic I/O path control. If the host OS is Solaris
7, the selected algorithm is set for all LUs corresponding to
the selected multipath LUs. This button becomes available
when you select the check box for a multipath LU in the
Multipath LUs page in order to set the load balancing
algorithm, the number of times the same path can be
used, or dynamic I/O path control. When the Configure
Multipath LUs button is clicked, the Configure Multipath
LUs dialog box is displayed. The function for setting the
load balancing algorithm for individual LUs is supported by
hosts that have HDLM version 5.8 or later installed.
Setting the number of times the same path can be used is
supported for each LU on hosts running HDLM version
7.4.1 or later. Dynamic I/O path control is supported for
individual LUs on hosts running HDLM version 7.3 or later.
• Show Paths button: Displays the status of paths
connected to multipath LUs. The Show Paths button
becomes active when you select a check box in the

A-172 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
Multipath LUs list. When the Show Paths button is
clicked, the Show Paths - host-group-name dialog box is
displayed.

Configuration tabbed- Displays the HDLM or HP-UX multipath operating environment

page settings. Depending on the HDLM version or the OS, support
status of the HDLM functions differs. The Configuration
tabbed-page only displays the functions supported by HDLM or
HP-UX multipath that are subject to display.
UNKNOWN is displayed if Global Link Manager is unable to
recognize HDLM or HP-UX multipath information.
• Name: Displays the host name.
• Version: Displays version information of HDLM. If HP-UX
multipath is used, the HP-UX version is displayed.
• Load Balancing:
For HDLM:
Displays one of the following for the set load balancing
algorithm when the load balancing function is being
used:
- Round robin
- Extended round robin
- Least I/Os (in operating systems other than
VMware)
- Extended least I/Os
- Least blocks (in operating systems other than
VMware)
- Extended least blocks
- Most Recently Used (in VMware)
- Fixed (in VMware)
- Unknown algorithm (in VMware)
When the host operating system is VMware, Unknown
is displayed for all other algorithms.
If a different load balancing policy is used for each
LUN, an asterisk (*) is appended to indicate that other
load balancing policies are also in use.
For HP-UX multipath:
Displays one of the following for the load balancing
policy for the LUN corresponding to the host:
- Round-robin
- Least command load
- Cell aware round robin
- Preferred path
- Preferred target port
- Closest path
- Weighted round-robin
- Path lock down
If a different load balancing policy is used for each
LUN, the most-used load balancing policy is displayed.

GUI reference A-173

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
To indicate that other load balancing policies are also
in use, an asterisk (*) is also appended.
In operating systems other than VMware, Disabled is
displayed when the load balancing function is not being
used.
• Path Health Checking: If the path health checking
function is enabled, the execution interval for path health
checking is displayed in minutes. If the path health
checking function is not being used, Disabled is displayed.
n/a is displayed in the following configurations:
- HP-UX multipath
- HDLM on a host running VMware
• Auto Failback: If the auto failback function is enabled,
the interval for path status checking is displayed in
minutes. If the auto failback function is not being used,
Disabled is displayed.
n/a is displayed in the following configurations:
- HP-UX multipath
- HDLM on a host running VMware
• Intermittent Error Monitor: Displays whether the
intermittent-error monitoring function is used. If HP-UX
multipath is used or the host OS is VMware and no path is
connected, n/a is displayed.

#
If UNKNOWN is displayed for the storage system name, check the status of
the path connected to the host. Make sure that the path is in the Online
status, and then update the host information.

DMP Windows tabbed-page

This tabbed-page displays information about the configuration of a Windows
host running DMP.

Item Description

Hosts tabbed-page If hosts have been registered in the selected host group, the
Hosts tabbed-page is displayed in a host-group-name
subwindow.
• Name: Displays the host names and icons that indicate
the host status. Clicking a host name displays the host-
name subwindow for that host.
• Last Update Time: Displays the last update time for the
host information.
• Status: Displays icons indicating the statuses of host
paths. The display shows the number of paths in each of
the statuses Healthy, and Unhealthy.
• Lost Path: Displays the number of lost paths. If the
number of lost paths is not detected for any host in the
hosts list, this item itself is not displayed.

A-174 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
• IP Address: Displays the IP address of the host. If the
host has both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses, the address that is
assigned the higher priority on the managing host is
displayed.
• OS: Displays the type and version information for the OS
installed on the host.
• Multipath Software: Displays DMP.
• Protocol: Displays the communication protocol used
between the host and the Global Link Manager server.
• Version: Displays version information of DMP.
• Add Hosts button: Used to add hosts to the host group.
Clicking the Add Hosts button displays the Add Hosts
dialog box.
• Remove Hosts button: Used to remove hosts from the
host group. This button becomes active when you select a
check box in the Hosts list.
• Refresh Hosts button: Used to refresh the information
about hosts. This button becomes active when you select a
check box in the Hosts list.

Paths tabbed-page Displays information about the paths connected to the hosts
registered in a host group.
• Status: Displays an icon indicating the status of a path.
• LUN: Displays the LUN.
• Storage system Name: Displays the name of the storage
system to which the path is connected. The storage
system name is made up of the following three items,
delimited by periods:
¢ vendor-ID: Vendor name of storage system
¢ product-ID: Product ID of the storage system
¢ serial-number: Serial number of storage system
• Target: Displays the target number. The target number is
made up of a number and an alphabetic character. This
number enables identification of the targets mounted on a
storage system. To identify a target, check this number
using the storage system management program.
• Disk: Displays the names of the physical disks connected
to the paths. Regardless of the number of paths, the
physical disk names are grouped by their corresponding
LUs and displayed in that order.
• Host Name: Displays the name of the host that
recognizes the path.
• Port / Channel: Displays a number that indicates the
HBA that connects to the path. This item is displayed in
the Pport-IDCchannel-ID format.
• Operations: Displays the total number of I/O counts for
the path.
¢ Reads: Displays the number of read requests issued
by the OS to the storage system.

GUI reference A-175

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
¢ Writes: Displays the number of write requests issued
by the OS to the storage system.
• Bytes: Displays the path I/O data size in bytes.
¢ Reads: Displays the amount of data issued by the OS
to the storage system for read requests.
¢ Writes: Displays the amount of data issued by the OS
to the storage system for write requests.
• Primary: Displays the primary path setting. One of the
following settings is displayed:
¢ YES
¢ NO
¢ -
• Path Name: Displays the path name that connects the
host and the LU. The display format of the path name is
shown below:
Path path-number-port-/-channel-number-target-
number-LUN
To modify the system configuration or upgrade the
hardware, browse the path names and check the affected
paths.

Disk tabbed-page Displays disk information related to the hosts registered in all
host groups.
• Disk: Displays the physical disk name. Regardless of the
number of paths, the physical disk names are grouped by
their corresponding LUs and displayed in that order.
• Host Name: Displays the name of the host managing the
disk.
• LoadBalancePolicy: Displays one of the following
algorithms, which are used to set the load-balancing
policy:
¢ Fail Over Only (Active/Passive)
¢ Round Robin (Active/Active)
¢ Round Robin with Subset
¢ Dynamic Least Queue Depth
¢ Weighted Paths
¢ Least Blocks
¢ Balanced Path
• Status: Displays the statuses of paths connected to the
disk as icons. Displays the number of paths with Healthy
and Unhealthy statuses.
• Storage system Name: Displays the name of the storage
system containing the disk. The storage system name is
made up of the following three items, delimited by
periods:
¢ vendor-ID: Vendor name of the storage system
¢ product-ID: Product ID of the storage system
¢ serial-number: Serial number of the storage system

A-176 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
• LUN: Displays the LUN.
• Show Paths button: Used to display the status of paths
connected to the disk. This button becomes activated
when a check box, for the disk whose path status is
displayed, is selected under Disk. When the Show Paths
button is clicked, the Show Paths - host-group-name
dialog box is displayed.

Configuration tabbed- Displays the DMP operating environment settings. The

page Configuration tabbed-page only displays that functions that
are supported by DMP.
UNKNOWN is displayed for a value that cannot be recognized
by Global Link Manager.
• Name: Displays the host name.
• Version: Displays version information of DMP.
• LoadBalancePolicy: Displays one of the following
algorithms, which are used to set the load-balancing
policy:
¢ Fail Over Only (Active/Passive)
¢ Round Robin (Active/Active)
¢ Round Robin with Subset
¢ Dynamic Least Queue Depth
¢ Weighted Paths
¢ Least Blocks
¢ Balanced Path
• TestPathRetryCount: Displays the test count that is used
to determine if a path has recovered from an error.
• KernelSleepTime: Displays the recovery time interval (in
milliseconds) for a path where an error has occurred.
• FailOverRetryCount: Displays the failover retry count.

Edit Properties - host-group-name dialog box

The Edit Properties - host-group-name dialog box is used for editing a host
group. To edit host groups, you need to edit the properties of host groups.
Enter a name and a description in Host Group for the host group. Items
marked with an asterisk (*) must be specified.
The items displayed in the Edit Properties - host-group-name dialog box are
explained below.

Item Description

*Name Enter a name for the host group. The name cannot exceed 50
characters. Line feed characters, tab characters, and the
following single-byte characters cannot be used:
\ / , ; : ? * " < > | .

Description Enter a new description for the host group. The description
cannot exceed 255 characters.

GUI reference A-177

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Add Hosts dialog box (adding to a host group)
The Add Hosts dialog box is used for adding hosts to a host group. The Host
List displays information about the hosts that are allocated to the logged-in
user but not registered in the selected host group. The OK button becomes
active when you select a check box.
The items displayed in the Add Hosts dialog box are explained below.

Item Description

Name Displays the host name.

IP Address Displays the IP address of the host. If the host has both IPv4
and IPv6 addresses, the address that is assigned the higher
priority on the managing host is displayed.

OS Displays the type and version information of the OS installed

on the host. If the host OS is Linux, the kernel version is
displayed.

Multipath Software Displays the name of the multipath management software.

Version Displays version information for the multipath management

software. If HP-UX multipath is used, the HP-UX version is
displayed.

Remove Hosts dialog box (removing from a host group)

The Remove Hosts dialog box is used for removing hosts from a host group.
In the Host List, check the host to be removed.
The items displayed in the Remove Hosts dialog box are explained below.

Item Description

Name Displays the host name.

IP Address Displays the IP address of the host. If the host has both IPv4
and IPv6 addresses, the address that is assigned the higher
priority on the managing host is displayed.

OS Displays the type and version information of the OS installed

on the host. If the host OS is Linux, the kernel version is
displayed.

Multipath Software Displays the name of the multipath management software.

Version Displays version information for the multipath management

software. If HP-UX multipath is used, the HP-UX version is
displayed.

Subwindows for managing users

Users and Permissions subwindow

The Users and Permissions subwindow displays items for managing users.
These include items for setting up profiles and permissions of users for all

A-178 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Hitachi Command Suite products. These operations can be performed only by
users who have the Admin (user management) permission.
The items displayed in the Users and Permissions subwindow are explained
below.

Item Description

User Management Displays items for managing users. Select one of the following
Items options according to the details to be set:
• Users: Select this option to view or set up a profile and
permissions of a user. Clicking Users opens the Users
subwindow.
• Permissions: Select this option to view the number of
users who have been given permissions and a breakdown
of their permissions by application. Clicking Permissions
opens the Permissions subwindow.

Users subwindow
The Users subwindow displays information about users who have permissions
to operate the Hitachi Command Suite products. In the Users subwindow, you
can:
• Display information about all users.
• Add a Hitachi Command Suite product user.
• Lock user accounts.
• Unlock user accounts.
• Delete a Hitachi Command Suite product user.
These operations can be performed only by users who have the Admin (user
management) permission. The items displayed in the User List of the Users
subwindow are explained below. In the User List, the built-in account (user
ID: System) is registered by default. The built-in account cannot be added
nor deleted.

Item Description

User ID Displays the user ID. Clicking a user ID opens the user-ID
subwindow.

Status Displays the lock status of the user account. One of the
following statuses is displayed:
• Locked: The user account is locked. This user cannot log
in to a Hitachi Command Suite product.
• Active: The user account is not locked. This user can log
in to a Hitachi Command Suite product.

Authentication One of the following is displayed as the method of the user

account authentication:
• Internal: Indicates that a Hitachi Command Suite product
has authenticated the user account.
• Kerberos: Indicates that a Kerberos server has
authenticated the user account.

GUI reference A-179

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
• LDAP: Indicates that an LDAP directory server has
authenticated the user account.
• RADIUS: Indicates that a RADIUS server has
authenticated the user account.
This item is displayed when the user account is configured to
be authenticated by an external authentication server in the
management server property file (the exauth.properties
file).

Full Name Displays the full name of the user.

Description Displays a description of the user.

Add User button Click this button to add a new user. Clicking the Add User
button opens the Add User dialog box.

Lock Users button Locks the user account and prohibits it from logging in to a
Hitachi Command Suite product. This button becomes active
when you select a check box. The Built-in account cannot be
locked.

Unlock Users button Unlocks the user account and permits it to log in to Hitachi
Command Suite products. This button becomes active when
you select a check box.

Change Auth button Changes the method of user account authentication for users
whose check box is selected. Clicking this button opens the
Change Authentication dialog box.
This item is displayed when the user account is configured to
be authenticated by an external authentication server in the
management server property file (the exauth.properties
file).

Delete Users button Click this button to delete a Hitachi Command Suite product
user. This button becomes active when you select a check box.

Tip: The user profile may not be updated immediately when it has been
edited. Click Refresh Tree button to update the user information.

Add User dialog box

The Add User dialog box is used for adding a Hitachi Command Suite product
user. In the User Profile, enter a user profile. Items marked with an asterisk
(*) must be specified.
The items displayed in the Add User dialog box are explained below.

Item Description

*User ID Enter a character string for the user ID by using no more than
256 characters. The following characters are allowed:
0-9 A-Z a-z # + - . @ _
The space character is not allowed. Alphabetic characters are
not case sensitive.
Note

A-180 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
¢ A Hitachi Command Suite product with a version
earlier than 5.5 supports a user ID that is from 4 to 25
characters in length. In an environment in which a
Hitachi Command Suite product with version 5.5 or
later coexists with a HiCommand product with a
version earlier than 5.5, specify a user ID that is from
4 to 25 characters in length.
¢ When performing external authentication by using
more than one domain or realm, include the domain
name and the realm name in the user ID at
registration.
Example: user-name@domain-name-or-realm-name
Enter the user ID in the above format at login also.

*Password Enter a password to be used for logging in by using no more

than 256 characters. The following characters are allowed:
0-9 A-Z a-z ! # $ % & ' ( ) * + - . = @ \ ^ _ |
The space character is not allowed. Alphabetic characters are
case sensitive.
Note
¢ A Hitachi Command Suite product with a version
earlier than 5.5 supports a password that is from 4 to
25 characters in length. In an environment in which a
Hitachi Command Suite product with version 5.5 or
later coexists with a Hitachi Storage Command Suite
product with a version earlier than 5.5, specify a
password that is from 4 to 25 characters in length.
¢ If a minimum password length or a combination of
character types required for a password have been set
as conditions, a password that does not satisfy the
conditions cannot be specified. Check the conditions in
the Password subwindow.

*Verify Password Re-enter the character string that you entered in *Password.

Full Name Enter a character string (maximum of 80 characters) for a full

name. You cannot use two or more consecutive dollar signs
(for example, $$ or $$$). The full name is displayed in the
global tasks bar area when the user logs on.

E-mail Enter a character string for an email address.

Description Enter a character string (maximum of 80 characters) to

describe the user.

user-ID subwindow
In the user-ID subwindow, you can:
• Display a user's profile and permissions.
• Edit a user profile.
• Change a user password.
• Change a user's permissions.

GUI reference A-181

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 • Delete a Hitachi Command Suite product user.
These operations can be performed only by users who have the Admin (user
management) permission.
The user-ID subwindow is organized into the following areas:
• Application bar area on page A-182
• User Profile on page A-182
• Granted Permission on page A-183

Application bar area

Item Description

Edit Profile button Enables you to edit the user's profile. Clicking this button
displays the Edit Profile - user-ID dialog box.

Change Password Enables you to change the user's password. This button is not
button displayed when a user is authenticated by an external
authentication server. Clicking this button displays the Change
Password - user-ID dialog box.

Change Permission Enables you to change the user's permission. Clicking this
button button displays the Change Permission -user-ID dialog box.

Delete Users button Deletes the user.

User Profile
Displays the user settings.

Item Description

User ID Displays the user ID.

Status Displays the lock status of the user account. One of the
following statuses is displayed:
• Locked: The user account is locked. This user cannot log
in to a Hitachi Command Suite product.
• Active: The user account is not locked. This user can log
in to a Hitachi Command Suite product.

Authentication One of the following is displayed as the method of the user

account authentication:
• Internal: Indicates that a Hitachi Command Suite product
has authenticated the user account.
• Kerberos: Indicates that a Kerberos server has
authenticated the user account.
• LDAP: Indicates that an LDAP directory server has
authenticated the user account.
• RADIUS: Indicates that a RADIUS server has
authenticated the user account.
This item is displayed when the user account is configured to
be authenticated by an external authentication server in the

A-182 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
management server property file (the exauth.properties
file).

Full Name Displays the full name of the user.

E-mail Displays the email address of the user.

Description Displays a description of the user.

Granted Permission
The permissions that a user has for each of the Hitachi Command Suite
products are displayed. The following permissions are available for Global
Link Manager: Admin permission, Modify permission, and View permission.

Item Description

Application User Management and a list of Hitachi Command Suite product

names are displayed. A check mark is displayed in User
Management if the user has the Admin (user management)
permission. A user who has this permission can manage users
of all Hitachi Command Suite products.

Admin A check mark is displayed if the user has the Admin permission
for a Hitachi Command Suite product. A user who has this
permission can add and delete resources for each Hitachi
Command Suite product, and allocate resources to users (or
manage resource groups). Global Link Manager manages hosts
as resources if multipath management software is installed on
the hosts.

Modify A check mark is displayed if the user has the Modify

permission. A user who has the Modify permission can modify
settings for, and update information of, allocated resources.
Global Link Manager can simultaneously modify the status of
multiple paths. When HDLM is used for the multipath
management software, Global Link Manager can set up an
HDLM operating environment.

Execute A check mark is displayed if the user has the Execute

permission. A user who has the Execute permission can
execute tasks, such as batch processing, defined by users who
have the Modify permission.

View A check mark is displayed if the user has the View permission.
A user who has the View permission can view the allocated
resources.

Peer A check mark is displayed if the user has the Peer permission.
The Peer permission is used exclusively by a Device Manager
agent to access the Device Manager server.

Edit Profile - user-ID dialog box (editing a user profile)

The Edit Profile - user-ID dialog box is used for editing a user profile. Enter a
new user profile in User Profile. The set information is displayed by default.

GUI reference A-183

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 The items displayed in the Edit Profile - user-ID dialog box are explained
below.

Item Description

User ID Displays the user ID. The user ID cannot be edited.

Full Name Enter a character string (maximum of 80 characters) for a full

name. You cannot use two or more consecutive dollar signs
(for example, $$ or $$$). The full name is displayed in the
global tasks bar area when the user logs on.

E-mail Enter a character string for an email address.

Description Enter a character string (maximum of 80 characters) to

describe the user.

Change Password - user-ID dialog box (changing a user password)

The Change Password - user-ID dialog box is used for changing a user
password. Enter a new user password in Entering Password. Items marked
with an asterisk (*) must be specified.
The items displayed in the Change Password - user-ID dialog box are
explained below.

Item Description

*New Password Enter a new password by using no more than 256 characters.
The following characters are allowed:
0-9 A-Z a-z ! # $ % & ' ( ) * + - . = @ \ ^ _ |
The space character is not allowed. Alphabetic characters are
case sensitive.
Note
¢ A Hitachi Command Suite product with a version
earlier than 5.5 supports a password that is from 4 to
25 characters in length. In an environment in which a
HiCommand product with version 5.5 or later coexists
with a Hitachi Command Suite product with a version
earlier than 5.5, specify a password that is from 4 to
25 characters in length.
¢ If a minimum password length or a combination of
character types required for a password have been set
as conditions, a password that does not satisfy the
conditions cannot be specified. Check the conditions in
the Password subwindow.
¢ When the Global Link Manager server is running in a
cluster environment, if you change the password for
the built-in account (user ID: System), specify the
same settings on all nodes that make up the cluster.

*Verify Password Re-enter the character string that you entered in *New
Password.

A-184 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Change Permission - user-ID dialog box
The Change Permission - user-ID dialog box is used for changing permissions
of a user. The Granted Permission displays check boxes for permissions
provided by each Hitachi Command Suite product. To add a permission,
select the check box for the permission to be added. To delete a permission,
clear the check box for the permission to be deleted.
The items displayed in the Change Permission - user-ID dialog box are
explained below.

Item Description

Application All Applications, User Management, and a list of Hitachi

Command Suite product names are displayed. To add
permissions for all Hitachi Command Suite products to the
user, select the check box for All Applications. To add the
Admin (user management) permission to the user, select the
check box for User Management.

Admin Select this check box to add the Admin permission for a Hitachi
Command Suite product to the user. When the Admin
permission is added, both the Modify and the View permission
are also automatically added. A user who has this permission
can add and delete resources for each Hitachi Command Suite
product, and allocate resources to users (or manage resource
groups). Global Link Manager manages hosts as resources if
multipath management software is installed on the hosts.

Modify Select this check box to add the Modify permission to the user.
When the Modify permission is added, the View permission is
also automatically added. A user who has the Modify
permission can modify settings for, and update information of,
allocated resources. Global Link Manager can simultaneously
modify the status of multiple paths. When HDLM is used for the
multipath management software, Global Link Manager can set
up an HDLM operating environment.

Execute Select this check box to add the Execute permission to the
user. A user who has the Execute permission can execute
tasks, such as batch processing, defined by users who have
the Modify permission, but cannot define, edit, or delete tasks.

View Select this check box to add the View permission to the user. A
user who has the View permission can view the allocated
resources.

Peer Select this check box to add the Peer permission to the user.
The Peer permission can be added only to Device Manager. The
Peer permission is used exclusively by a Device Manager agent
to access the Device Manager server.

Permissions subwindow
The Permissions subwindow displays the number of users who have
permissions for the Hitachi Command Suite products.
The Permissions subwindow is organized into the following areas:
• Registered Items on page A-186

GUI reference A-185

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 • Application List on page A-186

Registered Items
Item Description

Total Registered Displays the total number of registered Hitachi Command Suite
Applications products that mutually manage users.

Total Registered Displays the total number of users registered for the Hitachi
Users Command Suite products.

Application List
Item Description

Application User Management and a list of Hitachi Command Suite product

names are displayed. User Management indicates the Admin
(user management) permissions for managing users. Users
who have this permission can manage users for all Hitachi
Command Suite products.
Clicking an individual item opens the application-name
subwindow.

Host Name/IP Displays the host name or IP address of the server on which
Address the Hitachi Command Suite product is installed. If the host has
both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses, the address that is assigned the
higher priority on the managing host is displayed.

Number of Displays the number of users who have permission to operate

Authorized User each Hitachi Command Suite product.

application-name subwindow
The application-name subwindow displays information about the users
permitted to log in to each of the Hitachi Command Suite products.
The items displayed in Authorized User List in the application-name
subwindow are explained below.

Item Description

User ID Displays the user ID. Clicking the user ID displays the user-ID
subwindow.

Admin A check mark is displayed if the user has the Admin permission
for a Hitachi Command Suite product. A user who has this
permission can add and delete resources for each Hitachi
Command Suite product, and allocate resources to users (or
manage resource groups). Global Link Manager manages hosts
as resources if multipath management software is installed on
the hosts.

Modify A check mark is displayed if the user has the Modify

permission. A user who has the Modify permission can modify
settings for, and update information of, allocated resources.
Global Link Manager can simultaneously modify the status of

A-186 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
multiple paths. When HDLM is used for the multipath
management software, Global Link Manager can set up an
HDLM operating environment.

Execute A check mark is displayed if the user has the Execute

permission. A user who has the Execute permission can
execute tasks, such as batch processing, defined by users who
have the Modify permission, but cannot define, edit, or delete
tasks.

View A check mark is displayed if the user has the View permission.
A user who has the View permission can view the allocated
resources.

Peer A check mark is displayed if the user has the Peer permission.
The Peer permission is used exclusively by a Device Manager
agent to access the Device Manager server.

Subwindows for managing resource groups

Resource Groups subwindow

In the Resource Groups subwindow, you can:
• Display information for all resource groups.
• Create a resource group.
• Delete a resource group.
Only users who have the Admin (Global Link Manager management)
permission or whose account is the built-in account (user ID: System) are
allowed to manage resource groups. You can control access to Global Link
Manager resources by creating resource groups.
The items displayed in the Resource Groups list in the Resource Groups
subwindow are explained below.

Item Description

Name Displays the names of all resource groups. Clicking a resource

group name opens the resource-group-name subwindow. The
All Resources group is created by default for managing all
resources. All hosts registered for resources, the built-in
account (user ID: System), and users who have the Admin
(Global Link Manager management) permission are registered
in the All Resources group.

Number of Hosts Displays the number of hosts registered for each resource
group.

Number of Users Displays the number of users registered for each resource
group.

Description Displays a description for each resource group.

GUI reference A-187

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

Create Group button Click this button to create a resource group. Clicking the
Create Group button opens the Create Resource Group dialog
box. A resource group with the same name as the All
Resources group cannot be created.

Delete Groups button Click this button to delete a resource group. This button
becomes active when the check box for a resource group to be
deleted is selected in the Resource Groups list. The All
Resources groups cannot be deleted.

Create Resource Group dialog box

The Create Resource Group dialog box is used for creating a resource group.
Enter a name and a description in Resource Group Properties for the
resource group to be created. Items marked with an asterisk (*) must be
specified.
The items displayed in the Create Resource Group dialog box are explained
below.

Item Description

*Name Enter a character string (maximum 50 characters) for the

name of the resource group. Paragraph return characters,
tabs, and the following one-byte characters are not allowed.
You cannot use the name All Resources, which has been
reserved by the system.
\ / , ; : ? * " < > | .

Description Enter a character string (maximum 255 characters) to describe

the resource group.

Delete Resource Groups dialog box

The Delete Resource Groups dialog box is used for deleting selected resource
groups. In the Resource Group List, check the resource groups to be
deleted.
The items displayed in the Delete Resource Groups dialog box are explained
below.

Item Description

Name Displays the names of resource groups.

Number of Hosts Displays the number of hosts registered for each resource
group.

Number of Users Displays the number of users registered for each resource
group.

Description Displays a description for each resource group.

A-188 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
resource-group-name subwindow
In the resource-group-name subwindow, you can:
• Display information about registered hosts and users.
• Edit names and descriptions of resource groups.
• Delete a resource group.
• Add a host to a resource group.
• Remove a host from a resource group.
• Add a user to a resource group.
• Remove a user from a resource group.
Only users who have the Admin (Global Link Manager management)
permission or whose account is the built-in account (user ID: System) are
allowed to manage resource groups.
All hosts registered as resources, built-in accounts (user ID: System), and
users who have the Admin (Global Link Manager management) permission
have been registered in the All Resources group that manages all resources.
For the All Resources group, you can only add or remove users who have
the Modify or View permission for Global Link Manager. You cannot remove
the hosts, built-in accounts (user ID: System) or users who have the Admin
(Global Link Manager management) permission from the All Resources
group.
The resource-group-name subwindow is organized into the following areas:
• Application bar area on page A-189
• Summary on page A-189
• Hosts tabbed-page on page A-190
• Users tabbed-page on page A-190

Application bar area

Item Description

Edit Properties button Enables you to edit the name and description of the resource
group. Clicking this button displays the Edit Properties -
resource-group-name dialog box.

Delete Group button Deletes the resource group.

Summary
Item Description

Name Displays the name of the resource group.

Description Displays a description of the resource group.

Number of Hosts Displays the number of hosts registered in the resource group.

GUI reference A-189

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

Number of Users Displays the number of users registered in the resource group.

Hosts tabbed-page
This tabbed-page displays information for the hosts registered in the resource
group.

Item Description

Name Displays the name of the host.

IP Address Displays the IP address of the host. If the host has both IPv4
and IPv6 addresses, the address that is assigned the higher
priority on the managing host is displayed.

OS Displays the type and version information of the OS installed

on the host. If the host OS is Linux, the kernel version is
displayed.

Multipath Software Displays the name of the multipath management software.

Version Displays version information for the multipath management

software. If HP-UX multipath is used, the HP-UX version is
displayed.

Add Hosts button Click this button to add a host to the resource group. Clicking
the Add Hosts button opens the Add Hosts dialog box. The
Add Hosts button is not displayed in the All Resources
subwindow because all hosts registered for resources have
been registered in the All Resources group.

Remove Hosts button Click this button to remove a host from the resource group.
This button becomes active when you select a check box in the
Hosts list. The Remove Hosts button is not displayed in the
All Resources subwindow because the All Resources group
manages all resources and cannot remove hosts. You must
remove a host from the resources to remove a host from the
All Resources group.

Users tabbed-page
This tabbed-page displays information about the users registered in the
resource group.

Item Description

User ID Displays the user ID.

Admin A check mark is displayed if the user has the Admin permission
for a Hitachi Command Suite product. A user who has this
permission can add and delete resources for each Hitachi
Command Suite product, and allocate resources to users (or
manage resource groups). Global Link Manager manages hosts
as resources if multipath management software is installed on
the hosts.

A-190 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

Modify A check mark is displayed if the user has the Modify

permission. A user who has the Modify permission can modify
settings for, and update information of, allocated resources.
Global Link Manager can simultaneously modify the status of
multiple paths. When HDLM is used for the multipath
management software, Global Link Manager can set up an
HDLM operating environment.

View A check mark is displayed if the user has the View permission.
A user who has the View permission can view the allocated
resources.

Description Displays a description of the user.

Add Users button Click this button to add a user to the resource group. Adding a
user to the All Resources group allocates all hosts registered
in a resource to that user. Clicking the Add Users button
opens the Add Users dialog box.

Remove Users button Click this button to remove a user from the resource group.
This button becomes active when you select a check box in the
Users list.

Edit Properties - resource-group-name dialog box

The Edit Group - resource-group-name dialog box is used for editing the
name and description of a selected resource group. To edit resource groups,
you need to edit the properties of resource groups. Enter a new name and a
description in Resource Group. Items marked with an asterisk (*) must be
specified.
The items displayed in the Edit Group - resource-group-name dialog box are
explained below.

Item Description

*Name By default, the name of the selected resource group is

displayed. Enter a character string (maximum 50 characters)
as the new name of the resource group. Paragraph return
characters, tabs, and the following one-byte characters are not
allowed:
\ / , ; : ? * " < > | .

Description By default, the description of the selected resource group is

displayed. Enter a character string (maximum 255 characters)
as the new description of the resource group.

Add Hosts dialog box (adding to a resource group)

The Add Hosts dialog box is used for adding hosts to a resource group. A
single host cannot be registered in multiple resource groups. The Host List
displays information for hosts not registered in a resource group (other than
All Resources). The OK button becomes active when you select a check
box.

GUI reference A-191

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 The items displayed in the Add Hosts dialog box are explained below.

Item Description

Name Displays the host name.

IP Address Displays the IP address of the host. If the host has both IPv4
and IPv6 addresses, the address that is assigned the higher
priority on the managing host is displayed.

OS Displays the type and version information of the OS installed

on the host. If the host OS is Linux, the kernel version is
displayed.

Multipath Software Displays the name of the multipath management software.

Version Displays version information for the multipath management

software. If HP-UX multipath is used, the HP-UX version is
displayed.

Remove Hosts dialog box (removing from a resource group)

The Remove Hosts dialog box is used for removing hosts from a resource
group. In the Host List, check the host to be removed.
The items displayed in the Remove Hosts dialog box are explained below.

Item Description

Name Displays the host name.

IP Address Displays the IP address of the host. If the host has both IPv4
and IPv6 addresses, the address that is assigned the higher
priority on the managing host is displayed.

OS Displays the type and version information of the OS installed

on the host. If the host OS is Linux, the kernel version is
displayed.

Multipath Software Displays the name of the multipath management software.

Version Displays version information for the multipath management

software. If HP-UX multipath is used, the HP-UX version is
displayed.

Add Users - resource-group-name dialog box

The Add Users - resource-group-name dialog box is used for adding users to
a resource group. The User List displays information about users who have
Global Link Manager operation permissions but are not registered in the
selected resource group. The OK button becomes active when you select a
check box.
The items displayed in the Add Users - resource-group-name dialog box are
explained below.

Item Description

User ID Displays the user ID.

A-192 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

Admin A check mark is displayed if the user has the Admin permission
for a Hitachi Command Suite product. A user who has this
permission can add and delete resources for each Hitachi
Command Suite product, and allocate resources to users (or
manage resource groups). Global Link Manager manages hosts
as resources if multipath management software is installed on
the hosts.

Modify A check mark is displayed if the user has the Modify

permission. A user who has the Modify permission can modify
settings for, and update information of, allocated resources.
Global Link Manager can simultaneously modify the status of
multiple paths. When HDLM is used for the multipath
management software, Global Link Manager can set up an
HDLM operating environment.

View A check mark is displayed if the user has the View permission.
A user who has the View permission can view the allocated
resources.

Description Displays a description of the user.

Remove Users dialog box

The Remove Users dialog box is used for removing users from a resource
group. In the User List, check the user to be removed.
The items displayed in the Remove Users dialog box are explained below.

Item Description

User ID Displays the user ID.

Admin A check mark is displayed if the user has the Admin permission
for a Hitachi Command Suite product. A user who has this
permission can add and delete resources for each Hitachi
Command Suite product, and allocate resources to users (or
manage resource groups). Global Link Manager manages hosts
as resources if multipath management software is installed on
the hosts.

Modify A check mark is displayed if the user has the Modify

permission. A user who has the Modify permission can modify
settings for, and update information of, allocated resources.
Global Link Manager can simultaneously modify the status of
multiple paths. When HDLM is used for the multipath
management software, Global Link Manager can set up an
HDLM operating environment.

View A check mark is displayed if the user has the View permission.
A user who has the View permission can view the allocated
resources.

Description Displays a description of the user.

GUI reference A-193

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Subwindows for managing security options

Security subwindow
The Security subwindow displays a list of security management items, which
include the security options that are available when a user logs in to a Hitachi
Command Suite product. Security management is limited to users with the
Admin (user management) permission.
The items displayed in the Security subwindow are explained below.

Item Description

Security Management Displays the security options for logging in. Select one of the
Items following settings:
• Password: For viewing and setting password conditions.
Choosing Password displays the Password subwindow.
• Account Lock: For viewing and setting automatic lock
conditions for user accounts. Choosing Account Lock
displays the Account Lock subwindow.
• Warning Banner: For viewing and setting a message for
the warning banner. Choosing Warning Banner displays
the Warning Banner subwindow.

Password subwindow
The Password subwindow enables you to view and change the conditions for
the password that is required when a user logs in to a Hitachi Command Suite
product.
The Password subwindow is organized into the following areas:
• Application bar area on page A-194
• Password Policy on page A-194

Application bar area

Item Description

Edit Settings button Enables you to set password conditions (such as a minimum
number of characters or a required combination of characters).
Clicking this button displays the Password dialog box.

Password Policy
Displays the password conditions.

Item Description

Minimum length Displays the minimum length of a password (in characters).

A-194 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

Minimum number of Displays the numbers of upper-case letters, lower-case letters,

characters numeric characters, and symbols that must be included in a
password.
• uppercase: Displays the number of upper-case letters
that must be included in a password.
• lowercase: Displays the number of lower-case letters that
must be included in a password.
• numeric: Displays the number of numeric characters that
must be included in a password.
• symbolic: Displays the number of symbols that must be
included in a password.

Allow password to be Displays whether a password can be the same as the user ID.
the same as the User If so, Yes is displayed; if the password cannot be the same as
ID the user ID, No is displayed.

Password dialog box

The Password dialog box is used to set conditions for the password that is
required when a user logs in to a Hitachi Command Suite product. In
Password Policy, enter the conditions, such as the minimum length and
combination of characters. If the Global Link Manager server is running in a
cluster environment, set the conditions on the server side. For details about
how to set the conditions on the Global Link Manager server, see the Hitachi
Command Suite Global Link Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.
The items displayed in the Password dialog box are explained below.

Item Description

Minimum length Specifies the minimum length of a password (in characters).

Specify a value in the range from 1 to 256.

Minimum number of Specifies the minimum number of upper-case letters, lower-

characters case letters, numeric characters, and symbols that can be
included in a password. The total for the minimum number of
upper-case letters, lower-case letters, numeric characters, and
symbols must not exceed the specified minimum length.
• uppercase: Specifies the number of upper-case letters
that can be included in a password. Specify a value in the
range from 0 to 256.
• lowercase: Specifies the number of lower-case letters
that can be included in a password. Specify a value in the
range from 0 to 256.
• numeric: Specifies the number of numeric characters that
can be included in a password. Specify a value in the
range from 0 to 256.
• symbolic: Specifies the number of symbols that can be
included in a password. Specify a value in the range from
0 to 256.

GUI reference A-195

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

Allow password to be Specifies whether a password can be the same as the user ID.
the same as the User To allow the password to be the same as the user ID, click the
ID Yes radio button. To prohibit a password that is the same as
the user ID, click the No radio button.

Account Lock subwindow

The Account Lock subwindow enables you to view and change the automatic
lock conditions for user accounts.
The Account Lock subwindow is organized into the following areas:
• Application bar area on page A-196
• Account Lock Policy on page A-196

Application bar area

Item Description

Edit Settings button Enables you to set the automatic lock conditions for user
accounts. Clicking this button displays the Account Lock dialog
box.

Account Lock Policy

Displays the automatic lock conditions for user accounts.

Item Description

Maximum number of When automatic locking of user accounts is enabled, this

login attempts option displays the number of unsuccessful login attempts that
are permitted before the user account is locked automatically.
When automatic locking of user accounts is disabled,
unlimited is displayed.

Account Lock dialog box

The Account Lock dialog box sets the automatic lock conditions for user
accounts. If the Global Link Manager server is running in a cluster
environment, set the conditions on the server side. For details about how to
set the conditions on the Global Link Manager server, see the Hitachi
Command Suite Global Link Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.
The items displayed in the Account Lock dialog box are explained below.

Item Description

Lockout a user Select this check box to enable automatic locking of user
account after number accounts. Once automatic locking of user accounts has been
of failed attempts enabled, repeated entry of an invalid password for a user
check box account will result in that user account being locked, thus

A-196 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
prohibiting login to a Hitachi Command Suite product from that
user account.

Maximum number of When automatic locking of user accounts is enabled, specify

login attempts the number of unsuccessful login attempts that are to be
permitted before automatic locking occurs. Specify a value in
the range from 1 to 10. When automatic locking of user
accounts is disabled, this text box is displayed as inactive.

Warning Banner subwindow

The Warning Banner subwindow is used to view and edit the message set for
the warning banner that is displayed in the login window. You can also use
the hcmds64banner command to register the warning banner message. Note
that, if the message was registered by using the hcmds64banner command,
you can use the GUI to view and edit the message only when it was
registered without the locale specified.
The Warning Banner subwindow is organized into the following areas:
• Application bar area on page A-197
• Warning Banner on page A-197

Application bar area

Item Description

Edit Message button Enables you to edit a message for the warning banner. Clicking
this button displays the Edit Message dialog box.

Warning Banner
Displays, as an HTML image, the warning banner message to be displayed in
the login window. However, if the message was registered by using the
hcmds64banner command with the locale specified, the message might not be
displayed or a different message might be displayed. To edit a message
registered by using the hcmds64banner command with the locale specified,
use the hcmds64banner command. For details about the hcmds64banner
command, see the Hitachi Command Suite Global Link Manager Installation
and Configuration Guide.

Edit Message dialog box

The Edit Message dialog box is used to edit a message for the warning
banner. If the Global Link Manager server is running in a cluster environment,
use the hcmds64banner command to edit a message. For details about the
hcmds64banner command, see the Hitachi Command Suite Global Link
Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.
The items displayed in the Edit Message dialog box are explained below.

GUI reference A-197

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

Message Edit the message in HTML format. The maximum number of

characters that can be used, including HTML tags, is 1,000.
HTML tags are not case sensitive. If you wish to edit a
message that contains an HTML tag that is not supported by
the GUI, you must use the hcmds64banner command.
• To display (as part of the warning banner message)
characters that are used as an HTML tag, you must specify
those characters using the HTML escape sequence
• To enter a linefeed in the warning banner message, specify
the HTML tag <br>. Linefeeds entered in the text box
during message editing are ignored when the message is
registered.

Preview button Displays the message as an HTML display image. Clicking this
button displays the message in the Preview column.

Delete button Deletes the message in Message and Preview. Clicking the
OK button while the message has been deleted releases the
warning banner.

Preview Displays the message as an HTML display image. If the

message contains an invalid tag or HTML syntax error, this
column will be blank.

Subwindows for managing alerts

Alerts subwindow
In the Alerts subwindow, you can:
• View the list of alerts issued by the host and alerts issued by error
detection when host information is refreshed (View permission).
• Set or release the filtering conditions for the list of alerts (View
permission).
• Specify Read or Unread to indicate whether an alert has been checked
(Modify permission).
• Delete selected alerts (Modify permission).
• Set whether to report alert notifications if path redundancy is degraded
for paths that are in a state in which they can issue I/Os normally, or are
in a blocked state due to operations performed offline (Admin
permission).
• Specify sending alerts via email (Admin permission).
Critical-level and unread alerts are highlighted. The number of alert
information items that are stored is equal to the value set in the
server.snmp.trap_max property in the Global Link Manager server's
server.properties properties file. When the number of alerts exceeds the
value specified in this file, the oldest ones are deleted. For information about
the settings of the Global Link Manager server environment, see the Hitachi
Command Suite Global Link Manager Installation and Configuration Guide.

A-198 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
If a host name is changed, the host name for the alert information that has
been reported before the change is also changed.

Tip:
• If the host OS is VMware, an alert is not sent when a remote
management client stopped. After starting the remote management
client, do not forget to update the host information.
• If the host OS is VMware, an alert might be received approximately 5
minutes late.
The items displayed in the Alerts list in the Alerts subwindow are explained
below.
• Application bar area on page A-199
• Summary on page A-199
• HDLM or HDLM and others tabbed-page on page A-199
• DMP Windows tabbed-page on page A-203

Application bar area

Item Description

Configure Alert Used to specify the conditions for transferring alerts. This
Transfer button button is displayed only when the alert transfer is enabled.
When this button is clicked, Configure Alert Transfer dialog box
on page A-210 is displayed.

Configure Lost Path Used to set whether to report alert notifications if path
Check button redundancy is degraded for paths that are in a state in which
they can issue I/Os normally, or are in a blocked state due to
operations performed offline. When this button is clicked,
Configure Lost Path Check dialog box on page A-211 is
displayed.

Configure E-mail Used to specify sending alerts via email. When this button is
Notification button clicked, E-mail Notification dialog box on page A-212 is
displayed.

Summary
If instances of different multipath management software are running at the
same time, the number of alerts is displayed for each type of multipath
management software. Information displayed includes the number of critical
alerts, the number of error alerts, the number of information alerts, and the
total number of alerts.

HDLM or HDLM and others tabbed-page

This tabbed-page displays alert information for the host on which HDLM or
HP-UX multipath is running.

GUI reference A-199

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

Severity Indicates the severity of an alert. The icon meanings are as

follows:

Icon Severity Level

Indicates a Critical-level alert.

Indicates an Error-level alert.

Indicates an Information-level alert.

In the case of a value that Global Link Manager does not

recognize, UNKNOWN is displayed.

Read Indicates whether an alert has been checked. Either of the

following is displayed:
• Read: Indicates that an alert has been checked or a
corrective action has been taken for it.
• Unread: Indicates that an alert has not been checked or a
corrective action has not been taken for it.

Time Displays the date when the alert was issued.

LDEV ID For HDLM:

If a path in which an error occurred has been identified, the
number of the LDEV connected to the path is displayed.
For HP-UX multipath:
If a path in which an error occurred has been identified, the
LUN hardware path connected to the path is displayed.
If a path in which an error occurred has not been identified or has
been recovered, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

LDEV Label For HDLM:

Displays label information associated with the LDEV. If n/a is
displayed, Global Link Manager failed to obtain LDEV label
information from Device Manager. A blank is displayed if the
LDEV label information could not be acquired.
If a path in which an error occurred has not been identified
or has been recovered, a hyphen (-) is displayed.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.

Storage system If a path in which an error occurred has been identified, the name
Name of the storage system to which the path is connected is
displayed. If a path in which an error occurred has not been
identified or has been recovered, a hyphen (-) is displayed.
Clicking a storage system name displays the Storage-system-
Name dialog box.

CHA For HDLM:

If a path in which an error occurred has been identified, the
number of the CHA port connected to the path is displayed.
For HP-UX multipath:

A-200 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
If a path in which an error occurred has been identified, the
target address to which the path is connecting is displayed.
If a path in which an error occurred has not been identified or has
been recovered, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Physical Displays the following physical storage system information for

Information virtual storage machines and other devices:
• LDEV ID:
For HDLM
If a path in which an error occurred has been identified,
the number of the LDEV connected to the path is
displayed. If a path in which an error occurred has not
been identified or has been recovered, a hyphen (-) is
displayed.
For software other than HDLM
Displays n/a.
• Storage system name:
For HDLM
If a path in which an error occurred has been identified,
the name of the storage system to which the path is
connected is displayed. If a path in which an error
occurred has not been identified or has been recovered,
a hyphen (-) is displayed.
For software other than HDLM
Displays n/a.
• CHA:
For HDLM
If a path in which an error occurred has been identified,
the number of the CHA port connected to the path is
displayed. If a path in which an error occurred has not
been identified or has been recovered, a hyphen (-) is
displayed.
For software other than HDLM
Displays n/a.
This item is displayed when a virtual ID is used.

Multipath LU If a path in which an error occurred has been identified, the

number of the multipath LUs (HDevs) connected to the path is
displayed. If a path has been recovered, a hyphen (-) is
displayed.

Host Name Displays the name of the host that issued the alert. Clicking the
host name displays the host-name dialog box.

HBA For HDLM:

If a path in which an error occurred has been identified, a
number that indicates the HBA that connects to the path is
displayed. The bus number and the HBA port number are
delimited by a period. If a path in which an error occurred
has not been identified or has been recovered, a hyphen (-)
is displayed.

GUI reference A-201

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
For HP-UX multipath:
If the alert identifies the path, the hardware path connected
to the path is displayed.

HBA WWN Displays port WWN information for HBAs. If the alert message ID
is any of the following, n/a is displayed because this information
could not be obtained:
• KAPL04042-I
• KAIF20163-E
• KAIF20164-E

Category Displays the alert category. One of the following is displayed:

• Path: Indicates the alert for each path that reports that an
error occurred in the path.
• HDLM: Indicates the alert that reports changes to the
settings of the alert notification function.
• HGLM Agent: Indicates the alert that reports changes to the
settings of the alert notification function.
• Host: Indicates the alert that reports that an error occurred
in one or more of the paths connected to the host.

Component Displays the component related to the alert. One of the following
is displayed:
• HDLM Manager: Indicates an alert reported from the HDLM
Manager. Among those alerts, there is an alert that reports
changes to the settings for the alert notification function.
• HGLM Agent: Indicates an alert reported from the Global
Link Manager agent. Among those alerts, there is an alert
that reports changes to the settings for the alert notification
function.
• HGLM: Indicates the alert reported by path error detection
when host information is refreshed. The path error detection
reports an alert indicating that an error occurred in one or
more of the paths connected to the host.
If a component has not been identified, a hyphen (-) is
displayed.

Message ID Displays the message ID of the alert. Check the message ID and
take appropriate action. For information about the action to take
for the error, see the HDLM manual corresponding to the host
OS.

Description Displays a description of the alert.

Read button Click this button to set an alert as Read once an alert has been
checked or for which a corrective action has been taken. This
button becomes active when you select a check box.

Unread button Click this button to set an alert as Unread. This button becomes
active when you select a check box.

Delete Alerts button Click this button to delete the selected alerts. This button
becomes active when you select a check box.

Delete All Alerts Click this button to delete all alerts.

button

A-202 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

Filter button Filters information in the Alerts list. Clicking this button displays
the Filter - Alerts dialog box.

Filter Off button Cancels the filtering conditions that were set in the Filter - Alerts
dialog box.

DMP Windows tabbed-page

This tabbed-page displays information about alerts of a Windows host running
DMP.

Item Description

Severity Indicates the severity of an alert. The icon meanings are as

follows:

Icon Severity Level

Indicates a Critical-level alert.

Indicates an Error-level alert.

Indicates an Information-level alert.

In the case of a value that Global Link Manager does not

recognize, UNKNOWN is displayed.

Read Indicates whether an alert has been checked. Either of the

following is displayed:
• Read: Indicates that an alert has been checked or a
corrective action has been taken for it.
• Unread: Indicates that an alert has not been checked or a
corrective action has not been taken for it.

Time Displays the date when the alert was issued.

LUN Displays the LUN connected to the path if the path in which an
error occurred has been identified. Displays a hyphen (-) if the
path in which an error occurred has not been identified or the
path has recovered.

Storage system If a path in which an error occurred has been identified, the name
Name of the storage system to which the path is connected is
displayed. If a path in which an error occurred has not been
identified or has been recovered, a hyphen (-) is displayed.
Clicking a storage system name displays the Storage-system-
Name dialog box.

Target Displays the target number connected to the path if the path in
which an error occurred has been identified. If a path in which an
error occurred has not been identified or has been recovered, a
hyphen (-) is displayed.

Disk Displays the disk number connected to the path if the path in
which an error occurred has been identified. If a path has been
recovered, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

GUI reference A-203

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

Host Name Displays the name of the host that issued the alert. Clicking the
host name displays the host-name dialog box.

Port / Channel If a path in which an error occurred has been identified, a

number that indicates the HBA that connects to the path is
displayed. This item is displayed in the Pport-IDCchannel-ID
format. If a path in which an error occurred has not been
identified or has been recovered, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Category Displays the alert category. One of the following is displayed:

• Path: Indicates the alert for each path that reports that an
error occurred in the path.
• HGLM Agent: Indicates the alert that reports changes to the
settings of the alert notification function.
• Host: Indicates the alert that reports that an error occurred
in one or more of the paths connected to the host.

Component Displays the component related to the alert. One of the following
is displayed:
• DMP: Indicates an alert reported by DMP. Among those
alerts, there is an alert that reports changes to the settings
for the alert notification function.
• HGLM: Indicates the alert reported by path error detection
when host information is refreshed. The path error detection
reports an alert indicating that an error occurred in one or
more of the paths connected to the host.
If a component has not been identified, a hyphen (-) is
displayed.

Message ID Displays the message ID of the alert. Check the message ID and
take appropriate action. For information about the action to take
for the error, see the Hitachi Command Suite Global Link
Manager Messages.

Description Displays a description of the alert.

Read button Click this button to set an alert as Read once an alert has been
checked or for which a corrective action has been taken. This
button becomes active when you select a check box.

Unread button Click this button to set an alert as Unread. This button becomes
active when you select a check box.

Delete Alerts button Click this button to delete the selected alerts. This button
becomes active when you select a check box.

Delete All Alerts Click this button to delete all alerts.

button

Filter button Filters information in the Alerts list. Clicking this button displays
the Filter - Alerts dialog box.

Filter Off button Cancels the filtering conditions that were set in the Filter - Alerts
dialog box.

A-204 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Delete Alerts dialog box
The Delete Alerts dialog box is used for deleting the selected alerts. In the
Alerts list, check the alerts to be deleted.
The items displayed in the Delete Alerts dialog box are explained below.

Item Description

Severity Indicates the severity of an alert. The icon meanings are as

follows:

Icon Severity Level

Indicates a Critical-level alert.

Indicates an Error-level alert.

Indicates an Information-level alert.

In the case of a value that Global Link Manager does not

recognize, UNKNOWN is displayed.

Read Indicates whether an alert has been checked. Either of the

following is displayed:
• Read: Indicates that an alert has been checked or a
corrective action has been taken for it.
• Unread: Indicates that an alert has not been checked or a
corrective action has not been taken for it.

Time Displays the date when the alert was issued.

LDEV ID For HDLM:

Displays the number of the LDEV connected to the path in
cases in which the alert identifies the path.
For HP-UX multipath:
If the alert identifies the path, the LUN hardware path
connected to the path is displayed.
If the alert does not identify the path, a hyphen (-) is displayed.
LDEV ID is displayed when HDLM or HP-UX multipath is used for
the multipath management software.

LDEV Label For HDLM:

Displays the label of the LDEV connected to the path in cases
in which the alert identifies the path. If the alert does not
identify the path, a hyphen is displayed.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.
LDEV Label is displayed when HDLM or HP-UX multipath is used
for the multipath management software.

LUN Displays the LUN. LUN is displayed when DMP is used for the
multipath management software with Windows as the OS.

Storage system Displays the name of the storage system to which the path is
Name connected in cases in which the alert identifies the path. If the
alert does not identify the path, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

GUI reference A-205

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

CHA, or Target Displays the number of the CHA port connected to the path in
cases in which the alert identifies the path. If the alert does not
identify the path, a hyphen (-) is displayed.

Physical Displays the following physical storage system information for

Information virtual storage machines and other devices:
• LDEV ID:
For HDLM
Displays the number of the LDEV connected to the path
in cases in which the alert identifies the path. If the alert
does not identify the path, a hyphen (-) is displayed.
For software other than HDLM
Displays n/a.
• Storage system name:
For HDLM
Displays the name of the storage system to which the
path is connected in cases in which the alert identifies
the path. If the alert does not identify the path, a
hyphen (-) is displayed.
For software other than HDLM
Displays n/a.
• CHA:
For HDLM
Displays the number of the CHA port connected to the
path in cases in which the alert identifies the path. If the
alert does not identify the path, a hyphen (-) is
displayed.
For software other than HDLM
Displays n/a.
This item is displayed when a virtual ID is used.

Multipath LU, or Displays the multipath LU number connected to the path in cases
Disk in which the alert identifies the path.

Host Name Displays the name of the host that issued the alert.

HBA For HDLM:

Displays a number that indicates the HBA that connects to
the path in cases in which the alert identifies the path. The
bus number and the HBA port number are delimited by a
period. If the alert does not identify the path, a hyphen (-) is
displayed.
For HP-UX multipath:
If the alert identifies the path, the hardware path connected
to the path is displayed.
HBA is displayed when HDLM or HP-UX multipath is used for the
multipath management software.

Port / Channel Displays the port/channel connected to the path in cases in which
the alert identifies the path. If the alert does not identify the
path, a hyphen is displayed. Port / Channel is displayed when

A-206 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
DMP is used for the multipath management software with
Windows as the OS.

HBA WWN For HDLM:

Displays port WWN information for HBAs. For an iSCSI
interface, n/a is displayed because this information cannot
be obtained.
For HP-UX multipath:
The port name obtained by the scsimgr get_info command
is displayed.
HBA WWN is displayed when HDLM or HP-UX multipath is used
for the multipath management software.

Category Displays the alert category. One of the following is displayed:

• Path: Indicates the alert for each path that reports that an
error occurred in the path.
• HDLM: If HDLM is used for the multipath management
software, this indicates the alert that is reported when the
alert notification function settings are changed.
• HGLM Agent: If DMP or HP-UX multipath is used for the
multipath management software, this indicates the alert that
is reported when the alert notification function settings are
changed.
• Host: Indicates the alert that reports that an error occurred
in one or more of the paths connected to the host.

Component Displays the component related to the alert. One of the following
is displayed:
• DMP: Indicates the alert reported from the DMP. Among
those alerts, there is an alert that reports changes to the
settings for the alert notification function.
• HDLM Manager: Indicates the alert reported from the HDLM
Manager. Among those alerts, there is an alert that reports
changes to the settings for the alert notification function.
• HGLM Agent: Indicates an alert reported from the Global
Link Manager agent. Among those alerts, there is an alert
that reports changes to the settings for the alert notification
function.
• HGLM: Indicates the alert reported by path error detection
when host information is refreshed. The path error detection
reports an alert indicating that an error occurred in one or
more of the paths connected to the host.
For alerts that do not identify a component, a hyphen (-) is
displayed.

Message ID Displays the message ID of the alert. Check the message ID and
take appropriate action. For information on how to resolve the
error, see the HDLM manual corresponding to the host OS or the
Hitachi Command Suite Global Link Manager Messages.

Description Displays a description of the alert. Check the displayed content

and take the necessary corrective action.

GUI reference A-207

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Filter - Alerts dialog box
The Filter - Alerts dialog box is used to set filtering conditions for items in the
Alerts list. The filtering conditions are entered in Filtering Conditions.
The items displayed in the Filter - Alerts dialog box are explained below.

Item Description

Attribute From the drop-down list, select an item to be specified as a

filtering condition. The following lists and describes the items
that can be specified.
• Severity: Specifies the severity of the target alert.
• Read: Specifies whether the target alert is read or unread.
• Date: Specifies the date when the target alert was issued.
• LDEV ID:
For HDLM:
Specifies the number of the LDEV connected to the
path in which the target alert occurred.
For HP-UX multipath:
Specifies the LUN hardware path connected to the
path in which the target alert occurred.
LDEV ID can be specified if HDLM or HP-UX multipath is
used for the multipath management software.
• LUN: Specifies the LUN connected to the path in which the
target alert occurred. LUN can be specified if DMP is used
for the multipath management software with Windows as
the OS.
• LDEV Label:
For HDLM:
Specifies the number of the LDEV label connected to
the path in which the target alert occurred.
For HP-UX multipath:
n/a is displayed.
LDEV Label can be specified if HDLM or HP-UX multipath
is used for the multipath management software.
• Storage system Name: Specifies the name of the
storage system to which the path in which the target alert
occurred is connected.
• CHA:
For HDLM:
Specifies the number of the CHA port connected to the
path in which the target alert occurred.
For HP-UX multipath:
Specifies the target address connected to the path in
which the target alert occurred.
CHA can be specified if HDLM or HP-UX multipath is used
for the multipath management software.
• Physical LDEV ID: Specifies the number of the LDEV
connected to the path in which the target alert occurred.

A-208 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Item Description
Physical LDEV ID can be specified if HDLM is used for the
multipath management software.
• Physical Storage system name: Specifies the name of
the storage system to which the path in which the target
alert occurred is connected. Physical Storage system
name can be specified if HDLM is used for the multipath
management software.
• Physical CHA: Specifies the number of the CHA port
connected to the path in which the target alert occurred.
Physical CHA can be specified if HDLM is used for the
multipath management software.
This item can be specified when a virtual ID is used.
• Target: Specifies the target number connected to the path
in which the target alert occurred. Target can be specified
if DMP is used for the multipath management software
with Windows as the OS.
• Multipath LU:
For HDLM:
Specifies the names of the multipath LUs connected to
the path in which the target alert occurred.
For HP-UX multipath:
Specifies the LUN hardware path connected to the
path in which the target alert occurred.
Multipath LU can be specified if HDLM or HP-UX multipath
is used for the multipath management software.
• Disk: Specifies the disk connected to the path in which the
target alert occurred. Disk can be specified if DMP is used
for the multipath management software with Windows as
the OS.
• Host Name: Specifies the name of the host that issued
the target alert.
• HBA:
For HDLM:
Specifies the number of the HBA port connected to the
path in which the target alert occurred.
For HP-UX multipath:
Specifies the hardware path connected to the path in
which the target alert occurred.
HBA can be specified if HDLM or HP-UX multipath is used
for the multipath management software.
• HBA WWN:
For HDLM:
Specifies the WWN for the HBA port connected to the
path in which the target alert occurred.
For HP-UX multipath:
Specifies the port name connected to the path in
which the target alert occurred.
HBA WWN can be specified if HDLM or HP-UX multipath is
used for the multipath management software.

GUI reference A-209

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
• Port / Channel: Specifies the port/channel connected to
the path in which the target alert occurred. Port /
Channel can be specified if DMP is used for the multipath
management software with Windows as the OS.
• Category: Specifies the category of the target alert
• Component: Specifies the component related to the
target alert.
• Message ID: Specifies the message ID of the target alert.
• Description: Specifies a description of the target alert.

Operators Select the operator for the filtering condition. The available
operators depend on the item selected in Attribute. The
following lists and describes the available operators.
• is or is not: Filtering is executed on the condition that the
item selected in Attribute has the same or different value
from the value specified in Value.
• contains or does not contain: Filtering is executed on
the condition that the item selected in Attribute contains
or does not contain the value specified in Value.
• <=, >=, or =: Filtering is executed within the specified
range. You can select these operators when specifying a
date.

Value Displays a text box or a drop-down list depending on the item

specified in Attribute.
In the text box, enter the value that is to be used for the
filtering condition. To enter a date, use the format yyyy-mm-
dd.
The drop-down list displays values for the item specified in
Attribute. You can select one of these values as the filtering
condition. For example, if you specified Severity in Attribute,
the drop-down list for Value displays the values for Severity
(critical, error, and information).

- button Deletes the corresponding condition. If there is only one row of

conditions, the condition is displayed as inactive.

+ button Adds a row for entering a new condition. When multiple

conditions are set, filtering is executed by the AND condition.

Clear button Discards the edited filtering conditions and restores the
conditions to their initial settings.

Reset button Discards the edited filtering conditions and restores the
conditions that were in effect when the dialog box was opened.

Configure Alert Transfer dialog box

This dialog box specifies the conditions for transferring alerts. The items
displayed here are explained below.

A-210 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

Transfer Destination: Displays the IP address of the alert transfer destination that is
specified in the server.snmp_transfer.ip_address property
of the server.properties file.

SNMP Version: Specify the SNMP version when the alert is transferred. From
the drop-down list, select version 1 or version 3. When version
1 is selected, the succeeding items become inactive. When
version 3 is selected, the succeeding items become active.

User Name: Enter the user name in ASCII characters. You can enter from 1
to 32 characters.

Authentication: Specify the authentication information:

• Enable radio button: Select this item when performing
authentication. When this item is selected, the succeeding
items become active.
• Disable radio button: Select this item when you do not
want to perform authentication. When this item is
selected, the succeeding items become inactive.
• Protocol: Specify the protocol for authentication. From
the drop-down list, select SHA or MD5.
• Password: Enter the password in ASCII characters. You
can enter from 8 to 64 characters.
• Re-enter password: Re-enter the password.

Encryption: Specify the encryption information.

• Enable radio button: Select this item when performing
encryption. When this item is selected, the succeeding
items become active.
• Disable radio button: Select this item when you do not
want to perform encryption. When this item is selected,
the succeeding items become inactive.
• Protocol: Specify the protocol for encryption. From the
drop-down list, select DES-CBC or AES-128.
• Key: Enter the key in ASCII characters. You can enter
from 8 to 64 characters.
• Re-enter Key: Re-enter the key.

SNMP Engine ID: The engine ID for SNMP is displayed.

Configure Lost Path Check dialog box

In the Configure Lost Path Check dialog box, you can set whether to report
alert notifications if path redundancy is degraded for paths that are in a state
in which they can issue I/Os normally, or are in a blocked state due to
operations performed offline.

Item Description

Lost Path Check Select the On button to enable the Lost Path Check option.
Select the Off button to disable the Lost Path Check option.

GUI reference A-211

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
E-mail Notification dialog box
In the E-mail Notification dialog box, you can:
• Display the email address list for sending alerts (Admin permission).
• Add email addresses for sending alerts (Admin permission).
• Remove email addresses for sending alerts (Admin permission).
• Change settings of the email addresses for sending alerts (Admin
permission).
• Configure the SMTP server (Admin permission).
Alerts are collected in the Global Link Manager server, and the collection
results are sent by email to the SMTP server. If multiple alerts with the same
message ID are reported during a specified collection time, only the last alert
is sent to the SMTP server. The default collection time is 10 minutes. To
change the configuration, specify the server.alert_gathering.interval
property in the server.properties file on the Global Link Manager server.
An anonymous address is used by default as the source address of the emails
that are sent from the Global Link Manager server. If you want to change this
source address, specify an address for the
server.alert_email.from.address property in the server.properties file
for the Global Link Manager server. For details about these properties, see
the Hitachi Command Suite Global Link Manager Installation and
Configuration Guide.
The items displayed in the E-mail Notification dialog box are explained below.
• Application bar area on page A-212
• E-mail Address List on page A-212

Application bar area

Item Description

Configure SMTP Used to change the SMTP server configuration. When this
Server button button is clicked, the Configure SMTP Server dialog box is
displayed.

E-mail Address List

Item Description

E-mail Address Displays the email addresses for sending alerts. When an email
address is clicked, the Modify E-mail Address dialog box is
displayed.

Number of Resource Displays the number of resource groups that are registered to
Groups email addresses. When the number of resource groups is
clicked, the Modify Resource Group dialog box is displayed.

Add E-mail button Used to add email addresses for sending alerts. When the Add
E-mail button is clicked, the Add E-mail Address dialog box is
displayed.

A-212 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

Remove E-mail button Used to remove email addresses for sending alerts. This button
becomes activated when a check box, for the email address to
be removed, is selected in the E-mail List. When the Remove
E-mail button is clicked, the Remove E-mail Addresses dialog
box is displayed.

Add E-mail Address dialog box

This dialog box is used to add email addresses for sending alerts. Items
marked with an asterisk (*) must be specified.
The item displayed here is explained below.

Item Description

*E-mail Address: Enter the email address here.

Remove E-mail Addresses dialog box

This dialog box is used to remove email addresses for sending alerts. Check
email addresses to be removed using the Email Address List. The items
displayed here are explained below.

Item Description

E-mail Address Displays the email addresses.

Last E-mail sent Displays the date and time of the last email sent.

Modify E-mail Address dialog box

This dialog box is used to set email addresses associated with resource
groups. The items displayed here are explained below.
• Modify E-mail Address on page A-213
• Resource Group List on page A-213

Modify E-mail Address

Item Description

E-mail Address: Enter the email address here.

Resource Group List

Item Description

Resource Group Displays the name of the resource groups that are registered
to email addresses.

GUI reference A-213

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Configure SMTP Server dialog box
This dialog box is used to configure the necessary SMTP server for sending
alerts via email. If a firewall is set up between the Global Link Manager server
and the destination server, be sure to set the IP address and port number of
the destination server for the firewall. Items marked with an asterisk (*)
must be specified.
The items displayed here are explained below.

Item Description

*SMTP Server Enter the IP address or host name of the SMTP server. Use the
IPv4 or IPv6 format to enter an IP address.

*Port Number Enter the port number of the SMTP server. The default port
number 25 is automatically entered.

Enable SMTP Select this check box to enable the SMTP server authentication
Authentication check function.
box • User ID: Enter the user ID registered to the SMTP server.
This box becomes activated when the Enable SMTP
Authentication check box is selected.
• Password: Enter the user password registered to the
SMTP server. This box becomes activated when the
Enable SMTP Authentication check box is selected.

Send Test E-mail Sends a test email to the email address that is set in the E-
button mail Notification dialog box. This button becomes active when
you specify items marked with an asterisk (*).

Modify Resource Group dialog box

In the Modify Resource Group dialog box, you can:
• Add resource groups to email addresses (Admin permission).
• Remove resource groups from email addresses (Admin permission).
• Set the alert type to be sent via email for each resource group (Admin
permission).
The items displayed in the Modify Resource Group dialog box are explained
below.

Item Description

Resource Group Displays the name of the resource groups that are registered
to email addresses.

Send On Alert Type Displays the alert type emails to send for each resource group.
• Critical: A check mark is displayed when a Critical-level
alert is sent.
• Error: A check mark is displayed when an Error-level alert
is sent.
• Information: A check mark is displayed when an
Information-level alert is sent.

A-214 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

Last E-mail sent Displays the date and time of the last email sent.

Add Groups button Used to add resource groups to email addresses. When the
Add Groups button is clicked, the Add Resource Groups dialog
box is displayed.

Remove Groups Used to remove resource groups from email addresses. This
button button becomes activated when a check box, for the resource
group to be removed, is selected in the Resource Group List.
When the Remove Groups button is clicked, the Remove
Resource Groups dialog box is displayed.

Modify Alert Type Used to set the alert type to be sent via email for each
button resource group. This button becomes activated when a check
box, for the resource group to be configured, is selected in the
Resource Group List. When the Modify Alert Type button is
clicked, the Modify Alert Type dialog box is displayed.

Add Resource Groups dialog box

This dialog box is used to add resource groups to email addresses for sending
alerts. Multiple resource groups can be added to a single email address. The
Resource Group List displays the names of the resource groups that are not
registered to any email addresses. The OK button becomes activated when
you select the check box for the resource group to be added. The items
displayed here are explained below.
• Add Resource Groups on page A-215
• Resource Group List on page A-215

Add Resource Groups

Item Description

Send On Alert Type Select the check box of the alert type to be sent via email.
• Critical: Critical-level alert is sent.
• Error: Error-level alert is sent.
• Information: Information-level alert is sent.

Resource Group List

Item Description

Resource Group Displays the resource group names.

Remove Resource Groups dialog box

This dialog box is used to remove resource groups from email addresses for
sending alerts. Check resource groups to be removed using the Resource
Group List. The items displayed here are explained below.

GUI reference A-215

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

Resource Group Displays the resource group names.

Send On Alert Type Displays the alert type of sent emails for each resource group.
• Critical: A check mark is displayed when a Critical-level
alert is sent.
• Error: A check mark is displayed when an Error-level alert
is sent.
• Information: A check mark is displayed when an
Information-level alert is sent.

Last E-mail sent Displays the date and time of the last email sent.

Modify Alert Type dialog box

This dialog box is used to modify the alert type of sent emails for each
resource group. Check resource groups to be modified using the Resource
Group List. The items displayed here are explained below.
• Configure Alert Type on page A-216
• Resource Group List on page A-216

Configure Alert Type

Item Description

Send On Alert Type Select the check box of the alert type to be sent via email.
• Critical: Critical-level alert is sent.
• Error: Error-level alert is sent.
• Information: Information-level alert is sent.

Resource Group List

Item Description

Resource Group Displays the resource group names.

Subwindows for editing profiles

User Profile subwindow

In the User Profile subwindow, you can view and edit the profiles of logged-in
users.
This subwindow is organized into the following areas:
• Application bar area on page A-217
• User Profile on page A-217
• Granted Permission on page A-217

A-216 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Application bar area
Item Description

Edit Profile button Enables you to edit the logged-in user's profile. Clicking this
button displays the Edit Profile - user-ID dialog box.

Change Password Enables you to change the logged-in user's password. This
button button is not displayed when a user is authenticated by an
external authentication server. Clicking this button displays the
Change Password - user-ID dialog box.

User Profile
Item Description

User ID button Displays the user ID.

Full Name Displays the full name of the user.

E-mail Displays the email address of the user.

Description Displays a description of the user.

Granted Permission
Item Description

Application Displays the names of Hitachi Command Suite products for

which the logged-in user has permission. When the logged-in
user has the Admin (user management) permission, User
Management is displayed.

Admin A check mark is displayed if the user has the Admin permission
for a Hitachi Command Suite product. A user who has this
permission can add and delete resources for each Hitachi
Command Suite product, and allocate resources to users (or
manage resource groups). Global Link Manager manages, as
resources, the hosts on which multipath management software
has been installed.

Modify A check mark is displayed if the user has the Modify

permission. A user who has the Modify permission can modify
settings for, and update information of, allocated resources.
Global Link Manager can simultaneously modify the status of
multiple paths. When HDLM is used for the multipath
management software, Global Link Manager can set up an
HDLM operating environment.

Execute A check mark is displayed if the user has the Execute

permission. A user who has the Execute permission can
execute tasks, such as batch processing, defined by users who
have the Modify permission.

View A check mark is displayed if the user has the View permission.
A user who has the View permission can view the allocated
resources.

GUI reference A-217

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description

Peer A check mark is displayed if the user has the Peer permission.
The Peer permission is used exclusively by a Device Manager
agent to access the Device Manager server.

Edit Profile - user-ID dialog box (editing the logged-in user's profile)
The Edit Profile - user-ID dialog box is used to edit the profile of the logged-in
user. Enter a new user profile in User Profile. The set information is
displayed by default.
The items displayed in the Edit Profile - user-ID dialog box are explained
below.

Item Description

User ID button Displays the user ID of the logged-in user. The user ID cannot
be edited.

Full Name Enter a character string (maximum of 80 characters) for a full

name. You cannot use two or more consecutive dollar signs
(for example, $$ or $$$). The full name is displayed in the
global tasks bar area when the user logs on.

E-mail Enter a character string for an email address.

Description Enter a character string (maximum of 80 characters) to

describe the user.

Change Password - user-ID dialog box (changing the logged-in user's password)
The Change Password - user-ID dialog box is used for changing the password
of the logged-in user. Enter a new user password in Entering Password.
Items marked with an asterisk (*) must be specified.
The items displayed in the Change Password - user-ID dialog box are
explained below.

Item Description

*Old Password button Enter the current password.

*New Password Enter a new password by using no more than 256 characters.
The following characters are allowed:
0-9 A-Z a-z ! # $ % & ' ( ) * + - . = @ \ ^ _ |
The space character is not allowed. Alphabetic characters are
case sensitive.
Note
¢ A HiCommand product with a version earlier than 5.5
supports a password that is from 4 to 25 characters in
length. In an environment in which a Hitachi
Command Suite product with version 5.5 or later
coexists with a Hitachi Command Suite product with a

A-218 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
version earlier than 5.5, specify a password that is
from 4 to 25 characters in length.
¢ If a minimum password length or a combination of
character types required for a password have been set
as conditions, a password that does not satisfy the
conditions cannot be specified. For details about
conditions that have been set, contact the Global Link
Manager user administrator.
¢ When the Global Link Manager server is running in a
cluster environment, if you change the password for
the built-in account (user ID: System), specify the
same settings on all nodes that make up the cluster.

*Verify Password Re-enter the character string that you entered in *New
Password:.

Subwindows for managing licenses

License Info subwindow

In the License Info subwindow, you can view and edit Global Link Manager
licenses. The items displayed for all logged-in users in the License Info
subwindow are explained below.
The License Info subwindow is organized into the following areas:
• Application bar area on page A-219
• Information on page A-219
• Detailed License Information on page A-220

Application bar area

Item Description

Edit License button Enables you to register or edit a license. Clicking this button
displays the Edit License dialog box.

Information
Item Description

Version Displays the Global Link Manager version information.

License Type Displays the registered license type:

• Permanent: Indicates that a permanent license key is
registered. A permanent license key is required in order to
use the product indefinitely.
• Emergency: Indicates that an emergency license key is
registered. An emergency license key is used when a

GUI reference A-219

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
permanent license key cannot be issued in a timely
manner. The valid period is 30 days.
• Temporary: Indicates that a temporary license key is
registered. A temporary license key is used for the
purpose of product evaluation. The valid period is 120
days.
When a temporary license key or emergency license key is
being used, a message indicating the license key expiration
date is displayed. Check the message content.

Detailed License Information

Item Description

No. Displays the number of registered permanent license keys.

Number of Hosts Displays the number of hosts that can be managed for each
permanent license key that has been registered, the number of
hosts that can be managed for a permanent license key, and
the number of hosts currently being managed. When the
number of hosts to be managed exceeds the number of
licenses, a message is displayed. Check the message content,
and then add the necessary licenses.

License, About, and Edit License dialog boxes

This topic describes the License dialog box, About dialog box, and Edit
License dialog box.
These dialog boxes display the Global Link Manager version information and
registered license information. Register the necessary number of licenses
depending on the number of hosts to be managed. Directly enter license
keys, or specify a file in which the license key information is to be coded, in
License Key or File.
These dialog boxes are organized into the following areas:
• Information on page A-220
• License Key or File on page A-221
• Detailed License Information on page A-221

Information
Item Description

Version Displays the Global Link Manager version information.

License Type Displays the registered license type:

• Permanent: Indicates that a permanent license key is
registered. A permanent license key is required in order to
use the product indefinitely.

A-220 GUI reference

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Item Description
• Emergency: Indicates that an emergency license key is
registered. An emergency license key is used when a
permanent license key cannot be issued in a timely
manner. The valid period for a license is 30 days.
• Temporary: Indicates that a temporary license key is
registered. A temporary license key is used for the
purpose of product evaluation. The valid period for a
license is 120 days.
• Unregistered: Indicates that the license has not been
registered. To log in to Global Link Manager, you must first
register the license.
When a temporary license key or emergency license key is
being used, a message indicating a license key expiration date
is displayed. Check the message content.

License Key or File

Item Description

License Enter a license key. To directly enter the license key, select the
Key option and then enter the license key in the text box. To
specify the file in which license key information is coded, select
the File option, and then use the Browse button to select the
file. When the Save button is clicked, the specified license
information is saved and the information in the License Info
subwindow is updated.

Detailed License Information

Item Description

No. Displays the number of registered permanent license keys.

Number of Hosts Displays the number of hosts that can be managed for each
permanent license key that has been registered, the number of
hosts that can be managed for a permanent license key, and
the number of hosts currently being managed. When the
number of hosts to be managed exceeds the number of
licenses, a message is displayed. Follow the message to add
the necessary licenses.

GUI reference A-221

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
A-222 GUI reference
Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 B
Description of icons
This chapter explains Global Link Manager icons.

□ Icon indicating host status

□ Icon indicating storage system status

□ Icon indicating host group status

□ Icon indicating port status

□ Icon indicating path status

Description of icons B-1

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Icon indicating host status
Host status and meaning of Icons
Icon Description

Indicates that all paths that are connected to the hosts allocated to the
logged-in user are in the normal status.

Indicates that hosts connected to a path in which either an error occurred

or a lost path was detected are included in the hosts allocated to the
logged-in user.

Indicates that hosts whose information has not been updated after an
alert was reported are included in the hosts allocated to the logged-in
user.

Indicates that one of the following hosts are included in the hosts
allocated to the logged-in user.
• Hosts that are connected to a path in which an error occurred and
whose information has not been updated after an alert was reported.
• Hosts for which a lost path is detected and whose information has
not been updated after an alert was reported.
• Hosts for which information failed to be updated.

Indicates hosts connected to paths that are in the normal status.

Indicates hosts connected to a path in which either an error occurred or a

lost path was detected.

Indicates hosts whose information has not been updated after an alert
was reported.

Indicates one of the following:

• Hosts that are connected to a path in which an error occurred and
whose information has not been updated after an alert was reported.
• Hosts for which a lost path is detected and whose information has
not been updated after an alert was reported.
• Hosts for which information failed to be updated.

Icon indicating storage system status

Storage system status and meaning of Icons
Icon Description

Indicates that all paths connected to storage systems that can be

accessed by the logged-in user are in the normal status.

Indicates that storage systems connected to a path in which an error

occurred or hosts for which a lost path is detected are included in storage
systems that can be accessed by the logged-in user.

B-2 Description of icons

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Icon Description

Indicates that hosts whose information has not been updated after an
alert was reported are connected to storage systems that can be
accessed by the logged-in user.

Indicates that one of the following storage systems are included in the
storage systems that can be accessed by the logged-in user.
• Storage systems that include hosts that are connected to a path in
which an error occurred and whose information has not been
updated after an alert was reported.
• Storage systems that include hosts for which a lost path is detected
and whose information has not been updated after an alert was
reported.
• Storage systems that include hosts for which information failed to be
updated.

Indicates storage systems connected to paths that are in the normal

status.

Indicates storage systems connected to a path in which an error occurred

or storages systems that include a host for which a lost path is detected.

Indicates storage systems connected to hosts whose information has not

been updated after an alert was reported.

Indicates one of the following:

• Storage systems that include hosts that are connected to a path in
which an error occurred and whose information has not been
updated after an alert was reported.
• Storage systems that include hosts for which a lost path is detected
and whose information has not been updated after an alert was
reported.
• Storage systems that include hosts for which information failed to be
updated.

Icon indicating host group status

Host group status and meaning of Icons
Icon Description

Indicates that all paths connected to hosts that are registered in

host groups are in the normal status.

Indicates that host groups that contain hosts connected to

paths in which either an error occurred or a lost path was
detected are included in the host groups.

Indicates that host groups that contain hosts whose information

has not been updated after an alert was reported are included
in the host groups.

Indicates that one of the following are included in the host

groups.

Description of icons B-3

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Icon Description
• Host groups that include hosts that are connected to a path
in which an error occurred and whose information has not
been updated after an alert was reported.
• Host groups that include hosts for which a lost path is
detected and whose information has not been updated after
an alert was reported.
• Host groups that include hosts for which information failed
to be updated.

Indicates host groups that contain hosts connected to paths

that are in the normal status.

Indicates host groups that contain hosts connected to paths in

which either an error occurred or a lost path was detected.

Indicates host groups that contain hosts whose information has

not been updated after an alert was reported.

Indicates one of the following:

• Host groups that include hosts that are connected to a path
in which an error occurred and whose information has not
been updated after an alert was reported.
• Host groups that include hosts for which a lost path is
detected and whose information has not been updated after
an alert was reported.
• Host groups that include hosts for which information failed
to be updated.

Icon indicating port status

Port status and meaning of Icons
Icon Description

Indicates the CHA port.

Indicates one of the following:

• CHA port that includes error paths.
• CHA port for which a valid path does not exist.

Indicates the HBA port.

Indicates one of the following:

• HBA port that includes error paths.
• HBA port for which a valid path does not exist.

B-4 Description of icons

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Icon indicating path status
HDLM path statuses and Icons representing the statuses
Path status Icon Description
Online Indicates paths in an active status. If the host
operating system is Windows, this status includes
paths that have the Online(P) status.

Offline(C) Indicates paths that have been placed offline

manually.
Offline(E) Indicates paths that are offline due to an error. If
the host operating system is Windows, this status
includes paths that have the Offline(P) status. If
intermittent error monitoring is enabled, the icon
flashes when an intermittent error is detected.

Online(E)# Indicates paths in which an error occurred. If the

host operating system is Windows, this status
includes paths that have the Online(EP) status. If
no paths accessible by an LU have the Online
status, one of the paths is changed to the
Online(E) status. If the remove LU function is
being used, the path that was changed to the
Online(E) status is removed and no path is
displayed as having the Online(E) status. If
intermittent error monitoring is enabled, the icon
flashes.
Online(S) Indicates that the path error of the primary volume
(P-VOL) in the HAM environment has been
resolved, but I/O to the P-VOL is being suppressed.
Online(D) Indicates that the path error of the primary volume
(P-VOL) in the HAM environment has been
resolved, but I/O to the P-VOL is being suppressed.
If an error occurs on all the paths on the secondary
volume (S-VOL), the P-VOL paths automatically
change to the Online status.

#
When the host OS is VMware, paths do not change to Online(E) status,
and paths in Online(E) status are not displayed.

Path status in HP-UX multipath and Icons representing the status

Path status Icon Description
Online Indicates paths in the active status or the standby
status.
The status of a path for HP-UX multipath is online
or standby.

Offline(C) Indicates paths that have been placed offline

manually.

Description of icons B-5

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Path status Icon Description
The status of a path for HP-UX multipath is
disable.

Offline(E) Indicates paths that are offline due to a path error

or a lunpath authentication error.#
The status of a path for HP-UX multipath is offline
or unusable.

#
If you want to change the device and use it, you need to perform
operations for re-authentication. After performing re-authentication
operations, you can use Global Link Manager to set Online status. For
details about re-authentication operations, see the HP-UX manual.

DMP (Windows) path statuses and Icons representing the statuses

Path status Icon Description
Healthy Indicates paths in an active status.

Unhealthy Indicates paths in a blocked status.

Although paths where an error has
occurred are removed, Unhealthy status is
indicated if the host detects the path error
before the path is removed.

B-6 Description of icons

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 C
Functionality and version information
for HDLM
This chapter explains HDLM information managed by Global Link Manager.

□ Support status of the HDLM functions

□ HDLM version information

Functionality and version information for HDLM C-1

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Support status of the HDLM functions
The following table shows the HDLM functions and the earliest HDLM version
that first supported each function for each operating system. Global Link
Manager is supported only from HDLM version 5.2 (for Linux, version 5.3) or
later.

HDLM functions and the earliest HDLM version that supports each
function
Solaris
Function Window
AIX Linux HP-UX 10/11 VMware
name 7#1 8/9 s
#2

Load 5.2 5.3 5.2 5.2 5.2 5.8 5.2 7.3

balancing

Path health 5.2 5.3 5.2 5.2 5.2 5.8 5.2 --

checking

Auto failback 5.2 5.3 5.2 5.2 5.2 5.8 5.2 --

Intermittent 5.4 5.4 5.4 -- 5.4 5.8 5.4 7.3

error
monitoring

Dynamic I/O 7.3 7.3 -- -- 7.3 7.3 7.3 7.3

path control#3

Path use times 7.4.1 7.4.1 -- 7.4.1 7.4.1 7.4.1 7.4.1 7.4.1
(number of
times the
same path can
be used)#4

Random I/Os 8.1.2 8.1.2 -- -- -- 8.1.2 8.1.2 8.1.2

Path use times
(number of
times the
same path can
be used for
extended load
balancing
(random I/
O))#5

Virtual IDs 7.5 7.5 -- -- -- 7.5 7.5 --

Reservation 5.2 -- -- -- -- -- -- --
level#6

Remove LU -- -- -- -- -- 6.2 5.4 --

Logging 5.2 5.3 5.2 5.2 5.2 5.8 5.2 --

level#7

Trace level#8 5.2 5.3 5.2 5.2 5.2 5.8 5.2 --

C-2 Functionality and version information for HDLM

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Solaris
Function Window
AIX Linux HP-UX 10/11 VMware
name 7#1 8/9 s
#2

Error log file 5.2 5.3 5.2 5.2 5.2 5.8 5.2 --
size#9

Number of 5.6 5.6.2 5.6 5.6 5.6 5.8 5.6 --

error log files

Trace file size 5.6 5.6.2 5.6 5.6 5.6 5.8 5.6 --

Number of 5.6 5.6.2 5.6 5.6 5.6 5.8 5.6 --

trace files

Legend:
--: Not supported.
#1
Solaris 7 is supported by HDLM version 5.9 or earlier.
#2
Solaris 11 is supported by HDLM version 7.3 or later.
#3
Supported only for storage subsystems that are compatible with dynamic
I/O path control. For details about the storage subsystems that support
dynamic I/O path control, see the documentation for the version of HDLM
you are using.
#4
If VMware is being used as the host OS, for individual LUs you cannot
specify settings for the number of times the same path can be used.
#5
If VMware is being used as the host OS, for individual LUs you cannot
specify settings for the number of times the same path can be used for
extended load balancing (random I/O).
#6
The reservation level settings might not be supported even when the
HDLM version is 5.2 or later. To determine whether your HDLM supports
the reservation level settings, see the HDLM manual for the HDLM version
in use.
#7
The logging level can be set to Information or higher level(include
maintenance information) for Linux (HDLM version 5.6.2 or later) and
for other operating systems (HDLM version 5.6 or later).
#8
For Linux (HDLM version earlier than 5.6.2) and for other operating
systems (HDLM version earlier than 5.6), the name of the trace file that

Functionality and version information for HDLM C-3

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 can be set for the trace level is hntr2n.log (where n is the number of the
file).
For Linux (HDLM version 5.6.2 or later) and for other operating systems
(HDLM version 5.6 or later), the name of the trace file that can be set for
the trace level is hdlmtr[1-64].log.

#9
For Linux (HDLM version 5.6.2 or later) and for other operating systems
(HDLM version 5.6 or later), the error log file size has been expanded
from 100 to 9,900 KB, to 100 to 2,000,000 KB.

HDLM version information

The display of HDLM version information items depends on the HDLM version
of the host. The following table shows items displayed in the respective
versions. The only versions of HDLM supported by Global Link Manager are
version 5.2 (version 5.3 in Linux) and later.

Displayed contents of HDLM version information

HDLM version Displayed item Example

Earlier than 5.6 Only xx-xx is displayed. The service pack 05-40
version and corrected version information
are not displayed.

From 5.6 to 5.9.x xx-xx is displayed. For the service pack • For service pack
version and corrected version, the service version:
pack version and corrected version 05-60-A0
information are displayed.
• For corrected
version:
05-60-/A

6.0 and later x.x.x-xx is displayed. For the service • For service pack
pack version and corrected version, the version:
service pack version and corrected 6.0.0-01P
version information are displayed.
• For corrected
When the host OS is VMware, the HDLM version:
version of the host is displayed, not that
of the remote management client. 6.0.0-01

C-4 Functionality and version information for HDLM

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 D
Terms of multipath management
products
This chapter provides information about the terminology related to multipath
management products.

□ Comparing terminology multipath management products

Terms of multipath management products D-1

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Comparing terminology multipath management products
For some concepts, different terms are used in different multipath
management software products. The table below lists the similarities and
differences between these terms.
In this help document, whenever the described feature is not dependent on a
particular piece of multipath management software, the HDLM terms are
used.

Comparing terminology of multipath management products

Term used in HP-UX Term used in DMP
Term used in HDLM
multipath (Windows)

CHA port Target address Target

HBA port HBA path Port / Channel

Multipath LU LUN hardware path Disk

HDev

Load balancing Load balancing LoadBalancePolicy

D-2 Terms of multipath management products

Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Acronyms and abbreviations
The following acronyms and abbreviations might be used in this guide.

A
ASCII
American Standard Code for Information Interchange

C
CHA
Channel Adapter

CLPR
Cache Logical Partition

CSV
Comma Separated Value

E
EBNF
Extended Backus-Naur Form

# A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Acronyms-1
Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
G
GUI
Graphical User Interface

H
HBA
Host Bus Adapter

HDev
Host Device

I
I/O
Input/Output

IP
Internet Protocol

IPv4
Internet Protocol Version 4

IPv6
Internet Protocol Version 6

iSCSI
Internet Small Computer System Interface

L
LAN
Local Area Network

LDAP
Lightweight Directory Access Protocol

LDEV
Logical Device

# A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Acronyms-2
Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
LU
Logical Unit

LUN
Logical Unit Number

O
OS
Operating System

R
RADIUS
Remote Authentication Dial In User Service

S
SAN
Storage Area Network

SCSI
Small Computer System Interface

SLA
Service Level Agreement

SLPR
Storage Logical Partition

SMTP
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol

SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol

SSL
Secure Sockets Layer

# A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Acronyms-3
Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
T
TLS
Transport Layer Security

U
URL
Uniform Resource Locator

W
WWN
World Wide Name

# A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Acronyms-4
Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 Index
A B
adding bottlenecks
hosts 5-5 managing 2-19
hosts to host group 7-9 built-in account 1-10, 3-3
hosts to resource group 6-8
users 3-6
users to resource group 6-10 C
admin CHA
Global Link Manager management 1-10, 3-2 replacing 2-15
user management 1-10, 3-2 replacing microprogram 2-15
agent service port 5-8, 5-9 CHA ports 1-15
alert transfer change path configuration 5-16
settings 9-11 changing
alerts automatic account lock settings 11-5
configuring 5-32 login passwords 4-4
configuring email to report alerts 9-12 multipath management software device (LU)
deleting 9-10 configurations of hosts 2-12
deleting all 9-11 password conditions 11-4
filtering lists 9-7 user authentication method 3-11
lists 9-6 user passwords 3-9
lost path check option 9-2 user permissions 3-9
marking as read 9-9 cluster configuration 2-3
marking as unread 9-10 cluster system configuration 5-6
notification 5-32 components
overview 9-2 Global Link Manager 1-5
path errors, detected 9-2 concepts 1-8
SNMP traps 9-2 configuring
all resources 6-4 alerts for host 5-32
application area 2-10 HDLM operating environment for host 5-28
application bar area 2-10 lost path check option 9-12
auto failback 5-29 multipath LUs for individual host groups 5-27
automatic account lock multipath LUs for individual hosts 5-26
changing settings 11-5 multipath LUs for individual storage system 5-28
viewing settings 11-4

Index-1
Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 web browser 2-5 removing resource group from email address
connection target 9-17
host 2-13 emergency license key 10-2
remote management client 2-13 error log file size 5-30
creating explorer menu 2-10, A-2
host groups 7-6 exporting to CSV file 12-2
resource groups 6-6 external authentication server 3-11
CSV file exporting 12-2
CSV files
list of alerts 12-2 F
list of hosts 12-2
features 1-4
list of paths 12-2
filtering lists
path availability report 13-2
alerts 9-7
path status log 13-2
paths 8-13

D G
dashboard menu 2-10, A-3 generating reports
deleting path availability 13-2
alerts 9-10
path status log 13-2
all alerts 9-11
Global Link Manager client 1-3
host groups 7-7
Global Link Manager GUI
resource groups 6-7
window organization 2-9
users 3-7
Global Link Manager server 1-3
warning banner 11-7
database 5-15
dialog box 2-10
Global Link Manager subwindow A-4
distributing I/O across multiple paths 2-20
Global Link Manager window A-2
dynamic I/O path control 5-30
global tasks bar area 2-10, A-2

E H
editing
HBA ports 1-16
host groups 7-7
HDev 1-15
licenses 10-3
HDLM environment configuration
resource groups 6-7
items of 5-29
user profiles 3-7, 4-3
HDLM installer
warning banner 11-7
download 14-2
email notification hdvmagt_account command 5-7
adding email address 9-13 Healthy 1-14
adding resource group to email address 9-16 host 1-4
configuring alert types 9-18 host group status
configuring email address 9-15 icon B-3
configuring SMTP server 9-15 host groups 1-11
displaying list of email addresses 9-13 adding hosts 7-9
displaying resource group information for email configuring multipath LUs 5-27
addresses 9-16 creating 7-6
removing email address 9-14 deleting 7-7
editing 7-7

Index-2
Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 managing 7-2 L
refreshing host information 7-10
LDAP 3-11
refreshing multiple 5-20, 7-11
licenses
refreshing single 5-20, 7-10
editing 10-3
viewing host information 7-8
managing 10-2
viewing information 7-5
types 10-2
viewing list 7-5
viewing 10-3
viewing list of paths 8-8
list of paths
viewing summary of paths 8-5
CHA port 8-9
host status
CHA port of physical storage system 8-11
icon B-2
host group 8-8
hosts
host HBA port 8-7
adding 5-5
multipath LU 8-11
adding to host group 7-9
physical storage system 8-10
adding to resource group 6-8
single host 8-7
automatically refreshing information 5-18
specific status 8-12
changing multipath management software
storage system 8-9
device configurations 2-12
lists
configuring alerts 5-32
alerts 9-6
configuring HDLM operating environment 5-28
host groups 7-5
configuring multipath LUs 5-26
hosts 5-4
hierarchically grouping 2-18
paths 8-7
managing 5-2
paths that have specific status 8-12
refreshing information 5-15
physical storage systems 8-21
refreshing single 5-18
resource groups 6-5
removing 5-15
storage systems 8-20
removing from host group 7-9
users 3-4
removing from resource group 6-9
load balancing 1-16, 5-29
viewing list 5-4
logging in 2-8
viewing list of paths 8-7
logging level 5-30
logging out 2-8
I login passwords
changing 4-4
I/O lost path check option
bottlenecks 2-19 alerts 9-2
distributed across multiple paths 2-20 configuring 9-12
icon
host group status B-3
host status B-2 M
path status B-5
managing
storage system status B-2
alerts 9-2
identifying
host groups 7-2
path errors 2-21
hosts 5-2
intermittent error monitor 5-29
I/O bottlenecks 2-19
licenses 10-2
K path bandwidth 2-19
paths 8-2
Kerberos 3-11 resource groups 6-2

Index-3
Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 user profiles 4-2 users and permissions 3-2
users and permissions 3-2
marking alerts as read 9-9
marking alerts as unread 9-10 P
modify 1-10, 3-2
password
multipath LUs 1-15
changing conditions 11-4
configured for individual storage systems 5-28
login 4-4
configuring for individual host groups 5-27
user 3-9
configuring for individual hosts 5-26
viewing conditions 11-3
viewing list of paths 8-11 path availability information 13-2
multipath management software creating report 13-4
upgrading 2-12 path availability report 13-2
version summary 5-4 format for 13-5
path bandwidth
managing 2-19
N
path errors
navigation area 2-10 identifying 2-21
network scan 5-6 path errors, detected
number of error log files 5-30 alerts 9-2
number of trace log files 5-30 path failback 2-23
path failover 2-23
path health check 2-24
O path health checking 5-29
path status 8-15
object tree 2-10
icon B-5
offline 8-17
path status log 13-2
Offline(C) 1-13
format for 13-7
Offline(E) 1-13
path use times 5-29
Offline(P) 1-13
paths 1-12
Online 1-13
distributing I/O 2-20
online 8-17
filtering lists 8-13
Online(D) 1-14
host 8-5, 8-7
Online(E) 1-13
host group 8-5
Online(EP) 1-13
host HBA port 8-7
Online(P) 1-13
I/O counts and I/O errors, resetting number of
Online(S) 1-13
8-19
overview
managing 8-2
alerts 9-2
storage system 8-6, 8-9
download functionality 14-2
that have specific status 8-12
exporting management information 12-2
viewing list 8-7
generating reports 13-2
viewing summary 8-4
Global Link Manager 1-2
permanent license key 10-2
host groups 7-2
physical storage system
hosts 5-2
list of paths for CHA port of physical storage
licenses 10-2
system 8-11
paths 8-2
viewing list of paths 8-10
resource groups 6-2
physical storage systems
setting security 11-2
viewing information 8-22
user profiles 4-2

Index-4
Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 viewing list 8-21 security 11-2
previewing settings
warning banner 11-6 alert transfer 9-11
show list of lost paths 8-23
show paths dialog box (physical storage
R information) A-134
SMTP server 1-4
RADIUS 3-11
SNMP transfer destination server 1-4
refreshing
SNMP traps 5-32
host information 5-15
alerts 9-2
host information automatically 5-18
storage system 1-4
host information for host groups 7-10
configuring multipath LUs 5-28
multiple host groups 5-20, 7-11
viewing information 8-20
single host 5-18
viewing list 8-20
single host group 5-20, 7-10
viewing list of paths 8-9
remote management client 1-4
viewing list of paths for CHA port 8-9
remote port 5-8
viewing summary of paths 8-6
remove LU 5-30
storage system setting results dialog box A-99
removing
hosts 5-15 storage system status
icon B-2
hosts from host group 7-9
subwindow 2-10
hosts from resource group 6-9
switching path status 8-15
users from resource group 6-11
reservation level 5-30
resource groups 1-9
T
adding hosts 6-8
adding users 6-10 temporary license key 10-2
creating 6-6 terms 1-8
deleting 6-7 trace level 5-30
editing 6-7 trace log file size 5-30
managing 6-2 troubleshooting
removing hosts 6-9 identifying and correcting path errors 2-21
removing users 6-11 managing I/O bottlenecks 2-19
viewing information 6-5
viewing lists 6-5
resources 1-9, 6-2 U
Unhealthy 1-14
upgrading
S
multipath management software on host 2-12
SAN 1-4 user
security settings 11-2 management type 1-9
changing automatic account lock settings 11-5 permission 1-9
changing conditions for passwords 11-4 user accounts
deleting warning banner 11-7 locking 3-10
editing warning banner 11-7 unlocking 3-11
previewing warning banner 11-6 user passwords
viewing automatic account lock settings 11-4 changing 3-9
viewing conditions for passwords 11-3 user permissions
setting changing 3-9

Index-5
Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
 viewing 3-6 list of users 3-4
viewing summary 3-5 password conditions 11-3
user profiles paths 2-17
editing 3-7, 4-3 physical storage system information 8-22
managing 4-2 summary of all paths 8-4
viewing 4-3 summary of paths 8-4
users summary of paths for host group 8-5
adding 3-6 summary of paths for single host 8-5
adding to resource group 6-10 summary of paths for storage system 8-6
deleting 3-7 summary of user permissions 3-5
locking accounts 3-10 user profiles 4-3
removing from resource group 6-11
unlocking accounts 3-11
viewing information 3-5 W
viewing list 3-4
warning banner 11-2
users and permissions 3-2
deleting 11-7
editing 11-7
previewing 11-6
V
web browser configuration 2-5
view 1-10, 3-2
viewing
filtered alerts 9-7
filtered paths 8-13
host information for host groups 7-8
individual host group information 7-5
individual host information 5-4
individual resource group information 6-5
individual storage system information 8-20
individual user information 3-5
license information 10-3
list of alerts 9-6
list of host groups 7-5
list of hosts 5-4
list of paths 8-7
list of paths for CHA port of physical storage
system 8-11
list of paths for CHA port of storage system 8-9
list of paths for host group 8-8
list of paths for host HBA port 8-7
list of paths for multipath LU 8-11
list of paths for physical storage system 8-10
list of paths for single host 8-7
list of paths for storage system 8-9
list of paths that have specific status 8-12
list of physical storage systems 8-21
list of resource groups 6-5
list of storage systems 8-20
list of user permissions 3-6

Index-6
Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Hitachi Global Link Manager User Guide
Hitachi Data Systems

Corporate Headquarters
2845 Lafayette Street
Santa Clara, California 95050-2639
U.S.A.
www.hds.com

Regional Contact Information

Americas
+1 408 970 1000
[email protected]

Europe, Middle East, and Africa

+44 (0)1753 618000
[email protected]

Asia Pacific
+852 3189 7900
[email protected]

MK-92HC214-08